Application Manual - Part 2 - DraftPlanning - Siemens

Application Manual – Part 2: Draft Planning

Integrated solutions for power distributionin commercial and industrial buildings

Tota

lly In

tegr

ated

Pow

erTM

Ap

pli

cati

on

Ma

nu

al

– P

art

2:

Dra

ft P

lan

nin

g

The information provided in this manual contains merely general descriptions orcharacteristics of performance which in case of actual use do not always apply asdescribed or which may change as a result of further development of the products.An obligation to provide the respective characteristics shall only exist if expresslyagreed in the terms of contract.

All product designations may be trademarks or product names of Siemens AG orsupplier companies whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violatethe rights of the owners.

w w w . s i e m e n s . c o m / t i p

totally integrated

powerSiemens Aktiengesellschaft

Automation and Drives

Gleiwitzer Straße 555

90475 NUREMBERG

GERMANY

Power Transmission and Distribution

Freyeslebenstraße 1

91058 ERLANGEN

GERMANY

Siemens SWITZERLAND AG

Building Technologies Group

International Headquarters

Gubelstrasse 22

6301 ZUG

SWITZERLAND

Nominal charge: 36 EUR

Order No. E20001-A70-M104-V1-7600

Dispo 27612

H04120_2007_Umschlag_Englisch.qxd 16.08.2007 6:07 Uhr Seite 1

1 Planning with Totally Integrated Power

1.1 Introduction 1/2

1.2 Draft Planning (System and Integration Planning) 1/3

2 Power System

2.1 Overview 2/2

2.2 Dimensioning of Power Distribution Systems 2/10

2.3 System Protection and Safety Coordination 2/14

2.4 Protection Equipment for Low-Voltage Power Systems 2/20

2.5 Selectivity in Low-Voltage Systems 2/41

2.6 Protection of Capacitors 2/52

2.7 Protection of Distribution Transformers 2/53

2.8 Protection of Technical Building Installations –

Lightning Current and Overvoltage Protection 2/62

3 Medium Voltage

3.1 Introduction 3/2

3.2 Basics of Switchgear 3/3

3.3 Requirements on Medium-Voltage Switchgear 3/7

3.4 Siemens Medium-Voltage Switchgear 3/9

3.5 From Medium-Voltage Switchgear

to Turnkey Solutions 3/25

3.6 Protection of Power Distribution Systems

and Switchgear 3/28

4 Transformers

4.1 Distribution Transformers 4/2

4.2 Control and Isolating Transformers 4/6

5 Power Generation

5.1 Grid-Connected Photovoltaic (PV) Systems 5/2

5.2 Basis for the Use of UPS 5/5

6 Low Voltage

6.1 Low-Voltage Switchgear 6/2

6.2 Protective and Switching Devices

in the Low-Voltage Power Distribution 6/9

6.3 Requirements of the Switchgear

in the Three Circuit Types 6/11

6.4 Container Solutions 6/14

7 Busbar Trunking Systems,Cables and Wires

7.1 Busbar Trunking Systems 7/2

7.2 Cables and Wires 7/10

8 Subdistribution Systems

8.1 General 8/2

8.2 Configuration 8/2

8.3 Selectivity and Back-up Protection 8/3

8.4 Small Distribution Boards and

Wall- or Floor-Mounted Distribution Boards 8/6

8.5 Circuit Protection Devices 8/9

9 Power Consumers

9.1 Starting, Switching and Protecting Motors 9/2

9.2 Lighting 9/8

9.3 Elevator Systems 9/19

10 Ease of Operation,Safety and Control Engineering

10.1 Power Management with SIMATIC powercontrol 10/2

10.2 Building Management System 10/7

10.3 Energy Automation for the Industry 10/14

10.4 Safety Lighting Systems 10/20

10.5 Robust Remote Terminal Unit for Extreme

Environmental Conditions (SIPLUS RIC) 10/27

11 Appendix

Contents

Conversion Factors and Tables

Volume

1 in3

1 ft3

1 yd3

1 fl oz

1 quart

1 pint

1 gallon

1 barrel

16.387 cm3

28.317 dm3 = 0.028 m3

0.765 m3

29.574 cm3

0.946 dm3 = 0.946 l

0.473 dm3 = 0.473 l

3.785 dm3 = 3.785 l

158,987 dm3 = 1.589 m3

= 159 l

1 cm3

1 dm3

= 1 l

1 m3

0.061 in3 = 0.034 fl oz

61.024 in3 =0.035 ft3 = 1.057 quarts =2.114 pint = 0.264 gallons

0.629 barrels

SI unit Non-metricunit

SI unitNon-metricunit

1 in3

1 ft3

1 yd3

1 fl oz

1 quart

1 pint

1 gallon

1 barrel

16.387 cm3

28.317 dm3 = 0.028 m3

0.765 m3

29.574 cm3

0.946 dm3 = 0.946 l

0.473 dm3 = 0.473 l

3.785 dm3 = 3.785 l

158,987 dm3 = 1.589 m3

= 159 l


1 cm3

1 dm3

= 1 l

1 m3

0.061 in3 = 0.034 fl oz

61.024 in3 =0.035 ft3 = 1.057 quarts =2.114 pint = 0.264 gallons

0.629 barrels


Volume flow rate

1 gallon/s

1 gallon/min

1 ft3/s

1 ft3/min

3.785 l/s

0.227 m3/h = 227 l/h

101.941 m3/h

1.699 m3/h


SI unit

1 l/s

1 l/h

1 m3/h

0.264 gallons/s

0.0044 gallons/min

4.405 gallons/min =0.589 ft3/min = 0.0098 ft3/s

Non-metricunit

1 gallon/s

1 gallon/min

1 ft3/s

1 ft3/min

3.785 l/s

0.227 m3/h = 227 l/h

101.941 m3/h

1.699 m3/h


SI unit

1 l/s

1 l/h

1 m3/h

0.264 gallons/s

0.0044 gallons/min

4.405 gallons/min =0.589 ft3/min = 0.0098 ft3/s

Non-metricunit

1 hp h

ft lbf

1 Btu

0.746 kWh = 2.684 x 106 J= 2.737 x 105 kgf m

0.138 kgf m

1.055 kJ = 1055.06 J(= 0.252 kcal)

1 kWh

1 kgf m

1.341 hp h = 2.655 kgf m= 3.6 x 105 J

3.725 x 10-7 hp h =0.738 ft lbf =9.478 x 10-4 Btu(= 2.388 x 10-4 kcal)

3.653 x 10-6 hp h =7.233 ft lbf

Energy,yy work



1

1 J

Pressure

1 in HG

1 psi

1 lbf/ft2

1 lbf/in2

1 tonf/ft2

1 tonf/in2

0.034 bar

0.069 bar

4.788 x 10-4 bar =4.882 x 10-4 kgf/cm2

0.069 bar = 0.070 kgf/cm2

1.072 bar = 1.093 kgf/cm2

154.443 bar =157.488 kgf/cm2

1 bar= 105 pa= 102 kpa

29.53 in Hg =14.504 psi =2088.54 lbf/ft2 =14.504 lbf/in2 =0.932 tonf/ft2 =6.457 x 10-3 tonf/in2

(= 1.02 kgf/cm2)



Moment of inertia J

Numerical value equation: J = = Wr 2GD2

4

23.73 lb ft21 kg m2


1 lbf ft2 0.04214 kg m2


Torque, moment of force

8.851 lbf in = 0.738 lbf ft(= 0.102 kgf m)

1 Nm


1 lbf in

1 lbf ft

0.113 Nm = 0.012 kgf m

1.356 Nm = 0.138 kgf m


1 lbf in

1 lbf ft

0.113 Nm = 0.012 kgf m

1.356 Nm = 0.138 kgf m


8.851 lbf in = 0.738 lbf ft(= 0.102 kgf m)

1 Nm


Force

1 lbf

1 kgf

1 tonf

4.448 N

9.807 N

9.964 kN


0.225 lbf = 0.102 kgf

0.100 tonf

SI unit

1 N

1 kN

Non-metricunit1 lbf

1 kgf

1 tonf

4.448 N

9.807 N

9.964 kN


0.225 lbf = 0.102 kgf

0.100 tonf

SI unit

1 N

1 kN

Non-metricunit

Mass, weight

1 g

1 kg

1 t

0.035 oz

2.205 lb = 35.27 oz

1.102 sh ton = 2,205 lb


1 oz

1 lb

1 sh ton

28.35 g

0.454 kg = 453.6 g

0.907 t = 907.2 kg


1 oz

1 lb

1 sh ton

28.35 g

0.454 kg = 453.6 g

0.907 t = 907.2 kg


1 g

1 kg

1 t

0.035 oz

2.205 lb = 35.27 oz

1.102 sh ton = 2,205 lb


Velocity

1 m/s

1 km/h

3.281 ft/s = 2.237 miles/h

0.911 ft/s = 0.621 miles/h


1 ft/s

1 mile/h

0.305 m/s = 1,098 km/h

0.447 m/s = 1,609 km/h


1 ft/s

1 mile/h

0.305 m/s = 1,098 km/h

0.447 m/s = 1,609 km/h


1 m/s

1 km/h

3.281 ft/s = 2.237 miles/h

0.911 ft/s = 0.621 miles/h


1 bar= 105 pa= 102 kpa

29.53 in Hg =14.504 psi =2088.54 lbf/ft2 =14.504 lbf/in2 =0.932 tonf/ft2 =6.457 x 10-3 tonf/in2

(= 1.02 kgf/cm2)


1 in HG

1 psi

1 lbf/ft2

1 lbf/in2

1 tonf/ft2

1 tonf/in2

0.034 bar

0.069 bar

4.788 x 10-4 bar =4.882 x 10-4 kgf/cm2

0.069 bar = 0.070 kgf/cm2

1.072 bar = 1.093 kgf/cm2

154.443 bar =157.488 kgf/cm2


1 kWh

1 kgf m

1.341 hp h = 2.655 kgf m= 3.6 x 105 J

3.725 x 10-7 hp h =0.738 ft lbf =9.478 x 10-4 Btu(= 2.388 x 10-4 kcal)

3.653 x 10-6 hp h =7.233 ft lbf


1 J

1 hp h

ft lbf

1 Btu

0.746 kWh = 2.684 x 106 J= 2.737 x 105 kgf m

0.138 kgf m

1.055 kJ = 1055.06 J(= 0.252 kcal)


1

23.73 lb ft21 kg m2


1 lbf ft2 0.04214 kg m2



M 1

: 2

0

1 m

2 m

3 m

M 1

: 5

0

1 m

2 m

3 m

4 m

5 m

6 m

7 m

8 m

M 1

: 1

00

1 m

3 m

5 m

7 m

9 m

11

m1

3 m

15

m

Conductor cross sectionsin the Metric and US System

Conductorcrosssection

[mm2]

Equivalentmetric CSA

[mm2]

AWG or MCM

Metric crosssections acc.to IEC

American Wire Gauge(AWG)

0.75

1.50

2.50

4.00

6.00

10.00

16.00

25.00

35.00

50.00

95.00

150.00

240.00

400.00

625.00

0.653

1.040

1.650

2.620

19 AWG

17

14

11

9

5.260

8.370

13.300

21.150

33.630

6

3

70.00

53.480

120.00

85.030

152.000

1/0

3/0

250 MCM

400

800

253.350

354.710

506.710

185.00

300.00

500.00

0.832

1.310

2.080

18

16

15

13

12

10

8

7

3.310

4.170

6.630

10.550

16.770

26.670

5

4

2

142.410

67.430

107.200126.640

202.710

2/0

4/0

300

500

600700

1000

304.000

405.350

Specific steam consumption

1 kg/kWh 1.644 lb/hp h


1 lb/hp h 0.608 kg/kWh



Planning with Totally Integrated Power

chapter 11.1 Introduction

1.2 Draft Planning (System and Integration Planning)

1 Planning with Totally Integrated Power

Totally Integrated Power by Siemens1/2

1.1 IntroductionToday, the focus is on cost of invest-ment, when power supply systems forcommercial, institutional and indus-trial building projects are planned.Operating and energy costs, on theother hand, may not be neglected, asthey can have a lasting effect on thetotal cost balance across the building’slife cycle.

Investigations of the Scientific Councilof the German Federal Governmenton Global Environmental Changefound in 2003 that world consump-tion of primary energy is going todouble by 2050 (assumption: worldpopulation growth to 9 to 10 billionpeople). Among other consequences,this would mean that energy wouldbecome noticeably more expensive. Ifsustainable building management and

optimal utilization of resources isconsidered in the planning stagealready, an important step will havebeen made toward the minimizationof a building’s operating costs, andthus toward its longterm valueincrease.

So electrical engineering consultantsare entrusted with the responsibletask of designing power supply sys-tems under the aspects of operationalsafety and energy efficiency. Servicesrendered must be in accordance withthe generally accepted rules of goodpractice. This means that implement-ing orders, administrative regulations,relevant IEC, European (EN) andnational DIN standards as well as thegeneral building inspection certifi-cates and general building permitsmust also be observed across buildingcontract sections in the planning.*

Concepts like Totally Integrated Power(TIP) now provide support for increas-ingly complex engineering tasks. Theyfacilitate planning with integratedsolutions for power distribution andefficient engineering tools.

Totally Integrated Power with its well-matched components and optimizedinterfaces offers everything that canbe expected from a future-orientedpower distribution system. Very goodengineering support is also renderedby the TÜV-approved and certifieddimensioning tool SIMARIS design.Using SIMARIS design for dimension-ing electrical power distributionsystems in commercial, institutionaland industrial buildings produceseasy, fast and safe results.

Fig. 1.1/1: Safety, environmental compatibility and profitability of power supply and distribution are demanding challenges to the planning of modern buildingand infrastructure projects

* Also see Chapter 11, A1, Standards, Regulations and Guidelines

Further information on� Totally Integrated Power� SIMARIS designcan be obtained on the Internet at www.siemens.com/tip

11/3

Planning with Totally Integrated Power

1.2 Draft Planning(System andIntegrationPlanning)Building upon the concept drafted inthe “Preliminary Planning” phase 2,power distribution must be planned indetail in the “Draft Planning” phase 3.The Application Manual “TotallyIntegrated Power – Draft Planning”provides technical assistance andinformation on components for tech-nical installations in buildings with afocus on “electrical power supply.”

Services in detail, which are an inte-gral part of “Draft Planning”, aredefined in the Regulation of Archi-tects' and Engineers' Fees (HOAI) inGermany.

Based upon preliminary planningresults, Draft Planning represents thedefinite planning concept including allcomponents specified. In projectsrequiring a permit, the Draft Planningis the basis for the subsequentApproval Planning phase.

Table 1.2/1: Overview of the planner’s majortasks in the first two project stagesaccording to the HOAI (Regulationof Architects' and Engineers' Fees)(excerpt)

Basic services

� Elaboration of the planningconcept (step by step prepara-tion of drawings) that takes intoaccount requirements concern-ing aspects of urban develop-ment and design, functions,technology, building physics,profitability, energy manage-ment (e.g. regarding efficientpower utilization and the use ofrenewable energies) and land-scape ecology, and integratescontributions of other partiesinvolved in the planning, until acomplete draft is presented

� Integration of services renderedby other experts involved in theplanning

� Description of the buildingproject including an explanationof compensation and substitu-tion measures as stipulated bythe impact regulation undernature protection law

� Graphic presentation of theoverall draft, e.g. elaborated,complete preliminary outlineand/or outline drawings (scale

depending on the size of thebuilding project; for outdoorfacilities at scales of 1:500 to1:100, detailing in particular theimprovements for biotope func-tions, preventive, protective, careand development activities as wellas on differentiated planting; forspace enclosing developments: inscales of 1:50 to 1:20, in particu-lar with details of wall design aswell as color, light and materialdesign; if necessary includingdetailed plans of repetitive groupsof enclosed space; negotiationswith public authorities and otherexperts involved in planning as towhether an official approval canbe obtained

� Cost calculations in compliancewith DIN 276 or according tostatutory provisions for costcalculations of residentialdwellings

� Summary of all draft documents

� Cost controlling by a comparisonof the cost calculation with thecost estimate

Special services

� Analysis of alternatives/variantsand their assessment includingan investigation into costsinvolved (optimization)

� Profitability calculation� Cost calculation by setting up

quantity structures or a catalogof components

� Elaboration of special measuresfor the optimization of the build-ing or building sections, whichexceed the normal range of

engineering services, on thereduction of energy consumptionas well as pollutant and CO2emissions, and for the use ofrenewable energies in coordina-tion with other experts involvedin planning. The normal measurefor energy saving activitiesmeans the fulfillment of require-ments set by statutory provisionsand generally accepted rules ofgood practice.


Power System

chapter 22.1 Overview

2.2 Dimensioning of Power Distribution Systems

2.3 System Protection and Safety Coordination

2.4 Protection Equipment for Low-Voltage PowerSystems

2.5 Selectivity in Low-Voltage Systems

2.6 Protection of Capacitors

2.7 Protection of Distribution Transformers

2.8 Protection of Technical BuildingInstallations – Lightning Current andOvervoltage Protection

2 Power System


2.1 Overview2.1.1 SystemConfigurationsTable 2.1/1 illustrates the technicalaspects and influencing factors thatshould be taken into account whenelectrical power distribution systemsare planned and network componentsare dimensioned.

� Simple radial system(spur line topology)

All consumers are centrally suppliedfrom one power source. Each con-necting line has an unambiguousdirection of energy flow.

� Radial system with changeoverconnection as power reserve –partial load:

All consumers are centrally suppliedfrom two to n power sources. They arerated as such that each of it is capable

of supplying all consumers directlyconnected to the main power distribu-tion system (stand-alone operationwith open couplings). If one powersource fails, the remaining sources ofsupply can also supply some consumersconnected to the other power source.In this case, any other consumer mustbe disconnected (load shedding).

� Radial system with changeoverconnection as power reserve – fullload:

All consumers are centrally suppliedfrom two to n power sources (stand-alone operation with open couplings).They are rated as such that, if onepower source fails, the remainingpower sources are capable of addition-ally supplying all those consumersnormally supplied by this powersource. No consumer must be discon-nected. In this case, we speak of ratingthe power sources according tothe (n-1) principle. With three parallel

Quality criterion

LV- side system configurations

Simple radialsystem

Radial system with changeoverconnection as power reserve Radial system in an

interconnected grid

Radial system withpower distribution

via busbarsPartial load Full load

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

Low cost of investment • • • • •

Low power losses • • • • •

High reliability of supply • • • • •

Great voltage stability • • • • •

Easy operation • • • • •

Easy and clear system protectionHigh adaptability

• • • • •

Low fire load • • • • •

• • • • •

Rating: very good (1) to poor (5) fulfillment of a quality criterion

power sources or more, other supplyprinciples, e.g. the (n-2) principlewould also be possible. In this case,these power sources will be rated assuch that two out of three transform-ers can fail without the continuoussupply of all consumers connectedbeing affected.

� Radial system in an interconnectedgrid

Individual radial networks in whichthe consumers connected are cen-trally supplied by one power sourceare additionally coupled electricallywith other radial networks by meansof coupling connections. All couplingsare normally closed.

Depending on the rating of the powersources in relation to the total loadconnected, the application of the(n-1) principle, (n-2) principle etc. canensure continuous and faultlesspower supply of all consumers bymeans of additional connecting lines.

Table 2.1/1: Exemplary quality rating dependent on the power system configuration

Table 2.1/2: Exemplary quality rating dependent on the power supply system according to its type ofconnection to ground

CharacteristicsTN-C TN-C/S TN-S IT system TT system

1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3

Low cost of investment • • • • •

Little expense for system extensions • • • • •

Any switchgear/protective technology can be used • • • • •

Ground fault detection can be implemented • • • • •

Fault currents and impedance conditions inthe system can be calculated • • • • •

Stability of the grounding system • • • • •

High degree of operational safety • • • • •

High degree of protection • • • • •

High degree of shock hazard protection • • • • •

High degree of fire safety • • • • •

Automatic disconnection for protectionpurposes can be implemented • • • • •

EMC-friendly • • • • •

Equipment functions maintained in case of1st ground or enclosure fault • • • • •

Fault localization during system operation • • • • •

Reduction of system downtimes by controlled disconnection • • • • •

1 = true 2 = conditionally true 3 = not true

Further information

� Power system engineering:Siemens AG (Ed.): TIP Application Manual -Establishment of Basic Data and PreliminaryPlanning, 2006, Chapters 4.1 and 7

� EMC:Siemens AG (Ed.): TIP Application Manual -Establishment of Basic Data and PreliminaryPlanning, 2006, Chapter 7

� Design of the low-voltage main distributionsystemSiemens AG (Ed.): TIP Application Manual -Establishment of Basic Data and PreliminaryPlanning, 2006, Section 5.8

� Motors see Chapter 9 in this manual

22/3

Power System

The direction of energy flow throughthe coupling connections may varydepending on the line of supply,which must be taken into account forsubsequent rating of switching/pro-tective devices, and above all formaking protection settings.

� Radial system with power distribu-tion via busbars

In this special case of radial systemsthat can be operated in an intercon-nected grid, busbar trunking systemsare used instead of cables.

In the coupling circuits, these busbartrunking systems are either used forpower transmission (from radialsystem A to radial system B etc.) orpower distribution to the respectiveconsumers.

2.1.2 Power SupplySystems according to theType of Connection toGround

TN-C, TN-C/S, TN-S, IT and TTsystems

The implementation of IT systemsmay be required by national or inter-national standards.

� For parts of installations which haveto meet particularly high require-ments regarding operational andhuman safety (e.g. in medicalrooms, such as the OT, intensivecare or post-anaesthesia care unit)

� For installations erected and oper-ated outdoors (e.g. in mining, atcranes, garbage transfer stationsand in the chemical industry).

� Depending on the power systemand nominal system voltage theremay be different requirementsregarding the disconnection timesto be met (protection of personsagainst indirect contact with liveparts by means of automatic discon-nection).

� Power systems in which electro-magnetic interference plays animportant part should preferably beconfigured as TN-S systems immedi-ately downstream of the point ofsupply. Later, it will mean a compar-atively high expense to turn existingTN-C or TN-C/S systems into anEMC-compatible system.

The state of the art for TN systems isan EMC-compatible design as TN-Ssystem.


Checklist

Important electrical parameters of the higher-level medium-voltage systems

Local supply network operator ........................................................................

Point of supply: Under responsibility of local supply network

operator / customer ........................................................................

Neutral-point connection of power system � low resistance grounded

� compensated

� isolated

Maximum short-circuit current Ik" max ........................ kA

Alternatively, maximum system short-circuit rating Sk" max ........................ MVA

Minimum short-circuit current Ik" min ........................ kA

Alternatively, minimum system short-circuit rating Sk" min ........................ MVA

Data of higher-level medium-voltage protection

Current transformer Iprim ........................ A

Isec ........................ A

Type of protection relay applied:

Thermal overload protection available? � yes � no

Type of characteristic curve: � inverse-time-delayed � definite-time-delayed

Setting zone Ith ........................ A / time constant ........................ min

Setting zone I > ........................ A / t > ........................ s

Setting zone I >> ........................ A / t >> ........................ s

Note:� For preparing a comprehensive, end-to-end protection concept, the precise data of the higher-level medium-voltage

protection applied are required, so that the lower-level low-voltage protection system can be adapted in accordancewith the MV protection settings.

Further information on medium-voltage switchgear:Siemens AG (Ed.), TIP Application Manual - Establishment of Basic Data and Preliminary Planning, 2006, Section 5.1

22/5

Power System

Important electrical parameters of transformers

Uprim / Usec ........................ kV

Rating ........................ kVA

Rated short-circuit voltage ukr ........................ %

Winding losses Pk ........................ kW

No-load losses P0 ........................ kW

Overload capability

(vented/unvented transformers) ........................ %

Power reserve ........................ %

Note:� The rated short-circuit voltage ukr is a measure for the amount of voltage to be applied at the primary side in order to

reach the rated current level, when the secondary-side winding is shorted.� ukr is a measure for the transformer’s short-circuit power. As a rule, the higher ukr, the lower the short-circuit power.� High-quality transformers (e.g. GEAFOL) are characterized by reduced winding and no-load losses, which should be

taken into account for a profitability evaluation.� if transformers with cross-flow fans are used, their overloadability must be considered for rating the feeding lines,

switching devices and their protection settings.� Short-circuit current determination: The level of short-circuit current which a transformer can supply is independent of

its design with or without cross-flow ventilation. The magnitude of the short-circuit current is solely determined by therated short-circuit voltage ukr .

� Technical considerations for the connection of motor loads: to determine regenerative feedback from motors in theevent of a short circuit, the sum total of installed motor loads is required.

Further information on distribution transformers:Siemens AG (Ed.), TIP Application Manual - Establishment of Basic Data and Preliminary Planning, 2006, Section 5.2

Checklist


Checklist

Important electrical parameters of generators

Main use:

No-break standby generating set* � yes � no

Quick-starting standby generating set* � yes � no

Safety power supply* � yes � no

Nominal voltage ........................ V

Rating ........................ kVA

Subtransient reactance xd" ........................ %

Initial symmetrical short-circuit current Ik" ........................ kA

1-phase sustained short-circuit current Ik1D ........................ A

Available for period t ........................ s

3-phase sustained short-circuit current Ik1D ........................ A


R/X ratio ........................

* Safety power supply in compliance with IEC 60364-7-710, DIN VDE 0100-710 and -718;designed as no-break standby generating set according to customer specifications

Note:� Normally, generators can only supply the initial symmetrical short-circuit AC current Ik" for a period of few milliseconds.� Therefore, the sustained short-circuit currents which the generator can carry over a longer period of time are relevant

for the protective settings of devices using time-delayed short-circuit releases.� Above data must be obtained from the equipment manufacturer.� Rating of switching/protective devices for generator operation: selective response of these switching/protective devices

can be expected if the rating of the largest consumer connected is less than 1/3 of the generator output.� What is important for emergency lighting is the full compliance with standards from the point of supply to the

consumers (also see Section 10.4 “Safety Lighting Systems”).

Further information on generators:Siemens AG (Ed.): TIP Application Manual - Establishment of Basic Data and Preliminary Planning, 2006, Section 5.7

22/7

Power System

Important electrical parameters of a combined heat and power plant

Main use:

Safety power supply* � yes � no

Redundant power supply � yes � no


Rating ........................ kVA

Subtransient reactance xd" ........................ %

Initial symmetrical short-circuit current Ik" ........................ kA

1-phase sustained short-circuit current Ik 1D ........................ A


3-phase sustained short-circuit current Ik 1D ........................ A


R/X ratio ........................

* Safety power supply in compliance with IEC 60364-7-710, DIN VDE 0100-710 and -718;designed as no-break standby generating set according to customer specifications

Note:� Normally, combined heat and power plants are modularly designed and supply electricity and heat. They are based on

the principle of combined heat and power generation. The output of a combined heat and power plant is usuallydesigned as such that only a part of the maximum heating energy demand of the connected consumers is coveredwhen the plant is operated under full load. These co-generating plants are operated on a heat-demand basis.

� What is important for emergency lighting is the full compliance with standards from the point of supply to theconsumers (also see Section 10.4 “Safety Lighting Systems”).

Checklist


Checklist

Important electrical parameters of uninterruptible power supplies (UPS)


Rating ........................ kVA

Load power factor ........................

UPS factor ........................

Static or dynamic system ........................

Time curve of short-circuit currents

(1-phase, 2-phase, 3-phase) ........................

Interconnection of primary circuits ........................

Availability of internal protection equipment

in the primary circuits ........................

Switching/protective response of internal

protection equipment ........................

Internal operational response in the event of

a short circuit ........................

Note:� Uninterruptible power supplies for power supply systems are available in ratings of about 5 kW up to several 100 kW.

Their rating basically depends on the load carrying capability of the power converters. Another important feature of aUPS is the maximum power outage bridging time which depends on the capacity of the storage batteries. Depending onrequirements, it may be just a few seconds or several hours. If high power and long bridging times are required, powergenerating sets, so-called dynamic systems, are also used.

� Above data must be obtained from the equipment manufacturer.

Further information on UPS!Siemens AG (Ed.): TIP Application Manual - Establishment of Basic Data and Preliminary Planning, 2006, Section 5.6, andSection 5.2 in this manual.

22/9

Power System

Compilation of the intended system operating modes in the supply section

Which system operating mode is intended for this plant?

System operating mode 1: ...................................................................................................................................



Other: ...................................................................................................................................

Examples:

System operating mode 1: Normal power supply� 3 out of 3 transformers connected� Generator down� Coupling 1 closed� Coupling 2 closed

System operating mode 2: Transformer T1 in maintenance� 2 out of 3 transformers connected (transformer 1 down)� Generator down� Coupling 1 closed� Coupling 2 closed

System operating mode 3: Emergency power supply� Transformers down� Generator connected into supply� Coupling 1 open� Coupling 2 open

Note:� Alternative system operating modes from different sources of supply are important for determining minimum and

maximum short-circuit currents as well as subsequent device protection settings even if merely an extension of theexisting plant is considered.

Checklist


2.2 Dimensioningof Power Distribu-tion SystemsWhen the basic supply concept for theelectricity supply system has beenestablished, it is necessary to dimen-sion the electrical power system.

Dimensioning means the sizing/ratingof all equipment and components tobe used in this power system.

The dimensioning target is to obtain atechnically permissible combination of

switching/protective devices andconnecting line for each circuit in thepower system.

Basic rules

On principle, circuit dimensioningshall be performed in compliance withthe technical rules / standards listed inFig. 2.2/1. Details are explained belowunder Section 2.2.1 Circuit Types.

Cross-circuit dimensioning

When selected network componentsand systems are matched, an econom-

ically efficient overall system can bedesigned. This cross-circuit matchingof network components may bear anydegree of complexity, as subsequentmodifications to certain components,e.g. a switch or protective device, mayhave effects on the neighboring,higher-level, or all lower-level net-work sections (high testing expense,high planning risk).

Dimensioning principles

For each circuit, the dimensioningprocess comprises the selection of

IEC 60364-5-520IEC 60038

IEC 60364-7-710IEC 60947-2IEC 60898-1

IEC 60364-4-43

IEC 60364-4-41

IEC 60364-4-43 /IEC 60364-5-54

Dynamic/static selectivity

Protection against overload

Protection against short circuit

Protection against electric shock

Dynamic/static voltage drop

DIN VDE 0100Part 430

DIN VDE 0100Part 430 / Part 540

DIN VDE 0100Part 410

DIN VDE 0100Part 520DIN VDE 0175

DIN VDE 0100Part 710 and 718VDE 0660-101VDE 0641 Part 11

Fig. 2.2/1: Relevant standards for circuit dimensioning

Load

Start node

Transmission medium

Target node

SupplyConnecting line between

distribution boardsLoad feeders in final

circuits

Fig. 2.2/2: Schematic representation of the different circuit types

22/11

Power System

one, or more than one switching/pro-tective device to be used at the begin-ning or end of a connecting line, aswell as the selection of the connect-ing line itself (cable/line or busbarconnection) under consideration ofthe technical features of the corre-sponding switching/protectivedevices. For supply circuits in particu-lar, dimensioning also includes ratingthe power sources.

The objectives of dimensioning mayvary depending on the circuit type.The dimensioning target of overloadand short-circuit protection can beattained in correlation to the mount-ing location of the protective equip-ment. Devices applied at the end of aconnecting line can ensure overloadprotection for this line at best, not,however, short-circuit protection!

2.2.1 Circuit types

The basic dimensioning rules andstandards listed in Fig. 2.2/1 princi-pally apply to all circuit types. Inaddition, there are specific require-ments for these circuit types whichwill be explained in detail below.

Supply circuits

Particularly high requirements apply tothe dimensioning of supply circuits.This starts with the rating of the powersources. Power sources are ratedaccording to the maximum load cur-rent to be expected for the powersystem, the desired amount of reservepower, and the degree of supplyreliability required in case of a fault(overload / short circuit).

Load conditions in the entire powersystem are established by taking theenergy balance (in an “energy report”).Reserve power and operational safety inthe vicinity of the supply system areusually established by building up appro-priate redundancies, for example by

� providing additional power sources(transformer, generator, UPS);

� rating the power sources accordingto the failure principle, n- or (n–1)principle: applying the (n–1) princi-ple means that two out of threesupply units are principally capableof continually supplying the totalload for the power system withoutany trouble if the smallest powersource fails;

� rating those power sources that cantemporarily be operated under

overload (e.g. using vented trans-formers).

Independent of the load currentsestablished, dimensioning of anyfurther component in a supply circuitis oriented to the ratings of the powersources, the system operating modesconfigured and all the related switch-ing states in the vicinity of the supplysystem.

As a rule, switching/protective devicesmust be selected in such a way thatthe planned performance maximumcan be transferred. In addition, thedifferent minimum/maximum short-circuit current conditions in the vicin-ity of the supply system, which aredependent on the switching status,must be determined.

When connecting lines are rated(cable or busbar), appropriate reduc-tion factors must be taken intoaccount, which depend on the num-ber of systems laid in parallel and theinstallation type.

When devices are rated, special atten-tion should be paid on their ratedshort-circuit breaking capacity. Youshould also opt for a high-qualitytripping unit with variable settings, asthis component is an important basisfor attaining the best possible selec-tivity towards all upstream and down-stream devices.

Distribution circuit

Dimensioning of cable routes anddevices follows the maximum loadcurrents to be expected at this distribu-tion level.

As a rule

Ib max = ∑ installed capacity x simul-taneity factor

Switching/protective device andconnecting line are to be matchedwith regard to overload and short-circuit protection.


In order to ensure overload protection,you must also observe the standardizedconventional (non-)tripping currentsreferring to the devices in application.A verification based merely on the rateddevice current or the setting value Irwould be insufficient.

Basic rules for ensuring overloadprotection:

Rated current rule

� Non-adjustable protectiveequipment

Ib ≤ In ≤ Iz

The rated current In of the selecteddevice must be between the calcu-lated maximum load current Ib andthe maximum permissible load cur-rent Iz of the selected transmissionmedium (cable or busbar).

� Adjustable protective equipmentIb ≤ Ir ≤ Iz

The rated current Ir of overloadrelease must be between the calcu-lated maximum load current Ib andthe maximum permissible load cur-rent Iz of the selected transmissionmedium (cable or busbar).

Tripping current rule

I2 ≤ 1.45 x Iz

The maximum permissible load cur-rent Iz of the selected transmissionmedium (cable or busbar) must beabove the conventional trippingcurrent I2 /1.45 of the selected device.

The test value I2 is standardized andvaries according to type and charac-teristics of the protective equipmentapplied.

Basic rules for ensuring short-circuit protection:

Short-circuit energy

K2S2 ≥ I2t

(K = material coefficient; S = crosssection)

The amount of energy that is set freefrom the moment, when a shortcircuit occurs, until it is cleared auto-matically, must at any time be lessthan the energy which the transmis-sion medium can carry as a maximumbefore irreparable damage is caused.As standard, this basic rule applies inthe time range up to max. 5 s.

Below 100 ms of short-circuit break-ing time, the let-through energy ofthe protective device (acc. to equip-ment manufacturer’s specification)must be taken into account.

When devices with a tripping unit areused, observance of this rule acrossthe entire characteristic device curvemust be verified.

A mere verification in the range of themaximum short-circuit current applied(Ik max) is not always sufficient, inparticular, when time-delayedreleases are used.

Short-circuit time

ta (Ik min) ≤ 5 s

The resulting current breaking time ofthe selected protective equipmentmust ensure that the calculatedminimum short-circuit current Ik min atthe end of the transmission line orprotected line is automatically clearedwithin 5 s at the latest.

Overload and short-circuit protectionneedn’t necessarily be provided byone and the same device. If required,these two protection targets may berealized by a device combination. Theuse of separate switching/protectivedevices could also be considered, i.e.at the start and end of a cable route.As a rule, devices applied at the end

of a cable route can ensure overloadprotection for this line only.

Final circuits

The method for coordinating overloadand short-circuit protection is practi-cally identical for distribution and finalcircuits. Besides overload and short-circuit protection, the protection ofhuman life is also important for allcircuits.

Protection against electric shock

ta (Ik1 min) ≤ ta perm

If a 1-phase fault to ground (Ik1 min)occurs, the resulting current breakingtime ta for the selected protectiveequipment must be shorter than themaximum permissible breaking timeta perm which is required for this circuitaccording to IEC 60364-4-41 / DINVDE 0100-410 to ensure the protec-tion of persons.

As the required maximum currentbreaking time varies according to thenominal system voltage and the typeof load connected (stationary andnon-stationary loads), protectionrequirements regarding minimumbreaking times ta perm may be trans-ferred from one load circuit to othercircuits. Alternatively, this protectiontarget may also be achieved byobserving a maximum touch voltage.

As final circuits are often character-ized by long supply lines, their dimen-sioning is often affected by the maxi-mum permissible voltage drop.

As far as the choice of switching/pro-tective devices is concerned, it isimportant to bear in mind that longconnecting lines are characterized byhigh impedances and thus strongattenuation of the calculated short-circuit currents.

22/13

Power System

Depending on the system operatingmode (coupling open, couplingclosed) and the medium of supply(transformer or generator), the pro-tective equipment and its settingsmust be configured for the worst caseconcerning short-circuit currents.

In contrast to supply or distributioncircuits, where the choice of a high-quality tripping unit is considered veryimportant, there are no specialrequirements on the protective equip-ment of final circuits regarding thedegree of selectivity to be achieved.The use of a tripping unit with LIcharacteristics is normally sufficient.

2.2.3 Summary

Basically, the dimensioning processitself is easy to understand and can beperformed using simple means.

Its complexity lies in the procurementof the technical data on products andsystems required, which can be foundin various technical standards andregulations on the one hand andnumerous product catalogs on theother.

An important aspect in this context isthe cross-circuit manipulation ofdimensioned components owing totheir technical data, for example, theabove mentioned inheritance ofminimum current breaking times ofthe non-stationary load circuit toother stationary load or distributioncircuits.

Another aspect is the mutual impactof dimensioning <—> network calcula-tion (short circuit), e.g. for the use ofshort-circuit current limiting devices.

In addition, the complexity of the matterrises, when different national standardsor installation practices are to be takeninto account for dimensioning.

For reasons of risk minimization andtime efficiency, a number of engineer-ing companies generally use advancedcalculation software, such as SIMARISdesign, to perform dimensioning andverification processes in electricalpower systems.


2.3 SystemProtection andSafetyCoordinationThis chapter basically comprises theinstallation of electrical equipment inLV systems. Therefore, the emphasislies on the low-voltage side also whendealing with network protection.Specific network protection require-ments for medium voltage are dealtwith in Section 3.6 ”Protection ofMedium-Voltage Switchgear.”

System configurations

While in building and industrial powersystems ring-system configurationsare normally used for medium volt-age, radial system configurations arenormally preferred for the low-voltageside (radial systems, double spursystems). A number of switchgearsubstations and distribution boardsare required for distributing powerfrom the point of supply to the con-sumers. The protective devices forthese items of equipment areconnected in series.

Objectives of system protection

The objective of system protection isto detect faults and to selectivelyisolate faulted parts of the system. Itmust also permit short clearancetimes to limit the fault power and theeffect of arcing faults.

High power density, high individualpower outputs, and the relativelyshort distances in industrial andbuilding power systems mean thatlow-voltage and medium-voltagesystems are closely linked. Activities inthe LV system (short circuits, startingcurrents) also have an effect on theMV system, and vice versa, the controlstate of the MV system affects the

selectivity criteria in the secondarypower system. It is, therefore, neces-sary to adjust the power system andits protection throughout the entiredistribution system and to coordinatethe protective functions.

2.3.1 Definitions

Electrical installations in a powersystem are protected either by protec-tion equipment allocated to theinstallation components or by combi-nations of these protective elements.

Standby protectionWhen a protective device fails, thehigher-level device must take over thisprotective function.

Back-up protectionIf a short circuit, which is higher thanthe rated switching capacity of theprotective device used, occurs at aparticular point in the system, back-upprotection must provide protection forthe downstream installation compo-nent and for the protection device bymeans of an upstream protectivedevice.

Rated short-circuit breakingcapacityThe rated short-circuit breaking capac-ity is the maximum value of the shortcircuit that the protective device isable to clear according to specifica-tions. The protection device may beused in power systems for ratedswitching capacities up to this value.

SelectivitySelectivity, in particular, has become atopic for discussion in the previousyears. Partly, it has become a generalrequirement in tender specifications.Due to the complexity of this issue,information about proper selectionand application is often insufficient.These requirements as well as theeffects of full or partial selectivity inpower distribution systems within the

context of the relevant standard,industry, country, system configura-tion or structure should be clarified inadvance with the network planners,installation companies and systemoperators involved. The system inter-connection together with the fiverules of circuit dimensioning mustalso be taken into account. Someterms and definitions shall bedescribed in this chapter for a betterunderstanding of the issue. If youwish to obtain more detailed informa-tion regarding further applications,please contact your Siemens represen-tative.

Note:Proof of selectivity is required in IEC60364-7-710 and DIN VDE 100-710and -718.

Full selectivityTo maintain the supply reliability ofpower distribution systems, full selec-tivity is increasingly demanded. Apower system is considered fullyselective, if only the protective deviceupstream of the fault location discon-nects from supply, as seen in thedirection of energy flow (from thepoint of supply to the consumer).

Note:Full selectivity always refers to themaximum, fault current Ik at themounting location.

Partial selectivityThe corresponding device combina-tion (upstream and downstream) isnot selective up to a dead, 3-phase,i.e. maximum, fault current Ik max.

In certain situations, partial selectivity(up to a particular short-circuit cur-rent) is sufficient. The probability offaults occurring and the effects ofthese on the load must then be con-sidered for unfavorable scenarios.

22/15

Power System

2.3.2 ProtectiveEquipment

Medium-voltage protectionequipment

HV HRC fusesHigh-voltage high-breaking-capacity(HV HRC) fuses can only be used forshort-circuit protection. They do notprovide overload protection. A mini-mum short-circuit current is, there-fore, required for correct operation.HV HRC fuses restrict the peak short-circuit current. The protective charac-teristic is determined by the selectedrated current (Fig. 2.3/1).

Medium-voltage circuit-breakers(IEC 62271-100/VDE 0671-100)Circuit-breakers can provide time-overcurrent protection (definite-time orinverse-time-delay), time-overcurrentprotection with additional directionalfunction, or differential protection.Distance protection is rarely used in thedistribution systems described here.

Protective characteristicsSecondary relays, whose characteristiccurves are also determined by theactual current transformation ratio,are normally used as protectivedevices in medium-voltage systems.Static digital protection devices arealso being used to an increasingextent.

Low-voltage protective devices*

Low-voltage high-rupturing-capacity fusesLow-voltage high-rupturing-capacity(LV HRC) fuses have a high breakingcapacity. They fuse quickly to restrictthe short-circuit current to the utmostdegree. The protective characteristicis determined by the selected utiliza-tion category of the LV HRC fuse (e. g.full-range fuse for overload and short-circuit protection, or back-up fuse forshort-circuit protection only) and therated current (Fig. 2.3/2).

Low-voltage circuit-breakers(IEC 60947-2 / VDE 660-101)Basically, circuit-breakers for powerdistribution systems are distinguished

� according to their type design (openor compact design),

� mounting type (fixed mounting,plug-in, withdrawable),

� rated current (maximum designcurrent of the switch),

� method of operation: current-limiting (MCCB – molded-casecircuit-breaker), or non-current-limiting (ACB – air circuit-breaker)

� protective functions (see releases),� communication capability (capabil-

ity to transmit data to and from theswitch),

� utilization category (A or B, see IEC 60947-2).

Fig. 2.3/2: Protective characteristic of HV HRC fuse and MV time-overcurrentprotection

Fig. 2.3/1: Protective characteristic of LV HRC fuse and LV circuit-breakerwith releases

* For descriptions and modes of operation of low-voltage protection devices, controlgear andswitchgear, please also refer to the 4th edition ofthe Siemens AG handbook “Switching, Protectionand Distribution in Low-Voltage Networks”,published by Publicis, Erlangen, 1997.

2 t = constant

2 t = constant4t = constant

t

Definite-time-delayed

Inverse-time-delayed

not delayed

Low-voltage circuit-breaker with releases

Adjustable characteristic curves or setting ranges

LV HRC fuse

t definite-time-delayed

HV HRC fuse

Short-circuit trippinginverse-

time-delayed

Medium-voltage circuit-breaker with overcurrent-time protection

Adjustable characteristic curves or setting ranges


Releases / protective functionsThe protective function of the circuit-breaker in the power distributionsystem is determined by the selectionof the appropriate release. Releasescan be divided into thermo-magneticreleases (previously also calledelectromechanical releases) andelectronic tripping units (ETU).

� Overload protectionDesignation: “L” or earlier “a” (“L” forlong-time delay).Depending on the type of release,inverse-time-delay overload releasesare also available with optionalcharacteristic curves.

� Protection of neutral conductorDesignation: N (neutral)Inverse-time-delay overload releasesfor neutral conductors are availablein a 50% or 100% ratio of the over-load release.

� Short-circuit protection, instanta-neousDesignation: I (instantaneous),previously also called “n” release.Example: solenoid release. Depend-ing on the application, I-releases arealso offered with a fixed, adjustableor OFF function.

� Short-circuit protection, with delay Designation: “S” (short-time delay),previously also “z” release.For a temporal adjustment of protec-tive functions in series connections.Besides the standard curves andsettings, there are also optionalfunctions for special applications.

– Definite-time-delay overcurrentreleases:For this “standard S-function,”the desired delay time (tsd) is setto a definite value when a setcurrent value (limit-value Isd) isexceeded (definite time; similarto the DMT function in mediumvoltage)

– Inverse-time-delay overcurrentrelease:For this optional S-function appliesI2t constant. This function is gener-ally used to ensure a higher degreeof selectivity (inverse time; similarto the inverse-time-delay functionin medium voltage)

� Ground fault protectionDesignation: “G” (ground fault),previously also called “g” release. Besides the standard function(definite-time), there is also anoptional function (I2t inverse-timedelay).

� Fault current protectionDesignation: RCD (= residual currentdevice), previously also called “DI.”To detect differential fault currentsup to 3 A, similar to the RCCB func-tion for the protection of persons(up to 500 mA).

Electronic releases also permit newtripping criteria which are not possiblewith electromechanical releases.

Protective characteristicsThe protective characteristic curve isdetermined by the rated circuit-breakercurrent as well as the setting and theoperating values of the releases.

Low-voltage miniature circuit-breakers (MCB) IEC60898-1/VDE 0641-11

Miniature circuit-breakers are distin-guished according to their method ofoperation, showing a

� high current-limiting, or� low current-limiting capacity.

Their protective functions are deter-mined by electromechanical releases:

� Overload protection by means ofinverse-time-delayed overloadreleases, e.g. bimetallic releases

� Short-circuit protection by means ofinstantaneous overload releases,e.g. solenoid releases

2.3.3 Low-VoltageProtective SwitchgearAssemblies

With series-connected distributionboards, it is possible to arrange thefollowing protective devices in series(relative to the direction of powerflow):

� Fuse with downstream fuse� Circuit-breaker with downstream

miniature circuit-breaker� Circuit-breaker with downstream

fuse� Fuse with downstream circuit-

breaker� Fuse with downstream miniature

circuit-breaker� Several parallel feeding systems

with or without coupler units withdownstream circuit-breaker ordownstream fuse

Current selectivity must be verified inthe case of meshed LV systems.

The high- and low-voltage protectionfor the transformers feeding power tothe LV system must be harmonizedand matched to ensure protection ofthe secondary power system. Appro-priate checks must be carried out todetermine the effects on the primaryMV system.

In MV systems, HV HRC fuses arenormally installed upstream of thetransformers in the LV feeding systemonly. With the upstream circuit-breakers, only time-overcurrentprotection devices with differentcharacteristics are usually connectedin series. Differential protection doesnot affect, or only slightly influencesthe grading of the other protectivedevices.

22/17

Power System

2.3.4 Selectivity Criteria

In addition to factors such as ratedcurrent and rated switching capacity,another criterion to be considered isselectivity. Selectivity is importantbecause it ensures optimum supplyreliability. The following criteria canbe applied for selective operation ofseries-connected protection devices:

� Time difference for clearance (timegrading)

� Current difference for operatingvalues (current grading)

� Combination of time and currentgrading (inverse-time grading)

Power direction (directional protec-tion), impedance (distance protec-tion) and current difference (differen-tial protection) are also used.

Requirements for selectivebehavior of protective devices

Protective devices can only act selec-tively if both the highest and thelowest short-circuit currents for therelevant system points are known atthe project planning stage.

As a result:

� The highest short-circuit currentdetermines the required ratedshort-circuit switching capacityIcu/Ics of the circuit-breaker.Criterion: Icu or Ics > Ik max

� The lowest short-circuit current isimportant for setting the short-circuit release; the operating valueof this release must be less than thelowest short-circuit current at theend of the line to be protected,since only this setting of Isd or Iiguarantees that the overcurrentrelease can fulfill its operator andsystem protection functions.

AttentionWhen using these settings, permissi-ble setting tolerances of ± 20%, or the

tolerance specifications given by themanufacturer must be observed!

Criterion: Isd or Ii ≤ Ik min – 20%� The requirement that defined

tripping conditions be observeddetermines the maximum conduc-tor lengths or their cross sections.

� Selective current grading is onlypossible if the short-circuit currentsare known.

� In addition to current grading,partial selectivity can be achievedusing combinations of carefullymatched protective devices.

� In addition to current grading,partial selectivity can be achievedusing combinations of carefullymatched protective devices.

� With feeding into LV power sys-tems, the single-phase fault currentwill be greater than the three-phasefault current if transformers withthe Dy connection are used.

� The single-phase short-circuit cur-rent will be the lowest fault currentif the damping zero phase-sequenceimpedance of the LV cable is active.

With large installations, it is advisableto determine all short-circuit currentsusing a special computer program.Here, our SIMARIS design® planningand calculation software comes as theoptimum solution.

Grading the operating currentswith time grading

Grading of the operating currents isalso taken into consideration withtime grading, i.e. the operating valueof the overcurrent release of theupstream circuit-breaker must be atleast 1.5 times the operating value ofthe downstream circuit-breaker.Tolerances of operating currents indefinite-time-delay overcurrent S-releases (±20%) are thus compen-sated. When the manufacturer speci-

fies narrower tolerances, this factor isreduced accordingly.

Plotting the tripping characteristics ofthe graded protective devices in agrading diagram will help to verifyand visualize selectivity.

2.3.5 Preparing Current-Time Diagrams (GradingDiagrams)

When characteristic tripping curvesare entered on log-log graph paper,the following must be observed:

� To ensure positive selectivity, thetripping curves must neither crossnor touch.

� With electronic inverse-time-delay(long-time delay) overcurrentreleases, there is only one trippingcurve, as it is not affected by pre-loading. The selected characteristiccurve must, therefore, be suitablefor the motor or transformer atoperating temperature.

� With mechanical (thermal) inverse-time-delay overload releases (L), thecharacteristic curves shown in themanufacturer catalog apply to coldreleases. The opening times to arereduced by up to 25% at normaloperating temperatures.

Tolerance range of tripping curves� The tripping curves of circuit-break-

ers given in the manufacturercatalogs are usually only averagevalues and must be extended toinclude tolerance ranges (explicitlyshown in Fig. 3/4, 3/20 and 3/24only).

� With overcurrent releases – instan-taneous (I) and definite-timedelayed releases (S) – the tolerancemay be ±20% of the current setting(according to IEC 60947-2 / VDE0660 Part 101).

Fig. 2.3/3: Grading diagram with tripping curves of the circuit-breakers Q1 and Q2


Significant tripping timesFor the sake of clarity, only the delay time (td) is plotted for circuit-breakers with definite-time-delayovercurrent releases (S), and only theopening time (to) for circuit-breakerswith instantaneous overcurrentreleases (I).

Grading principleDelay times and operating currentsare graded in the opposite direction tothe flow of power, starting with thefinal circuit:

� without fuses, for the load breakerwith the highest current setting ofthe overcurrent release,

� with fuses, for the fused outgoingcircuit from the busbars with thehighest rated fuse-link current.

Circuit-breakers are preferred to fusesin cases where fuse links with highrated currents do not provide selectiv-ity vis-à-vis the definite-time-delayovercurrent release (S) of the trans-former feeder circuit-breaker, or onlywith very long delay times tsd (400 to500 ms). Furthermore, circuit-break-ers are used where high system avail-ability is required, as they help toclear faults faster and the circuit-breakers’ releases are not subject toaging – especially with consumerswith very long feeding distances.

Procedure with two or morevoltage levelsIn the case of selectivity involving twoor more voltage levels (Fig. 2.7/2ff.),all currents and tripping curves on thehigh-voltage side are converted andreferred to the low-voltage side onthe basis of the transformer’s transfor-mation ratio.

Tools for preparing gradingdiagrams� Standard forms with paired current

values for commonly used voltages,

e. g. 20/0.4 kV, 10/0.4 kV, 13.8/0.4 kV, etc.

� Templates for plotting the trippingcharacteristics

Fig. 2.3/3 shows a hand-drawn grad-ing diagram with tripping curves fortwo series-connected circuit-breakers,not taking into account tolerances.When the SIMARIS design planningsoftware is used, a manual prepara-tion of grading diagrams is no longernecessary.

Medium-voltage time grading

Tripping command and gradingtimeThe following must be observed whendetermining the grading time tgt onthe medium-voltage side:

Once the protective device has beenenergized (Fig. 2.3/4), the set timemust elapse, before the device issuesthe tripping command to the shunt or

undervoltage release of the circuit-breaker (command time tk).

The release causes the circuit-breakerto open. The short-circuit current isinterrupted when the arc has beenextinguished. Only then does theprotection system revert to the nor-mal (rest) position (release time).

The grading time tst between succes-sive protective devices must begreater than the sum of the totaldisconnection time tg of the breakerand the release time of the protectionsystem.

Since response time tolerances, whichdepend on a number of factors, haveto be expected for the protectivedevices (including circuit-breakers), asafety margin is incorporated in thegrading time.

Whereas grading times tst of less than400 to 300 ms are not possible with

120

min

s

ms

t

Q1 Q2

L (cold)

k1

100402010

421

2010

421

2040

400200100

10

10 2 3 4 6 2 3 4 6 2 3

St t150 ms 180 msst sd

t < 30 msi

4 6 2 3 4 61 102 103 104 10Current (r.m.s. value)

k2

52

22/19

Power System

to prevent any damage being causedby short-circuit currents.

The DIN VDE and IEC standards alsopermit a switching device to be pro-tected by one of the upstream protec-tive devices with an adequate ratedshort-circuit switching capacity if boththe branch circuit and the down-stream protective device are alsoprotected.

t

Short-circuit current

Operating current

Load current

Time setting ofprotective device

Time setting of overlaid protection

Grading time t st

Command time tk

Scatter band of protective tripping

Scatter band of circuit-breaker

Scatter band of protective tripping

Total disconnection time of circuit-breaker

t g

Disconnection time of circuit-

breakerRelease

timeSafety

time

Current I

Fig. 2.3/4: Time grading in medium-voltage switchgear

protective devices with mechanicalreleases, electronic releases havegrading times of 300 ms, and digitalreleases used with modern vacuumcircuit-breakers even provide gradingtimes of only 250 or 200 ms.

Low-voltage time grading

Grading and delay timesOnly the grading time tst and delaytime tsd are relevant for time gradingbetween several series-connectedcircuit-breakers or in conjunction withLV HRC fuses.

Proven grading times tst

Series-connected circuit-breakers:Those so-called “proven grading times”are guiding values or rules of thumb.Precise information must be obtainedfrom the equipment manufacturers.

� Grading between two circuit-break-ers with electronic overcurrentreleases should be about 70-80 ms

� Grading between two circuit-break-ers with different release types (ETUand TM) should be about 100 ms

� For circuit-breakers with ZSI (zone-selective interlocking, i.e. short-time grading control) the gradingdistance of the unblocked releasehas been defined as 50 ms.

If the release is blocked, the switchtrips within the set time tsd.

Irrespective of the type of S-release(mechanical or electronic), a gradingtime of 70 ms to 100 ms is necessarybetween a circuit-breaker and adownstream LV HRC fuse.

Back-up protection

According to the Technical SupplyConditions of the supply networkoperators (see ”Electrical InstallationsHandbook”), miniature circuit-break-ers must be fitted with back-up fuseswith a rated current of 100 A (max.)

Further information on low-voltage switchgear andprotective devices� Siemens AG (Ed.), Switching, Protection and

Distribution in Low-Voltage Networks, 4th ed.,published by Publicis , Erlangen, 1997

� Seip, Günther (Ed.), Electrical InstallationsHandbook, published by Publicis, Erlangen,2000.


2.4 ProtectiveEquipment for Low-Voltage PowerSystemsOvercurrent protection devices mustbe used to protect lines and cablesagainst overheating which may resultfrom operational overloads or deadshort circuits.* The protective switch-ing devices and safety systems dealtwith in this chapter are furtherdescribed in Chapter 5.

Tables 2.4/1 and 2.4/2 provide anoverview of the protection equipmentfor LV systems. The protection equip-ment in the MV system of transformerbranches has also been listed in Table2.4/2.

2.4.1 Circuit-Breakerswith Protective Functions

Protective functions of LV circuit-breakers

Circuit-breakers are used, first andforemost, for overload and short-circuit protection. In order to increasetheir protective functions, they canalso be equipped with additionalreleases, e.g. for disconnection onundervoltage, or with supplementarymodules for detecting fault/residualcurrents (also see Chapter 6).

Circuit-breakers are distinguishedaccording to their protective function:

� Circuit-breakers for system protec-tion acc. to IEC 60947-2 / DIN VDE 0660-101

� Circuit-breakers for motor protec-tion acc. to IEC 60947-2 / DIN VDE 0660-101

� Circuit-breakers used in motorstarters acc. to IEC 60947-4-2 / DIN VDE 0660-102

� Miniature circuit-breakers for cableand line protection acc. to EN 60898/ IEC 60898 / DIN VDE 0641-11

Zero-current interrupters / currentlimiters

Depending on their method of opera-tion, circuit-breakers are available as:

� Zero-current interrupters� Current limiters (fuse-type current

limiting)

When configuring selective distribu-tion boards, zero-current interruptersare more suitable as upstream protec-tion devices and current limiters asdownstream protection devices.

Overload and overcurrentprotection

Table 2.4/3 provides an overview ofreleases and relays in LV circuit-breakers.

Overcurrent protection devices Standard Overload Short-circuit

protection protection

Line-protection fuses, gL IEC 60269/DIN VDE 0636 × ×

Miniature circuit-breakers IEC 60898/DIN VDE 0641-11 × ×

Circuit-breakers w. overload IEC 60947-2/DIN VDE 0660-101 × ×and overcurrent releases

Switchgear fuses, aM IEC 60269/DIN VDE 0636 – ×

Switchgear assembly

consisting of line-side fuse in IEC 60269/DIN VDE 0636 – ×utilization category gL or aM

and contactor w. overload relay IEC 60947-4-1/DIN VDE 0660-102 × –

or

starter circuit-breaker IEC 60947-2/DIN VDE 0660-101 – ×and contactor w. overload relay IEC 60947-4-1/DIN VDE 0660-102 × –

× Protection ensured – protection not ensured

Table 2.4/1: Overview of overcurrent protection devices for lines and cables together with their protection range

* cf. Seip, Günther G. (Ed.): Electrical Installations Handbook, 4th edition,Publicis, Erlangen, 2000, Section 1.7

22/21

Power System

MV protection Switch-disconnectors, Circuit-breaker, current

devices applied HV HRC fuses transformer, overcurrent-

time protection

LV Circuit-breakers Tie Circuit-breaker

or LV HRC fuses breakers

Expense low adequate high

Medium-voltage side

Transformers with temp.

detectors or thermal

protection

Low-voltage side with series

connections of various protective

devices in radial networks, and

parallel connections of LV HRC

fuses in interconnected grids

HV HRC

MV

LV

≤ 630 A

NH

≤ 50 A, ≤ 100 A

Typically single and parallel operation

optionallyTypically single and parallel operation

MV

LV

I >I >>

HV HRC fuse or LV HRC fuse

Reactive-power control unit

Switch-disconnector

>>>

Independent two-zone definite-time overcurrent-time protection, > and >>, to current transformer

Circuit-breaker

Withdrawable circuit-breaker (with isolating point)

Contactor

Overload relay

Table 2.4/2: Overview of protection grading schemes for transformer branch and LV branch circuits

Overcurrent releasesInstantaneous electromagnetic over-current releases have either fixed oradjustable settings, whereas theelectronic overcurrent releases used inSiemens circuit-breakers all haveadjustable settings.

ModulesThe overcurrent releases can beintegrated in the circuit-breaker orsupplied as separate modules for

retrofitting or replacement. For possi-ble exceptions, please refer to themanufacturers' specifications.

Overload releasesMechanical (thermal) inverse-time-delay overload releases (L-releases)are not always suitable for networkswith a high harmonic content. Circuit-breakers with electronic overloadreleases must be used in such cases.

Short-circuit protection withS-releasesIf circuit-breakers with definite (short)time-delay overcurrent releases (S)are used for time-graded short-circuitprotection, it should be noted that thecircuit-breakers are designed for aspecific maximum permissible thermaland dynamic load. If the time delaycauses this load limit to be exceededin the event of a short circuit, anI-release must also be used to ensure

I >I >>


that the circuit-breaker is openedinstantaneously in case of very highshort-circuit currents. The informationsupplied by the manufacturer shouldbe consulted when selecting anappropriate release.

Reclosing lockout after short-circuittrippingSome circuit-breakers can be fittedwith a mechanical and/or electricalreclosing lockout which preventsreclosing to the short circuit aftertripping on this fault. The circuit-breaker can only be closed again afterthe fault has been eliminated and thelockout has been reset manually.

Fault-current/residual-currentprotection

Fault-current protection devices haveacquired a position of vital importancein safety engineering all over theworld, due to the high level of protec-tion they provide (protection ofhuman life and property) and theirextended scope of protection features(alternating and pulsating currentsensitivity).

Apart from residual-current-operatedcircuit-breakers, miniature circuit-breaker assemblies, e. g. miniaturecircuit-breakers with fault-currenttripping, are being used to an increas-ing extent for commercial and indus-trial applications.

Miniature circuit-breakers (MCB)with fault-current trippingThese circuit-breaker assemblies areavailable as compact factory-builtdevices or may be assembled from aminiature circuit-breaker as the basicdevice and an add-on module.

Miniature circuit-breakers withfault-current/residual-currenttrippingThe assembly comprising a circuit-breaker and add-on module hasestablished itself for circuit-breakers

with rated currents In of up to 400 Aand fault-current/residual-currenttripping.

Technical featuresThe add-on module for residual-current tripping used in system pro-tection applications includes such thetechnical features as:

� Rated residual current I∆n adjustablein steps, e.g. 30 mA/ 100 mA/300 mA/ 1,000 mA/ 3,000 mA

� Tripping time ta adjustable in steps,e.g. instantaneous 60 ms/ 100 ms/250 ms/ 500 ms/ 1,000 ms

� Operation depends on the systemvoltage

� Sensitivity: tripping with alternatingand pulsating DC fault currents( )

� Reset button ”R” for resetting afterresidual-current tripping

� Test button ”T” for testing thecircuit-breaker assembly

� Status display for the present leak-age/residual current I∆ in the down-stream circuit, e. g. by means ofcolored LEDs:

– green: I∆ ≤ 0,25 I∆n

– yellow: 0,25 I∆n < I∆ ≤ 0,5 I∆n

Protective Code Delay type of the Symbols acc. to

function release EN 60617 / DIN 40713

Schematic symbol Graphic

or symbol

Overload L Stromabhängig

protection verzögert

Selective short- S1) definite-time-

circuit protection delayed by timer

(with delay) Zeitglied

or with

I2-dependent

delay

Fault-current/ G1) definite-time-

residual-current/ delayed or with

ground-fault I2-dependent

protection (RCD) delay

Short-circuit I instantaneous

protection

(instantaneous)

1) For SENTRON 3WL and SENTRON 3VL circuit-breakers also with “zone-selective interlocking” (ZSI)Combinations of releases will only be referred to by their codes as L-, S- and I-releases etc.

I>I>

I

I>>>

Table 2.4/3: Symbols for releases according to protective function

22/23

Power System

– red: IA > I∆ > 0.5 I∆nIA = Tripping current of

additional residual-current module

� Disconnection of the electronics’overvoltage protection prior toinsulation measurements in theinstallation

� ”Remote tripping”� ”Auxiliary switch (AS)”

Interface to bus systems

The circuit-breaker assemblies can beequipped to bus systems using appro-priate interfaces, to enable theexchange of information and interac-tion with other components in theelectrical installation.

Circuit-breaker assemblies sensitiveto universal currentMiniature circuit-breaker assemblies,which are sensitive to universal cur-rent (AC/DC-sensitive), are requiredfor industrial applications for electricalinstallations in which smooth DC faultcurrents or currents with a low resid-ual ripple occur in the event of a fault.

StandardsThe standards IEC 60947-2 / DIN VDE 0660-101 apply to circuit-breakers with add-on fault-current orresidual-current modules.

Selection criteria for circuit-breakers

When selecting the appropriate cir-cuit-breakers for system protection,special attention must be paid to thefollowing characteristics:

� Type of circuit-breaker and itsreleases according to the respectiveprotective function and tasks

� Rated voltages� Short-circuit strength Icu/ Ics and

rated short-circuit making (Icm) andbreaking capacity (Icn)

� Rated and maximum load currents

The system voltage and system fre-quency are crucial factors for selectingthe circuit-breakers according to� rated insulation voltage Ui and� rated operating voltage Ue

Rated insulation voltage Ui

The rated insulation voltage Ui is thestandardized voltage value for whichthe insulation of the circuit-breakersand their associated components israted in accordance with HD 625 / IEC60664 / DIN VDE 0110, InsulationGroup C.

Rated operating voltage Ue

The rated operating voltage Ue of acircuit-breaker is the voltage value towhich the rated short-circuit makingand breaking capacities and the short-circuit performance category refer.

Short-circuit currentThe maximum short-circuit current atthe mounting location is a crucialfactor for selecting the circuit-break-ers according to

� short-circuit strength Icu/ Ics, as wellas

� rated short-circuit making (Icm) andbreaking capacities (Icn).

Dynamic short-circuit strength

The dynamic short-circuit strength isthe maximum asymmetric short-circuitcurrent. It is the highest permissibleinstantaneous value of the prospectiveshort-circuit current along the conduct-ing path with the highest load.

Thermal short-circuit strength(1-s current)The permissible thermal short-circuitstrength is referred to as the ratedshort-time current Icw. It is the maxi-mum current which the breaker iscapable of withstanding for a definedtime without being damaged. Gener-ally, the Icw current refers to 1 s. Othertime values > 1 s can be convertedassuming Icn = constant.

Rated switching capacityThe rated switching capacity of thecircuit-breakers is specified as therated short-circuit making capacity Icm

and rated short-circuit breakingcapacity Icn.

Rated short-circuit making capacity Icm

The rated short-circuit making capac-ity Icm is the short-circuit currentwhich the circuit-breaker is capable ofmaking at the rated operating voltage+10%, rated frequency and a specifiedpower factor. It is expressed as themaximum peak value of the prospec-tive short-circuit current, and is atleast equal to the rated short-circuitbreaking capacity Icn, multiplied bythe factor n specified in Table 2.4/4.

Rated short-circuit breakingcapacity Icn

The rated short-circuit breaking capac-ity Icn is the short-circuit current whichthe circuit-breaker is capable of break-ing at the rated operating voltage+10%, rated frequency and a specifiedpower factor cos ϕ. It is expressed asthe r.m.s. value of the alternatingcurrent component.

Switching capacity categorySwitching capacity categories, whichspecify how often a circuit-breakercan switch its rated making andbreaking current as well as the condi-tion of the breaker after the specifiedswitching cycle, are defined for cir-cuit-breakers in IEC 60947/ DIN VDE0660 and in accordance with IEC 157-1 (Table 2.4/5). The ratedshort-circuit breaking capacity Icn isbased on the test sequence O-t-CO-t-CO. The rated service short-circuitbreaking capacity Ics can also bespecified on the basis of the short-ened switching sequence O-t-CO (seeTable 2.4/5 for explanation of O, t,and C).


Rated circuit-breaker currentsThe rated duty, e.g. continuous opera-tion, intermittent operation or short-time operation, plays a decisive role inselecting the switchgear according toits rated currents.

The following rated currents aredistinguished according to the ther-mal characteristics:

� Conventional rated thermal current Ith

� Rated continuous current Iu� Rated operating current Ie

Conventional rated thermalcurrent Ith, rated continuouscurrent Iu

The conventional rated thermal cur-rent Ith or Ithe for motor starters inenclosures is defined as an 8-h currentin accordance with IEC 60947-1, -4-1,-3 / DIN VDE 0660-100, -102, -107.

It is the maximum current which canbe carried during this time withoutthe temperature limit being exceeded.The rated continuous current Iu can becarried for an unlimited time.

With adjustable inverse-time-delayreleases and relays, the maximumcurrent setting is the rated continuouscurrent Iu.

Rated current Ie

The rated operating current Ie is thecurrent that is determined by thefollowing parameters:

� The operating conditions of theswitching device

� Rated operating voltage� Rated frequency� Rated switching capacity � Rated duty

Tabelle 2.4/4: Ratio n between short-circuit making and breaking capacity and corresponding power factor (for AC circuit-breakers)

Short-circuit breaking Power factor Minimum value n

capacity Icn cos ϕ n = short-circuit making capacity

(r.m.s. value) [kA] short-circuit breaking capacity

4.5 < I ≤ 6 0.7 1.5

6 < I ≤ 10 0.5 1.7

10 < I ≤ 20 0.3 2.0

20 < I ≤ 50 0.25 2.1

50 < I 0.2 2.2

Table 2.4/5: Switching performance categories acc. to IEC 60947 / DIN VDE 0660 and IEC 157-1

The rated short-circuit breaking capacity is indicated with two parameters:

Switching capacity Icu Ics

Rated Rated

ultimate short-circuit service short-circuit

breaking capacity breaking capacity

Test sequence O-t-CO O-t-CO-t-CO

Testing of • ultimate short-circuit • service short-circuit

breaking capacity breaking capacity

Verification of Verification of

• tripping on overload • tripping on overload

• dielectric strength • dielectric strength

• heating • heating

O Breaking (O = Open); CO Making/Breaking (C = Close); t Pause (t = time)

* The utilization category describes theswitching devices’ application and stress, seedevice standards IEC 60947 / DIN VDE 0660.

22/25

Power System

Table 2.4/6: Application examples for Siemens circuit-breakers and their typical tripping characteristics

Switch type Rated current Application Tripping characteristic

Air Circuit- For the protection of distribution systems, Breaker (ACB) 630 A to 6,300 A motors, transformers and generators

SENTRON 3WL – High rated short-time current for time selectivity

– Two product series, SENTRON 3WL1 and SENTRON 3WL6,

with high and medium rated switching capacity

– Electronic overcurrent releases, independent of

external voltages, based on microprocessors

– Zone-selective interlocking (ZSI) with 50 ms total

delay time

Current-limiting Built and tested in compliance

circuit-breaker with IEC 60947/DIN VDE 0660 and

(MCCB) suitable for use as/in:

SENTRON 3VL

TM-release: For system protection up to 1,600 A

6 A to 630 A Option: adjustable overload and overcurrent releases:

ETU release: accurate adaptation to protection requirements

63 A to 1,600 A

ETU releases: For motor protection up to 500 A

63 A to 500 A electronic overload releases with adjustable

time lag class:

effective protection when the motor is at full duty

M-releases: For starter combinations up to 500 A,

63 A to 500 A unaffected by inrush peak currents:

Release doesn’t trip on direct-on-line start of motor

M-releases: Isolating function up to 1,600 A

100 A to 1,600 A with integrated overcurrent releases,

no line-side fuse required

Circuit-breaker For motor protection with overload and

3RV1 0.16 A to 100 A overcurrent protection

Tripping cause: L overload S short-time delayed overcurrent I instantaneous tripping on overcurrent G ground fault

L

S

G

L

S

L

L

L

Application examples for Siemens circuit-breakers and their typical tripping characteristics


2.4.2 SwitchgearAssemblies

Switchgear assemblies are series-connected switching and protectiondevices which perform specific tasksfor protecting a system component;the first device (relative to the flow ofpower) provides the short-circuitprotection.

Switchgear assemblies with fuses

Fuses and molded-case circuit-breakersIf the prospective short-circuit currentIk exceeds the rated short-circuitbreaking capacity Icn of the circuit-breaker at its mounting location, thelatter must be provided with upstreamfuses (Fig. 2.4/1).

Protection and operating rangesDefined protection and operatingranges are assigned to each devicein the switchgear assembly. TheL-release monitors overload currents,while the I-release detects short-circuit currents up to the rated short-circuit breaking capacity of the circuit-breaker.

The circuit-breaker provides protec-tion against all overcurrents up to itsrated short-circuit breaking capacityIcn and ensures all-pole opening andreclosing.

The fuses will only be responsible for clearing the short-circuit, whenhigher short-circuit currents Ik arepresent. In this case too, the circuit-breaker disconnects all-pole almostsimultaneously via its I-release, trig-gered by the let-through current ID ofthe fuse. The fuse must, therefore, beselected such that its let-throughcurrent ID is less than the rated short-circuit breaking capacity Icn of thecircuit-breaker.

Fuse, contactor, and thermalinverse-time-delay overload relayThe switchgear assembly comprisingcontactor and overload relay isreferred to as a motor starter or, if athree-phase motor is started directly,a direct-on-line starter. The contactoris used to switch the motor on andoff. The overload relay protects themotor, motor supply conductors, andcontactor against overloading. Thefuse upstream of the contactor andoverload relay provides protectionagainst short circuits. For this reason,the protection ranges and characteris-tics of all the components (Fig. 2.4./2)must be carefully coordinated witheach other.

Specifications for contactors andmotor startersThe standards IEC 60947-4-1 / DINVDE 0660-102 apply to contactors andmotor starters up to 1,000 V fordirect-on-line starting (with maximumvoltage).

When short-circuit current protectionequipment is selected for switchgear

assemblies, a distinction is madebetween various types of protectionaccording to the permissible degree ofdamage as defined in IEC 60947-4-1 /DIN VDE 0660-102:

� Coordination type 1: Destruction ofcontactor and overload relay arepermissible. The contactor and/oroverload relay must be replaced ifnecessary.

� Coordination type 2: The overloadrelay must not be damaged. Contactwelding at the contactor is, how-ever, permissible, given the con-tacts can easily be separated or thecontactor can easily be replaced.

Protection and operating ranges ofequipment

Grading diagram for a motorstarterThe protection ranges and the rele-vant characteristics of the equipmentconstituting a switchgear assemblyused as a motor starter are illustratedin the grading diagram in Fig. 2.4/2.

The fuses in this assembly must satisfya number of conditions:

L

k

L

A

A

cn k

Fuse

Circuit-breaker

+ BreakerFuseFuse

Circuit-breaker

-releaseL-releaseOperating:

Disconnecting:

Circuit-breaker

FuseL Inverse-time delay

overload releaseI Instantaneous

electromagneticovercurrent release

Icn Rated short-circuitbreaking capacity

Ik Sustained short-circuit current at themounting location

A Spacings ofcharacteristic curves

Fig. 2.4/1: Switchgear assembly comprising fuse and circuit-breaker

22/27

Power System

� The time-current characteristics offuses and overload relays mustallow the motor to be run up tospeed.

� The fuses must protect the overloadrelay from being destroyed bycurrents approximately 10 timeshigher than the rated current of therelay.

� The fuses must interrupt overcur-rents beyond the capability of thecontactor (i.e. currents approxi-mately 10 times higher than therated operating current Ie of thecontactor).

� In the event of a short-circuit, thefuses must protect the contactorsuch that any damage does notexceed the specified degrees ofdamage (see above). Depending onthe rated operating current Ie ,contactors must be able to with-stand motor starting currents ofbetween 8 and 12 times the rated

operating current Ie without thecontacts being welded.

To satisfy these conditions, the fol-lowing safety margins A, B and C mustbe maintained between certain char-acteristic curves of the devices:

Protection of overload relayIn order to protect the overload relay,the prearcing-time/current character-istic of the fuse must lie in margin Abelow the intersection of the trippingcurve of the overload relay (1) with itsdestruction curve (2) (an LV HRCswitchgear fuse of utilization categoryaM was used in this example, pleaserefer to the section ”Selecting fuses”below).

Protection of contactorIn order to protect the contactoragainst excessively high breakingcurrents, the prearcing-time/currentcharacteristic of the fuse from thecurrent value, which corresponds tothe breaking capacity of the contactor

(3), must lie in margin B below thetripping characteristic of the overloadrelay (1).

In order to protect the contactoragainst contact welding, time-currentcharacteristics, up to which loadcurrents can be applied, can be speci-fied for each contactor, which eitherresult in

� no contact welding or

� welded contacts that can easily beseparated (characteristic curve 4 inFig. 2.4/2).

In both cases, therefore, the fusemust respond in good time. The totalclearing time curve of the fuse (6)must lie in margin C below the charac-teristic curve of the contactor foreasily separable contact welding (4)(total fault clearing time = prearcingtime + extinction time).

Selecting fuses

LV HRC switchgear fusesFuses for motor starters are selectedaccording to the aforementionedcriteria.

Compared with LV HRC fuses in uti-lization category gL used to protectconductors and cables, LV HRCswitchgear fuses in utilization cate-gory aM provide the advantage ofweld-free short-circuit protection forthe maximum motor power which thecontactor is capable of switching.

Owing to their more effective current-limiting abilities (as compared withthose of line-protection fuses), theyare very effective in relieving contac-tors of high peak short-circuit currentsIp, since they respond more rapidly inthe upper short-circuit range asshown in Fig. 2.4/3.

It is therefore preferable to useswitchgear fuses rather than line-

t

1 min

AB

1 ms

2

3

4

C

6

5

1

Assembly with LV HRC fuse, contactor and thermal overload relay (motor starter)

(depending on current limiting by the fuse)

1 Tripping curve of(thermal) inverse-time-delay overload relay

2 Destruction curve ofthermal overload relay

3 Rated breaking capacityof contactor

4 Characteristic curve ofthe contactor for easilyseparable contactwelding

5 Prearcing-time/currentcharacteristic curve ofthe fuse, utilizationcategory aM

6 Total clearing time curveof the fuse, category aM

Fig. 2.4/2: Switchgear assembly comprising fuse, contactor, and thermal inverse-time-delay overload relay

A, B, C Safety margins forcorrectly workingshort-circuit protection


protection fuses with relay settings> 80 A at higher operating currentswith correspondingly lower short-circuit current attenuation.

Table 2.4/7 shows the classification ofthe fuses based on functional fea-tures.

Classification of LV HRC fuses andcomparison of characteristics of gLand aM utilization categories

LV HRC fuses are divided into func-tional and utilization categories inaccordance with their type. They cancontinuously carry currents up to theirrated current.

Functional category g (full-range fuses)Functional category g applies to full-range fuses which can interruptcurrents from the minimum fusingcurrent up to the rated short-circuitbreaking current.

Utilization category gLThis category includes fuses in utiliza-tion category gL for cable and lineprotection.

Functional category a(back-up fuses)Functional category a applies to fusesfor partial-range protection (back-upfuses), which can interrupt currentsabove a specified multiple of their

rated current up to the rated short-circuit breaking current.

Utilization category aMUtilization category aM applies toswitchgear fuses whose minimumbreaking current is approximately fourtimes the rated current. Therefore,these fuses are only intended forshort-circuit protection. For thisreason, fuses of functional category“a” must not be used above their ratedcurrent. A means of overload protec-tion, e.g. a thermal time-delay relay,must always be provided.

The prearcing-time/current character-istics of LV HRC of utilization categorygL and aM for 200 A are compared inFig. 2.4/3.

Switchgear assemblies withoutfuses (circuit-breaker protecteddesign)

Back-up protection (cascade-connected circuit-breakers)If two circuit-breakers with I-releasesof the same type are connected inseries along one conducting path,they will open simultaneously in theevent of a fault (K) in the vicinity ofthe distribution board (Fig. 2.4/4,2.4/5).

The short-circuit current is therebydetected by two series-connectedinterrupting devices and effectively

10

10t

gLaM

4 10 10 510

10

10

10

10

10

10

8

[A]

3

3s

2 4-3

-2

-1

0

1

2

4Prearcing time [s]

Utilization category

Fig. 2.4/3: Comparison of prearcing-time/currentcharacteristics of LV HRC fuses ofutilization categories gL and aM,rated current 200 A

Table 2.4/7: Classification of LV HRC fuses based on their functional characteristics defined in IEC60269-1/DIN VDE 0636-10

Functional category Utilization category

Designation Rated continuous Rated breaking Designation Protection of

current up to current

Full-range fuses

g In ≥ Ia min gL/gG Cables and

lines

gR Semiconductors

gB Mining

facilities

Back-up fuses

a In ≥ 4 In aM Switchgear

≥ 2.7 In aR Semiconductors

Ia min lowest rated breaking current

Q2

Q1

K

Circuit-breaker with I-release

Circuit-breaker with L- and I-release

and

Fig. 2.4/4: Block diagram of a back-up protectioncircuit (cascade connection) in asubdistribution board

extinguished. As a result, the down-stream circuit-breaker with a lowerrated switching capacity can beinstalled at a location where thepossible maximum short-circuit cur-rent exceeds its rated switchingcapacity (see Section 2.3.1 “Back-upProtection”).

Protection and operating ranges ofthe circuit-breakersFig. 2.4/4 shows the single-line dia-gram and Fig. 2.4/5 the principle of acascade connection. The rated currentof the upstream circuit-breaker Q2 isselected in accordance with its ratedoperating current.

The circuit-breaker Q2 is, for example,used as a main circuit-breaker orgroup circuit-breaker for severalbranch circuits in subdistribution

22/29

Power System

i

u e

t

i p

iD1

iD(1+2)

t

uuB(1+2)

uB1

Fig. 2.4/5: Principle of a back-up protectioncircuit (cascade connection)

ip Peak short-circuit current(maximum value)

iD1 Let-through current of branchcircuit-breaker Q1

iD(1+2) Actual let-through current (lower than iD1)

ue Driving voltage (operating voltage)

uB(1+2) Sum of the arc voltages of theupstream circuit breaker Q2and the outgoing feedercircuit-breaker Q1

uB1 Arc voltage of branch circuit-breaker Q1

boards. Its I-release is set to a veryhigh operating current, if possible tothe rated short-circuit breaking capac-ity (Icn) of the downstream circuit-breakers. The branch circuit-breakerQ1 provides overload protection andalso clears autonomously relativelylow short-circuit currents, which maybe caused by short circuits to exposedconductive parts, insulation faults orshort circuits at the end of long linesand cables. The upstream circuit-breaker Q2 only opens at the sametime if high short-circuit currents flowas a result of a dead short circuit inthe vicinity of the branch circuit-breaker Q1 (limited selectivity).

Circuit-breakers with L- and I-releases and contactor

Protection and operating rangesThe circuit-breaker provides overloadand short-circuit protection also forthe contactor, while the contactorperforms switching duties (Fig. 2.4/6).The requirements that must be ful-filled by the circuit-breaker are thesame as those that apply to the fusein switchgear assemblies comprisingfuse, contactor and overload relay(see Fig. 2.4/2).

Starter circuit-breaker with I-release, contactor, and overloadrelay

Readiness for reclosingOverload protection is provided by theoverload relay in conjunction with thecontactor, while short-circuit protec-tion is provided by the starter circuit-breaker. The operating current of itsI-release is set as low as the startingcycle will permit, in order to includelow short-circuit currents in theinstantaneous breaking range as well(Fig. 2.4/7). The advantage of thisswitchgear assembly is that it ispossible to determine whether thefault was an overload or short circuit

according to whether the contactor,triggered by the overload relay, or thestarter circuit-breaker has opened.Further advantages of the startercircuit-breaker following short-circuittripping are three-phase circuit inter-ruption and immediate readiness forreclosing.

Switchgear assemblies with startercircuit-breakers are becoming increas-ingly important in control units with-out fuses.

Switchgear assemblies withthermistor motor-protectiondevices

Overload relays and releases cease toprovide reliable overload protectionwhen it is no longer possible to estab-lish the winding temperature from themotor current. This is the case with

� high switching frequencies,� irregular, intermittent duty,� restricted cooling and� high ambient temperatures.

In these cases, switchgear assemblieswith thermistor motor-protectiondevices are used. The switchgearassemblies are designed with orwithout fuses depending on theinstallation configuration. The degreeof protection that can be attaineddepends on whether the motor to beprotected has a thermally criticalstator or rotor. The operating temper-ature, coupling time constant, and theposition of the temperature sensor inthe motor winding are also crucialfactors. They are usually specified bythe motor manufacturer.


Motors with thermally criticalstatorsMotors with thermally critical statorscan be adequately protected againstoverloads and overheating by meansof thermistor motor-protectiondevices without overload relays.Feeder cables are protected againstshort circuits and overloads either byfuses and circuit-breakers (Fig2.4/8a)or by fuses alone (Fig. 2.4/8b).

Motors with thermally criticalrotorsMotors with thermally critical rotors,even if started with a locked rotor, canonly be provided with adequateprotection if they are fitted with anadditional overload relay or release.The overload relay or release alsoprotects the cabling against overloads(Fig. 2.4/8a, c and d).

t

L

1 2

3 cn

Circuit-breaker with L -releases

Contactort

L

cn

Tripping:

Disconnecting:

L-release

Contactor Circuit-breaker

-release

Einstellbereich

Circuit-breaker with -release for starter assemblies

Contactor

Inverse-time-delay overload relay with L-release

M

+

M

+

M

+

M

+

Fuse


Thermistor motor protection

Fuse

Contactor

Overload relay



Contactor


Circuit-breaker with I-release

Contactor

Overload relay


a) b) c) d)

L Characteristic curve of(thermal) inverse-time-delay overload relay

I Characteristic curve ofadjustable instantaneousovercurrent release

1 Rated breaking capacity ofcontactor

2 Rated making capacity ofcontactor

3 Characteristic curve of thecontactor for easilyseparable contact welding

L Characteristic curve of theinverse-time-delay overloadrelease

I Characteristic curve of theinstantaneouselectromagneticoverovercurrent release

Icn Rated short-circuit breakingcapacity of circuit-breaker

Fig. 2.4/7: Switchgear assembly comprising circuit-breaker, adjustableovercurrent release, contactor, and overload relay

Fig. 2.4/6: Switchgear assembly comprising circuit-breaker and contactor

Fig. 2.4/8: Switchgear assembly comprising comprising thermistor motor protection plus additional overload relay or release (schematic circuit diagram)

Note:We recommend the use of anelectronic motor protection systemsuch as SIMOCODE (with or withoutthermistor protection) for motors.Advantages: broad performancerange, comprehensive controlfunctionalities, bus interfacing(PROFIBUS-DP), etc.

22/31

Power System

2.4.3 Selecting ProtectiveEquipment

Short-circuit protection of branchcircuitsBranch circuits in distribution boardsand control units can be providedwith short-circuit protection by meansof fuses or by means of circuit-break-ers without fuses. The level of antici-pated current limiting, which is higherin fuses with low rated currents thanin current-limiting circuit-breakerswith the same rated current, may alsobe a crucial factor in making a choicein favor of one or the other solution.

Comparing the protectivecharacteristics of fuses with thoseof current-limiting circuit-breakers

The following should be taken intoconsideration when comparing theprotection characteristics of fuses andcircuit-breakers:

� The rated short-circuit breakingcapacity, which can vary consider-ably;

� The level of current limiting which isalways higher with fuses of up to400 A than for current-limitingcircuit-breakers with the same ratedcurrent;

� The shape of the prearcing-time/current characteristics of fuses

and the tripping characteristics ofcircuit-breakers,

� Fault clearing conditions in accor-dance with IEC 60 364-4-41/ DINVDE 0100-410, Section 6.1.3 ”Pro-tection Measures in TN Systems”.*

Comparison of current-limitingcharacteristics of LV HRC fuses andcircuit-breakers

Fig. 2.4/9 shows the current-limitingcharacteristics of a circuit-breakerwith rated continuous current of 63 A,at 400 V and 50 Hz compared to an LVHRC fuse of type 3NA, utilizationcategory gL, rated currents 63 A and100 A. Owing to the high motorstarting currents, however, the ratedcurrent of the fuse must be higherthan the rated operating current ofthe motor, i.e. a circuit-breaker with aminimum rated current of 63 A or afuse with a minimum rated current of100 A is required for a 30 kW motor.

Comparison between the trippingcurves of fuses with those ofcircuit-breakers with the samerated current

The prearcing-time/current character-istic curve a of the 63 A fuse link,utilization category gL, and the “LI”tripping curve b of a circuit-breaker

are plotted in the time-current dia-gram in Fig. 2.4/10. The settingcurrent for the inverse-time-delayoverload release of the circuit-breakercorresponds to the rated current ofthe fuse link.

Current limiting range (1)The typical test range for fuse cur-rents (A) is, for example, between 1.3and 1.6 times the rated current whilethe test range for the limiting trippingcurrents of the overload release (B) isbetween 1.05 and 1.2 times thecurrent setting. The adjustable over-load release allows for the currentsetting and, therefore, the limitingtripping current to be matched moreclosely to the continuous loadingcapability of the equipment to beprotected than it would be possiblewith a fuse, whose different currentratings would only permit approxi-mate matching. Although the limitcurrent of the fuse is adequate forproviding overload protection of linesand cables, it is not sufficient for thestarting current of motors, where afuse with the characteristic a’ wouldbe needed.

i , i

63 A 100 A

63 A

cos 2,25

i

i

i

i

cos 0,3

cos 0,5

cos 0,7

10A

13108

1

[kA]

[kA]

p D

D

p

D

D

k

1 10 22 100


a, a´

2h

t

10 ms

10 s

1,6 ,( )1 1, 31,05 1,2 [kA]

100

21 3

B A

a b

a´

b

kmaxr e

cn

kmin

Fig. 2.4/9: Current-limiting characteristics of circuit-breaker (63 A) and LVHRC fuses (63 A or 100 A)

Fig. 2.4/10: Characteristic curves and switching capacities of a fuse (a) andcircuit-breaker (b) with LI-releases

* Also see Seip, Günther (Ed.),Electrical Installations Handbook, 4th ed.,Erlangen, 2000, Chapter 2.

iD Let-through currents

ip Peak short-circuit currents

For example for Ik = 10 kA:

iD Fuse (100 A) 7.5 kA

iD Circuit-breaker 8 kA

1 Current-limiting range

2 Overload range

3 Short-circuit current range

A Test range for fusecurrents

B Test range for the limitingtripping currents of thecircuit-breaker

Icn Rated short-circuitbreaking capacity


Overload range (2)In the overload range, the prearcing-time/current characteristic curve ofthe fuse is steeper than the trippingcurve of the overload release. This isdesirable for overload protection ofcables and conductors; the flattertripping characteristic b is, however,required for the overload protectionof motors.

Short-circuit current range (3)In the short-circuit current range, theinstantaneous release of the circuit-breaker detects short-circuit currentsabove its operating value faster thanthe fuse. Higher currents are brokenmore quickly by the fuse. And for thisreason, a fuse limits the short-circuitcurrent more effectively than a circuit-breaker.

This results in an extremely high ratedbreaking capacity for fuses of over100 kA at an operating voltage of690 V AC. The rated short-circuitbreaking capacity Icn of circuit-break-ers, however, depends on a numberof factors, e.g. the rated operatingvoltage Ue and the type.

A comparison between the protectioncharacteristics of fuses, circuit-break-ers and their switchgear assembliescan be found in Tables 2.4/6 and2.4/9.

Selecting circuit-breakers forcircuits with and without fuses

Circuits and control units can bedesigned with or without fuses.

Circuits with fuses (fuse-protected design)The standard design with fusesintended for system protectionincludes fuse-switch-disconnectorsswitch-disconnectors with fuses, andfuse and base arrangements (Table2.4/10).

The feeder circuit-breaker provides

overload protection and selectiveshort-circuit protection for the trans-former and distribution board.Siemens circuit-breakers SENTRON WLare ideal for this purpose. Transform-ers featuring lower output ratings,and/or if selectivity is not required,

may also be protected by a molded-case circuit-breaker, type SENTRON3VL. The fuse, providing systemprotection, protects the lines to thesubdistribution board against over-loads and short circuits as well as non-motor consumers. The switchgear

Table 2.4/8: Comparison between the protective characteristics of fuses and circuit-breakers

Characteristic Fuse Circuit-breaker

Rated switching capacity at > 100 kA, 690 V f (Ir Ue type1))

alternating voltage

Current limiting f (Ir Ik) f (Ir Ik Ue type1))

Additional arcing space none f (Ir Ik Ue type1))

Operability status visible from yes no

outside

Safe actuation during operation yes

Remote control no yes

Automatic all-pole opening yes

Signaling option yes

Interlocking no yes

Readiness for reclosing after

disconnection on overload no yes

short-circuit clearing no f (condition)

Interruption of operations yes f (condition)

Maintenance expense no f

Selectivity no expense extra expense required

Replaceability yes5) if the same make

Short-circuit protection

Line very good good

Motor very good good

Overload protection

Line sufficient good

Motor not possible good

1) Type of construction may be: arcquenching method, short-circuitstrength owing to specific resistance,constructive design

2) For example, by means of shock-hazard protected fuse-switch-discon-

nectors with high-speed closing 3) By means of fuse monitoring and

dedicated circuit-breaker4) By means of fuse monitoring5) Standardized

extra expenserequired2)

(no. of switching operationsand condition)



22/33

Power System

Equipment Protective devices with fuses

to be protected

and switching

frequency Fuse

Circuit-breaker

Contactor

Overload protection

Thermistor-

motor protection

Overload protection

– Line ++ ++ + + ++ ++

– Motors (with thermally critical stators) ++1) ++ ++ ++ ++ ++

– Motors (with thermally critical rotors) ++1) ++ + + ++ ++


– Line ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++

– Motor ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++

Switching frequency – ++ – ++ – ++

Equipment to be Protective devices without fuses

protected and

switching

frequency –

Circuit-breaker

Contactor

Overload protection

Thermistor-/

SIMOCODE

motor protection

Overload protection

– Line ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ +

– Motors (with thermally critical stators) ++1) ++ ++ ++ ++1) ++

– Motors (with thermally critical rotors) ++1) ++ ++ ++ ++1) ++


– Line ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++

– Motor ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++

Switching frequency + + + + – –

1) Protection with little restriction in case of phase failure

++ Very good + Good – Poor

Table 2.4/9: Comparison between the protective characteristics of different switchgear assemblies (schematic circuit diagrams)

M3~

M3~

M

+

M

+

M

+

M

+

M3~

M3~

M

+

M

+

M3~

M

+ϑ


assemblies comprising fuse andcircuit-breaker, which provide motorprotection, as well as fuses, contactor,and overload relay protect the motorfeeder cable and the motor against

overloads and short circuits.

Circuits without fuses (circuit-breaker protected design)In the case of distribution boards

without fuses (Table 2.4/11), short-circuit protection is provided bycircuit-breakers for system protection.In the case of load circuit-breakers,short-circuit protection is provided by

Type of Version Rated short- Type of release or relay Fuse Tripping

circuit- circuit L S I curve

breaker breaking Ad- Fixed Ad- Fixed Ad-

capacity just- setting just- setting just- Icn Adjustable

Icn able able able > 100 kA release

Feeder circuit-breaker

1 Circuit-breaker 3WL ≥ Ik1 × – × – × –

for system

protection

with

selectivity

requirement

Distribution circuit-breaker

2 Fuse for 3NA ≥ Ik2 – – – – – ×system

protection

Load circuit-breaker

3 Fuse and 3NA ≥ Ik3 – – – – – ×circuit- 3RV1 ≤ Ik3 × – – × – –

breaker for

motor

protection

4 Fuse and 3NA ≥ Ik3 – – – – – ×direct-on- 3RB × – – – – –

line starter 3RT – – – – – –

for motor

protection

5 Fuse for 3NA ≥ Ik3 – – – – – ×power

consumer

M3~

M3~

3

4

1

k1

k2 k2

2

k3 k3

k3

V

5

k2

t

k1

cn

t

k2

cn

t

k3

cn

t

k3

cn

t

k3

cn

↔

↔

Table 2.4/10: Distribution boards combining fuses and circuit-breakers

No.

22/35

Power System

circuit-breakers for motor protectiononly or for starter assemblies togetherwith the contactor. The protectionranges of the switchgear assembliescomprising circuit-breaker, contactor

and overload relay have already beendealt with in this chapter. Furthertechnical data can be found in theliterature supplied by the manufac-turer.

Type of Version Rated short- Type of release or relay Tripping

circuit- circuit L S I characteristic

breaker breaking Ad- Fixed Ad- Fixed Ad-

capacity just- set- just- set- just- Adjustable

Icn able ting able ting able release

Feeder circuit-breaker

1 Circuit-breaker 3WL ≥ Ik1 × – × – ×for system

protection

without

selectivity

requirement

Distribution circuit-breaker

2* Circuit-breakers 3VL ≥ Ik2 – × – × –

for system × – – × –

protection × – – – ×without

selectivity

requirement

3 Circuit-breaker 3WL ≥ Ik2 × – × – ×for system 3VL

protection

with

selectivity

requirement

Load circuit-breaker

4 Circuit- 3RV1 ≥ Ik3 × – – × –

breaker

for motor

protection

5 Circuit-breaker 3RA ≥ Ik3 × – – × −and direct-on-

line starter for

motor

protection

M3~

M3~

45

1

k1

k2

3

k3 k3

k2

2

t

k1

cn

t

k2

cn

t

k2

cn

t

k3

cn

t

k3

cn

↔

Table 2.4/11: Power distribution using circuit-breaker without fuses

↔

* 3 Varianten möglich,Variante 3 bildlich dargestellt

No.


2.4.4 Miniature Circuit-Breakers (MCBs)

Task

Miniature circuit-breakers (MCBs) aremainly designed for the protection ofcables and lines against overload andshort circuit, thus ensuring the pro-tection of electrical equipment againstexcessively high heating in compli-ance with the relevant standards, e.g.IEC 60364-4-43 / DIN VDE 0100-430.

Under certain conditions, MCBs in aTN system also provide protectionagainst electrical stroke at excessivelyhigh contact voltage due to wronginsulation, e.g. according toIEC 364-4-41 / DIN VDE 0100-410.

Use

Miniature circuit-breakers are used inall distribution networks, both forcommercial buildings and industrialbuildings. Due to a wide range ofversions and accessories (e.g. auxil-iary contacts, fault signal contacts,open-circuit shunt releases), they areable to meet the various requirementsof the most diverse areas of applica-tion.

Tripping characteristics

Four tripping characteristics A, B, Cand D are available for any kind ofapplication; they correspond to theequipment being connected in thecircuit to be protected.

� Tripping characteristic A is particu-larly suitable for the protection oftransducers in measuring circuits,for electronically controlled circuitsand where disconnection within 0.4 s is required in accordance with IEC 60364-4-41/ DIN VDE 0100-410.

� Tripping characteristic B is thestandard characteristic for wall-outlet circuits in residential and

commercial buildings.� Tripping characteristic C is advanta-

geous wherever equipment withhigher inrush currents, e.g. lumi-naires and motors, is used.

� Tripping characteristic D is adaptedto highly pulse-generating equip-ment, such as transformers, sole-noid valves or capacitors.

Operating method

Miniature circuit-breakers are protec-tive switches for manual operation,including overcurrent remote tripping(via thermal overcurrent instanta-neous release). Multi-pole devices arecoupled mechanically at the outsidevia handles and simultaneously insidevia their releases.

b ≤ n≤ z

b

2 ≤ 1.45· z

z

n 2 1.45· z

21

3

3

4 5

t Time

1st condition 2st condition

Fig. 2.4/11: Schematic reference value diagram of lines and their protective device

Ib Operating current to beexpected, i.e. current drawnby the power consumerunder normal operatingconditions

Iz Permissible continuous loadcurrent for a conductor,when the maximumcontinuously appliedtemperature of theinsulation is not exceeded

1.45·Iz Maximum permissibleoverload current of limitedduration, at which a sudden,temporary exceeding of themaximum continuouslyapplied temperature has notyet resulted in a safety-relevant reduction ofinsulation properties

In Rated current, i.e. thecurrent the miniature circuit-breaker has been laid out forand other rating parametersrefer to (setting value)

I1 Conventional non-trippingcurrent, i.e. the currentwhich does not result indisconnection under definedconditions

I2 Conventional trippingcurrent, i.e. the currentwhich is broken underdefined conditions (In ≤ 63 A) within one hour

I3 Tolerance margins

I4 Withstand current of theinstantaneous electro-magnetic overcurrentrelease (short-circuitrelease)

I5 Tripping current of theinstantaneous electromag-netic overcurrent release(short-circuit release)

22/37

Power System

Standards

The international basic standard is IEC 60898. The German nationalstandard DIN VDE 0641-11 isbased upon it. Device sizes aredescribed in DIN 43880. For theprotection against personal injury, the relevant standards, e.g. concern-ing fault clearing requirements incompliance with IEC 60364-4-41 /DIN VDE 0100-410 have to be met.

Versions

MCBs are available in many differentversions: 1-pole, 2-pole, 3-pole, 4-pole and with connected neutral 1-pole+N and 3-pole+N. Correspondingto the preferred series according toIEC 60898 and DIN 43880, MCBs are allocated the following ratedcurrents:

� Devices with 55 mm in depth 0.3 A to 63 A

� Devices with 70 mm depth 0.3 A to 125 A

Depending on the device type, anauxiliary switch (AS), fault-signalcontact (FC), open-circuit shuntrelease (ST), undervoltage release(UR) or residual-current-operatedcircuit-breaker (RCCB module) can beretrofitted.

By fitting an RCCB module to an MCB,an RCBO assembly is created. As acomplete system, it can be used forline protection as well as for protec-tion against electrically ignited firesand personal injury in the event ofdirect or indirect contact voltages.

Auxiliary switches (AS) signal theswitching state of the MCB and indi-cate whether it has been switched offmanually or automatically. Fault-signal contacts (FC) indicate trippingof the MCB due to overload or short

circuit. Open-circuit shunt releases(ST) are suitable for remote switchingof MCBs. Undervoltage releases (UR)protect devices connected in thecircuit against impacts of insufficientlylow supply voltage.

By connecting the AS and the FC to aninstabus KNX/EIB binary input, thesignals may also be read into aninstabus KNX/EIBEIB system (e.g.GAMMA instabus). When using aninstabus KNX/EIB binary output, theMCB which is tripped via the open-circuit shunt release (AA) can also beremotely tripped via instabusKNX/EIB.

Depending on the device type, minia-ture circuit-breakers by Siemens havethe following features:

� Excellent current-limiting andselectivity characteristics

� Identical terminals on both sides foroptional feeding from the top orbottom

� Installation and dismantling withoutthe use of tools

� Rapid and easy removal from thesystem

� Terminals safe-to-touch by fingersor the back of the hand according toVDE 0106-100

� Combined terminals for simultane-ous connection of busbars andfeeder cables

� Main switch characteristics according to IEC 60204 / VDE 0113

� Separate switch position indicator

Alternating-current type MCBs aresuitable for all AC and three-phasenetworks up to a voltage of 240/415 V and all DC networks up to 60 V (1-pole) and 120 V (2-pole).

The MCB voltage rating is 230/400 VAC. AC/DC-current type MCBs may alsobe used for 220 V DC (1-pole) and440 V DC (2-pole).

In order to avoid damaging of theconductor insulation in case of faults,temperatures must not rise abovecertain values. For PVC insulation,these values are 70 °C permanently or160 °C for a maximum of 5 s (shortcircuit).

For line-overcurrent protection, theMCBs usually have two independentreleases. In the event of overload, abimetal contact opens inverse-time-delayed corresponding to the currentvalue. If a certain threshold isexceeded in the event of a shortcircuit, however, an electro-magneticovercurrent release instantaneouslytrips without delay. The tripping range(time-current threshold zone) of theMCB according IEC 60898 / DIN VDE0641-11 is defined via parameters I1to I5 (Fig. 2.4/12). The line parametersIb and Iz (see Fig. 2.4/11) are relatedto it.

When the IEC 60898 was published,new characteristics B, C and D weredefined internationally. They werealso adopted in DIN VDE 0641-11.

The new tripping requirementsof MCBs facilitate their assignmentto conductor cross sections.In the relevant standards, e.g.IEC 60364-4-43 / DIN/VDE 0100-430,the following conditions are listed:

Rated current rule Ib ≤ In ≤ Iz

Tripping current rule I2 ≤ 1.45 x Iz

As the second condition is automati-cally fulfilled with the new character-istic curves due the fact that thesecurves have been defined (Iz = In),the MCB merely needs to be selectedaccording to the simplified criterion In ≤ Iz

Resulting from this, a new allocationof rated currents for MCBs and con-


ductor cross sections can be given(see Table 2.4/12), related to anambient temperature of +30 °C, as itis considered appropriate according toIEC 60364-4-43 / DIN VDE 0100-430,and in relation to the type of installa-tion and accumulation of equipment.

Siemens MCBs are available with thetripping characteristics B, C and D,bearing, among other things, the VDEmark based upon the CCA procedure(CENELEC Certification Agreement).

Figure 2.4/12 represents all trippingcharacteristics. Due to the position ofthe tripping bands, the followingfeatures vary in intensity with a risingdegree from curve A to D:

� Current pulse withstand strength,rising

� Permissible line and cable length forthe protection of persons, decreas-ing

Temperature impact

The tripping characteristics are stan-dard defined at an ambient tempera-ture of +30 °C. At higher tempera-tures, the thermal tripping curve inFig. 2.4/12 shifts to the left, and tothe right at lower temperatures. This

Rated cross Rated MCB current In for Iz (line)section qn protection of Permissible continuous load current if

2 conductors under load 3 conductors under load 2 conductors under load 3 conductors under loadmm2 A A A A

1.5 16 16 19.5 17.52.5 25 20 27 244 32 32 36 326 40 40 46 41

10 63 50 63 5716 80 63 85 7625 100 80 112 9635 125 100 138 119

Table 2.4/12: MCB and conductor cross section matrix Example: flat-webbed cable, stranded cable, on or in the wall, installation type C*), at +30 ºC ambient temperature

* Installation type C in compliance with IEC 60364-5-52 / DIN VDE 0298-4: cables are fixed in such a way that the spacing between them and thewall surface is less than 0.3 times the outer cable diameter.

1 2 3 4 6 8 10 20 30 40 60 80 1000.01

0.1

0.4

1

5

10

1

10

1)60

300

1

A B C D

A B C D1)2

3

3

4 4 44

5 5 5 5

2 x n

1.45 x n

1.13 x n

1.45 x n 1.45 x n 1.45 x n

1.13 x n 1.13 x n 1.13 x n

x Rated current n

Min

utes

Sec

onds

Tim

e t

Meets the requirements of IEC 60364-4-41/ DIN VDE 0100-410

Disconnection condition acc. toIEC 60364-4-41/ DIN VDE 0100-410

MCBTripping characteristics B, C, D acc. toIEC 60898 / DIN VDE 0641-11

1 (t > 1h)

2 (t < 1h)

4 (t > 0,1s)

5 (t < 0,1s) 3 x n

3 x n

5 x n

5 x n

10 x n

10 x n

20 x n

Fig. 2.4/12: Time-current limit ranges of MCBs

22/39

Power System

means that tripping becomes effectiveeven with lower currents present(higher temperatures) or only withhigher currents (lower temperatures).

This has to be taken into account inparticular for an installation in hotrooms, in encapsulated distributionboards where, owing to the current-induced heat losses of the built-indevices, higher temperatures mayprevail and for distribution boardsinstalled outdoors. MCBs can be usedat temperatures ranging from –25 °Cto +55 °C. The relative humidity maybe 95%.

Resistance to climate

Miniature circuit-breakers by Siemensare resistant to climate in compliancewith IEC 68-2-30. They were success-fully tested in six climatic cycles.

Degree of protection

As MCBs are mainly installed in distri-bution boards, their degree of protec-tion must meet the requirements ofthe respective type of room. MCBswithout an encapsulation can reachIP30 according to IEC 60529 / DIN VDE0470-1 provided that they haveadequate terminal covers.

All MCBs are equipped with a snap-onfixing for rapid fitting on 35-mm widestandard mounting rails according toDIN EN 50022. Some versions mayadditionally be screwed on mountingplates.

Installation

Moreover, some type series are avail-able with a rapid wiring system formanual handling without the use oftools, which even enables the removalof individual MCBs from the busbarsystem.

Rated switching capacity

Besides a reliable adherence to char-acteristic curves, an important per-formance feature of MCBs is theirrated short-circuit breaking capacity.It is divided into short-circuit breakingcapacity classes and indicates up towhich level short-circuit currents canbe broken according to IEC 60898/DIN VDE 0641-11 (Table 2.4/13).Depending on their design, MCBs bySiemens have short-circuit breakingcapacity ratings up to 25,000 A andVDE approval.

Current-limiting classes

As a selectivity indicator with regardto upstream fuses, miniature circuit-

breakers with characteristic B and Cup to 40 A are divided in to threecurrent-limiting classes according totheir current-limiting capability.

For permissible let-through I2t values,please refer to the standardsIEC 60898 / DIN VDE 0641-11.

For reasons of selectivity, only Class 3MCBs with a rated switching capacityof at least 6,000 A may be used indistribution boards connected down-stream of the meter for residentialand commercial buildings in compli-ance with the Technical Supply Condi-tions of German supply networkoperators.

Devices must be labeled:

Selectivity

Selectivity means that only that pro-tective device will trip in the event ofa fault which is closest to the faultlocation in the course of the currentpath. This way the energy flow can bemaintained in circuits which areconnected in parallel. In the diagramin Fig. 2.4/13, the current curve in adisconnection process is shownschematically with regard to current-limiting classes. Siemens MCBs of typeB16 reduce the energy flow to muchlower values than defined for current-limiting class 3.

Figure 2.4/13 shows the selectivitylimits of MCBs with different current-limiting classes as the intersection ofthe MCB tripping curve with themelting curve of the fuse. The highlyeffective current limitation of the MCBalso affects the high current discrimi-nation towards the upstream fuse.

Curve B16 relates to 16 A Siemensbreakers, tripping characteristic B.

Standards Rated switching capacity classes

IEC 60898 / 1,500 ADIN VDE 0641-11 3,000 A

4,500 A

6,000 A10,000 A15,000 A

20,000 A25,000 A

Table 2.4/13: Rated switching capacity classes of MCBs


Back-up protection

If the short-circuit current at the pointwhere the MCB is installed exceeds itsrated switching capacity, anothershort-circuit protecting device has tobe connected upstream. Withoutaffecting the operability of thebreaker in such cases, the switchingcapacity of such an assembly will beincreased up to 50 kA.

In some countries, circuit-breakers ratherthan LV HRC fuses are connectedupstream instead, which – dependingon the type – reduces the combinedswitching capacity considerably.

Although circuit-breakers have a highinherent rated breaking capacity, they

do not switch sufficiently current-limiting in the range of the MCBswitching capacity limit (6 kA / 10 kA),so that they cannot provide muchsupport. Therefore, miniature circuit-breakers with a rated current of 6 A to32 A are only protected by anupstream circuit-breaker up to thedefined rated switching capacity ofthe MCB (back-up protection).

ik i

[A]

100 5

[ms]

eff

B 163 2 1

t

321

B 16

2 2

10 -1 1063 0 1063 1

[kA]k

10 3

10 4

[A2

s]2 t

Transformer

Fuse

MCB

Sine half-wave

Permissible t value of calbe 1,5 mm

DIAZED 50 A

Fig. 2.4/13: Selectivity of MCBs with current limiting classes as described and towards back-up fuses Curve B16 applies to 16 A Siemens breakers, trippingcharacteristic B.

1 2 3

For further product information on MCBs pleaserefer to the ET B1 Catalog”BETA Low-Voltage Control Systems”, Order no. E86060-K8220-A101-A8

22/41

Power System

2.5 Selectivity inLow-VoltageSystemsProof of selectivity is required in IEC60364-7-710 and DIN VDE 100-710and -718.

Full selectivity is achieved with twoseries-connected protective devices if,when a fault occurs after the down-stream protection device, only thedownstream device disconnects fromsupply.

A distinction is made between twotypes of selectivity:

� Partial selectivity acc. to IEC 60947-2,VDE 660-101: Overcurrent discrimi-nation of two series-connectedovercurrent protection devices,where the load-side protectivedevice takes over the full protectiontask up to a defined overcurrentlevel without the other protectivedevice being active.

� Full selectivity acc. to IEC 60947-2,VDE 660-101: Overcurrent discrimi-nation of two series-connectedovercurrent protection devices,where the load-side protectivedevice takes over the full protectiontask without the other protectivedevice being active.

Selectivity types� Selective current breaking capacity

by grading the instantaneous short-circuit releases of Ii circuit-breakerswith Ii characteristic.

� Time selectivity: Grading of the configurable trippingtimes (tsd in the S-part) of the short-circuit releases. This applies tostandard as well as to optionalcharacteristic curves. Circuit-breakerwith LSI characteristics: it is oftenrequired in main distribution boardsand at transfer points using devicesof different manufacturers.

� Dynamic/energy selectivitySelectivity based on the evaluation ofthe let-through energy of thedownstream devices and the trippingenergy of the upstream protectivedevice.

Determining the selectivity type

According to IEC 60947-2, AppendixA, and VDE 660-101, the determina-tion or verification of the desired typeof selectivity is divided in two timeranges.

Time range ≥ 100 ms:

The time range above 100 ms can beanalyzed by a comparison of charac-teristic curves in the L- or S-range,taking the tolerances, required protec-tive settings, curve representation inidentical scales etc. into account.

Time range < 100 ms:

The standard requires selectivity inthis time range to be verified bytesting. Due to the fact that the timeand cost expense involved are veryhigh, when different devices are usedin the power distribution system,selectivity limits can often beobtained from renowned equipmentmanufacturers only. In practice, let-through currents are therefore oftencompared to the operating or pickupcurrents or, the let-through currentsof the protective devices are com-pared to each other. The prerequisitebeing that the relevant data is avail-able from the equipment manufac-turer and that it is analyzed thor-oughly.

Comparing characteristic curvesThree diagram types can be used forcomparing characteristic curves:

� Time-current diagram� Let-through current diagram� Let-through energy diagram

Since these characteristic curves arecompared over several orders ofmagnitude, they are usually plottedon log-log paper.All characteristic curves must – if not already specified by the manufac-turer – be assigned a tolerance bandto enable selectivity to be determinedreliably. In the case of switchgear, IEC60 947–2 / DIN VDE 0660–101 specifya tolerance of ± 20% for the instanta-neous overcurrent release. The oper-ating times, which are sometimesconsiderably shorter at normal operat-ing temperatures, must be taken intoconsideration for electromechanicaloverload releases.

Determination of the selectivitylimitAs a rule, all selectivity limits betweentwo protective devices can be deter-mined by carrying out measurementsor tests. These measurements arevirtually indispensable, particularlywhen assessing selectivity in theevent of a short circuit, owing to theextremely rapid switching operationswhen current-limiting protectionequipment is used.

The measurements can, however, bevery costly and complicated, which iswhy many manufacturers publishselectivity tables for their switchgear.

The SIMARIS design software auto-matically takes all these criteria intoaccount and selects suitable Siemensproducts.


2.5.1 Selectivity in RadialSystems

Selectivity between series-connected fuses

The feeding line and the outgoingcircuits branching from the busbar ofa distribution board carry differentoperating currents and, therefore,also have different cross sections.Consequently, they are usually pro-tected by fuses with different ratedcurrents, which ensure selectivity onaccount of their different operatingbehaviors.

Selectivity between series-connected fuses with identicalutilization categories

When fuses of the same utilizationcategory (e.g. gL or gG) are used,selectivity is ensured across the entireovercurrent range up to the ratedswitching capacity (absolute selectiv-ity) if the rated currents differ by afactor of 1.6 or higher (Fig. 2.5/1).The Joulean heat values (I2t values)should be compared in case of highshort-circuit currents. In the exampleshown, a 160 A LV HRC fuse wouldalso have absolute selectivity withrespect to a 100 A LV HRC fuse.

Selectivity between series-connected circuit-breakers

Selectivity can be achieved by gradingthe operating currents of instanta-neous overcurrent releases(I-releases) (Fig. 2.5/2). Prerequisitesfor this are:

� Current grading with differentshort-circuit currents

The short-circuit currents in the eventof a short circuit at the respectivelocations of the circuit-breakers aresufficiently different.

� Current grading with differentlyconfigured I-releases

The rated currents and, therefore, theI-release values of the upstream anddownstream circuit-breakers differaccordingly.

� 5-second breaking and line-protec-tion conditions

In compliance with the 5-secondbreaking condition specified in IEC60364-4-41 / DIN VDE 0100-410 orthe 5-second line-protection conditionspecified in IEC 60364-4-43 / DIN VDE0100-430 (if line protection cannot beprovided in any other way), theI-release must generally be set to4,000 A so that even very small shortcircuits are cleared at the input termi-nals of the downstream circuit-breaker Q1 within the specified time.

Only partial selectivity can be estab-lished by comparing characteristiccurves for current grading, since thecurve in the range < 100 ms – which

is frequently, and quite rightly repre-sented by broken lines – does notpermit any conclusions with regard toselectivity owing to the complicateddynamic switching and trippingoperations.

Selectivity through circuit-breakercoordination(dynamic selectivity)With high-speed operations, e.g. inthe event of a short circuit, and theinteraction of series-connected pro-tection devices, the dynamicprocesses in the circuit and in theelectromechanical releases have aconsiderable effect on selectivitybehavior, particularly if current lim-iters are used.

Selectivity is also achieved if thedownstream current-limiting protec-tion device trips so quickly that,although the let-through current doesmomentarily exceed the operatingvalue of the upstream protectiondevice, the ”mechanically slow”

1.37 s

ts

200 A(160)

k =1,300 A

50 A 50 A 100 A

101 10 2 10 3 10 4

1.3[A]

100 ASize 00 Size 1

200 A

[s]

1,4

0,03

K1

k

k = 1,300 A

b) Prearcing times at = 1,300 Aa) Selective disconnection of short-circuit fault location K1

Fig. 2.5/1: Selectivity between series-connected LV HRC fuses with identical utilization categories (example)

22/43

Power System

release does not have time to trigger.The let-through current depends onthe maximum asymmetrical short-circuit current and current limitingcharacteristics.

Selectivity limits of two series-connected circuit-breakersA maximum short-circuit value – theselectivity limit – up to which thedownstream circuit-breaker can openmore quickly and alone, i.e. selec-tively, can be determined for eachswitchgear assembly.

The selectivity limit may be well abovethe operating value of the instantaneousovercurrent release in the upstreamcircuit-breaker (see Fig. 2.5/3).

Irrespective of this, it is important toverify selectivity in the event of anoverload by comparing the character-istic curves and by checking thattripping times are in accordance withthe relevant regulations.

Generally speaking, dynamic selectiv-ity in a short circuit only providespartial selectivity. This may be suffi-cient (full selectivity) if the prospec-tive maximum short-circuit current atthe downstream protective device islower than the established selectivitylimit.

With partial selectivity, which usuallyarises with current grading owing to the fault clearing condition (see Fig. 2.5/2), a consideration of

dynamic selectivity provides a goodpossibility for verifying full selectivitywithout having to use switchgear with short-time-delay overcurrentreleases.

Selectivity by means of short-time-delay overcurrent releases (time grading)

If current grading is not possible andcannot be achieved by selecting theswitchgear in accordance with selec-tivity tables (dynamic selectivity),selectivity can be provided by time-grading short-time-delay overcurrentreleases. This requires grading of boththe tripping delays and the appropri-ate operating currents.

54

10 2 2 5 10 3 2 5 10 4 2 5

10-2

10-1

10 0

10 1

10 2

10 3

10 4

1022

1

0

10

10

min.

M3~

Q2

5.0 kAQ1

II

I

L

t

L

2.1 kA

I II

b) Tripping curves

L Definite-time delayed overload release

I Instantaneous electromagnetic overcurrent release

a) Block diagram

Q1 Circuit-breaker for motor protection (current-limiting)

Q2 Circuit-breaker (zero-current interrupter)

ukr = 4% r = 577 A k = 15 kA

= 10 kAk

e = 600 A (L-release) e = 4,000 A (I-release)

e = 60 A (L-release) e = 720 A (I-release)

Sr = 400 kVA at 400 V, 50 Hz

[s]Opening time

Current [A]

Fig. 2.5/2: Current selectivity for two series-connected circuit-breakers at different short-circuit current levels (example)


Time grading with virtuallyidentical short-circuit currentsThe upstream circuit-breaker isequipped with short-time-delay over-current releases (S) so that, if a faultoccurs, only the downstream circuit-breaker disconnects the affected partof the installation from the system.Time grading can be implemented tosafeguard selectivity if the prospectiveshort-circuit currents are almost identi-cal. This requires grading of both thetripping delays and the operatingcurrents of the overcurrent releases.

In addition to the diagram with thefour series-connected circuit-breakers,Fig. 2.5/3 also contains the associatedgrading diagram. The necessarygrading time, which allows for alltolerances, depends on the operatingprinciple of the release and the typeof circuit-breaker.

Electronic S-releasesWith electronic short-time-delay over-current releases (S-releases), a gradingtime of approximately 70 ms to 100 msfrom circuit-breaker to circuit-breakeris sufficient to allow for all tolerances.

Operating currentThe operating current of the short-time-delay overcurrent release shouldbe set to at least 1.45 times (twice per20% tolerance, unless other values arespecified by the manufacturer) thevalue of the downstream circuit-breaker.

Additional I-releasesIn order to reduce the short-circuitstress in the event of a “dead” shortcircuit at the upstream circuit-break-ers, they can be fitted with instanta-neous electromagnetic overcurrentreleases in addition to the short-timedelay releases (Fig. 2.5/4). The valueselected for the operating current ofthe instantaneous electromagneticovercurrent releases must be highenough to ensure that the releasesonly operate in case of direct ”dead”short circuits and, under normaloperating conditions, do not interferewith selective grading.

Zone-selective interlocking (ZSI)A microprocessor-controlled short-time grading control, also called“zone-selective interlocking”, has beendeveloped for circuit-breakers toprevent excessively long trippingtimes when several circuit-breakersare connected in series. This controlfunction allows the tripping delay tobe reduced to 50 ms (maximum) forthe circuit-breakers located upstreamof the short circuit.

The method of operation regardingzone-selective interlocking is illus-trated in Fig. 2.5/5. A short circuit atK1 is detected by Q1, Q3, and Q5. IfZSI is active, Q3 is temporarily dis-abled by Q1 and Q5 by Q3 by means

of appropriate communication lines.Since Q1 does not receive any dis-abling signal, it trips after 10 ms.A short circuit at K2 is only detectedby Q5; since it does not receive anydisabling signal, it trips after 50 ms.Without “ZSI”, tripping would onlyoccur after 150 ms.

Selectivity between circuit-breakerand fuse

When considering selectivity in con-junction with fuses, a permissibletolerance of ± 10% in the direction ofcurrent flow must be allowed for inthe time-current characteristics.

Circuit-breaker with downstreamfuse

Selectivity between LI-releases andfuses with very low rated currentsIn the overload range up to the oper-ating current Ii of the instantaneousovercurrent release, partial selectivityis achieved if the upper toleranceband of the characteristic fuse curvedoes not touch the tripping curve ofthe fully preloaded, thermally delayedovercurrent release (L). A reduction inthe tripping time of up to 25% mustbe allowed for at normal operatingtemperatures (unless the manufac-turer states otherwise).

Full selectivity for circuit-breakerswithout short-time-delay overcurrentreleases is achieved if the let-throughcurrent of the fuse ID does not reachthe operating current of the instanta-neous overcurrent release.* This is,however, only to be expected for afuse, the rated current of which isvery low compared with the ratedcontinuous current of a circuit-breaker.

M

Circuit-breaker

Power system Delay time

of S-releasetv

300 ms

200 ms

100 ms

instantaneous

3WL1

3WL13VL

3VL

3VL3RV

Fig. 2.5/3: Required delay time settings forelectromagnetic short-time-delayreleases for selective short-circuitprotection

* See the current-limiting diagram for LV HRC fuses inSeip, Günther G. (Ed.): Electrical InstallationsHandbook, 4th edition, Erlangen, 2000,Section 4.1.1.

22/45

Power System

Q3 Q5

10 4 10 510 310 2

10 -2

10 -1

10 0

10 1

10 2

10 3

10 4

Q5

K2

Q3 Q4

Q1 Q2

K1

AE

AE

AE

AE

AE

tsd = 100 ms

tzss = 50 ms

tzss = 50 ms

tsd = 10 mstzss = tsd

tsd = 10 mstzss = tsd

tzss

tsd = 100 ms

cn

tsd = 100 ms

tsd = 10 ms

Q1/Q2/Q4

Opening time t

communication lineCurrent [A]

[s]

10 2 2 5 10 3 2 5 10 4 2 510 -2

10 -1

10 0

10 1

10 2

10 3

10 4

L

Q2Q1

10 5

~

LL

Q3

M

Q1

Q3

Q2

tsd2 = 100 ms

tsd3 = 200 ms

S S

Sn = 1000 kVA at 400 V, 50 Hz

ukr = 6% n = 1,445 A k = 24.1 kA

Main distribution board

subdistribution board

= 200 ms i (20 kA)

= 100 mstsd2

tsd3

k = 17 kA

k = 10 kA

[s]

Current [A]

Opening time t

Fig. 2.5/4: Selectivity between three series-connected circuit-breakers with limitation of short-circuit stress by means of an additional I-release in circuit-breaker Q3

Fig. 2.5/5: Zone-selective interlocking (ZSI) of series- or parallel-connected circuit-breakers (block diagram)


Selectivity between LS-releases and fuses with relatively high ratedcurrentsDue to the dynamic processes thattake place in electromagneticreleases, absolute selectivity can alsobe achieved with fuses, whose ID

briefly exceeds the operating current.Once again, selectivity can only beverified by means of appropriatemeasurements of I. Absolute selectiv-ity can be achieved by using circuit-breakers with short-time-delay over-current releases (S-releases) if the

characteristic curves – includingsafety margins – do not touch. Inpractice, a safety margin of 100 msbetween the reference curves isusually sufficient (Fig. 2.5/7).

Selectivity between fuse anddownstream circuit-breaker

Selectivity ratios in the overloadrangeIn order to achieve selectivity in theoverload range, a safety margin oftA ≥ 1 s is required between the lowertolerance band of the fuse and the

characteristic curve of the inverse-time-delay overload release(Fig. 2.5/8).

In the case of short-circuits, it isimportant to remember that, after thereleases in the circuit-breaker havetripped, the fuse continues to beheated during the arcing time. Theselectivity limit lies approximately atthe point where a safety margin of70 ms between the lower toleranceband of the fuse and the operatingtime of the instantaneous overcurrentrelease or the delay time of the short-time-delay overcurrent release isundershot.

Selectivity ratios in the short-circuitrange A reliable and usually relatively highselectivity limit for the short-circuitrange can be determined in the I2tdiagram. In this diagram, the maxi-mum let-through I2t value of thecircuit-breaker is compared with theminimum prearcing I2t value of thefuse (Fig. 2.5/9). Since these valuesare maximum and minimum values,tolerances are obsolete.

Selectivity with parallel supply

Improving selectivity with parallelfeeding systemsWhen feeding in parallel to a busbar,the total short-circuit current Ik ∑ thatoccurs in the faulted outgoing circuitcomprises the partial short-circuitcurrents Ik Part in the individual feedinglines and represents the base currentin the grading diagram (Fig. 2.5/10).This is the case for all fault types.

Two identical feeding systems

If a short circuit occurs in the outgo-ing circuit downstream of the circuit-breaker Q1, the total short-circuitcurrent Ik ∑ of ≤ 20 kA, for example,flows through this circuit, while the

t

i

F1

F1

Q1L

Q1

L

I

F1 Fuse

Q1 Circuit-breaker

L Definite-time delayed overload release

I Instantaneous electromagnetic overcurrent release

Operating current of I-release

The time-current curves (tolerance bands) do not touch

i

Overcurrent limit

t

F1S

F1

Q1LS

Q1

ts sdt

L

k

sd

tA > 100 ms

Definite-time delayed overload release

Short-time-delayed overcurrent release

Safety margin

Operating current of S-release

Prearcing time of fuse

Delay time of S-release

L

S

tA

t

t

s

sd

sd

Fig. 2.5/6: Selectivity between circuit-breaker and downstream fuse in overload range

Fig. 2.5/7: Selectivity between circuit-breaker with LS-releases and downstream fuse; short-circuitcurrent range

22/47

Power System

feeder circuit-breakers Q2 and Q3,with the outgoing circuit connectedcentrally to the busbars and feedinglines of equal length, each carry onlyhalf this current, i.e. ≤ 10 kA.

Additional current selectivity withparallel transformer operation

In the grading diagram, the trippingcharacteristic of circuit-breakers Q2and Q3 must, therefore, be consid-ered in relation to the base current ofthe circuit-breaker Q1.

Since the total short-circuit current isideally distributed equally among thetwo feeding lines (ignoring the loadcurrents in the other outgoing cir-cuits) with the outgoing circuitlocated at the center of the busbars,the tripping curve of circuit-breakersQ2 and Q3 can be shifted optimally tothe right along the current scale by acharacteristic displacement factor of 2up to the line Ik ∑, which representsthe base current for this fault condi-tion. The result of this is selectivityboth with regard to time and current.

If the characteristic curve of theindividual circuit-breaker is used

tF1

F1

Q1L

Q1

L t A ≥ 1 s

F1

Q1

L

I

tA

i

II

Overload limit

Fuse

Circuit-breaker

Definite-time delayed overload releaseInstantaneous electromagnetic overcurrent release

Safety margin

Operating current of I-release

The time-current curves (tolerance bands) do not touch

2 tF1

F1

Q1

k

Q1

Q1

F1

Sel

Sel

Miniature circuit-breaker

Circuit-breaker (max. let-through value)

Fuse (min. prearcing value)

Selectivity limit

Selectivity limit

10 2410 2 4 2 46 10 2 4

63

102

10-1

10 0

101

10 2

10 3

10 4t

[s]

L

Q2Q1

Q2

Q1

M~

LL

S

LSI

Q3 LSI

T1 T2

LI

3

Q2+Q3

i

k

k < 10 kA

kTeil

r = 200 Ai = 2,400 A

r = 600 Asd = 3,000 Ai = 12,000 Ak < 10 kA

k

kTeil

[A]

(> 70 ms)tsd = 100 ms

Equal output

Parallel

Basis

Separate

Fig. 2.5/8: Selectivity between fuse and downstream circuit-breaker; overload range

Fig. 2.5/9: Selectivity between fuse and downstream circuit-breaker; short circuit

Fig. 2.5/10: Selectivity with two feeding transformers of the same rating and operating simultaneously.Example with outgoing circuit in the center of the busbar


instead of the shifted characteristic,the exact short-circuit current (distri-bution) which flows through thecircuit-breaker must be taken intoconsideration.

With asymmetrical configurations andwith incoming (feeding) and outgoingcircuits located in the busbars, short-circuit current distribution will differaccording to the impedance along thefeeding lines.

This is particularly significant in theevent of fused branch circuits withhigh current ratings, e.g. 630 A to1,000 A. It is important to ensure thata safety margin of ≥ 100 ms betweenthe tripping characteristic of theS-release and the prearcing-time/current characteristic of the LV HRCfuse is provided not only with paralleloperation, but also with individualtransformer operation.

When setting the releases of circuit-breakers Q1, Q2 and Q3, it must beensured that selectivity is alsoachieved for operation with onetransformer and for all short-circuitcurrents (single- to three-phase).

For cost-related reasons, S-releasesfor the feeder circuit-breakers mustalso be provided for low and mediumrated fuse currents as the resultingcurrent selectivity of I-releases isinsufficient.

Three identical feeding systems

With parallel operation of three trans-formers, the selectivity ratios will,owing to the additional current selec-tivity, be more favorable than withtwo units since the characteristicdisplacement factor is > 2 and < 3.Once again, LS-releases are requiredfor the circuit-breakers in the feedinglines in order to achieve unambiguousselectivity ratios.

Furthermore, it is necessary to provideadditional I-releases to allow a faultbetween the transformer and feedercircuit-breaker to be detected, asshown in Fig. 2.5/11. For this pur-pose, the S-releases of circuit-breakersQ1 to Q3 must be set to a value < Ikand the I-releases to a value > Ik but << Ik ∑. The highest and lowest faultcurrents are important here. Due to

the I-releases, only the faulted trans-former branch circuit will be discon-nected on the high-voltage and low-voltage side. The circuit-breakers inthe “healthy” feeding systems remainoperative.

Parallel-connected feeding linesvia tie breakers

Tie breakers must perform the follow-ing protective functions in fault situa-tions:

� Instantaneous tripping with faults inthe vicinity of the busbars and

� relief of branch circuits of theeffects of high total short-circuitcurrents.

Selecting the circuit-breakersThe type of device used in the branchcircuits and the selectivity ratiosdepend primarily on whether circuit-breakers with current-zero cut-off, i.e.without current limiting, or withcurrent limiting are used as tie break-ers.

Instantaneous, current-limiting tiebreakers relieve the outgoing circuitsof the effects of high unlimited totalpeak short-circuit currents Ip and,therefore, permit the use of lower-duty and less expensive circuit-break-ers.

Setting the overcurrent releases intie breakers

The values set for the overcurrentreleases must be as high as possible inorder to prevent operational interfer-ence caused by the tie breakers open-ing at relatively low short-circuitcurrents, e.g. in the branch circuits ofthe subdistribution boards.

With two feeding linesWith two feeding lines and dependingon the fault location (left or rightbusbar section or outgoing circuit),

< 15 kA < 15 kA

15 kA

k S k k < 30 kA

Q1LS

T1

Q2 Q3

T2 T3

15 kA

k Part 1

k ∑

k Part 2

Q1 Q2Q3

Fig. 2.5/11: Selectivity with three feedingtransformers operatingsimultaneously

Fig. 2.5/12: Short-circuit distribution via the tie breaker Q3 with two feeders Q1 and Q2

22/49

Power System

only the associated partial short-circuit current (e.g. Ik Part 2) flowsthrough the tie breaker Q3 as shownin Fig. 2.5/12.

With three feeding lines and faultWith three feeding lines, the ratios aredifferent according to which of thebranch circuits shown in Fig. 2.5/13aand b is faulted.

In the center busbar sectionIf a fault occurs at the outgoingcircuit of the center busbar section(Fig. 2.5/13a), approximately equalpartial short-circuit currents flowthrough the tie breakers Q4 and Q5.

In the outer busbar sectionIf a fault occurs at the outgoingcircuit of the outer busbar section,(Fig. 2.5/13b), two partial short-circuitcurrents flow through the tie breakerQ4.

Computer-assisted selectivity checkPrecise values for the short-circuitcurrents, which flow through the tiebreakers, are required to permit

optimum setting of the overcurrentreleases. They provide informationconcerning selective characteristicswith a large number of different faultcurrents, and are determined andevaluated with the aid of a computerprogram.

Selectivity and undervoltageprotection

If a short circuit occurs, the systemvoltage collapses to a residual voltageat the short-circuit location. Themagnitude of the residual voltagedepends on the fault impedance. Witha ”dead” short circuit, the fault imped-ance and, therefore, the voltage atthe short-circuit location drops toalmost zero. Generally speaking,however, arcs with arc-drop voltagesbetween approximately 30 V and 70 Voccur with short circuits. This voltage,starting at the fault location, increasesproportionately to the intermediateimpedance with increasing proximityto the power source.

Fig. 2.5/14 illustrates the voltageconditions in LV switchgear with a”dead” short circuit.

If a short circuit occurs at K(Fig. 2.5/14a), the rated operatingvoltage Ue drops to 0.13 Ue at thebusbar of the subdistribution boardand to 0.5 x Ue at the busbar of themain distribution board. The nextupstream circuit-breaker Q1 clears thefault. Depending on the size and typeof the circuit-breaker, the total break-ing time is ≤ 30 ms for zero-currentinterrupters and a maximum of 10 msfor current-limiting circuit-breakers.

If a short-circuit occurs at K2(Fig. 2.5/14b), the circuit-breaker Q2opens. It is equipped with a short-time-delay overcurrent release (S).The delay time is at least 100 ms.During this time, the rated operatingvoltage at the busbar of the maindistribution board is reduced to0.13 x Ue.

If the rated operating voltage dropsto 0.7 – 0.35 times this value andvoltage reduction takes longer thanapproximately 20 ms, all of thecircuit-breakers with undervoltagereleases open. All contactors alsoopen if the rated control supplyvoltage collapses to below 75%of its rated value for longer than 5 to30 ms.

Tripping delay for contactors andundervoltage releasesUndervoltage releases and contactorswith tripping delay are required toensure that the selective overcurrentprotection is not interrupted prema-turely. They are not necessary ifcurrent-limiting circuit-breakers,which have a maximum total clearingtime of 10 ms, are used.

k Part 1 k Part 2 k Part k Part

k Part

Q1 Q3

Q4 Q5

3 k

k ∑

Q2 Q1 Q3

Q4

k ∑

Q5

2

Q2

a) Fault in the outgoing circuit of center busbar section

b) Fault in the outgoing circuit of outer busbar section

Fig. 2.5/13: Distribution of the short-circuit currents used in determining the settings for the overcurrentrelease– in the tie breakers Q4 and Q5 with three feeders and faults a and b– in the outgoing circuits in different busbar sections


Q3

Q2

Q1

K1

Q3

Q2

Q1

K2

0.13.Ue

0.5.Ue

80 m3 x 95 mm2 Cu

tv >100 ms

0.13.Ue

tv = 0Ue Rated operating voltagetv Delay time

Main distribution board

a) Short circuit in subdistribution board b) Short circuit in main distribution board

Subdistribution board

k1 k2F1 F2a

F3

k3 = k1+ k2

K1

k3 + k4

k4k k

k

b

Fig. 2.5/16: Example of a meshed system with multi-phase feedingFig. 2.5/15: Short-circuited cable with its twofeeder nodes a and b

Fig. 2.5/14: Voltage conditions for short-circuited LV switchgear with a main and subdistribution board

22/51

Power System

2.5.2 Selectivity inMeshed Systems

Two selectivity functions must beperformed in meshed systems:

� Only the short-circuited cable maybe disconnected from the system.

� If a short-circuit occurs at the termi-nals of a feeding transformer, onlythe faulted terminal may be discon-nected from the system.

Node fuses

The nodes of a meshed LV system arenormally equipped with cables withthe same cross section and withLV HRC fuses of utilization category gLof the same type and rated current (Fig. 2.5/15).

If a short circuit (K1) occurs along themeshed system cable, the short-circuitcurrents Ik3 and Ik4 flow to the faultlocation. Short-circuit current Ik3 fromnode ”a” comprises the partial cur-rents Ik1 and Ik2 which may differgreatly depending on the impedanceratios.

Permissible current ratioSelectivity of the fuses at node a isachieved if fuse F3, through whichthe total current Ik3 flows, melts andfuse F1 or F2, through which thepartial short-circuit Ik1 or Ik2 flows,remains operative. In the case ofSiemens LV HRC fuses (400 V, max.400 A), the permissible current ratioIk1 /(Ik1 + Ik2 ) for high short-circuitcurrents is 0.8.

Power transformers in meshedsystems

Feeder circuit-breakerIn multi-phase meshed systems (Fig.2.5/16), i.e. feeding several medium-voltage lines and transformers, powerfeedback from the LV system to thefault location should be prevented if afault occurs in a transformer substa-tion or medium-voltage line. A net-work master relay (reverse powerrelay) used to perform this task at thelow-voltage side of the transformer.Today, circuit-breakers with electronicreleases, e.g. an S-release with an I2tcharacteristic, are used for this task.

If a short circuit occurs on the HV sideof the transformer (K1) or betweenthe transformer and network circuit-breaker (K2) or along the cable (K3)(Fig. 2.5/17), the HV HRC fuse oper-ates on the HV side; on the LV side,power flows back to the fault locationvia the low-voltage circuit-breaker andits S-release (with I2t characteristic).As the sum of all short-circuit currentquantities from all the other trans-formers flows through this circuit-

breaker, this circuit-breaker will tripfast enough and thus selectively,owing to its I2t characteristic.

a

K1

bK2

K3

c

Node fuses

a

b

c

HV HRC fuses

LV circuit-breaker with I²t characteristic in the S-release

Fig. 2.5/17: Block diagram showing the feedingpoint of a meshed LV power system


2.6 Protection ofCapacitorsAccording to IEC 60358 / VDE 0560Part 4, capacitor units must be suit-able for continuous operation with acurrent whose r.m.s. value does notexceed 1.3 times the current whichflows with a sinusoidal voltage andrated frequency. Owing to the above-mentioned dimensioning require-ments, no overload protection isprovided for capacitor units in themajority of cases.

Capacitors in systems withharmonic components

The capacitors can only be overloadedin systems with devices which gener-ate high harmonics (e.g. generatorsand converter-fed drives). The capaci-tors, together with the series-con-nected transformer and short-circuitreactance of the primary system, forman anti-resonant circuit. Resonancephenomena occur if the naturalfrequency of the resonant circuitmatches or is close to the frequencyof a harmonic current generated bythe power converter.

Reactor-connected capacitors

The capacitors must be equipped withreactors to prevent resonance.* An LCresonant circuit, whose resonancefrequency is below the lowest har-

monic component (250 Hz) in theload current, is used instead of thecapacitor. The capacitor unit is thusinductive for all harmonic currentsthat occur in the load current and can,therefore, no longer form a resonantcircuit with the system reactance.

Settings of the overload relay

If thermal time-delay overload relaysare used to provide protection againstovercurrents, the tripping value canbe set at 1.3 to 1.43 times the ratedcurrent of the capacitor since, allow-ing for the permissible capacitancedeviation, the capacitor current canbe 1.1 x 1.3 = 1.43 times the ratedcapacitor current.

With transformer-heated overloadrelays or releases, a higher secondarycurrent flows due to the changedtransformation ratio of the transform-ers caused by the harmonic compo-nents. This may result in prematuretripping.

Harmonics suppression by meansof filter circuits

An alternative solution would be touse filter circuits to remove the major-ity of harmonics from the primarysystem. ** The filter circuits are alsoseries-resonant circuits which, unlikethe reactor-connected capacitors, aretuned precisely to the frequencies ofthe harmonic currents to be filtered.

As a result, the impedance is almostzero.


LV HRC fuses with utilization categorygL are typically used in capacitor unitsfor short-circuit protection.

A rated fuse current of 1.6 to 1.7times the rated current of the con-nected capacitor modules is selectedto prevent the fuses from tripping inthe overload range and when thecapacitors switch.

Note:Fuses, fuse-switch-disconnectors,capacitors and contactors must bematched during configuration. Werecommend using complete assemblykits (see Application Manual –Establishment of Basic Data andPreliminary Planning, Section 5.8)

* Seip, Günther G. (Ed.): Electrical InstallationsHandbook, 4th edition, Erlangen, 2000,Section 1.6.

** Seip, Günther G. (Ed.): Electrical InstallationsHandbook, 4th edition, Erlangen, 2000,Sections 1.6.3, 16.4.

22/53

Power System

2.7 Protection ofDistributionTransformersThe following devices are used forprotection tasks in medium-voltagesystems:

HV HRC fuses

High-voltage high-rupturing-capacity(HV HRC) fuses usually used in con-junction with switch-disconnectors toprotect radial feeders and transform-ers against short circuits.

Circuit-breakers with protection

Protection relaysProtection relays connected to currenttransformers (protection core) can beused to perform all protection-relatedtasks irrespective of the magnitude ofthe short-circuit currents and ratedoperating currents of the requiredcircuit-breakers.

Digital protectionModern protection equipment iscontrolled by microprocessors (digitalprotection) and supports all of theprotective functions required for amedium-voltage branch circuit.

Protection as component of theenergy automation systemDigital protection also allows operat-

ing and fault data, which can becalled up via serial data interfaces, tobe collected and stored. Digital pro-tection can, therefore, be incorpo-rated in substation control and protec-tion systems as an autonomous com-ponent.

Current transformer rating forprotection purposesCurrent transformers are subject tothe standards DIN VDE 0414, Parts 1to 3, as well as IEC 185 and IEC 186.Current transformers with 5P or 10Pcores must be used for connectingprotection equipment.

The required rated output and over-current factor must both be deter-mined on the basis of the informationprovided in the protection relaydescriptions.

Overcurrent protectionOvercurrent protection via currenttransformers for protecting cables andtransformer branches can be eithertwo-phase or three-phase. The neu-tral-point connection of the medium-voltage network must be consideredhere.

Relay operating currents withemergency generator operationCare should be taken to ensure thatthe operating currents of the protec-tion relays provided for normal system

operation are also attained in theevent of faults during emergencyoperation using generators withrelatively low rated outputs.

Three-phase time-overcurrentprotectionIn the interests of future systemsafety, it is advisable to configure thetime-overcurrent protection as athree-phase system, irrespective ofthe method of neutral-point connec-tion.

Note:Protection against internal faults(excess temperature etc.), see Section 2.7.2.


2.7.1 Protection withOverreaching Selectivity

Ideally, transformer branches shouldbe protected by:

� HV HRC fusesHigh-voltage high-rupturing-capacity(HV HRC) fuses used in conjunctionwith switch-disconnectors for ratedtransformer outputs of up to approx.1,250 kVA for low switching rates, or

� Circuit-breakers with protectionCircuit-breakers with protection ofabout 800 kVA of higher, and for highswitching rates; also when severalcircuit-breakers with S-releases arearranged in series on the low-voltageside and selectivity is not possiblewith upstream HV HRC fuses.

The anticipated selectivity conditionsmust, therefore, be checked beforethe protection concept is chosen anddetails determined.

Protection by means of HV HRCfuses

Dimensioning HV HRC fusesThe rated current of the HV HRC fusesspecified by the manufacturers for therated output of each transformershould be used when dimensioningthe HV HRC fuses. The lowest ratedcurrent is dictated by the rush cur-rents generated when the transform-ers are energized and is 1.5 to 2 timesthe rated transformer currents.

� Energizing current of thetransformerThe lowest rated current is dimensionedby the rush currents generated when thetransformers are energized and is 1.5 to2 times the rated transformer current. Inpractice it is normally sufficient if themaximum energizing current of thetransformer has a selective clearance of20% from the fuse curve at 0.1 s

1,000

t100

10

1

0.1ms

0.011,000 10,000 / A at 0.4 kV 100,000

sm

in

1,000 2,000 3,000 5,000 7,50010,000 20,000 50,000

40 80 120 200 400 800 2,000

A at 0.4 kV

A at 10 kV

10 kV

0.4 kV

3GD50 A

400 kVAu 6%

< 10.5 kAk

kr

a min

t Prearcing time of fusesLowest breaking current of HV HRC fuse

s

3GD 50 A

Basis < 10.5 kA

25% safety margin

20% safety margin

a min

k

Rush

Fig. 2.7/1: Example for dimensioning a HV HRC fuse acc. to the minimum breaking current of the HVHRC fuse and the energizing current of the transformer

� In order to determine the maximumrated current, the minimum breakingcurrent Ia min of the fuse must beexceeded in the event of a short circuiton the secondary side of the trans-former reaching as far as the busbarsin the installation. Actual practice hasshown that a 25% minimum safetymargin of Ia min should be establishedin relation to the short-circuit current Ikof the transformer between the calcu-

lated maximum short-circuit current inthe vicinity of the busbar on the low-voltage side (converted to themedium-voltage side) and the mini-mum breaking current Ia min (the circlein the prearcing-time/current charac-teristic).The fuse link can be chosen betweenthe above specified limits according tothe selectivity requirements (see Fig. 2.7/1).

22/55

Power System

HH

a

SNH

NH

HH

NHb

3WL

HH

NHc

3WL

400 V

S

Required scope of standby protection

Network master relay 7RM

Fig. 2.7/2: Necessary scope of standby protection of HV HRC fuses when different protection equipmentis used at the low-voltage side

seen in Fig. 2.7/2, illustrated for threecircuit diagrams. The working rangeof the standby protection is inverselyproportional to the rated fuse current.

Further information on safety mar-gins, e.g. for gradings as shown inFig. 2.7/2, case b and c, is given below.

Grading of HV HRC with LV HRCfuses in supply circuits

Grading HV HRC fuses and LV HRCfuses is mainly used for transformerswith rated outputs of max. 400 kVA,when LV HRC fuse switch-disconnec-tors or motor fuse-disconnectors(maximum rated current 630 A) arealso applied (example: Fig. 2.7/3);circuit-breakers with overcurrentreleases are used at the low-voltageside for rated outputs ≥ 500 kVA.

It is acceptable for the prearcing-time/current characteristics F2(LV HRC) and F3 (HV HRC) – referredto 0.4 kV – to touch or intersect, andthe switch-disconnector to be possiblytripped on the high-voltage side bythe upstream HV HRC fuse, since bothfuses protect the same system ele-

ment and interruption will occur in allcases (limited selectivity). HV HRCfuses with higher rated currents(e. g. 80 A as shown in Fig. 2.7/3)would not be suitable here, since theirminimum breaking current Ia min hasno safety margin of at least 25%below the short-circuit current Ikwhich the transformer can carry (max.10.5 kA).

A non-selective fuse response, asdemonstrated in the example of the50 A HV HRC fuse towards the630 A low-voltage fuse (Fig. 2.7/3)may result in damage of unblown fuselinks in case of faults in the LV busbar,so that the tripping characteristic ischanged and the fuse may trip at anytime under any load – even its ratedcurrent. In the event of protectivetripping by the HV HRC fuse, or thelow-voltage fuse, both fuse linksshould always be replaced altogether.This applies to all descriptions belowand the examples given for HV HRCfuses, where non-selective protectionat the transformers’ low-voltage side is provided (Fig. 2.7/4 to Fig. 2.7/6).

Protection by switch-disconnectorsand HV HRC fuses

As a load interrupter switch is nor-mally used for transformer protection,when HV HRC fuses are used, itslimited current breaking capacity mustbe taken into account. According toIEC 62271-105 / VDE 0671-105, thefollowing two conditions must be metamong others:

� The transient current of the HV HRCfuse / switch-disconnector combina-tion must be lower than the breakingcapacity of the load interrupterswitch.

� A secondary-side transformer shortcircuit should be cleared by the HVHRC fuse in order to relieve the loadinterrupter switch from high tran-sient recovery voltages.

On account of the extremely complexinteraction of this combination andthe data required, such as the charac-teristic time-current curve of the HVHRC fuse, time to contact separationand rated transient current of the loadinterrupter switch, the manufacturerof the medium-voltage switchgearmust provide the fuse type and ratedcurrent to be used for the specifiedtransformer.

In practice it may happen underdifficult conditions, that simultaneouscompliance with both standards IEC 60787 / DIN VDE 0670-402 andIEC 62271-105 / VDE 0671-105 is notpossible. In these cases, theswitchgear manufacturer should beconsulted, or a circuit-breaker shouldbe used for transformer protection.

Working range covered by standbyprotection

HV HRC fuses must provide sufficientstandby protection in case of a failureof the downstream protective device.The required working range can be


1,000

t

100

10

1

0.1ms

0.011,000 10,000 / A at 0,4 kV 100,000

sm

in

1,000 2,000 3,000 5,000 7,500 10,000 20,000 50,000

40 80 120 2 00 400 800 2,000

A at 0.4 kV

A at 10 kV

10 kV

0.4 kV

3GD50 A(80 A)

F3

400 kVAu 6%

< 10.5 kAk

kr

3NA400 AF1

3NA630 A

F2

a min

t Prearcing time of fusesLowest breaking current of HV HRC fuse

s

3GD 80 A

25% safety margin is not maintained!

k

3GD 50 AF3

3NA 630 AF2

3NA 400 AF1

Basis < 10.5 kA

a min

Fig. 2.7/3: Example of grading HV HRC fuses – LV HRC fuses in the branchcircuit, and a 400 kVA transformer

1,000

t

100

10

1

0.1ms

0.011,000 10,000 / A at 0.4 kV 100,000

sm

in

1,000 2,000 3,000 5,000 7,50010,000 20,000 50,000

40 80 12 120 2 00 400 800 2,000

A at 0.4 kV

A at 10 kV

10 kV

0,4 kV

3GD80 AF2

630 kVAu 6%

< 16.4 kAk

kr

t 300 mssd

3NA315 AF1

3WL1,000 AQ1

t stsd

t2

t

3GD 80 A

F2

3WL 1000 A

Q1

3NA 315 AF1

k

sd

Basis < 16.4 kA

-characteristic

Prearcing time of fusesDelay time of S-release (Q1)

Fig. 2.7/4: Example of grading a HV HRC fuse F2 with circuit-breaker Q1 anddownstream LV HRC fuse F1 in the branch circuit

Grading between HV HRC fuses andL/S releasesSince the protective devices in thefeeding system form a functional unit,a restriction in selectivity in the uppershort-circuit current range is acceptedin case of faults in the vicinity of thebusbars (as indicated by the circle inthe diagram for the 80 A HV HRC fusein Fig. 2.7/4 to 2.7/6), because faultsinside the switchgear in this short-circuit range can virtually be outruledfor Siemens low-voltage SIVACONswitchboards.

Even partial selectivity of the low-voltage circuit-breaker in the branchcircuit with the HV HRC fuse (see Fig.2.7/6) in the upper short-circuit rangeis often acceptable, as dead 3-phase

the delay times tR and tsd must bematched to the transformer outputand the downstream LV HRC fuse.

If a low-voltage circuit-breaker is usedwith an additional I4t characteristic inthe L-release, higher LV HRC fuses canbe used in the branch circuits owingto characteristics, and selectivity willstill be maintained (Fig. 2.7/5).

If circuit-breakers, such as the SEN-TRON 3WL, are used instead of LV HRCfuses, branch circuits can be config-ured with higher currents whilemaintaining selectivity (Fig. 2.7/6), asthe S-releases can be adapted accord-ingly with regard to their excitationcurrents Isd and delay times tsd .

Grading of HV HRC fuses with LVcircuit-breakers and downstreamLV HRC fuses

RequirementsSelectivity is to be establishedbetween the protective devices of thebranch circuits and those of thesupply, which together form a func-tional unit; the safety margins of theprotective devices must also be takeninto account (Fig. 2.7/4 and Fig.2.7/5).

Grading between LV HRC fuses andL/S releasesSelectivity is ensured with the 315 Afuse link used in the example (Fig.2.7/4). With L- and S-releases, theexcitation values IR and Isd as well as

22/57

Power System

short-circuit currents can be outruledin practice, and faults will be belowthe selectivity level just a few metersdownstream of the protective device(here: the intersection of the HV HRCfuse curve and S-release curve). Inthese cases, the focus is on improvedcost-efficiency, as offered by a HV HRCfuse compared to a medium-voltagecircuit-breaker, rather than on thecriterion of 100% selectivity.

Attention:Tie breakers connecting safety powersupply networks (SPS networks) mustfulfill the criterion of full selectivitytowards line-side HV HRC fuses incompliance with IEC 60364-7-710 /VDE 0100-710 and VDE 0100-718!

The requirement of full selectivity andthe use of HV HRC fuses can often bemet by implementing zone-selectiveinterlocking with low-voltage circuit-breakers. All of the downstreamdistribution systems and protectivedevices, as well as the short-circuitcurrents likely to be present at thefault locations must then be takeninto account.

Tolerances of HV HRC fusesAccording to EN 60282-1 / DIN VDE0670-4, the tolerance of HV HRC fuselinks can be ±20%. Siemens HV HRCfuse links have a tolerance of ±10%.

1,000

t

100

10

1

0.1ms

0.011,000 10,000 / A at 0,4 kV 10,0000

sm

in

1,000 2,000 3,000 5,000 7,50010,000 20,000 50,000

40 80 120 2 00 400 800 2,000

A at 0.4 kV

A at 10 kV

10 kV

0.4 kV

3GD80 AF2

630 kVAu 6%

< 16.4 kAk

kr

t 300 mssd

4,000 Asd

3NA315 AF1

3WL 1,000 AQ1

t stsd

t4

3GD 80 A

characteristic

F2

3WL 1,000 A

Q1

3NA 400 AF1

Basis < 16.4 kAk

tsd

Prearcing time of fusesDelay time of S-release (Q1)

Fig. 2.7/5: Example of grading a HV HRC fuse F2 with circuit-breaker Q1(optional I4t characteristic of the L-release) and downstream LVHRC fuse F1 in the branch circuit

1,000

t

100

10

1

0.1ms

0.011,000 10,000 / A at 0.4 kV 100,000

sm

in

1000 2,000 3,000 5,000 7,50010,000 20,000 50,000

40 80 120 2 00 400 800 2,000

A at 0.4 kV

A at 10 kV

10 kV

0.4 kV

3GD80 AF2

630 kVAu 6%

< 16.4 kAk

kr

t 300 mssd

4,000 Asd

Q1

3WL 1,000 A

t 200 mssd

2,520 Asd

3WL 630 A

Q2

t stsd1

tsd2

t2

3GD 80 A

characteristic

F2

3WL 1,000 AQ2

t2 characteristic3WL 630 AQ1

Basis < 16.4 kAk

tsd2

tsd1

Prearcing time of fusesDelay time of S-release (Q1)Delay time of S-release (Q2)

Fig. 2.7/6: Example of grading a HV HRC fuse F2 with circuit-breaker Q2 anddownstream circuit-breaker Q1 with an LSI-release in the branchcircuit


Protection by means of circuit-breakers with definite-timeovercurrent protection (DMT)

RequirementsThe two feeder circuit-breakers (inFig. 2.7/7, 2.7/8 and Fig.2.7/9, 2.7/10)form a functional unit and requireselectivity with respect to the protec-tion devices on the low-voltage side.

DMT protectionNowadays, digital devices are used toprovide DMT protection in practicallyall applications. They have broadersetting ranges, allow a choicebetween definite-time and inverse-time overcurrent protection or over-load protection, provide a greater andmore consistent level of measuringaccuracy and are self-monitoring.

2-zone DMT protectionIf DMT protection is applied, whoseprotective function merely consists ofthe two I> (ANSI Code 51) and I>>(ANSI Code 50) short-circuit zones,and if no further measures are takenfor transformer protection, the I>zone is normally used as standbyprotection for the low-voltage side,i.e. the I> zone is set to 1.5 up to 2.0times the transformer’s rated currentvalue. This means that the size of thebranch circuits in the main distribu-tion system at the low-voltage level islimited in order to ensure selectivitythere. For example, with a 630 kVAtransformer this means:

� A fuse of a maximum size of 160 Acan be used in the main distribu-tion (Fig. 2.7/7). In practice thisroughly corresponds to 20% of therated transformer current.

� With circuit-breakers, their maxi-mum size depends on the settingranges of the circuit-breakers’releases and their tolerances, aswell as the protective devices in thebranch circuits of the subdistribu-tion board. Selective grading using

a SENTRON 3WL, 630 A, or even800 A is possible (Fig. 2.7/8). Gen-erally speaking, circuit-breakers canbe used with current ratings of 50%up to 80% of the rated transformercurrent.

Intersection of the characteristiccurves Q2 and Q3 in the middle short-circuit range is permissible, because

� the low-voltage circuit-breaker andthe medium-voltage circuit-breakerform a functional unit;

� the L-release of the low-voltagecircuit-breaker Q2 protects thetransformer against overloading,

which practically applies in therange of 1.0 – 1.3 times the ratedcurrent of the transformer only;

� a safety margin of 50 ms to 100 msexists between the tripping value ofthe I> zone of the DMT protection(lower tolerance band) and theupper tolerance bands of the char-acteristic LV HRC fuse curve F1 andthe S-release of the circuit-breakerQ1 in the branch circuits, whichmeans that selectivity is ensured.

2-zone DMT protection withoverload protectionIf advanced DMT protection equip-ment is applied, which provides

1,000

t

100

10

1

0.1ms

0.011,000 10,000 / A at 0,4 kV 100,000

sm

in

1,000 2,000 3,000 5,000 7,50010,000 20,000 50,000

40 80 120 2 00 400 800 2,000

A at 0.4 kV

A at 10 kV

10 kV

0.4 kV

60/1 A 66 A/500 ms780 A/50 ms

Q3

630 kVAu 6%kr

t 300 mssd

4,000 Asd

3WL 1,000 A

t 200 mssd

1,260 Asd

3WL 630 A

Q2

< 16.4 kAk < 16.4 kAk

F1 3NA160 A

Q1

>>>

t stsd1

tsd2

/ tt >>>

t2

3NA 160 A

characteristic

F1

3WL 1,000 AQ2

t/ >>Q3

/ t>>>>Q3

/ >> of the DMT protection (Q3)>Delay times of short-circuit tripping zones

Basis < 16.4 kAk

tsd2


Grafik 2.7/7: Example of grading a circuit-breaker with DMT protection (Q3), circuit-breaker 3WL,1,000 A with LSI-release (Q2) and downstream branch circuits, e.g. LV HRC fuse 160 A(F1), and a transformer supplying 630 kVA

22/59

Power System

additional overload protection Ith(ANSI Code 49) besides the twostandard short-circuit protectionzones I> and I>>, the I> zone can actas a “proper” short-circuit protectionzone, and the overload protection canbe used as transformer protection and standby protection for the low-voltage side. Above all, this allows the use of larger fuses in the low-voltage branch circuits. With regard tooverload protection, it must beensured that the initial load is alsotaken into account for a selectivityevaluation. For a 630 kVA transformerthis means:

� A fuse of a maximum size of 315 Acan be used in the main distribution(Fig. 2.7/9). In practice this roughlycorresponds to 35% of the ratedtransformer current.

� With circuit-breakers, their maxi-mum size depends on the settingranges of the circuit-breakers’releases and their tolerances, aswell as the protective devices in thebranch circuits of the subdistribu-tion board. Selective grading usinga SENTRON 3WL, 630 A, or even800 A is possible (Fig. 2.7/10).Generally speaking, circuit-breakerscan be used with current ratings of

50% up to 80% of the rated trans-former current.

Current transformer sizing forprotection purposesDimensioning a current transformerdepends on many parameters ifcorrect functioning of the relays is tobe ensured. This includes

� maximum short-circuit currentspresent,

� requirements set by the protectivedevices on the current transformers,

� secondary-side rated current trans-former current,

� burden of the connecting cablesand other connected protectivedevices,

� power output and inherent burdenof the current transformer,

� rated accuracy limit factor of thecurrent transformer.

Authorized information on the preciserating of these current transformersmatching the protection relaysapplied and the prevailing boundaryconditions can only be given by thespecialized technical departments ofthe equipment manufacturer.

In practice, the rated currents of thecurrent transformers used for DMTprotection devices can be determinedas follows:

� General use of 1-A transformers(secondary side) if numerical pro-tection technology is applied:usually, this approach almost com-pletely outrules possible problemsregarding non-saturated transmis-sion of short-circuit currents and theburdening of the current transform-ers for DMT protection in advance.

� The primary rated current of thecurrent transformer should be 1.2to 2.0 times the transformer ratedcurrent. This protects the currenttransformer against damage fromoverload, as for cost reasons, cur-

1,000t

100

10

1

0.1ms

0.011,000 10,000 / A at 0.4 kV 100,000

sm

in

1,000 2,000 3,000 5,000 7,50010,000 20,000 50,000

40 80 120 2 00 400 800 2000

A at 0.4 kV

A at 10 kV

10 kV

0.4 kV

60/1 A 66 A/500 ms780 A/50 ms

Q3

630 kVAu 6%kr

t 300 mssd

4,000 Asd

3WL 1,000 A

t 200 mssd

1,260 Asd

3WL 630 A

Q2

F1 3NA160 A

< 16.4 kAk< 16.4 kAk

Q1

>>>

t stsd1

tsd2

/ tt >>>

t2 characteristic3WL 1,000 A

Q2

t2 characteristic3WL 630 A

Q1

t/ >>Q3

/ t>>>>Q3


Basis < 16.4 kAk

tsd2

tsd1


Fig. 2.7/8: Example of grading a circuit-breaker with DMT protection and overload protection (Q3),circuit-breaker 3WL, 1,000 A with LSI-release (Q2) and downstream branch circuits, e.g. LVHRC fuse 160 A (F1), and a transformer supplying 630 kVA


Short-circuit current zone I >>:(Fig. 2.7/9 and Fig. 2.7/10)

The short-circuit current zone I >> isset in such a way, that it will onlyacquire primary-side faults which arethen cleared as fast as possible. Usu-ally, it is chosen with a safety marginof approx. 20% above the maximumthree-phase fault on the secondaryside of the transformer.

When taking the new cmax factor forlow-voltage networks into account asgiven in the standard for short-circuitcurrent calculation, IEC 60909 /VDE 0102, the maximum secondary-side three-phase short-circuit currentcan initially be estimated as:

rent transformers without overloadcapability are nowadays used inapplications, unless requirementsare explicitly defined otherwise.

� The primary rated current of thecurrent transformer should notexceed 4 times the transformerrated current in order to preventsignificant impacts of current trans-formers tolerances on measure-ments and current evaluations.

For our example this means:

Rated transformer current 36.4 A(630 kVA, 10 kV) –> rated current ofcurrent transformer, primary side [1.2x InTr ... 2 x InTr] = [43.7 A ... 72.8 A]–> A 60/1-A current transformer ischosen.

Setting the short-circuit current zonesI >, I>> and time delays t >, t >>

Short-circuit current zone I >:(Fig. 2.7/9 and Fig. 2.7/10)

Assuming that additional overloadprotection Ith has also been set in theDMT protection device, the short-circuit current zone is chosen in sucha way that it will excite at a safetymargin of approx. 20% towards theminimum single-phase fault on thesecondary side of the transformer.Please note that on account of thetransformer’s Dy vector group, thisfault is shown on the primary side asfollows:

representing the transformer’s trans-formation ratio, in the example:ü = 10 kV / 0.4 kV = 25

Assuming a minimum single-phaseshort-circuit current of approx.12.5 kA (in this example: transformerwith 630 kVA, ukr 6%), there is:

Ik min prim ≈ 288 A

Consequently, when considering asafety margin of 20%, there is:

I’k min prim = 0,8 x Ik min prim ≈ 230 A

A selected value of I’k min prim = 210 Aresults in the following setting value:

The time delay of the I > zone is set to:

t ≥ 0.5 s

1,000

t

100

10

1

0.1ms

0.011,000 10,000 / A at 0.4 kV 100,000

sm

in

1,000 2,000 3,000 5,000 7,50010,000 20,000 50,000

40 80 120 2 00 400 800 2,000

A at 0.4 kV

A at 10 kV

10 kV

0,4 kV

60/1 A42 A210 A/500 ms780 A/50 ms

Q3

630 kVAu 6%kr

t 300 mssd

4,000 Asd

3WL 1,000 A

t 200 mssd

2,560 Asd

3WL 630 A

Q2

< 16.4 kAk < 16.4 kAk

F1 3NA315 A

Q1

>>>

th

t stsd1

tsd2

/ tt >>>

Q3

0% Vorlast100% Vorlast

th


Q2

3NA 315 AF1

t/ >>Q3

/ t>>>>Q3


Basis < 16.4 kAk

tsd2


Fig. 2.7/9: Example of grading a circuit-breaker with DMT protection (Q3), circuit-breaker 3WL, 1,000 Awith LSI-release (Q2) and downstream branch circuits, e.g. circuit-breaker 3WL, 630 A withLSI-release (Q1), and a transformer supplying 630 kVA

22/61

Power System

2.7.2 Equipment forProtecting DistributionTransformers (againstInternal Faults)

The following signaling devices andprotection equipment are used todetect internal transformer faults:

� Devices for monitoring and protect-ing liquid-cooled transformers suchas Buchholz protectors, temperaturedetectors, contact thermometers,etc.

� Temperature monitoring systemsfor GEAFOL resin-encapsulatedtransformers comprising:– temperature sensors in the low-

voltage winding and– signaling and tripping devices in

the incoming-feeder switch panel.

The thermistor-type thermal protec-tion protects the transformer againstoverheating resulting from increasedambient temperatures or overloading.Furthermore, it allows the full outputof the transformer to be utilizedirrespective of the number of loadcycles without the risk of damage tothe transformer.

These signaling and protectiondevices do not have to be included inthe grading diagram.

Assuming the transformer of ourexample (630 kVA, ukr 6%) and a cmax

factor = 1.05, there is

Ik max prim ≈ 636 A

Consequently, when considering asafety margin of 20%, there is:I’k max prim = 1.2 x Ik max prim ≈ 764 A

A selected value of I’k max prim = 780 Aresults in the following setting value:

In practice, the time delay of the I >>stage is set to 50 – 100 ms.

1,000t

100

10

1

0.1ms

0.011,000 10,000 / A at 0.4 kV 100,000

sm

in

1,000 2,000 3,000 5,000 7,50010,000 20,000 50,000

40 80 120 2 00 400 800 2,000

A at 0,4 kV

A at 10 kV

10 kV

0,4 kV

60/1 A42 A210 A/500 ms780 A/50 ms

Q3

630 kVAu 6%kr

t 300 mssd

4,000 Asd

3WL 1,000 A

t 200 mssd

2,560 Asd

3WL 630 A

Q2

F1 3NA315 A

< 16.4 kAk< 16.4 kAk

Q1

>>>

th

t stsd1

tsd2

/ tt >>>

Q3

0% Vorlast100% Vorlast

th


Q2

t2 characteristic3WL 630 A

Q1

t/ >>Q3

/ t>>>>Q3


Basis < 16.4 kAk

tsd2

tsd1


Fig. 2.7/10: Example of grading a circuit-breaker with DMT protection and overload protection (Q3),circuit-breaker 3WL, 1,000 A with LSI-release (Q2) and downstream branch circuits, e.g.circuit-breaker 3WL, 630 A with LSI-release (Q1), and a transformer supplying 630 kVA


2.8 Protection ofTechnical BuildingInstallations –Lightning Currentand OvervoltageProtection

2.8.1 Standards,Regulations andGuidelines

Direct damaging effects of lightningand overvoltages can be prevented orat least reduced by taking appropriateaction. Such protection measurescause a safe current discharge andprevent injections of potential differ-ences. Relevant standards are:

DIN EN 62305-1 (VDE 0185-305-1):2006-11 Protection against lightning,Part 1: General principles

DIN-EN 62305-2 (VDE 0185-305-2):2006-11 Protection against lightning,Part 2: Risk management: Calculationassistance for assessment of risk forstructures

DIN-EN 62305-3 (VDE 0185-305-3):2006-11 Protection against lightning,Part 3: Physical damage to structuresand life hazard

DIN-EN 62305-4 (VDE 0185-305-4):2006-11 Protection against lightning,Part 4: Electrical and electronic sys-tems within structures

IEC 60364-4-44: 2001-08 Electricalinstallations of buildings; Part 4-44

IEC 60362-5-53: 2001-08 Electricalinstallations of buildings; Part 5-53

Procedures for risk evaluation aredescribed in IEC 62305-2.

2.8.2 Planning ofLightning andOvervoltage ProtectionInstallations

Lightning and overvoltage protectionshould be taken into planning considera-tions (preliminary draft) of a building orreconstruction project at an early stage.In order to protect building installationsagainst the direct impact of strikes oflightning, a ligtning protection system isrequired comprising:

� Exterior lightning protection� Interior lightning protection

Integration of building contractsections – planning, support,inspection

A tailored combination of individualprotection measures may be chosenfrom the options listed below, in orderto protect a building and all of itsinstalled electrical and electronicsystems against the impact of light-ning electrommagnetic pulses (LEMP):

� Cable routing and screening� Equipotential bonding� Room shielding� Grounding

Table 2.8/1 exemplifies recommenda-tions on grounding, equipotentialbonding, lightning protection andovervoltage protection measures forvarious building contract sections.

Additional overvoltage protectionmeasures may be necessary for thepower supply and IT despite theexistence of a lightning protectionsystem.

The basis for rating and and planninglightning and overvoltage protectionsystems is a definition of the build-ing’s endangerment level. This defini-tion must be made in compliance withDIN EN 50164-2.

Table 2.8/1: Recommendations on grounding,equipotential bonding, lightningprotection and overvoltageprotection measures, see next page.

Lightning protection zones (LPZ) mustbe defined on the basis of buildinglayout drawings and a categorizationof the technical building installations.

Appropriate measures for protectionagainst strikes of lightning and/orovervoltages must be implemented atevery zone transition area. To do this,every zone is allocated its ownequipotential bonding rail. These railsmust be connected to the groundingsystem via the grounded main equipo-tential rail.

The most important objective is theprotection of human life. Technicalbuilding system functions and systemavailability for use are of secondaryimportance in this context. Based onthese priorities, a protection zoneconcept needs to be established forthe building facility in compliancewith DIN EN 50164-3 and -4. Itscharacteristics are:

� Treatment of the grounding system� Treatment of roof and facade areas� Integration of the technical building

installations� Establishment of the protection

zone concept within the buildingincluding zone-specific equipon-tential bonding systems, each ofwhich being connected to thegrounding system.

22/63

Power System

Cost group (KG)acc. to DIN 276

System nameGrounding /

equipotentialbonding

Lightningprotection

(type 1)

Overvoltageprotection

(type 2)

Overvoltageprotection

(type 3)

Overvoltageprotection in IT

systems

Sanitarysystems (KG 410)

Freshwater supply X

Drinking water supply X

Rainwater supply X

Water supply for fire quenching X

Ventilation X X X X

Lifting gear X X X X

Collector/ separator systems/ gulleys X X X X

Draining X X X X

Piping X

Heating systems(KG 420)

Gas supply X)) X

District heating supply X)) X

Solar collectors X

Chimney system X

Air intake X

Outdoor sensors/ actuators X X) X X X

Outdoor tanks X X X X

Air heat pumps X X X X

Piping X

Installations inair (KG 430)

Roof mounting constructions X X X X X

Wall-mounted constructions X X X X X

Geothermal heat exchanger X X X X

Light domes X X X X

Smoke evacuation systems X X X X X

Rotary heat exchangers X X X X X

Canal system X

Electricalinstallations

(KG 440)

MV building supply X

LV building supply X X

LV installations X X) X X X

Photovoltaic systems X X) X X X

Paths/access ways X X X X X

External fire extinguishing system X X X X X

Billboards X X) X X X

Shutter systems X X) X X X

Sun shields X X) X X X

Outdoor sensors/ actuators X X) X X X

Telecommunica-tions and IT

systems

Telecom supply X

included in thelow-voltageinstallations

included in thelow-voltageinstallations

X X

RF supply X X X

Satellite system X X X

Antenna systems X X X

Mobile radio communications X X X

Burglar alarm system X X X

Alarm system X X X

Bell/intercom X X X

Hauling/ conveyorsystems (KG 460)

Elevators X X X X

Escalators X X X X

x Recommended x) Required if a lightning protection system exists x)) Cathode-protected tank and piping systems must not be directlygrounded, they must be integrated in the equipotential bonding and grounding systems by means of a series gap.


Besides an integration of the rein-forcement steel girders and all of thecanal, conduit, piping and cablesupport systems made of conductivematerials into the equipotentialbonding system, an EMC-suitablelayout of the building installations isrequired.

New installations must always beequipped with a concrete-footedground electrode (DIN 18014). Thiselectrode must be connected with thereinforcement (by clamping or weld-ing) at regular distances of about 5 min such a way that it can carry light-ning currents. Existing building instal-lations without a grounding system ofits own must be retrofitted with ringground electrodes or buried groundrods – or a combination thereof,which must be integrated in theequipotential bonding system.

Electrical power distribution

To meet the requirement of establish-ing protection zones for all cablingsystems which intersect protectionzone borders, suitable overvoltageprotection measures must be plannedand implemented.

Cabling

Cable routing in buildingsCables and lines inside a buildingmust be routed separately, splitaccording to their voltage levels.

If the reference potential of auxiliarysupplies, e.g. 24 V DC systems, arepermanently grounded, only onegrounding connection is permissibleper system. With more than onegrounding connection in such systemsthere would be the risk of malfunc-tions or even total destruction.

If such systems, which are merelygrounded at the central groundingpoint, are spread at a large scale

across the building, this mass poten-tial is to be treated separately as a liveconductor.

Cable routing outside buildingsLines and cables leading to technicalinstallations outside the building mustbe included in the LPZ framework ofzone-specific equipotential bonding atthe transition areas of the lightningprotection zones, which is imple-mented by means of overvoltageprotection devices. For this purpose,the overvoltage protection devicesrequired must be connected to thebuilding’s equipotential bondingsystem close to their mounting loca-tion. As few cable entry points intothe building as possible should beplanned.

2.8.3. ImplementingLightning andOvervoltage ProtectionInstallations

Exterior lightning protection

Roof areas are often used as “technol-ogy platforms” for large-size equip-ment. In compliance with DIN EN50164-3, these roof mounting con-structions are often protected againstdirect strikes of lightning by means ofseparate lightning rods and roof con-ductors. Three methods may beapplied to determine the protectioncategory (Fig. 2.8/1):

h

h

11

r

Protection angle

Grounding system

Cover

Lightning rod

Mesh width

Lightning ball

Fig. 2.8/1: Methods for determining the protection class (source: VDE)

22/65

Power System

� Lightning ball method� Meshing method� Protection angle method

Cable bushings penetrating the roofshould be avoided. For this reason, itcannot be avoided to route supplylines on the roof across longer dis-tances. These lines must be protectedagainst direct strikes of lightningacross their full length by means oflightning rods and roof conductors.Sufficient isolating space must bemaintained between them. Powercables to the roof mounting construc-tions must be equipped with electro-magnetic screening. The screen is tobe laid on both sides.

Connections of current discharge lines

If the lightning protection equipoten-tializer is only connected to a singlegrounding electrode, there may behigh potential differences to the othergrounding electrodes. For this reason,current discharge lines must be con-nected with each other at ground level(i.e. close to soil). This connectionshould be made outside the building.What applies to all these connectinglines is that the length of current pathsshould be kept as short as possible.They should not be installed above aheight of 1 m above ground.

Minimum dimensions and materialsof overhead connecting lines outsidebuildings are defined inDIN EN 62305-3.

Equipotential bonding andgrounding

Equipotential bondingOwing to technical progress, anincreasing number of electrical equip-ment is installed in buildings, there-fore DIN VDE 0100-410 calls forequipotential bonding.

The following conductive parts shallbe connected:

� Connection lug of the concrete-footed ground electrode

� Main protective conductor(PE conductor in the TT system, PENconductor in the TN system)

� Water pipe� Gas pipe (behind the water meter)� Metal air pipes

Fig. 2.8/2: The concept of lightning protection zones

LEMP

IT network

Powersystem

LPZ 0 A

LEMP

LEMPRoom shield

Ventilation Terminal

Equipotential bonding as lightning protection, lightning current arresterLocal equipotential bonding,surge arrester

SEMP

LPZ 0 B

LPZ 0 B

LPZ 3

LPZ 2

LPZ 2LPZ 0 B

M

LPZ 1

LEMP: Lightning Electromagnetic Pulse; SEMP: Switching Electromagnetic Pulse; LPZ: Lightning Protection Zone


� Metal waste water and rainwaterpipes

� Heating pipes� Cooling pipe� Other metal piping� Metal rails� Antenna systems� Telecommunications system� Lightning protection systems

An additional equipotential bondingconductor is required for bathroomsand shower rooms. Several pipes maybe interconnected and connected tothe equipotential bonding rail via acommon main equipotential bondingconductor. The main equipotentialbonding conductor must be half thecross section of the main protectiveconductor, but at least 6 mm2 Cu,maximum cross section of 25 mm2 Cu.Regional regulations must be observed.

The main equipotential bonding railshould be laid in the building’s serviceentrance room, and this is where themain equipotential bonding conduc-tors and the connection lug of theconcrete-footed ground electrode areconnected to it. DIN VDE 0100-7requires additional equipotentialbonding in rooms with special hazardsfor people.

All conductive metal pipes and theconductive outlets of bath- and showertubs must be connected to an equipo-tential bonding conductor with aminimum cross section of 4 mm2 Cu.Connection with the equipotentialbonding busbar is made with a conduc-tor cross section of at least 6 mm2 Cu.

Parallel running, metal cable supportsystems should be connected at regu-lar intervals (ideally 5 m).

Grounding

Two types of arrangements forgrounding electrodes, type A and B,are distinguished. Arrangement typeA consists of horizontal or verticalsingle grounding electrodes. Arrange-ment type A requires at least 2grounding electrodes. Buried ground-ing rods are normally used in practice.

Arrangement type B consist of a ringgrounding conductor outside thebuilding/facility, with a minimumof 80% of its total lenght beingburied in the ground, or it could bea concrete-footed ground electrode.Mesh widths of a concrete-footedground electrode should not bemore than 20 m x 20 m.

Interior lightning protection

Lightning protection zones aredefined protection areas which areclassified according to the degree ofendangerment by lightning strikes.Equipotential bonding must be imple-mented at the borders of these ligthn-ing protection zones for all metalparts and electrical supply lines enter-ing the zone.

Equipotential bonding for lightningprotection from LPZ 0 to LPZ 1 mustbe performed for all metal systemsand electric power and data lines. Theaim of equipotential bonding is toreduce potential differences causedby a lightning current. Requirementson equipotential bonding for lightningprotection are fulfilled by a directconnection of all metal systems andthe indirect connection of all livesystems by means of overvoltageprotection devices, type 1. Equipoten-tial bonding for lightning protectionshould be implemented as closely aspossible near the service entrance intothe building, in order to prevent theingress of partial lightning currentsinto the building.

At the lightning protection zone LPZ 2(e.g. subdistribution boards), coordi-nated overvoltage protection devicestype 2 must be series-connecteddown the line of overvoltage protec-tion devices type 1.

DIN VDE 0100-534 requires that thelength of connecting lines to overvolt-age protection devices in branchcircuits must not be more than 0.5 m.

Medium Voltage

chapter 33.1 Introduction

3.2 Basics of Switching Devices

3.3 Requirements on Medium-VoltageSwitchgear

3.4 Siemens Medium-Voltage Switchgear

3.5 From Medium-Voltage Switchgear to Turnkey Solutions

3.6 Protection of Power DistributionSystems and Switchgear

3 Medium Voltage


(operating voltage). The values varygreatly from country to country,depending on the historical develop-ment of technology and the localconditions.

Medium-voltage equipment

Apart from the public supply, thereare still other voltages fulfilling theneeds of consumers in industrialplants with medium-voltage systems;in most cases, the operating voltagesof the motors installed are decisive.Operating voltages between 3 kV and15 kV are frequently found in indus-trial supply systems. In power supplyand distribution systems, medium-voltage equipment is available

� in power stations, for generatorsand station supply systems,

� in transformer substations of theprimary distribution level (publicsupply systems or systems of largeindustrial companies), in whichpower supplied from the high-voltage system is transformed tomedium voltage,

� in local supply, transformer orcustomer transfer substations forlarge consumers (secondary distri-bution level), in which the power istransformed from medium to lowvoltage and distributed to the endconsumer (Fig. 3.1/3).

0 1 kV 52 kV

High voltage

Alternating voltage

Lowvoltage

Medium voltage 1 kV < 52 kV

Fig. 3.1/1: Voltage definitions

Medium voltage

1

1 High voltage2 Low voltage3

2 1 3

Fig. 3.1/2: Voltage levels from the power plant to the consumer

3.1 IntroductionAccording to international rules, thereare only two voltage groups:

� Low voltage: up to and including 1 kV AC (or 1,500 V DC)

� High voltage: above 1 kV AC(or 1,500 V DC)

Most electrical appliances used inhousehold, commercial and industrialapplications work with low voltage.High voltage is used not only totransmit electrical energy over verylarge distances, but also, finelybranched, for regional distribution tothe load centers. However, as differ-ent high voltages are used for trans-mission and regional distribution, andsince the tasks and requirements ofthe switchgear and substations arealso very different, the term "mediumvoltage" has come to be used for thevoltages required for regional powerdistribution, as a part of the high-voltage range above 1 kV AC up toand including 52 kV AC. Most operat-ing voltages in medium-voltagesystems are in the 3 kV AC to 40.5 kVAC range.

The electrical transmission and distri-bution systems not only connectpower stations and electricity con-sumers, but also, with their “meshedsystems”, form a supraregional back-bone with reserves for reliable supplyand for the compensation of loaddifferences. High operating voltages(and therefore low currents) arepreferred for the power transmissionin order to minimize losses. Thevoltage is not transformed to theusual values of the low-voltage sys-tem until it reaches the load centersclose to the consumer.

In public power supplies, the majorityof medium-voltage systems are oper-ated in the 10 kV to 30 kV range

33/3

Medium Voltage

3.2 Basics ofSwitching Devices

3.2.1 What are switchingdevices?

Switching devices are devices used toclose (make) or open (break) electricalcircuits. The following stress can occurduring making and breaking:

� No-load switching

� Breaking of operating currents

� Breaking of short-circuit currents

3.2.2 What can the differentswitching devices do?

� Circuit-breakers

can make and break all currents withinthe scope of their ratings, from smallinductive and capacitive load currentsup to the full short-circuit current, andthis under all fault conditions in thepower supply system, such as earthfaults, phase opposition, etc.

� Switches

can switch currents up to their ratednormal current and make on existingshort circuits (up to their rated short-circuit making current).

� Disconnectors (isolators)

are used for no-load closing andopening operations. Their function isto “isolate” downstream devices sothey can be worked on.

� Switch-disconnectors (load break switches)

are the combination of a switch and adisconnector, or a switch with isolat-ing distance.

� Contactors

are load breaking devices with alimited short-circuit making or break-ing capacity. They are used for highswitching rates.

� Earthing switches

earth isolated circuits.

� Make-proof earthing switches(earthing switches with makingcapacity)

are used for the safe earthing ofcircuits, even if voltage is present, i.e.also in the event that the circuit to beearthed was accidentally not isolated.

� Fuses

consist of a fuse base and a fuse link.With the fuse base, an isolating dis-tance can be established when thefuse link is pulled out in de-energizedcondition (like in a disconnector). Thefuse link is used for one single break-ing of a short-circuit current.

� Surge arresters

discharge loads caused by lightningstrikes (external overvoltages) orswitching operations and earth faults(internal overvoltages) to earth. Theytherefore protect the connectedequipment against impermissibly highvoltages.

M

G G

Low voltage

Secondarydistribution level

Primarydistribution level

Transformer substation

Power transmission

Power generationMedium voltage

High voltage

Medium voltage

Fig. 3.1/3: Medium voltage in the power supply and distribution system


3.2.3 Selection ofswitching devices

Switching devices are selected bothaccording to their ratings and accord-ing to the switching duties to beperformed, which also includes theswitching rates. The following tablesillustrate these selection criteria: Table3.1/1 shows the selection according toratings. Tables 3.1/2 to 3.1/5 show theservice life of the devices.

Selection according to ratings

The system conditions, i.e. the proper-ties of the primary circuit, determinethe required parameters. The mostimportant of these are:

� Rated voltage

is the upper limit of the system volt-age the device is designed for. As allhigh-voltage switching devices arezero-current interrupters – except forsome fuses – the system voltage is themost important dimensioning crite-rion. It determines the dielectric stressof the switching device by means ofthe transient recovery voltage and therecovery voltage, especially whileswitching off.

� Rated insulation level

is the dielectric strength from phaseto earth, between phases and acrossthe open contact gap, or across theisolating distance. The dielectricstrength is the capability of an electri-cal component to withstand all volt-ages with a specific time sequence up

to the magnitude of the correspon-ding withstand voltages. These can beoperating voltages or higher-fre-quency voltages caused by switchingoperations, earth faults (internalovervoltages) or lightning strikes(external overvoltages). The dielectricstrength is verified by a lightningimpulse withstand voltage test withthe standard impulse wave of 1.2/50µs and a power-frequency withstandvoltage test (50 Hz / 1 min).

� Rated normal current

is the current the main circuit of adevice can continuously carry underdefined conditions. The temperaturerise of components – especially con-tacts – must not exceed definedvalues. Permissible temperature rises

Device Withstand capability, rated … Switching capacity, rated …

insulation level voltage normal currentpeak withstand

current breaking currentshort-circuit

breaking currentshort-circuit

making current

Circuit-breaker x x x x x

Switch(-disconnector) x x x x x

Disconnector x x x

Earthing switch x x

Make-proof earthing switch x x x

Contactor x x x x x 1) x 1)

Fuse link x x x

Fuse base x x

Surge arrester* x 2) x 3) x 4) x 5)

Current limiting reactor x x x

Bushing x x x 6)

Post insulator (insulator) x x 6)

x Selection parameter 1) Limited short-circuit breaking capacity2) Applicable as selection parameter in special cases only, e.g.

for exceptional pollution layer3) For surge arresters with spark gap = rated voltage

4) Rated discharge current for surge arresters5) For surge arresters: Short-circuit strength in case of overload6) For bushings and insulators: Minimum failing loads for tension, bending and torsion* See also Section 3.3

(Parameters of the secondary equipment for drives, control and monitoring are not taken into consideration in this table.)

Table 3.2/1: Device selection according to data of the primary circuit

33/5

Medium Voltage

always refer to the ambient air tem-perature. If a device is mounted in anenclosure, it may possibly not beloaded with its full rated current,depending on the quality of heatdissipation.

� Rated peak withstand current

is the peak value of the major loop ofthe short-circuit current during acompensation process after the begin-ning of the current flow, which thedevice can carry in closed state. It is ameasure for the electrodynamic(mechanical) load of an electricalcomponent. For devices with fullmaking capacity, this value is notrelevant (see Rated short-circuitmaking current).

� Rated short-circuit making current

is the peak value of the making cur-rent in case of short circuit at theterminals of the switching device. Thisstress is greater than that of the ratedpeak withstand current, as dynamicforces may work against the contactmovement.

� Rated breaking current

is the load breaking current in normaloperation. For devices with full break-ing capacity and without a criticalcurrent range, this value is not rele-vant (see Rated short-circuit breakingcurrent).

� Rated short-circuit breaking current

is the root-mean-square value of thebreaking current in case of shortcircuit at the terminals of the switch-ing device.

Selection according to enduranceand switching rates

If several devices satisfy the electricalrequirements and no further criteriaare more important, the requiredswitching rate can be used as anadditional selection criterion. Thefollowing tables show the enduranceof the switching devices and thereforeprovide a recommendation for theirappropriate use. The respective devicestandards distinguish between classesof mechanical (M) and electrical (E)endurance, whereby they can also beused together on the same switchingdevice; for example, a switchingdevice can have both mechanical classM1 and electrical class E3.

� Switches

Standard IEC 60265-1 / VDE 0670-301only specifies classes for the so-calledgeneral-purpose switches. There arealso “Special switches” and “Switchesfor limited applications”.*

– General-purpose switchesmust be able to switch different typesof operating currents (load currents,ring currents, currents of unloadedtransformers, charging currents ofunloaded cables and overhead lines) aswell as make on short-circuit currents.

General-purpose switches that areintended for use in systems withisolated neutral or with earth faultcompensation, must also be able toswitch under earth fault conditions.The versatility is mirrored in the veryexact specifications for the E classes.

– SF6 switchesare appropriate when the switchingrate is ≤ once a month. Theseswitches are usually classified as E3with regard to their electricalendurance.

Class Operating cycles Description

MM1 1,000 Mechanical endurance

M2 5,000 Increased mechanical endurance

E

E1 10 x I1

10 x I2a

2 x Ima

20 x 0.05 · I1

10 x I4a

10 x 0.2 … 0,4 · I4a

10 x I4b

10 x I6a

10 x I6b

I1 mainly active load current

I2a closed loop current

I4a cable-charging current

I4b line-charging current

I6a earth-fault current

I6b cable-charging and line-charging current under earth-fault conditions

Ima short-circuit making current

E2 30 x I1

20 x I2a

3 x Ima

E3 100 x I1

20 x I2a

5 x Ima

Table 3.2/2: Endurance classes for switches

* Switches for limited applications must only control some of the switching duties of a general-purpose switch.Switches for special applications are provided for switching duties such as switching of single capacitor banks, paralleling of capacitorbanks, switching of ring circuits formed by transformers connected in parallel, or switching of motors in normal and locked condition.


– Air-break or hard-gas switches

are appropriate when the switchingrate is ≤ once a year. These switchesare simpler and usually belong to theE1 class. There are also E2 versionsavailable.

– Vacuum switchesTheir switching capacity is signifi-cantly higher than that of the M2/E3classes. They are used for special tasks– mostly in industrial power supplysystems – or when the switching rateis ≥ 1 once a week.


Whereas the number of mechanicaloperating cycles is specifically statedin the M classes, the circuit-breakerstandard IEC 62271-100 / VDE 0671-100 does not define the electricalendurance of the E classes by specificnumbers of operating cycles, butremains very vague on this.

The test duties of the short-circuittype tests provide an orientation as towhat is meant by “normal electricalendurance” and “extended electricalendurance”. The number of make andbreak operations (Close, Open) isspecified in the fields of the table witha gray background.

Modern vacuum circuit-breakers cangenerally make and break the ratednormal current with the number ofmechanical operating cycles.

The switching rate is not a determin-ing selection criterion, as circuit-breakers are always used where short-circuit breaking capacity is required toprotect equipment.

� Disconnectors

Disconnectors do not have any switch-ing capacity.* Therefore, classes areonly specified for the number ofmechanical operating cycles.

� Earthing switches

With earthing switches, the E classesdesignate the short-circuit makingcapacity (earthing on applied volt-age). E0 corresponds to a normalearthing switch; switches of the E1and E2 classes are also called make-proof or high-speed earthingswitches.

The standard does not specify howoften an earthing switch can be

Class Description

MM1 2,000 operating cycles Normal mechanical endurance

M2 10,000 operating cycles Extended mechanical endurance, low maintenance

E

E1 2 x C and 3 x O with 10%,30%, 60% and 100% Isc

Normal electrical endurance(Switch which is not covered by E2)

E2 2 x C and 3 x O with 10%,30%, 60% and 100% Isc

Without AR*operation

Extended electricalendurance withoutmaintenance of the arcingchamber26 x C 130 x O 10% Isc

26 x C 130 x O 30% Isc

4 x C 8 x O 6% Isc

4 x C 6 x O 100% Isc

Without AR*operation

* AR = automatic reclosing


M

M0 1,000 For general requirements

M1 2,000 Extended mechanical endurance

M2 10,000

Table 3.2/4: Endurance classes for disconnectors

Table 3.2/3: Endurance classes for circuit-breakers


E

E0 0 x Ima No short-circuit makingcapacity

For general requirements

E1 2 x Ima Short-circuit makingcapacity

E2 5 x Ima Reduced maintenance required

Table 3.2/5: Endurance classes for earthing switches

* Disconnectors up to 52 kV may only switch negligible currents up to 500 mA (e.g. voltage transformer) or larger currents only when there is aninsignificant voltage difference (e.g. during busbar transfer when the bus coupler is closed).

33/7

Medium Voltage

actuated purely mechanically; thereare no M classes for these switches.

� Contactors

The standard has not specified anyendurance classes for contactors yet.Commonly used contactors todayhave a mechanical and electricalendurance in the range of 250,000 to1,000,000 operating cycles. They areused wherever switching operationsare performed very frequently, e.g. > once an hour.

3.3 Requirementson Medium-VoltageSwitchgearThe major influences and stress valuesa switchgear assembly is subject toresult from the task and its rank in thedistribution system. These influencingfactors and stresses determine theselection parameters and ratings ofthe switchgear.

3.3.1 Influences andstress values

System parameters

System voltage

It determines the rated voltage of theswitchgear, switching devices andother installed components. Themaximum system voltage at the uppertolerance limit is the deciding factor.

Assigned configuration criteria for switchgear

� Rated voltage Ur

� Rated insulation level Ud; Up

� Rated primary voltage of voltagetransformers Upr


It is characterized by the electricalvalues of peak withstand current Ip(peak value of the initial symmetricalshort-circuit current) and sustainedshort-circuit current Ik. The requiredshort-circuit current level in the sys-tem is predetermined by the dynamicresponse of the loads and the powerquality to be maintained, and deter-mines the making and breakingcapacity and the withstand capabilityof the switching devices and theswitchgear (Table 3.3/1).

Attention: The ratio of peak currentto sustained short-circuit current inthe system can be significantly largerthan the standardized factor Ip/ Ik =2.5 (50 Hz), used for the constructionof the switching devices and theswitchgear. A possible cause, forexample, are motors that feed powerback to the system when a shortcircuit occurs, thus increasing thepeak current significantly.

• •• •• •• •

• •• •• •

• •• •

• •• •

• •• •• •

• •• •

• •• •• •

• •• •

Ambient conditions

System parameters

Rated voltage Neutral earthingShort-circuit current

Load flow

SelectivityProtection functions

Normal current

System protection and measuring

Supplies

Service location

Sector-specific application

Sector-specific operating procedures

Regulations

Measuring

Public power systems

In-plant power generation

Place of installation

Utilities room

Transport

Room climateTemperature

Switching dutiesBusbar transfer

Operation

WorkingInspection

StandardsAssociation guidelines

Cable / overhead lineOvervoltage protectionPower quality

RedundancyTripping timesMetering

Emergency power

Redundancy

Accessibility

Buildings

Installation

AltitudeAir humidity

Switching rateAvailability

Personal protection

Work instructionsMaintenance

Laws

Company regulations

Fig. 3.3/1: Influencing factors and stresses on the switchgear


Assigned configuration criteria for switchgear

Main and earthing circuits – Rated peak withstand current Ip– Rated short-time withstand current Ik

Switching devices – Rated short-circuit making current Ima

– Rated short-circuit breaking current Isc

Current transformers – Rated peak withstand current Ik dyn– Rated short-time thermal current Ith

Table 3.3/1: Configuration criteria for short-circuit current

Normal current and load flow

The normal current refers to currentpaths of the incoming feeders, bus-bar(s) and outgoing consumer feed-ers. Because of the spatial arrange-ment of the panels, the current is alsodistributed and therefore there maybe different rated current values nextto one another along a conductingpath; different values for busbars andfeeders are typical.

Reserves must be planned whendimensioning the switchgear, e.g.

� in accordance with the ambient airtemperature,

� for planned overload or

� temporary overload during faults.

Large cable cross sections or severalparallel cables must be connected forhigh normal currents; the panel con-nection must be designed accordingly.

Assigned configuration criteria forswitchgear

� Rated current of busbar(s) andfeeders

� Number of cables per phase in thepanel (parallel cables)

� Current transformer ratings.

3.4 SiemensMedium-VoltageSwitchgearAs described on page 5/2 in the TIPApplication Manual “Establishment ofBasic Data and Preliminary Planning”,the 8DH switchgear is the right choicefor the majority of applications ininfrastructure projects. In this TIPManual for Draft Planning, we wouldlike to present some advanced prod-ucts and solutions. For more detailedinformation, please contact your localSiemens representative.

33/9

Medium Voltage

Loss of servicecontinuity category

When an accessible compartment of the switchgear is opened …

Type of construction

LSC 1 the busbar and therefore thecomplete switchgear must beisolated.

No partitions within the panel, no panel separation walls toadjacent panels.

LSC 2 LSC 2A the incoming cable must be isolated. The busbar and theadjacent switchgear panels canremain in operation.

Panel separation walls and isolating distance with partition to the busbar.

LSC 2B the incoming cable, the busbar and the adjacent switchgearpanels can remain in operation.

Panel separation walls and isolatingdistance with partition to thebusbar and to the cable.

Type of accessibility to a compartment

Access features Type of construction

Interlock-controlled Opening for normal operation and maintenance, e.g. fusereplacement.

Access is controlled by the construction of the switchgear, i.e.integrated interlocks preventimpermissible opening.

Procedure-based Opening for normal operation or maintenance, e.g. fuse replacement.

Access control via a suitableprocedure (work instruction of theoperator) combined with a lockingdevice (lock).

Tool-based Opening not for normal operationand maintenance, e.g. cabletesting.

Access only with tool for opening,special access procedure (instruc-tion of the operator).

Not accessible Opening not possible / not intended for operator,

opening can destroy the compartment.

This applies generally to the gas-filled compartments of gas-insulatedswitchgear. As the switchgear is maintenance-free and climate-independ-ent, access is neither required nor possible.

The notation IAC A FLR, I and t contains the abbreviations for the following values:

IAC Internal Arc Classification

A Distance between the indicators 300 mm, i.e. installation in rooms with access forauthorized personnel, closed electrical service location.

FLR Access from the front (F), from the sides (L = lateral) and from the rear (R).

I Test current = rated short-circuit breaking current (in kA)

t Arc duration (in s)

Table 3.4/3: Internal arc classification according to IEC 62271-200

Table 3.4/1: Loss of service continuity categories

Table 3.4/2: Accessibility of compartments


Table 3.4/4: Overview of Siemens medium-voltage switchgear

Dis

trib

uti

on

leve

lIn

sula

-ti

on

Typ

e o

fco

nst

ruc-

tio

n

Loss

of

serv

ice

con

tin

uit

yPa

rtit

ion

clas

sIn

tern

al a

rc

clas

sifi

cati

on

*Sw

itch

gea

rty

pe

Bu

sbar

sy

stem

Rate

dvo

ltag

e (k

V)

Rat

ed c

urr

ent,

bu

sbar

(A

)R

ated

cu

rren

t,fe

eder

(A

)

1 s

3 s

Prim

ary

Gas

-in

sula

ted

Exte

ndi

ble

LSC

2B

(pan

els

wit

hou

tH

V H

RC f

use

s)

LSC

2A

(pa

nel

s w

ith

H

V H

RC f

use

s)

PMIA

C A

FLR

31

,5 k

A, 1

sN

XPL

US

CSi

ngl

e1

5

24

.0

31

.5

25

31

.5

25

2,5

00

2,5

00

2,5

00

2,0

00

LSC

2B

(pan

els

wit

hou

tH

V H

RC f

use

s)

LSC

2A

(pa

nel

s w

ith

H

V H

RC f

use

s)

PMIA

C A

FLR

25

kA

, 1s

NX

PLU

S C

Dou

ble

24

25

25

2,5

00

1,2

50

LSC

2B

PMIA

C A

FLR

31

,5 k

A, 1

sN

XPL

US

Sin

gle

40

.53

1.5

31

.52

,50

02

,50

0

LSC

2B

PMIA

C A

FLR

31

,5 k

A, 1

sN

XPL

US

Dou

ble

36

31

.53

1.5

2,5

00

2,5

00

LSC

2B

PMIA

C A

FL

40

kA

, 1s

8D

A1

0Si

ngl

e4

0.5

40

40

4,0

00

2,5

00

LSC

2B

PMIA

C A

FL

40

kA

, 1s

8D

B1

0D

oubl

e4

0.5

40

40

4,0

00

2,5

00

Air

-in

sula

ted

Exte

ndi

ble

LSC

2B

PMIA

C A

FLR

40

kA

, 1s

NX

AIR

Sin

gle

12

40

40

3,1

50

3,1

50

LSC

2B

PMIA

C A

FLR

40

kA

, 1s

NX

AIR

Dou

ble

12

40

40

3,1

50

3,1

50

LSC

2B

PMIA

C A

FLR

25

kA

, 1s

NX

AIR

MSi

ngl

e2

42

52

52

,50

02

,50

0

LSC

2B

PMIA

C A

FLR

25

kA

, 1s

NX

AIR

MD

oubl

e2

42

52

52

,50

02

,50

0

LSC

2B

PMIA

C A

FLR

50

kA

, 1s

NX

AIR

PSi

ngl

e1

55

05

04

,00

04

,00

0

LSC

2B

PMIA

C A

FLR

50

kA

, 1s

NX

AIR

PD

oubl

e1

55

05

04

,00

04

,00

0

LSC

2B

PMIA

C A

FLR

31

,5 k

A, 1

sSI

MO

PRIM

ESi

ngl

e1

7.5

31

.53

1.5

3,1

50

3,1

50

LSC

2A

PMIA

C A

FLR

25

kA

, 1s

8B

T1Si

ngl

e2

42

52

52

,00

02

,00

0

LSC

2B

PMIA

C A

FL

31

,5 k

A, 1

s8

BT2

Sin

gle

36

31

.53

1.5

2,5

00

2,5

00

LSC

1PM

IAC

A F

L 1

6 k

A, 1

s8

BT3

Sin

gle

36

16

16

1,2

50

1,2

50

Seco

nda

ryG

as-

insu

late

dN

on-

exte

ndi

ble

LSC

2B

(pan

els

wit

hou

tH

V H

RC f

use

s)

LSC

2A

(pa

nel

s w

ith

H

V H

RC f

use

s)

PMIA

C A

FL

21

kA

, 1s

8D

J10

Sin

gle

17

.5

24

25

20

20

20

63

0

63

0

63

0

63

0

LSC

2B

(pan

els

wit

hou

tH

V H

RC f

use

s)

LSC

2A

(pa

nel

s w

ith

H

V H

RC f

use

s)

PMIA

C A

FL

21

kA

, 1s

8D

J20

Sin

gle

17

.5

24

25

20

20

20

63

0

63

0

63

0

63

0

Exte

ndi

ble

LSC

2B

(pan

els

wit

hou

tH

V H

RC f

use

s)

LSC

2A

(pa

nel

s w

ith

H

V H

RC f

use

s)

PMIA

C A

FLR

21

kA

, 1s

8D

H1

0Si

ngl

e1

7.5

24

25

20

20

20

1,2

50

1,2

50

1,2

50

1,2

50

Air

-in

sula

ted

Exte

ndi

ble

LSC

2B

(pan

els

wit

hou

tH

V H

RC f

use

s)

LSC

2A

(pa

nel

s w

ith

H

V H

RC f

use

s)

PMIA

C A

FLR

20

kA

, 1s

SIM

OSE

CSi

ngl

e1

7.5

24

25

20

20

20

1,2

50

1,2

50

1,2

50

1,2

50

* M

axim

um

pos

sibl

e IA

C c

lass

ifica

tion

Rat

ed s

ho

rt-t

ime

wit

hst

and

cu

rren

t (k

A)

33/11

Medium Voltage

Performance features

The air-insulated, metal-cladswitchgear type NXAIR is the innova-tion in the switchgear field for thedistribution and process level up to 12 kV, 40 kA, 3150 A.

� Metal-enclosed, metal-clad LSC 2B PM switchgear

� Resistance to internal faults: IAC A FLR 40 kA, 1 s

� Type tests of the circuit-breaker and make-proof earthing switch in the panel

� Cable connection from the front or from the rear

� Bushing-type transformers enableselective shutdown of feeders

� Confinement of internal fault torespective compartment

� Replacement of module and con-nection compartment possible

� Modular contactor panels

NXAIR Rated

voltage kV 7.2 12

frequency Hz 50/60 50/60

short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage kV 20 28*

lightning impulse withstand voltage kV 60 75

short-circuit breaking current max. kA 40 40

short-time withstand current, 3 s max. kA 40 40

short-circuit making current** max. kA 100 100

peak withstand current** max. kA 100 100

normal current of the busbark max. Ak 3,150 3,150

normal current of the feeders

with circuit-breaker max. Ak 3,150 3,150

with switch-disconnector*** max. Ak 200 200

* 42 kV optional ** Values for 50 Hz *** Depending on the rated current of the HV HRC fuses used

Table 3.4/5: Technical data of NXAIR

Fig. 3.4/1: NXAIR panel

H3

H1 H

2

TIP_

NX

AIR

-00

1

W D

All panel types Dimensions in mm

Width W 400 / 600 / 800 / 1,000

Height H1 Standard 2,300

H2 – For higher low-voltage compartment

– For natural ventilation

– With additional compartment for busbar components

2,350

H3 Height of standard low-voltage compartment 2,000

Depth D Single busbar ≤ 31.5 kA, ≤ 2,500 A 1,350

40 kA, 3,150 A 1,450

D Double busbar ≤ 31.5 kA, ≤ 2,500 A 2,850

40 kA, 3,150 A 3,050

Table 3.4/6: Dimensions of NXAIR



The air-insulated, metal-cladswitchgear type NXAIR M is the conse-quent further development of theNXAIR family for use in the distribu-tion and process level up to 24 kV, 25 kA, 2,500 A.





� Bushing-type transformers enableselective shutdown of feeders

� Confinement of internal fault torespective compartment

� Replacement of module and con-nection compartment possible

NXAIR M

H3

H2 H

1

TIP_

NX

AIR

-M-0

01

H4

W D


Width W ≤ 1,600 A 800

2,000, 2,500 A 1,000

Height H1 With standard low-voltage compartment

– For natural ventilation

2,655

H2 Front for standard low-voltage compartment 2,200

H3 – For higher low-voltage compartment 2,550

H4 – With additional compartment for busbar components 2,770

Depth D Single busbar 1,554

Double busbar for back-to-back arrangement 3,,260

Rated

voltage kV 24

frequency Hz 50

short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage kV 50

lightning impulse withstand voltage kV 125

short-circuit breaking current max. kA 25

short-time withstand current, 3 s max. kA 25

short-circuit making current max. kA 63

peak withstand current max. kA 63

normal current of the busbark max. Ak 2,500


with circuit-breaker max. Ak 2,500

with switch-disconnector max. Ak 200*

* Depending on the rated current of the HV HRC fuses used

Table 3.4/7: Technical data of NXAIR M

Table 3.4/8: Dimensions of NXAIR M Fig. 3.4/2: NXAIR M panel

33/13

Medium Voltage


The air-insulated, metal-cladswitchgear type NXAIR P is based onthe construction principles of theNXAIR family and designed for use inthe distribution and process level upto 15 kV, 50 kA, 4000 A.





� Can be delivered as withdrawableor truck-type switchgear

� Bushing-type transformers enableselective shutdown of feeders up to 31.5 kA

� Confinement of internal fault torespective compartment up to 31.5 kA

� Replacement of module and con-nection compartment is possible

� Modular contactor panels

NXAIR P Rated

voltage kV 7.2 12 15

frequency Hz 50/60 50/60 50/60

short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage kV 20 28 35

lightning impulse withstand voltage kV 60 75 95

short-circuit breaking current max. kA 50 50 50

short-time withstand current, 3 s max. kA 50 50 50

short-circuit making current* max. kA 125 125 125

peak withstand current* max. kA 125 125 125

normal current of the busbark max. Ak 4,000 4,000 4,000


with circuit-breaker max. Ak 4,000 4,000 4,000

with vacuum contactor max. Ak 400** 400** –

* Values for 50 Hz** Depending on the rated current of the HV HRC fuses used

D

HA

25-2

688d e

ps

H1

W

H2

H4

H3

Table 3.4/9: Technical data of NXAIR P

Fig. 3.4/3: NXAIR P panel

All panel types (except vacuum contactor panel) Dimensions in mm

Width W ≤ 2,000 A 800

> 2,000 A (for panel ventilation) 1,000

Height H1 Front for standard low-voltage compartment (≤ 3150 A) 2,225

H2 With higher low-voltage compartment 2,485

H3 With standard, top-mounted pressure relief duct 2,550

H4 For forced ventilation 2,710


Double busbar for back-to-back arrangement 3,320

Vacuum contactor panel

Width W 400

Height H1 Front for standard low-voltage compartment (≤ 3150 A) 2,225

H2 With higher low-voltage compartment 2,485

H3 With standard, top-mounted pressure relief duct 2,550

H4 For forced ventilation (400 A) 2,710


Table 3.4/10: Dimensions of NXAIR P

DW

H1

H2

HA

26

-20

24

a ep

s


SIMOPRIME


The air-insulated, metal-cladswitchgear type SIMOPRIME is afactory-assembled, type-tested indoorswitchgear for use in the distributionand process level up to 17.5 kV,40 kA, 3600 A.





� Truck-type design

� Use of block-type or ring-corecurrent transformers

� All switching operations with closed door

� Logical mechanical interlocks

Rated

voltage kV 7.2 12 15 17.5

frequency Hz 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60

short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage kV 20 28* 35 38

lightning impulse withstand voltage kV 60 75 95 95

short-circuit breaking current max. kA 40 40 40 40

short-time withstand current, 3 s max. kA 40 40 40 40

short-circuit making current** max. kA 100 100 100 100

peak withstand current **k max. kA 100 100 100 100

normal current of the busbar max. Ak 3,600 3,600 3,600 3,600


with circuit-breaker max. Ak 3,600 3,600 3,600 3,600

with switch-disconnector max. Ak 200*** 200*** 200*** 200***

with vacuum contactor max. Ak 400*** 400*** – –* 42 kV optional** Values for 50 Hz*** Depending on the rated current of the HV HRC fuses used

All panel types Dimensions in mm≤ 31.5 kA 40 kA

Width W Circuit-breaker panel ≤ 1,250 A 600 800

2,500 A, 3,150 A, 3,600 A 800

Vacuum contactor panel 400

Disconnector panel ≤ 1,250 A 600 800

2,500 A, 3,150 A, 3,600 A 800

Switch-disconnector/ fuse panel 12 kV 600 800

17.5 kV 600 800

Bus sectionalizer/circuit-breaker panel 1,250 A 600 800

≤ 2,500 A, 3,150 A, 3,600 A 800

Bus sectionalizer/bus riser panel ≤ 2,500 A 600 800

3,150 A, 3,600 A 800

Metering panel 600 800

Height H1 With standard low-voltage compartment and IAC 0.1 s 2,200

With standard low-voltage compartment and IAC 1.0 s 2,437

H2 – 1,780

Depth D Standard 1,860

Table 3.4/12: Dimensions of SIMOPRIMEFig. 3.4/4: SIMOPRIME panel

Table 3.4/11: Technical data of SIMOPRIME

33/15

Medium Voltage

W

HA

26

-20

29

a ep

s

D1

H1

H2

D2

8BT1


The air-insulated, cubicle-typeswitchgear type 8BT1 is a factory-assembled, type-tested indoorswitchgear for lower ratings in thedistribution and process level up to 24 kV, 25 kA, 2,000 A.

� Metal-enclosed, LSC 2A PM cubicleswitchgear


� Tested for resistance to internalfaults: IAC A FLR 25 kA, 1 s

� Circuit-breaker panel, fixed-mounted switch-disconnector panel, modular

� Cable connection from the front


� Use of block-type current transformers



� Use of SION vacuum circuit-breakers

Rated

voltage kV 12 24

frequency Hz 50 50

short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage kV 28 50

lightning impulse withstand voltage kV 75 125

short-circuit breaking current max. kA 25 25

short-time withstand current, 3 s max. kA 25 25

short-circuit making current max. kA 63 63

peak withstand current max. kA 63 63

normal current of the busbark max. Ak 2,000 2,000


with circuit-breaker max. Ak 2,000 2,000

or disconnector truck

with switch-disconnector max. Ak 630 A / 200 A* 630 A / 200 A*



7.2/12 kV

Width W For circuit-breaker max. 1,250 A 600

For circuit-breaker 2,000 A 800

For switch-disconnector 600

Height H1 With standard low-voltage compartment 2,050

H2 With cable duct* 2,350

Depth D1 Without low-voltage compartment 1,200

D2 With low-voltage compartment 1,410

24 kV

Width W For circuit-breaker max. 1,250 A 800

For circuit-breaker 2,000 A 1,000

For switch-disconnector 800

Height H1 With standard low-voltage compartment 2,050

H2 With cable duct* 2,350

Depth D1 Without low-voltage compartment 1,200

D2 With low-voltage compartment 1,410

* For 1 s arc duration

Table 3.4/13: Technical data of 8BT1

Fig. 3.4/5: 8BT1 panel Table 3.4/14: Dimensions of 8BT1


8BT2


The air-insulated, metal-cladswitchgear type 8BT2 is a factory-assembled, type-tested indoorswitchgear for use in the distributionand process level up to 36 kV, 25 kA,2,500 A.

� LSC 2B PM switchgear

� Tested for resistance to internalfaults: IAC A FLR 31.5 kA, 1 s






Rated

voltage kV 36

frequency Hz 50/60



short-circuit breaking current max. kA 31.5

short-time withstand current, 3 s max. kA 31.5

short-circuit making current max. kA 80/82

peak withstand current max. kA 80/82

normal current of the busbar max. Ak 2,500



with contactor max. Ak –

with switch-disconnector max. Ak –

D

H

W


Table 3.4/16: Dimensions of 8BT2Fig. 3.4/6: 8BT2 switchgear


Width W 1,550

Height H ≤ 25 kA 2,400

31.5 kA 2,775

Depth D 2,450

33/17

Medium Voltage

8BT3


The air-insulated, cubicle-typeswitchgear type 8BT3 is a factory-assembled, type-tested indoorswitchgear for lower ratings in thedistribution and process level up to 36 kV, 16 kA, 1,250 A.

� LSC 1 switchgear

� Tested for resistance to internalfaults: IAC FLR 16 kA, 1 s

� Circuit-breaker panel, fixed-mounted switch-disconnectorpanel, modular






Rated

voltage kV 36

frequency Hz 50/60



short-circuit breaking current max. kA 16

short-time withstand current, 3 s max. kA 16

short-circuit making current max. kA 40/42

peak withstand current max. kA 40/42

normal current of the busbar max. Ak 1,250



with contactor max. Ak –

with switch-disconnector max. Ak 400*


DW

H


Table 3.4/18: Dimensions of 8BT3Fig. 3.4/7: 8BT3 switchgear


Width W 1,000

Height H 2,400

Depth D 1,450


TIP_

8D

J10

-23

55

_1

H1

W

H2

TIP_

8D

J10

-23

58

_1a

D

� Internal arc classification:IAC A FL 21 kA, 1 s

� No gas work during installation

Advantages:

� Independent of the environmentand climate

� Compact

� Maintenance-free

� High operating and personal safety

� Operational reliability

� Environmentally compatible

� Cost-efficient

Rated

voltage kV 7.2 12 15 17.5 24

frequency Hz 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60

short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage kV 20 28* 36 38 50

lightning impulse withstand voltage kV 60 75 95 95 125

short-time withstand current, 1 s max. kA 25 25 25 25 20

short-time withstand current, 3 s max. kA – 20 20 20 20

short-circuit making current max. kA 25 25 25 25 20

peak withstand current max. kA 63 63 63 63 50

normal current of the ring-main feeders A 630

normal current of the transformer feeders (depending on the HV HRC fuse link)

A 200

* 42 kV / 75 kV according to some national requirements

Fig. 3.4/8: 8DJ10 switchgear

Table 3.4/19: Technical data of 8DJ10

Table 3.4/20: Internal arc classification according to IEC 62271-200

Dimensions Dimensions in mm

Width (module) W Connection method:

2RC + 1T (connection 10) 710

3RC + 1T (connection 71) 1,060

4RC + 2T (connection 62) 1,410

Height H1 Low design 1,360

H2 High design 1,650

Depth D Standard switchgear 775

Switchgear with pressure absorber 880

8DJ10

The gas-insulated switchgear type 8DJ10with switch-disconnectors is used forpower distribution in the secondarydistribution system up to 24 kV. With itsextremely narrow design, block versionswith up to six feeders can be used in alltypes of substations.

Performance features:

� Type-tested according to IEC 62271-200

� Sealed pressure system with SF6filling for the entire service life

� Safe-to-touch enclosure and stan-dardized connections for plug-incable terminations

� Block-type construction, non-extendable

� Three-pole, gas-insulatedswitchgear vessel with three-position switch, for connection of cable plugs

� Operating mechanisms locatedoutside the switchgear vessel, easilyaccessible

� Metal-enclosed, partition class PM

� Loss of service continuity categoryfor switchgear: – without HV HRC fuses: LSC 2B– with HV HRC fuses: LSC 2A

8DJ20

The gas-insulated medium-voltageswitchgear type 8DJ20 is used forpower distribution in the secondarydistribution system up to 24 kV. Ring-main feeders, circuit-breaker feedersand transformer feeders are all part ofa comprehensive product range incompact block-type construction tosatisfy all requirements – also forextreme ambient conditions.





� Block-type construction, non-extendible

� Three-pole, gas-insulated switchgear vessel with three-position switch, for connection of cable plugs

� Operating mechanisms locatedoutside the switchgear vessel, easily accessible

� Metal enclosed, partition class PM

� Loss of service continuity categoryfor switchgear:– without HV HRC fuses: LSC 2B– with HV HRC fuses: LSC 2A

33/19

Medium Voltage

� Internal arc classification:IAC A FL 21 kA, 1 s

� No gas work during installation

Advantages:


� Compact




� Cost-efficient

Rated

voltage kV 7.2 12 15 17.5 24

frequency Hz 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60

short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage

kV 20 28* 36 38 50


short-circuit breaking current for switchgear with circuit-breakers max. kA 20 20 16 16 16





normal current of the ring-main feeders A 630

normal current of the circuit-breakerfeeders

A 250 oder 630

normal current of the transformerfeeders (depending on the HV HRC fuse link)

A 200


TIP_

8D

J20

-LST

-24

20

_1

H1

W

H2

H3

TIP_

8D

J20

-23

37

_4a

D

Fig. 3.4/9: 8DJ20 switchgear

Table 3.4/21: Technical data of 8DJ20

Table 3.4/22: Dimensions of 8DJ20


Width W Number of feeders (in extracts)

2 feeders (e.g. 2RC) 710

3 feeders (e.g. 2RC + 1T) 1,060

4 feeders (e.g. 3RC + 1T, 4RC) 1,410

5 feeders (e.g. 4RC + 1T, 5RC) 1,760

Height H1 Low overall height 1,200

H2 Standard overall height 1,400

H3 High structure (higher frame) 1,760

Option: Low-voltage compartment, compartment height: 400 or 600




Fig. 3.4/10: 8DH10 switchgear Table 3.4/24: Dimensions of 8DH10

8DH10

The gas-insulated medium-voltageswitchgear type 8DH10 is used forpower distribution in secondary andprimary distribution systems up to 24 kV. The product range includesindividual panels such as ring-main,transformer and circuit-breaker panelsor metering panels, as well as panelblocks to satisfy all requirements with thehighest level of operational reliability.





� Single-pole insulated busbar

� Three-pole gas-insulated switchgearvessels with three-position switch,circuit-breaker and earthing switch,for connection of cable plugs

� Operating mechanisms and trans-formers located outside theswitchgear vessel, easily accessible



� Internal arc classification for:– Wall-standing arrangement:

IAC A FL 21 kA, 1 s

– Free-standing arrangement: IAC A FLR 21 kA, 1 s

� No gas work during installation orextension

Advantages:


� Compact



� Operational reliability and securityof investment


� Cost-efficient

TIP_

8D

H-2

27

9_1

H1

H2

W

Rated

voltage kV 7.2 12 15 17.5 24

frequency Hz 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60

short-duration power-frequencywithstand voltage

kV 20 28* 36 38 50


short-circuit breaking current max. kA 25 25 25 25 20





normal current of the busbark A 630 or 1,250

normal current of the feeders A 630 630 630 630 630


TIP_

8D

H-2

28

2_1

H1

H2

W

TIP_

8D

H-2

30

1_1

a

D

Table 3.4/23: Technical data of 8DH10


Width W Ring-main feeders 350

Transformer feeders,

circuit-breaker feeders,bus sectionalizer panels

500

Metering panels 850

Panel blocks 700, 1,050, 1,400

Height H1 Panels without low-voltage compartment 1400

H2 Panels with low-voltage compartment 2,000 or 2,300



33/21

Medium Voltage

TIP_

NX

PLU

S-C

-00

1

H1

H2

W D

D

NXPLUS C

The medium-voltage circuit-breakerswitchgear that made gas insulationwith the proven vacuum switchingtechnology economical in its class –the compact NXPLUS C for secondaryand primary distribution systems up to24 kV, up to 31.5 kA, up to 2,500 A. Itcan also be supplied as double-busbarswitchgear in back-to-back arrange-ment (see Catalog HA35.41).





� Single-pole insulated and screened busbar

� Three-pole gas-insulated switchgearvessels with three-position switchand circuit-breaker, for connectionof cable plugs

� Operating mechanisms and trans-formers are arranged outside theswitchgear vessel, easily accessible



Rated

voltage kV 7.2 12 15 17.5 24

frequency Hz 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60


kV 20 28* 36 38 50


short-circuit breaking current max. kA 31.5 31.5 31.5 25 25

short-time withstand current, 3 s max. kA 31.5 31.5 31.5 25 25



normal current of the busbar max. Ak 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500

normal current of the feeders max. Ak 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,000 2,000


Table 3.4/25: Technical data of NXPLUS C

Table 3.4/26: Dimensions of NXPLUS CFig. 3.4/11: NXPLUS C panel


IAC A FL 31,5 kA, 1 s– Free-standing arrangement:

IAC A FLR 31,5 kA, 1 s

Advantages:

� No gas work during installation or extension

� Independent of the environment


Width W 630 A, 1,000 A, 1,250 A 600

2,000 A, 2,300 A, 2,500 A 1,200

Height H1 Standard design 2,250

H2 For higher low-voltage compartment 2,650

Depth D Wall-standing arrangement 1,100

Free-standing arrangement 1,250

and climate

� Compact


� Safe for operators



� Cost-efficient


Rated

voltage kV 12 24 36 40.5

frequency Hz 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60


kV 28 50 70 50

lightning impulse withstand voltage kV 75 125 170 185

short-circuit breaking current max. kA 40 40 40 40

short-time withstand current, 3 s max. kA 40 40 40 40

short-circuit making current max. kA 100 100 100 100

peak withstand current max. kA 100 100 100 100

normal current of the busbar max. Ak 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000

normal current of the feederse max. Ak 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500

Table 3.4/27: Technical data of 8DA/8DB

Fig. 3.4/12: 8DA (on the left) for single-busbar and 8DB for double-busbar applications Table 3.4/28: Dimensions of 8DA/8DB

TIP_

8D

A-0

01

H

W D1

TIP_

8D

B-0

01

H

W D2

8DA switchgear

8DB switchgear


Width (spacing) W 600

Height H Standard design 2,350

Design with higher low-voltage compartment

2,700

Depth D1 Single-busbar switchgear 1,625

D2 Double-busbar switchgear 2,660

8DA/8DB

The gas-insulated medium-voltage circuit-breaker switchgear up to 40.5 kV with theadvantages of the vacuum switchingtechnology – for a high degree of inde-pendence in all applications. 8DA/8DB10for primary distribution systems up to40.5 kV, 40 kA, up to 4000 A.



� Enclosure with modular standard-ized housings made from corrosion-resistant aluminum alloy


� Operating mechanisms and trans-formers are easily accessible outsidethe enclosure


� Loss of service continuity categoryfor switchgear: LSC 2B

� Internal arc classification: IAC A FL 40 kA 1 s

Advantages:


� Compact

� Low maintenance




� Cost-efficient

33/23

Medium Voltage

NXPLUS

The gas-insulated medium-voltagecircuit-breaker switchgear up to40.5 kV with the advantages of thevacuum switching technology – for ahigh degree of independence in allapplications. NXPLUS for primarydistribution systems up to 40.5 kV, upto 31.5 kA, up to 2,000 A (for double-busbar switchgear up to 2500 A).





� Three-pole gas-insulated modulesfor busbar with three-positiondisconnector, as well as circuit-breaker, for connection of cableplugs

� Interconnection of modules with single-pole insulated and screened module couplings

� Operating mechanisms and trans-formers are arranged outside theswitchgear vessels, easily accessible

� Metal enclosed, partition class PM

Rated

voltage kV 7.2 12 24 36 40.5

frequency Hz 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60


kV 20 28 50 70 85


short-circuit breaking current max. kA 31.5 31.5 31.5 31.5 31.5

short-time withstand current, 3 s max. kA 31.5 31.5 31.5 31.5 31.5



normal current of the busbar max. Ak 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,000


TIP_

NX

PLU

S-0

01

H1

W D1

Table 3.4/29: Technical data of NXPLUS

Fig. 3.4/13: NXPLUS switchgear for single-busbar applications (on the left), NXPLUS switchgear for double-busbar applications (on the right) Table 3.4/30: Dimensions of NXPLUS


Width (spacing) W Feeders up to 1,250 A 600

Height H Switchgear design

H1 Single-busbar switchgear 2,450

H2 Double-busbar switchgear 2,600

Depth D1 Single-busbar switchgear 1,600

D2 Double-busbar switchgear 1,840

NXPLUS switchgear with single busbar NXPLUS switchgear with double busbarTI

P_N

XPL

US_

DSS

-00

1

H2

W D2

� Loss of service continuity category for switchgear: LSC 2B

� Internal arc classification:IAC A FLR 31,5 kA, 1 s

� No gas work during installation orextension

Advantages:


� Compact





� Cost-efficient

TIP_

SIM

-24

07

_1

H1

W

H2


SIMOSEC

The air-insulated medium-voltageswitchgear type SIMOSEC is used forpower distribution in secondary andprimary distribution systems up to 24 kV and up to 1,250 A. The modularproduct range includes individualpanels such as ring-main, transformerand circuit-breaker panels or meteringpanels to fully satisfy all requirementsfor power suppliers and industrialapplications.



� Phases for busbar and cable connec-tion are arranged one behind theother

� Three-pole gas-insulated switching-device modules with three-positiondisconnector, circuit-breaker andearthing switch as sealed pressuresystem with SF6 filling for the entireservice life

� Air-insulated busbar system

� Air-insulated cable connectionsystem, for conventional cablesealing ends


� Loss of service continuity categoryfor switchgear:without HV HRC fuses: LSC 2B

with HV HRC fuses: LSC 2A


IAC A FL 20 kA, 1s– Free-standing arrangement:

IAC A FLR 20 kA, 1 s

� Can be mounted side-by-side and extended as desired

Advantages:

� Compact modular design



� Cost-efficient

Rated

voltage kV 7.2 12 15 17.5 24

frequency Hz 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60


kV 20 28* 36 38 50


short-circuit breaking current max. kA 25 25 25 25 20





normal current of the busbar A 630 or 1,250



TIP_

SIM

-23

93

_2

D

Fig. 3.4/14: SIMOSEC switchgear

Table 3.4/31: Technical data of SIMOSEC

Table 3.4/32: Dimensions of SIMOSEC


Width (spacing) W Ring-main feeders, transformer feeders 375 or 500

Circuit-breaker feeders, bus sectionalizer 750 or 875

Metering panels 750

Height H1 Panels without low-voltage compartment 1,760

H2 Panels without low-voltage compartment 2,100 or 2,300

Depth D Standard 1,230

33/25

Medium Voltage

3.5 From Medium-Voltage Switchgearto TurnkeySolutionsBesides supplying just medium-volt-age switchgear, the Siemens PowerTransmission and Distribution Group(PTD) also provides the engineeringand implementation of turnkey powersupply systems for power supplycompanies, industrial customers andinvestors.

These turnkey solutions combine thestages of design, supply, installationand commissioning of power supplysystems to the hand-over of a com-plete package. The major benefit tothe customer: communication withonly one partner who is responsiblefor the entire project implementation.

The portfolio encompasses standardand turnkey solutions as well asindividual special solutions such as:

� Power quality solutions

� – SIPLINK solutions for load flowcontrol in 2 and/or 4-quadrantoperation

� – Active and passive compensationsystems for low-voltage andmedium-voltage applications

� – Line filters

� Generator switchgear

� Photovoltaic systems coupled to the power system

� Hydro-electric systems

� Wind power stations

Some examples from the solutionsportfolio of Siemens PTD M aredescribed below.

Dimensioning of compensationsystems for medium voltage

Today, electrical energy can be con-verted into every conceivable form ofpower, whereby the technology usedreduces the quality of the power to agreater of lesser extent. The use ofcompensation systems is becomingincreasingly necessary in order tocomply with the standards and guide-lines or to meet the specificationsrelevant for electricity rates. Compen-sation systems help to

� reduce losses,

� save electricity costs and

� improve the voltage quality.

To improve the quality of the power,compensation systems for medium-voltage applications are adapted tothe technological processes of individ-ual, exposed consumers or consumergroups or entire subsystems. Themajor focus is on system compatibilityof all electrical consumers.

In addition to knowledge of the powersupply system and local conditions atthe place of installation, the prerequi-site for correct dimensioning is infor-mation on the present rated andoperating data of the consumers to becompensated, as well as a definitionof the actual goals that are to beachieved with the compensationmeasures. Special measuring instru-ments for data acquisition, powerful

simulation programs and the manyyears of experience then enablecustomer-specific solutions to bedimensioned.

With just a few details from the “Com-pensation systems for medium volt-age” checklist (marked with an *), it isalready possible to estimate costs forthe compensation measures duringthe planning stage, or depending onthe amount of information available,to submit tenders for compensationsystems based on a sound technicalknowledge.

Your contact for Europe includingGermany: Jürgen Sauer PTD M 34, TurnkeyStromversorgungsanlagenDynamostraße 4 61850 Mannheim Tel.: +49 6 21 4 56-32 80Fax: +49 6 21 4 56-32 89Mobile: +49 1 72 6 32 31 44 [email protected]

Contact: Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbHPower Quality Management Direct Business Division E-mail:[email protected]

Fig. 3.5/1: Application examples


Checklist

Compensation systems for medium voltage

Project name:

Contractor:

Environmental conditions:

Place of installation (country)

Site altitude (above sea level) � < 1,000 m � m

Pollution

Ambient air temperature (min./max.)

Air humidity

Resistance to earthquakes

Rated system voltage*

Operating voltage*

System frequency*

Short-circuit current or short-circuit capacity* (min./max.)

Audio-frequency remote control � Yes Frequency: ......... Hz

� No

Harmonic pre-stressing � Yes 03rd h. ..... 05th h. ..... 07th h. ..... 11th h. .....of the supply system

13th h. ..... 17th h. ..... 19th .h. ..... _.h. .....

� None

33/27

Medium Voltage

Checklist

Industrial sector* � Power supplier � Steel industry

� Oil and gas � Chemical

� Cement � Mining

�

Characteristic of the consumer to be compensated � Constant � Fluctuating

� Stochastic � Dynamic

�

Power/operating data of the consumers to be � Data sheets compensated � Measurement results

Consumers to be compensated* Type: Power: cos ϕ:

Type: Power: cos ϕ:

Relevant producers of harmonics* Type: Power: cos ϕ:

� 6-pulse � 12-pulse �

� Thyristors � Diodes

Type: Power: cos ϕ:

� 6-pulse � 12-pulse �

� Thyristors � Diodes

� None

Objective of the compensation* � Improvement of the average cos ϕ

� Nominal cos ϕ: Time base:

� Improvement of the momentary cos ϕ

� Nominal cos ϕ: Time base:

� Ensuring the motor startup

� Reduction of harmonics

� Voltage stabilization

� Flicker compensation

� Inrush current limitation

� Reduction of capacitive charging power

Standard or guideline to be complied with

for the voltage quality


I>

I>

I> ∆ I ∆ I

∆ I

∆ I

∆ I

∆ I

I> I>

I>

I>

I>

MSMS

I> I> ∆ I ∆ I

∆ I

∆ I

∆ I

∆ I

I> I>

I>>

I>

I>

MSMS

>

>>

>

>

>

>

>

>

∆ I∆ I

Supply 1 Supply 2

Emergency connection



Busbar protection through reverse interlocking via additional definite-time overcurrentprotection or integrated backup definite-time overcurrent protection (for )

Line differential protection: SIPROTEC 7SD600 or 7SD610

Fig. 3.6/1: Radial network with a low extension

Note: Only the protection relays that are relevant for the topology have been shown

3.6 Protection ofMedium-VoltageSwitchgearThis section provides informationabout the selection and use of SIPROTEC protective relays in the fieldof power system protection. Theseprotective devices have the task toreliably detect faults in the powersystem and selectively disconnect theaffected substation component. Nomatter whether you want to protectcables, switchgear or busbars, SIPROTEC protective relays alwaysoffer optimal and economical solutions.

Basic requirements on numericalprotection relays:

� Complete digital measuring andanalysis for precise measurementsthroughout the entire life cycle

� Integrated self-monitoring withalarm contact for low maintenancecosts and higher device availability

� Integrated fault recording and a powerful analysis program (e.g. SIGRA) for fast fault clearing and signaling, thus reducing downtimes in the event of a line fault

� One operating program (e.g. DIGSI)for all protective devices, providinga higher degree of operating safetyand savings in staff training costs

� Parameter set changeover forautomatic adaptation of the pickup values to different supplyconditions

� Application-oriented functionaladaptations, e.g. by means of CFClogic (Continuous Function Chart)using the DIGSI operator tool

� Serial communications interface foreasy integration into a controlsystem or for the data export to

other applications (e.g. powermanagement)

3.6.1 Protection Configu-ration in a Radial NetworkRadial networks distribute power fromthe infeed points to the consumers.However, protective tripping switchesoff all downstream consumers. Thesecan be supplied from another sideafter switchovers (closing of emer-gency connections).

A radial network is easy to protectdue to the single-sided supply andbecause its topology is not meshed.However, there are still differentsolution options. Generally, a gradingof non-directional overcurrent-timeprotection relays is sufficient. In thisnetwork structure, the substationbusbars can also be protected bymeans of reverse interlocking withvery short tripping times.

The disadvantage of this solution isthe increase in the tripping times inthe direction of the system supply, thelocation of the highest short-circuitpower. The increasing grading timealso limits the number of subordinatesubstations. At the same time, theupstream overcurrent-time protectionrelays act as backup protection forsubordinate devices.

The overcurrent-time protectionshould be equipped with an I> (ANSICode 51) and an I>> (ANSI Code 50)zone. Thermal overload protectionshould have parameterization optionsfor signaling or tripping, dependingon the requirement.

Differential protection devices withvery short tripping times offer analternative protection concept. Linedifferential protection relays protectthe connections between the substa-

33/29

Medium Voltage

stations to be tripped in first-zonetime. The non-directional overcurrent-time protection function contained inthese relays can be utilized for abackup protection concept, but notfor busbar protection via reverseinterlocking. This suggests the use ofSIPROTEC 7UT6 or 7SS60 for busbarprotection, in which case backupprotection also requires consideration.

Alternatively, ring networks can beprotected by means of directionalcomparison protection. Directionalovercurrent-time protection relays areused for this purpose; they requirevoltage transformers as well as acommunication link to the respectivepartner device at the opposite end ofthe line. Busbar protection can beimplemented with these relays viareverse interlocking. A backup protec-tion concept can also be set up

M

I>

I>

I>

I>

>

>

> I>I>>

>

I>I>>

I>I>>

I>I>>

I>I>>

Line differential protection: SIPROTEC 7SD61 with backup overcurrent-time protection

Busbar differential protection: SIPROTEC 7UT6

Directional overcurrent-time protection: SIPROTEC 7SJ62

Supply 1 Supply 2

Fig. 3.6/2: Ring network with a low extension

Note: Only the protection relays that are relevant for the topology have been shown

3.6.2 ProtectionConfiguration in a ClosedRing Network

Ring networks are used frequently asthey permanently supply all stationswith power from two sides. Thisenables faults on connecting cables tobe selectively cleared without havingto disconnect consumers.

The supply from two or more sidesplaces high demands on the protec-tion concept, as the fault current canflow in both directions, i.e. non-directional overcurrent-time protec-tion relays are not suitable as themain protection measure.

Ring networks are generally protectedby means of differential protectionrelays. This enables faults on theconnecting cables between the sub-

tions in first-zone time. The backupprotection concept must be consid-ered separately. Under no circum-stances should the overcurrent-timeprotection/backup protection func-tion, which is integrated in the differ-ential protection devices, be used forthe same network section, as in thatcase hardware redundancy would notbe ensured.

Note:Differential protection is less commonin radial networks because of costreasons. It is only used in the processindustry in order to ensure short faultclearing times and therefore preventprocess interruption whenever possible.

Of course, a radial network can alsobe protected by means of Z< distanceprotection relays when the distancebetween neighboring stations permitsa correct grading of the distancezones. These devices would be able toclear the majority of faults in first-zone time. The principle of reverseinterlocking is also suitable here toprotect the busbars. Backup protec-tion is also implicitly provided throughthe extended zone grading of subordi-nate network sections.

Proposed devices:

I> = SIPROTEC 7SJ61, 7SJ62

ΔI = SIPROTEC 7SD600 or 7SD610

Z< = SIPROTEC 7SA6


through extended zone grading ofadjacent network sections. Directionalcomparison protection is mainly usedin power supply systems for infra-structure and industry.

Of course, ring networks can also beprotected by means of distance pro-tection relays when the distancebetween neighboring substationspermits a clear grading of the distancezones. These devices would clear themajority of faults in first-zone time.The principle of reverse interlocking isalso suitable here to protect thebusbars. Backup protection is implic-itly contained through the extendedzone grading of adjacent networksections. Distance protection relaysalso require voltage transformers.Distance protection is mainly used inthe ring networks of distributionsystem operators.

Proposed devices:

ΔI = line differential protection SIPROTEC 7SD610

ΔI = busbar differential protection SIPROTEC 7UT6

I> = SIPROTEC 7SJ62

3.6.3 ProtectionConfiguration for OpenRing Networks

Open ring networks have the follow-ing characteristics: circuit-breakers areinstalled in the system supplies. Thesubstations in the open ring areequipped with switch-disconnectors.As a rule, they are not equipped withprotective devices, as switch-discon-nectors cannot break short-circuitcurrents. Only outgoing transformerfeeders are equipped with fuses.Regarding the protective equipmentfor the system supply, the sameapplies as for the radial network.

3.6.4 Protection ofParallel Lines

The directional overcurrent-timeprotection determines the direction ofthe current flow from the phase angleof the current and voltage, and offersadditional directional overcurrentzones besides the non-directionalovercurrent-time protection. Thispermits different current thresholdsand delay times for the two directions.Main applications are parallel lines aswell as lines supplied from both sides.

Proposed devices:

I> = SIPROTEC 7SJ62

I> = SIPROTEC 7SJ61 or 7SJ600,7SJ602 or 7SJ80

Differential protection relays with veryshort tripping times offer an alterna-tive protection concept for parallellines. Line differential protectionrelays protect the interconnectionsbetween the substations in first-zonetime. The backup protection conceptmust be considered separately.

Note:Differential protection is used mainlyin the process industry in order toensure short fault clearing times andtherefore prevent a process interrup-tion whenever possible.

t = 0ms

>

>

Supply direction

Overcurrent-time protection SIPROTEC 7SJ61

Line differential protection SIPROTEC 7SD610

Grafik 3.6/4: Protection concept for parallel supply with differential protection relays

t = 0ms

t = 0ms t = 0ms

t = 300ms t = 300ms

>

> >

> >

>

>Overcurrent-time protection SIPROTEC (7SJ61 or 7SJ600)

Directional overcurrent-time protection SIPROTEC (7SJ62)

Supply direction

Fig. 3.6/3: Protection concept for parallel supply with definite-time overcurrent protection

�

�

33/31

Medium Voltage

3.6.5 Earth-FaultDetection in an Isolated orCompensated System

An earth fault is not a short circuit.Operation is first of all continued. Anearth fault must be signaled andcleared as quickly as possible. Theearth fault is located by devices withwattmetric earth-fault directiondetection, such as SIPROTEC 7SJ602.In meshed systems, transient earth-fault relays such as SIPROTEC 7SN60are used to locate the earth fault.

The earth currents can be detectedwith a Holmgreen circuit or a cable-type current transformer. The Holm-green circuit is suitable for higherearth-fault currents (> 40 A) and atransformation ratio of the feedertransformers (< 150/1), that is not toohigh.

3.6.6 Earth-FaultProtection for Low-Resistance NeutralEarthing

In a system with a low-resistanceearthed neutral, every earth fault is ashort circuit. The pickup value for theearth-fault protection must beselected so that it is suitably sensitiveto reliably trip every earth fault.SIPROTEC line protection relays canoptionally be selected with the appro-priate earth-fault protection. In theoverhead line system, approximately70% of the earth faults are success-fully cleared without major opera-tional interruptions through auto-matic reclosing (AR).

3.6.7 TransformerProtection

Transformer differential protection isused for selective, instantaneousprotection of transformers. As thefeeding line lengths of the transform-ers on the high and low voltage sidesare usually not too long, the sum-mated current can be formed in onedevice and not in separate devices asin line differential protection.

Modern transformer differentialprotection relays no longer requireany secondary interface circuits tosimulate current effects imposed bythe transformer. This is computed bythe numerical protection device.

The protection device should also beequipped with an inrush detection toensure safe connection of the trans-former.

Proposed devices:

ΔI = SIPROTEC 7UT612 for two-winding transformers

ΔI = SIPROTEC 7UT613 for three-winding transformers

Power directionForward

Backward

Wattmetric directional earth-fault relay

Fig. 3.6/5: Earth-fault protection1

2

Transformer differential protectionSIPROTEC 7UT612 for two-winding transformersSIPROTEC 7UT613 for three-winding transformers

Fig. 3.6/6: Transformer protection


3.6.8 Machine Protection

Generators < 1 MW

If a cable-type current transformer isavailable for sensitive earth-faultprotection, a 7SJ602 or 7SK80 devicewith a separate earth-current inputcan be used instead of the SIPROTEC7SJ600.

Generators up to 5 MW

A SIPROTEC 7UM61 protection relay is used for larger generators. With itsfrequency adjustment from 11 to 60 Hz, the protection is also fullyeffective when the generator isstarted up. If a generator differentialprotection is required, a SIPROTEC7UM62 protection relay should beused.

Note:Two voltage transformers in a V-connection are sufficient.

MV

Fig. 3.6/7: Protection concept for very small generators with solidly earthed neutral

Panel

Fig. 3.6/8: Protection concept for small generators

�

I> = SIPROTEC 7SJ602 Catalog SIP 3.3 Order no. E50001-K4403-A131-A2

I> = SIPROTEC 7SJ61Catalog SIP 3.1 Order no. E50001-K4403-A111-A5

I> = SIPROTEC 7SJ600Catalog SIP 3.2 Order no. E50001-K4403-A121-A1

Machine protection SIPROTEC 7UM61Catalog SIP 6.1 Order no. E50001-K4406-A111-A1

SIPROTEC 7SJ61-64Catalog SIP 3.1 Order no. E50001-K4403-A111-A5

Further information:

ΔI = SIPROTEC 7SD600 Catalog SIP 5.2 Order no. E50001-K4405-A121-A2

ΔI = SIPROTEC 7SD610Catalog SIP 5.4 Order no. E50001-K4405-A141-A2

Z< = SIPROTEC 7SA6Catalog SIP 4.3 Order no. E50001-K4404-A131-A2

ΔI = Busbar differential protection SIPROTEC 7UT6Catalog SIP 5.6 Order no. E50001-K4405-A161-A2

I> = SIPROTEC 7SJ62 Catalog SIP 3.1 Order no. E50001-K4403-A111-A5

Transformers

4.1 Distribution Transformers

4.2 Control and Isolating Transformers

chapter 4

4 Transformers


4.1 DistributionTransformersA safe power supply requires a welldeveloped supply system with high-capacity transformers. Whereverdistribution transformers in theimmediate vicinity of people mustguarantee highest safety, cast-resintransformers are the perfect solution.Cast-resin transformers have made itpossible to avoid the restrictions ofliquid-filled transformers, while stillpreserving tried and tested propertiessuch as operational reliability andlong service life.

In the TIP Application Manual on theEstablishment of Basic Data andPreliminary Planning, essentialinformation for the design and config-uration of distribution transformers isdescribed in Section 5.2, p. 5/12 ff. Inaddition to this section, please seebelow for the most important require-ments for the site of installation.

Requirements on the site ofinstallation

Cast-resin transformers place thelowest requirements on the site ofinstallation. This arises from theprovisions for groundwater protec-tion, fire protection and conservationof functions in DIN VDE 0101, DINVDE 0100-718 and of Elt Bau VO.Below is a comparison of transformersof different designs on the basis ofthese provisions, as valid in 1997.

Table 4.1/2: Protective measures for fire protection and conservation of functions in accordance withDIN VDE 0101

Table 4.1/1: Protective measures for water protection in accordance with DIN VDE 0101

Trans-formerdesign

Type ofcooling inaccordancewithEN 60076-2

General In isolated electricaloperating areas

Outdoor installations

Mineraloil * O a Oil sumps und collectingpits

b Discharge of liquid fromthe collecting pit must beprevented

c Water Resources Act andthe state ordinances areto be observed

Impermeable floorswith ground platesare permissible as oilsumps und collectingpit with max. 3transformers and lessthan 1,000 liters ofliquid per transformer

No oil sumps andcollecting pits undercertain conditions

Complete text ofVDE 0101, Section5.4.2.5 C, must betaken intoconsideration

= Transfor-mers withsilicone oilor synth.ester **

K As with coolant code O

Cast-resindry-typetrans-formers

A No measures required

* or burning point of the cooling and insulation liquid ≤ 300 °C

** or burning point of the cooling and insulation liquid > 300 °C

Coolant code General Outdoor installations

O a Rooms fire-proof F90A, isolated;

b Doors fire-retardant T30;

c Doors leading outside fire-resistant

d Oil sumps and collecting pits arranged so that fire doesnot spread; except for installation in isolated electricaloperating areas with max. 3 transformers and less than1,000 liters of liquid per transformer;

e Fast working protective equipment

a Sufficient distances

or

b Fire-proof partitions

K As with coolant code O a, b and c are not necessary if e isfulfilled

No measures required

A As with coolant code K, but without d No measures required

Table 4.1/3: Environment Categories, Climate Categories and Fire Safety Categories in accordance withIEC 60076-11

44/3

Transformers

Environment Categories,Climate Categories andFire Safety Categories

IEC 60076-11 defines EnvironmentCategories, Climate Categories andFire Safety Categories, which take intoconsideration the various operatingconditions at the site of installation.The Environment Category (E) takesinto account air humidity, precipita-tion and pollution. The Climate Cate-gory (C) takes into account the lowestambient temperature. It is thus also ameasure of the crack resistance of thecast-resin impregnation. The FireSafety Category (F) takes into accountthe possible consequences of fire.

Important!In accordance with IEC 60076-11 orDIN 42523 the required class may bedefined by the operator.

GEAFOL transformers fulfill therequirements of the highest definedclasses:

� Environment Category E2� Climate Category C2� Fire Safety Category F1

Temperature of the cooling air

Transformers are designed for thefollowing values of the cooling air inaccordance with the relevantstandards:

� Maximum 40 °C� Daily average 30 °C� Annual average 20 °C

Table 4.1/4: System capacity dependingon the ambient temperature

Under normal operation this meansnormal service life consumption isattained. The average annual tempera-ture and the capacity in particular aredecisive for service life consumption.Ambient temperatures deviating fromthis affect the load capacity of thesystem.

Special installation conditions

Extreme conditions on site are to betaken into consideration whenplanning the system:

� Coating and prevailing tempera-tures are relevant for use in atropical climate.

� For use at an altitude of over1,000 m above sea level, a specialdesign with regard to warming andinsulation level is necessary(see IEC 60076-11).

� In the event of increased mechani-cal strain – use in a ship, excavator,earthquake region, etc. – structuralsupport may be required, e.g.propping of the top yokes.

Environment Category

Class E0 No precipitation, pollution negligible

Class E1 Occasional precipitation, pollution possible to a limited extent

Class E2 Frequent precipitation or pollution, also both at the same time

Climate Category

Class C1 Indoor installation not below –5 °C

Class C2 Outdoor installation down to –25 °C

Fire Safety Category

Class F0 Limiting of the fire risk is not envisaged.

Class F1 The properties of the transformer mean the fire risk is limited.

Ambienttemperature(annual average)

Capacity

–20 °C 124 %

–10 °C 118 %

0 °C 112 %

+10 °C 106 %

+20 °C 100 %

+30 °C 93 %

c

b aShock-hazard protection

The cast-resin surface of the trans-former winding is not safe to touchduring operation. Hence, protectionagainst accidental touching is neces-sary. Various measures taken at thetime of installation of the transformerin an electrical operating area ensureshock-hazard protection, e.g. thefitting of a guard strip (Fig. 4.1/2) orgrid (Fig. 4.1/3).

Examples of designFig. 4.1/2 and 4.1/3 show examples oftypes of protection against accidentaltouching.

For the distances A, B and C thefollowing rule applies:

� Minimum distance (Table 4.1/3)plus

� 30 mm safety margin (tried andtested dimension) plus

� Assembly distance (depending onspace required).

Safe clearance D (Fig. 4.1/3) isrequired for separation with coverstrips, chains or ropes, mounted at a


height of 1,100 to 1,300 mm. For Um,the following applies:

� 12 kV = 500 mm� 24 kV = 500 mm� 36 kV = 525 mm

Safe clearance E (Fig. 4.1/3) isrequired for a grid height of1800 mm. For Um, the followingapplies:

� 12 kV = 215 mm� 24 kV = 315 mm� 36 kV = 425 mm

and max. 40 mm mesh size forwire-mesh doors or guards.

Safe clearance D and E in accordancewith DIN VDE 0101.

Room division betweentransformers

When several cast-resin transformersare arranged in one room (Fig. 4.1/2and 4.1/3), room division is not stipu-lated, but this is normally done using

a simple, non-flammable partition.Partitioning has clear advantages iftransformers supply different net-works; if one transformer has to beisolated, the other one can remain inoperation.

Table 4.1/5: Minimum distances around GEAFOL transformers

Fig. 4.1/1: Minimum distances around GEAFOL transformers

Maximum voltage*)of the equipment Um

Rated, withstand, lightningstroke, impulse voltage*) LI

Minimumdistance

(see Fig. 4.1/1) List 1 List 2 a b c

kV kV kV mm mm mm

12 – 75 120 **) 50

24 95 – 160 **) 80

24 – 125 220 **) 100

36 45 – 270 **) 120

36 – 170 320 **) 160

*) see DIN EN 60076-3 (VDE 0532 T3);**) distance b = distance a, if h.v. tapping here; otherwise: distance b = distance c

Minimum distances

Further information:Siemens AG, Power Transmissionand Distribution (ed.): GEAFOL cast-resin transformers: Planning Notes,Order No. E50001-U413-A47-V2

44/5

Transformers

Full wall

13

00 1

80

0

CB

D

A

Fig. 4.1/2: Example of a guard strip

Full wall

18

00

CB

E

A

Fig. 4.1/3: Example of a grid


4.2 Controland IsolatingTransformers

4.2.1 Single- andThree-phase Dry-typeTransformers

Areas of application

� Control transformers in theconstruction of plants and processcontrol equipment

� Matching transformers formanufacturing plants

� Isolating and safety isolatingtransformers for electricalequipment

� Transformers in productionmachines

� Associated transformers forcommunication technology,medical engineering and buildinginstallations

� Transformers for drive systems

In order to ensure the correct voltagein every situation, the right trans-former is needed. SIRIUS dry-typetransformers are reliable, functionally

safely under very varied conditionsthroughout the world. The rangecomprises:

� Power range 25 VA to 2 MVA

� Voltage range 1 V to 3.6 kV

� Current range 1 A to 20 kA

Standards/regulations

SIRIUS one- and three-phasetransformers < 16 kVA are categorizedas isolating, control and linetransformers in accordance withEN 61558-2-4, -2-2, -2-1 or safetyisolating, control and linetransformers in accordance withEN 61558-2-6, -2-2, -2-1 orautotransformers in accordance withEN 61558-2-13 with selectable inputand output voltages

Note:In the case of SIRIUS transformers,line transformers with ≤ 50 V on theoutput side are always designed assafety isolating transformers.

SIRIUS one- and three-phase powertransformers > 16 kVA can be used asmatching transformers with aninput/output voltage in accordancewith DIN VDE 0532-6 and as match-ing, auto- or converter transformers inaccordance with DIN VDE 0532-6 withselectable input and output voltages.

SIRIUS dry-type transformers provideoptimal protection with high permissi-ble ambient temperatures up to 40 °Cor 55 °C, high short-time rating in thecase of control transformers, a fuse-less design and their safety standard“Safety inside“ EN 61558.

For more technical data on the Internetsee www.siemens.com/sidac

One- and three-phase dry-typetransformers < 16 kVA

EN 61558-2-6, -2-4, -2-2, -2-1, -2-13

The standard EN 61558 with the VDEclassification VDE 0570 is the German-

language version of the internationalstandard IEC 61558 (Safety of powertransformers, power supply units andsimilar) and has completely replacedthe older standards VDE 0550 andVDE 0551.

These changes have resulted instricter conditions for production andtesting for some transformers. WithSELV* (exposed, maximum 50 V AC or120 V DC), transformers for generaluse always have double or reinforcedinsulations, i.e. these transformersare exclusively safety isolating trans-formers. Furthermore, all trans-formers are supplied with instructionsfor protective elements which can beused to protect them against shortcircuit und overload.

One- and three-phase dry-typetransformers > 16 kVA

DIN VDE 0532-6

Area of applicationIn industrial machines, process engi-neering, heating and air conditioningtechnology, etc. for feeding controland signaling circuits, if

� several electromagnetic consumers(e.g. contactors) are to becontrolled,

� control and signaling devices areused outside the control cabinet,

� the operating voltage of theconsumer is different to that whichis available, as well as for

� voltage matching for machines andsystems with electrical isolation oras an autotransformer, or

� in general for voltage matching ofelectrical equipment, e.g. incommunication technology, medicalengineering and buildinginstallations.

Fig. 4.2/1: SIRIUS dry-type transformers

* Safety Extra-Low voltage

Table 4.2/1 SIRIUS transformers

44/7

Transformers

� In drive engineering, specialconverter transformers are used forvoltage matching and as auto-transformers when infeed/feedbackmodules are used

� Special transformers are used forrail vehicles, ships and containerloading bridges, wind power andsolar energy.

Important properties of one- andthree-phase dry-type transformers

� High short-time rating of SIRIUScontrol transformers: lowertransformer-rated power with alarger number of contactors

� Suitable for “fuseless design“:the low inrush on the primary sidemeans “circuit-breakers for motorprotection“ can also be used

� CUUS-approved for the US andCanada

Characteristics

� Rated power Pn (continuousoperation)

depending on:

– frequency AC 50 Hz … 60 Hz

– degree of protection IP00

– installation altitude up to 1,000 mabove sea level and

– ambient temperature ta,type-dependent 40 °C or 55 °C.

Referring to the ambient temperature,the parameter Pn is a characteristic ofthe thermal load capacity. Installationand operating conditions that deviatefrom this affect the permissible con-tinuous load by the consumers (seeFig. 4.2/1).

Short-time rating PshorttThe most important selection criterionfor control transformers is their short-time rating Pshortt. This is required for


switching on electromagnetic loads,e.g. contactors with high makingcapacity in relation to the holdingpower. In accordance withEN 61558-2-2 “Particular require-ments for control transformers“ theoutput voltage with this load shouldnot drop more than 5% in relation tothe rated voltage in order to ensuresafe switching. Depending on theirapplication, SIRIUS control transform-ers < 16 kVA are optimized for highshort-time rating with comparativelylow rated power and thus small size

Inrush currentSIRUS transformers in the powerrange < 16 kVA have been designedfor protective equipment whichprovides the transformers with reliableprotection in the event of short circuitor overload.

Optimal protection is provided by theSIRIUS standard circuit-breakers 3RVand 3VF. Thus, the transformers areprotected on the primary side againstboth short circuits and overload,without the risk of false tripping onstartup. The low inrush current, the

short-circuit current and the thermalload capacity on overload arematched to the tripping characteris-tics of the circuit-breakers.

It is also possible to protect the trans-formers on the secondary side againstshort circuits or overload with circuit-breakers or with miniature circuit-breakers with C characteristics.

Note:The specified primary-side circuit-breakers are for protecting theprimary side of transformers in theevent of short circuit und overload onthe secondary side. In the event of apossible short circuit on the feederlines between the protective deviceand the primary side of the trans-former, the rated short-circuit break-ing capacity of the circuit-breakermust be taken into account withregard to the maximum possiblecurrent at the place of installation.

Configuration assistant ASIST

ASIST is a PC program for selectingcontrol transformers available inGerman, English and Danish.

EN 61558-2-2 stipulates that theshort-time rating must be entered onthe rating plate only if power factorcos phi = 0.5 of the load. The short-time rating of control transformersdepends essentially on cos phi of theload, however. It increases with lowerpower factors in particular. It is thusall the more important to calculatethe exact short-time rating with therelevant cos phi. Using the PC pro-gram ASIST as a configuration assis-tant reduces the time it takes tocalculate the required type size to aminimum and guarantees that thecontrol transformer is technologicallyand economically optimal.

The current version of the ASISTprogram can be ordered on the Inter-

net and downloaded fromwww.siemens.com/sidac–> Support –> Tools & Downloads

4.2.2 Non-StabilizedDC 24 V Power Supplies

Area of application

Non-stabilized 24 V DC power suppliesare used to

� supply general electrical loads,

� feed control circuits,

� provide a power supply forelectronic controllers.

Note:They meet the requirements in accor-dance with EN 61131-2 “Programma-ble controllers – Equipment require-ments and tests“ and are, besidesother applications, also suitable forSIMATIC.

Selection/overview

SIRIUS power supplies provide non-stabilized direct voltage of 24 V DC onthe basis of single-phase transformeror three-phase safety isolating trans-formers with series-connected recti-fiers and smoothing capacitor.

Function

SIRIUS power supplies meet therequirements in accordance withEN 61131-2, depending on the loading(idling to rated current) and irrespec-tive of the fluctuation of the supplyvoltage (+6% to –10% in accordancewith IEC 60038). The electronic con-troller is supplied with the permissibleoperating voltage also in the event offluctuation of these parameters with-out the necessity, depending on theload and network conditions, of alsohaving to select relevant tapping onthe transformer to raise or lower theoutput direct voltage. In the event of a

Fig. 4.2/1: Load characteristics: permissibletransformer continuous load inrelation to the ambient temperatureand the installation height

n zul.

n

Installation altitude [x 1,000 m above sea level]

1,10NSF0_00141c

0 1 2 3 4 5 60,8

0,9

1,0

Ambient temperature

n zul.

n

NSF0_00142c

0 10 20 30 40 50 600,6

0,8

1,0

1,2

80°C

= 55 °C/H

1,4

a

= 40 °C/Ha

= 40 °C/Ba

Ripplefactor

< 5 %

< 5 %

< 5 %

< 5 %

< 5 %

48,3 %

< 5 %

Rated outputvoltage

AC V

115 ... 415

115 ... 415

230 ... 415

200 ... 600

400 ... 415

230 or 400

400

Rated outputcurrent/ratedpower

A/W

1 ... 3,5 A

2,5 ... 15 A

1,5 ... 10 A

15 ... 150 A

25, 35 A

50 ... 500 W

4 ... 25 A

Phases

1

1

1

3

3

1

3

Rated outputvoltage in acc. w.EN 61131-2suitable forSIMATIC systems

DC V

24

24

24

24

24

24

30-27-24

Connection

screw-type/slip-onterminal

screw-type/slip-on orcage clampterminal

screw-type/slip-onor cageclamp





Installation

on standardmountingrail

screw-typeand/ortop-hat railinstallation

screw-typeand/or onstandard

screw-typeinstallation




SIRIUS power suppliesNon-Stabilized Power Supplies

Version

Filtered

4AV21/23

4AV20/22/24/26

4AV4

4AV3

4AV5

Unfiltered

4AV98

4AV96

cURus

yes

no

partly

no

no

approval

Table 4.2/2: SIRIUS power supplies

* Functional extra-low voltage.

44/9

Transformers

higher power requirement, any num-ber of devices of the same type can beswitched in parallel. Here the totalcurrent may not exceed 90% of theindividual rated currents.,

Layout

SIRIUS power supplies are one- orthree-phase transformers with series-connected rectifiers in a 2-pulse (B2)or 6-pulse (B6) bridge circuit andsmoothing capacitor. They correspondto safety class I.

The safety isolating transformers usedare laid out in accordance withEN 61558-2-6 and make it possible tosafely isolate SELV and FELV* controlcircuits from other control circuits.They are fully impregnated in poly-ester resin to protect against harmfulenvironmental factors.

SIRIUS power supplies are:

� Suitable for protection by standardcircuit-breakers for fuseless design

� Fitted with additional earthterminals for easy earthing of thecontrol circuit by means of adetachable connection directly tothe equipment

� Easy to install with freely accessiblemounting holes or rail snap-onmounting

� At the output terminal to damphigher-frequency overvoltageswired with varistors and MKT capac-itors

� Available for the IEC standardvoltages of 230 / 400 V and inmulti-voltage design that can beconnected to the most commonsystem voltages worldwide up to600 V.

Properties

The robust design means the powersupplies have a very high reliability.They prove to be extremely stableagainst the influence of externalsystem disturbances and have adampening effect on electromagneticinterference. They are also well-suitedfor supplying capacitive loads, sinceconnecting these consumers causesonly minor voltage dips.

Protective equipment

In order to ensure short circuit,overload and shock-hazard protection,conductors between the outputterminals of the power supply and theconsumer must show negligible lineimpedance. Further details are to befound in DIN VDE 0100 (Erection ofpower installations with rated volt-ages below 1,000 V) Part 410,Part 520 in particular Section 525 andPart 610.

Supplementary capacitors for thethree-phase model (aluminumelectrolyte)

3-phase power supplies are availablewith supplementary capacitors uponrequest. Thus the values in the“Selection and order data” areattained. The back-up time applieswhere U1 = U1N – 10%


Power Generation

chapter 55.1 Grid-connected

Photovoltaic (PV) Systems

5.2 Basis for the Use of UPS


5.1 Grid-ConnectedPhotovoltaic (PV)SystemsAlternative power generation con-cepts are becoming increasinglyimportant as the energy reservesdecrease and the cost of electricity isconstantly rising. Photovoltaic sys-tems convert sunlight directly intoelectrical energy without emitting anypollution, thus increasing indepen-dence from expensive fossil fuels.Government sponsorship programsand improvements in performance aremaking photovoltaic (PV) systemsmore and more interesting for inves-tors. Above-average returns can beachieved by feeding solar power intothe grid.

Basics

Typically a PV system is made up ofthe following components:

� Solar generator

� Cabling

� Inverter

� Feed-in meter

� Connection to the local grid

Processes

Sunlight can be absorbed by solarcells and converted into electricalenergy. Direct current will be produ-ced by the solar cells. Several solarcells connected form a solar panel.Panels connected in series are calledstrings. All strings, connected parallel,form the solar generator. The inver-ters convert the direct current fromthe solar generator into alternatingcurrent which will be fed into thepublic grid. Optimal engineeringforms the basis for a highly efficienctand reliable PV system.

Requirements

While planning solar systems, civil andelectrical requirements must be takeninto consideration, as previsions forphotovoltaic systems will rarely havebeen made originally, when thebuilding was planned. For years,“Siemens Solar Projects” has beendeveloping civil and electrical solu-tions for solar power plants, resultingin a broad experience with all kinds ofsystems

The following factors directlyinfluence the efficiency, during theplanning and implementation of a PVsystem and therefore influence theprofitability.

� System location (high solar irradiation)

� Orientation and tilt of the PV system

� Quality of the products (optimallyconfigured)

� Optimal engineering(electrical/civil)

Available systems

� Facade system

� Roof system

� Flat roof installation

� Custom solutions for special systems

Photo 5.1/1: PV system integrated in the facade

Photo 5.1/2: Installation of a PV system on theroof of a building

55/3

Power Generation

Planning guidelines

The following points have to beclarified when planning a grid-connec-ted PV system:

� The configuration and orientation(solar irradiation)

� Clarity about the type of solarpower system

� – The total installed power of thesystem, depending on investmentpossibilities and the available area

– Creation of a financing package

– Static proof of the load carryingcapacity of the roof or facade

– Electrical and civil engineering

– Clarification of the feed-in possibi-lity and registration at the localgrid operator

As a rule, roof and facade systems arefed 3-phase into the low-voltagepower system of the local grid. Thetype of grid feed-in should be clarifiedindividually with the local grid opera-tor.

Turnkey solutions

Siemens provides efficient and relia-ble system solutions for turnkeysupply of solar power systems; thismeans the supply of grid-connectedPV systems, including the planning,purchasing and engineering and theacceptance of works performed.

Siemens supports the planning

process with ...

� Advice

� Concept creation

500

1,080 Y

Solar panel

Specially developed solarpanel clamp

1411

46

80

3

Ø6

6

90°90°

Detail view Yof solar panel clamp

X

Side view ofWorld Cup stadium

Detail side view Xof World Cup stadium

Fig. 5.1/1: Example of a special mounting solutions for fastening the support structure on a stadium roof (World Cup soccer stadium in Nuremberg)

Photo 5.1/3: Example of a special mountingsolutions for fastening the supportstructure on a stadium roof

GT6

1

L1L2L3NPE

2 3 4 5 6 7 8A

= =

≈ ≈

A = 35 mm

Cable sizes:

Siemens master/slave inverter unitSinvert Solar 2x60

26 modules 26 modules 25 modules 25 modules 25 modules 25 modules 25 modules 25 modules

2

B = 70 mm 2

GT6 GT6 GT6 GT6 GT6 GT6 GT6

A

B

A

A

B

A

A

Fig. 5.1/2: Systematic representation for the configuration of a grid-connected PV system

Contact:Siemens Solar ProjectsTobias WittmannPTD M 3 M, Marketing & InnovationMozartstraße 31c91052 Erlangen, Germany+49 91 31 7-3 45 [email protected]/solar

Photovoltaic supportInformation about the current remu-neration for supplies, sponsorshipprograms and allowances is availablefrom the Kreditanstalt für Wiederauf-bau (Development Loan Corporation)at www.kfw.de/ or from the localpower distribution network operator.


� Creation of tender specifications

� Calculation of profitability

� Support during the preparation of afinancing concept

� Provision of system solutions

Based on many years of experience inthe implementation of PV systemscoupled to the power system,Siemens can provide the followingsystem solutions:

� Lightweight flat roof solar system

� Building integrated solar powersystem (BIPV)

� SUNIT™ roof-mounted system

� Solar system integrated in thefacade

� SolarPark™ solar canopy

A SUNIT solar power system consistsof for example solar panels, Siemensinverter(s), switches, cabling, moun-ting systems and their installationmanuals. This product family can besupplied in various configurations fortiled, flat or corrugated sheet roofs orfacades.

www.siemens.com/solar

GT =

generator terminal box

55/5

Power Generation

Line faults Time e.g. IEC 62040-3 UPS solution Ableiter-Lösung

1. Power failures > 10 msVFD

Voltage + FrequencyDependent

Classification 3, passivestandby operation

(offline)

–

2. Voltage fluctuations < 16 ms –

3. Voltage peaks 4 ... 16 ms –

4. Undervoltages Continuous VIVoltage +

Independent

Classification 2, lineinteractive operation

–

5. Overvoltages Continuous –

6. Lightning strikes Sporadic

VFIVoltage +

FrequencyIndependent

Classification 1, double-conversion operation

(online)

Lightning andovervoltage protection

(IEC 60364-5-534)7. Surge < 4 ms

8. Frequency fluctuations Sporadic –

9. Voltage distortion (burst) Periodic –

10. Voltage harmonics Continuous –

Table 5.2/1: Line faults and UPS classification according to international standard (source: [2])

5.2 Basis for theUse of UPSThe use of a UPS system is for theprotection of sensitive consumers inthe general power supply system(GPS) and to ensure that they cancontinue to operate during powerfailures [1]. The notes in this sectionrefer to static UPS systems whereelectronic components influence thevoltage. The international standardIEC 62040-3 describes the classifica-tion for static UPS systems and definesthe tests for the associated classifica-tion. The UPS classification focuses onthe behavior during line faults and thequality of the load supply (Table5.2/1).

The requirements of the systemintegration in accordance with TotallyIntegrated Power must be satisfied byan (input-side) frequency- and vol-tage-independent load supply throughdouble-transformer UPS devices (so-called online devices with double-conversion operation). In this context,

the distributed use of plug-in devicescan be excluded from the planning.

A CE marking in accordance withDirective 73/23/EEC for low-voltagesystems and 89/336/EEC for electro-magnetic compatibility is required foroperation of UPS devices within theEuropean Community. These regula-tions have been included in the inter-national standards for safety require-ments (IEC 62040-1-1 for operation in easily accessible rooms and IEC 62040-1-2 for operation in closedrooms) as well as in the EMC require-ments (IEC 62040-2).

The special features of the UPS thathave to be taken into account duringthe planning and operation haveresulted in separate UPS-specificcharacteristics having to be definedthat go beyond the IEC 60950 stan-dard for the safety of IT facilities. Thebasic schematic structure of a UPScomprises:

� A mains-supplied input

� The possibility of switching to aback-up system

� The dedicated power supply via theDC link

� The charging function for the DC linkaccumulators

� The ability to control elements of thepower electronics

� The influence on the supplied loadsvia IT connections

� Load supply via the inverters

These factors result in numerousinterdependencies and operatingmodes that must be taken intoaccount during the planning.

Care should also be taken whenplanning extensions to the UPS sys-tem. These include:

� Power supply input and systemperturbations

� Battery, battery monitoring and DClink

� (Manual) bypasses, UPS output andload


5.2.1 Power Supply Input

The following must be consideredduring the planning phase:

� Input voltage range without switch-over to battery operation

� Maximum permissible input currentfor rectifiers (charging operation,efficiency, power factor, connectinglead, line-side fusing, etc.)

� Separate bypass input and feedbackprotection

� Rectifier circuit, system perturba-tions and input power factor(dimensioning of emergency gene-rating sets)

The rectifier has the task of buildingup the DC link. The inverter is suppliedand the energy storage module char-ged with a direct voltage that is asconstant as possible. If special batterychargers or charging converters areused in the UPS, it must be deter-mined whether the charging current issufficient to recharge the connectedtemporary storage module within areasonable time. A broad input vol-tage range is useful for weak orfluctuating networks, especially forlow voltages, in order to avoid fre-quent switchover to battery opera-tion.

Typical rectifier circuits for three-phase networks are 6-pulse or 12-pulse bridge circuits with diodes,thyristors or more recently also withtransistors (Fig. 5.2/2).

Input voltage range and maximuminput current of the UPS are typicalparameters that characterize thepower capability of the rectifier.Fluctuations can already occur in thepublic power supply of the networkoperator, in a range between +10%and –10% of the rated voltage (accor-ding to IEC 60038; +6% / –10% appliesprovisionally until 2008). If line losses

Battery fuse

Battery switch disconnector QS 9

Battery switch disconnector

Battery fuse

Battery cabinet

Remotesignaling

Switch disconnector QS 1

Sicherung

Rectifier Inverter Transformer

Electronic bypass switch

Switch disconnector QS 3

Switch disconnector QS 2

Switch dis-connector QS 4 Consumer

InterfacesSoftwareoption

Mainsystem

Back-upsystem

Fig. 5.2/1: UPS block diagram for MASTERGUARD S III series

� Redundancy and availability

� Construction, installation andenvironmental conditions

� Extensions, options and accessories

� IT and communication interfaces,signaling and load tripping

� Telemonitoring, maintenance andservice

There is no standard approach for UPSengineering. Planning notes for theindividual points are not a recipe howto proceed and are not a substitute forconsulting our Siemens engineeringpromoters. Every project has its ownboundary conditions that need to beadhered to, and for weighting indivi-dual parameters appropriately, aniterative planning and implementa-tion process involving the customerand the contracting engineering firmshould be considered.

System perturbations and separateinput networks are much more impor-tant for a large, central three-phasecurrent UPS system than for one-phase UPS devices in 19-inch cabinets.On the other hand, environmental

conditions such as noise, EMC, wasteheat and battery gassing are moreimportant in office and computerenvironments. As in this manual theemphasis is on commercial, institutio-nal and industrial buildings withsensitive consumers, the devices to beconsidered can be limited to three-phase UPS devices (380/400/415 Vand 50/60 Hz) with an output powergreater than 10 kVA. This correspondsto the MASTERGUARD UPS devices ofthe C, D and S III series installed inseparate operating rooms.

55/7

Power Generation

of approx. –4% also occur in theconsumer system, then the UPSshould have an input voltage range of+10% / –14% or better. The DC linkcurrent supplied by the rectifier mustbe sufficient to supply the inverterwith power at the lowest permissibleinput voltage without discharging thebattery. For this reasons, specifica-tions for the part-load operation canbe helpful for the operation of UPSdevices in weak power systems. Thecabling for the UPS input and outputmust be dimensioned appropriatelyfor the input currents and the cablelengths. Recommended and maxi-mum possible conductor cross-sec-tions should be specified for theconnection.

Please note that higher currents mayflow through a separate bypass con-nection in order to trip fuses in theoutgoing circuit via the electronicbypass. With UPS devices of largepower, it must be clarified whetherthe manual bypass is already integra-ted in the device as standard, orwhether it has to be installed in aseparate cabinet. It is also possible toseparate the input networks or inte-grate emergency generators without anetwork switchover upstream of theUPS via suitable, separate connectionpossibilities on the UPS. The all-polediagrams (Fig. 5.2/3) for the UPSconnection are important for this. Thegrounding and switching conditionsupstream and downstream of the UPSmust be considered for the planning,for example, does the spatial assign-ment of the main ground bus (MGB)between the system supply and theUPS output have to be taken intoaccount.

Emergency generators upstream ofthe UPS require special considerationso that the interaction between UPSand generator functions correctly. It isimportant that the rectifier of the UPSand the characteristic of the generator

Fig. 5.2/2: Rectifier configuration for MASTERGUARD S III series with 12-pulse circuit and filter

THDV = 8% SIII series 6-pulse rectifier SIII series 12-pulse rectifier D series

Generator KUPS = 1.6 KUPS = 0.8 KUPS = 0.6

xd“ = 8% DF = 1.6 DF = 1 DF = 1

xd“ = 14% DF = 2.8 DF = 1.4 DF = 1.05

xd“ = 20% DF = 4 DF = 2 DF = 1.5

Fig. 5.2/2: Rectifier configuration for MASTERGUARD S III series with 12-pulse circuit and filter

match. The UPS and generator manu-facturers should provide a joint solu-tion. A simple aid is the dimensioningfactor (DF), which determines theratio between the rated apparentpower of the generator SGen and theapparent power of the UPS at theinput SUPS:

DF = SGen / SUPS

The boundary condition must be

SSGen ≥ SUPS

The dimensioning factor is defined as

DF = xd“ x KUPS / THDV

i.e. a generator should be selected forwhich the following applies:

SGen ≥ DF x SUPS

where

xd“ = subtransient reactance

of the generator (to be obtained fromthe manufacturer)

KUPS = UPS factor

THDV = permissible voltage distortionin the UPS input network (Total Har-monic Distortion)

Whereas 8% is a typical value for theTHDV when further consumers are tobe supplied in the input network, theUPS factor depends on the UPS recti-fier (Table 5.2/2).


5.2.2 Battery, BatteryMonitoring and DC LinkThe connection of an energy storagemodule in the UPS DC link is a majordifference between a UPS and avoltage stabilizer or a frequencyconverter. At present, battery systemsare generally used in UPS systems forcost-performance reasons. Currentalternatives are rotating mechanicalenergy storage modules (flywheel)and storage capacitors (Supercap);however, for cost reasons, they canonly be used for short interruptions(< 1 min), until a generator hasstarted up. The fuel cell can also beoperated as power generator in theDC link, but requires a further bufferstorage for the start-up phase.The fuel cell should therefore becompared with corresponding dieselgenerators upstream of the UPS.

The following factors are a simplifica-tion of what has to be considered forthe availability of the battery storageand the uninterrupted integrationwhen a fault occurs in the rectifiersupply:

� DC link voltage and inverter supply

� Battery type, battery life and spatialrequirements

� Capacity and required stored energytime

� Discharging and charging

� Monitoring system

The DC link voltage is a base value forthe circuit design of a three-phaseUPS. An inverter output voltage whichis as sinusoidal as possible is achievedeither via a much higher DC voltage atthe inverter input or through the useof expensive inverter transformers.

Thanks to the latest developments in

semiconductor electronics and the

associated control possibilities, low

battery voltages can also be raised

through so-called boosters (DC/DC

converters). Additional benefits of

controllable DC link electronics are the

charging characteristic that can be set

to the battery type and the easier

possibilities provided for a battery

test.

The following are mainly used for

static UPS systems:

� Sealed lead-acid batteries contai-

ning an electrolyte, e.g. incorpora-

ted in a gel or fleece; also called

maintenance-free battery (VRLA =

Valve-Regulated Lead Acid)

��

Fig. 5.2/3: All-pole diagrams for the connection of the S III and D series

55/9

Power Generation

� Encapsulated lead-acid batteriesthat can be refilled; therefore alsocalled low-maintenance battery

� Nickel-cadmium batteries (NiCd)that can be refilled with electrolyte;high resistance to corrosion (seealso www.eurobat.org)

Typical factors that influence theselection of the battery type:

� Space requirements, installation

� Service life

� Ambient temperature

� Cyclic strength and suitability forhigh current loads

� Ease of maintenance

� Price

Because of their high price, NiCdbatteries are usually only used underextreme climatic conditions, e.g. inartic or tropical regions, when serviceand maintenance is unreliable or forpossible exhaustive discharge over alonger period. In Central Europe andNorth America, the majority of sys-tems are stationary using lead-acidbatteries. Services, which operatorsshould have contractually agreed fortheir UPS systems, as well as monito-ring systems are a precaution againstbattery failures such as high-resi-stance collapses, short-circuits or evenfire hazard.

To be able to determine the suitabilityof a battery block type, the planningengineer needs information about thedesired stored energy time for theassociated output power, about thenominal voltage in the DC link and theend-point voltage. In actual UPSoperation, monitoring is performed bythe MASTERGUARD UPS devices of theC, D and S III series so that there is aload-dependent determination of theend-point voltage (to avoid exhaus-

tive discharge during long powerfailures and low load), and also totake account of load changes duringbattery operation.

5.2.3 UPS Output andLoad

The reliable supply of the connectedconsumers with faultless alternatingvoltage that causes as little disturban-ces as possible is the task of thecontrollable output electronics, suchas the inverter and electronic bypass.Therefore, the load requirementsduring reference conditions must betaken into account for UPS dimensio-ning.

These are:

� Active power

� Power factor

� Apparent power

� Overload capability

� Voltage stability

� Phase angle precision

Additional considerations about thepower system configuration, subdistri-bution, back-up and behavior duringload-side faults are also part of theplanning.

The inverter configuration with IGBTswith pulse width modulation anddigital closed-loop control (Fig. 5.2/4)has established itself for static, three-phase current UPS systems.

As described earlier, modern compo-nents with high switching frequenciesenable a reduction in the size of filterelements and/or elimination of aninverter output transformer; prerequi-site is that the controller is also equip-ped with high-speed digital signalprocessors and real-time algorithms.In addition to an improvement in theefficiency, flexibility advantages withregard to the load requirements canalso be utilized.

The different consumers can producetypical effects on the voltage quality:

� Electric arc furnaces, electric for-ging and welding can cause fluctua-ting currents.

Fig. 5.2/4: UPS inverter configuration with IGBTs, output transformer and filter


��

�

�

��

��

�

� �

��

�

�

�

ϕ

�

��

��

��

� �

��

�

��

ϕ

��

��

� �

� ��

Fig. 5.2/5: Current-voltage phase relationships for different simple loads

� Single-phase consumers can causeimbalanced loading in three-phasesupplies.

� Non-linear loads such as PC swit-ched-mode power supplies, dim-mers or controlled drives produceundesired harmonics.

� Switches and relays can also causefaults in the output network.

The non-linear loads and the asymme-tric distribution of consumers result incurrent load on the N conductor in thethree-phase network. The load on theN conductor can even be greater thanon a phase, and therefore the cross-section of the N conductor should beoverdimensioned for safety reasons(factor of 1.7 compared with thephase maximum). Care should alwaysbe taken when laying the powercables to ensure that no electromag-netic effects, e.g. on data lines, causeinterference. The phase displacementbetween voltage and current mustalso be taken into account.

Equivalent circuit diagrams withohmic, capacitive and inductiveresistances (Fig. 5.2/5) for all consum-ers connected to the UPS can becombined by the planning engineerinto a phase analysis. At the sametime, an appropriate description orgraphics should be available for theUPS (Fig. 5.2/6).

If used for the UPS, the transformerand the output filter componentshave a major effect on the curve form.As can be seen in Fig. 5.2/6, withoverdimensioning, conventional UPStechnology can more than compen-sate for the limitation to a powerfactor of cos ϕ = 0.8 in the area ofinductive loads, but the connectedconsumers still have to be selectedwith care for capacitive loads.

Electronic bypass

With MASTERGUARD UPS devices, theelectronic bypass switches the loadsupply to the back-up line. There is asecond system input for this. Theelectronic bypass switch is also called

the static bypass switch (SBS). If twoseparate input systems are not availa-ble, the back-up input can be connec-ted to the rectifier input. The switch-over is made without interruption asstatic electronic components, such asthyristors, are used. The following aretypical occurrences that can result in aswitchover to the back-up system:

� UPS fault in the double-transformersection, such as inverter fault,impermissible AC components inthe DC link, short-circuits in the DClink, etc.

� Overload, so that the inverter couldbe damaged.

� The end-point voltage is reachedduring battery operation due to apower failure at the rectifier input;the UPS tries to switch over to theback-up system.

In all cases, the UPS control checkswhether the back-up system is availa-ble in a suitable voltage andfrequency quality and is synchronous

55/11

Power Generation

with the UPS output, before a switch-over is performed. The electronicbypass switch does not have an effecton the quality of the back-up systemsupply to the load.

Under certain circumstances, theelectronic bypass can also be used fora parameterized and deliberate loadsupply without loading the powerelectronics in the double-transformerpath. This reduces the losses duringUPS operation; however, the connec-ted consumers must also have atolerance for the voltage and fre-quency fluctuations that is appropri-ate for the parameterization of thisUPS operating mode.

Manual bypass

The electronics can be bypassed viathe back-up system for maintenanceand service work on the UPS. To dothis, the UPS must be switched from

double-transformer mode throughelectronic bypass mode to the manualbypass mode. Also for this reason, itis necessary to consult the operatinginstructions before any switchingoperation on the UPS is performed.

5.2.4 Interfaces andCommunication

The voltage and current for the inputsupply and for the load response canbe monitored with the UPS. For thisreason, human-machine communica-tion possibilities are important andalso that they be automated ashuman-machine signaling in thecomputer network. As the boundaryconditions for the UPS operation areconstantly changing, they have to bejust as closely monitored as the bat-tery function, which has to supply fullpower when the normal supply sys-tem fails.

��

�

� ��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

ϕ

ϕϕ

ϕ

Fig. 5.2/6: Phasor diagram for the output cos phi range of various UPS output configurations

� Human machine interface

Optical and acoustic signals are thesimple signaling methods of a UPS.Each UPS is equipped with acousticwarning signals and indicator lights,usually colored LEDs. A combinationof LEDs and LCDs is being increasinglyused in the larger UPS devices. TheLEDs clearly indicate when somethingis wrong, so that the user should readout the LCDs to obtain detailed infor-mation about the irregularities. Gra-phic displays have the advantage ofclarity compared with scrollingthrough alphanumeric displays line byline. Make sure that the display is nottoo high or too low, otherwise theviewing angle is unfavorable.

Control keys are required on theoperator panel to acknowledge mes-sages, handle display and controlmenus and enter parameters. SomeUPSs can be switched to bypass modeand back again via a key (which maybe mechanically locked or electroni-cally protected), and also reparamete-rized via input keys.

� Machine-machine interfaces

Interfacing the UPS to a data network,improves the versatility, ease ofoperation, clarity and informationcontent of displays. There should atleast be a serial PC connection possibi-lity (USB or RS232) for the UPS. Twoseparate interfaces are better or eventhe possibility of a network connec-tion via an SNMP* adapter.

* Simple Network Management Protocol


as possible in order to avoid compen-sation effects.

Depending on the project, furthercommunication options via industrialbus systems such as PROFIBUS DP,J-bus, ModBus, CAN, etc. are requiredin industrial environments. For thispurpose, the UPS is integrated in theback-up of the system. Contact inputsor outputs can be programmed in theUPS for special communicationrequirements. Boundary conditionssuch as the voltage and currentavailable at the so-called contactinterface are important parameters forthe configuration. In accordance withthe requirements of the internationalstandard IEC 62040-1, the UPSprovides safety-relevant contacts fora rapid shutdown and the feedbackprotection via the system input for thestatic bypass switch.

Outlets, 230 VInput 230 V

USB

Slot

SNMP adapterplugable

RESET

10/100 BASE-T


USB

Slot

RS 232sub D


USB

Slot

RS 232sub D

a) b) c)

Fig. 5.2/7: UPS communications interfaces

a) Serial communication directly with a PC

b) Serial communication with server/client network shutdown of clients

c) Network connection via SNMP adapter and server/client shutdown

� Fault-tolerant solutions in whichredundant systems play an essentialrole

The cost of the most sophisticatedsoftware combinations is normallyonly a fraction of the total invest-ment.

An important point for the monitoringsoftware is the energy stored in thebattery. Automatically performedbattery tests are used to check whet-her the battery system can ensure therequired backup of the load supply.The software test algorithms must beset so that there are no undesiredshutdowns or switchovers even ifthere are battery problems. In addi-tion, individual battery blocks cannowadays be monitored [3]. This isuseful as battery blocks connected inseries should work as homogenously

The UPS then communicates with theadapter, which can have a separatedata memory. This functions in thenetwork as an intelligent networkcomponent that sends and receivesdata and, if necessary, forwards it tothe UPS. Browser-supported commu-nication and the sending of e-mailsare possible, for example, with Telnet,Web, FTP and SNMP server functiona-lity (see Fig. 5.2/7). Vice versa, theUPS commands and parameterizationchanges can also be received via thenetwork connection.

The basis for the data traffic is theUPS-specific software. This includes:

� Individual computer workstationshutdown in Windows and Unixsystems

� Controlled server-client shutdown

55/13

Power Generation

5.2.5 RedundancyConcepts and Availability

Redundancy generally describes thepresence of several objects with thesame function, content or of the sametype. Multiple availability is intendedto reduce the risk of failure for asystem. A distinction is made in thefollowing between internal redun-dancy, device redundancy and systemredundancy.

Internal redundancy

A typical example of the internalredundancy of a UPS device is theventilation system. In generouslyconfigured UPS devices, one or morefans can fail without the operationhaving to be restricted. However, thefan failure should still be signaled.More frequently, there is a limitedinternal redundancy. This means thatthe functioning fans can cool thepower electronics in the UPS duringpart-load operation, but this fanperformance is not sufficient for full-load operation.

As the switchover of the UPS to thestatic bypass path is also included in

the availability calculations (see Ref.[4]), the static switch is also oftenconsidered to be internally redundant.However, this is only true to a limitedextent, as voltage corrections are nolonger possible during bypass opera-tion.

Device redundancy

With special demands on the availabi-lity, it is not sufficient to switch to thesupply system via the static bypasswhen a fault occurs. The same appliesif not all UPS devices can be accessedfrom the load for maintenance orrepair work.

In true parallel operation, several UPSdevices supply the connected loadssimultaneously. It is important thatthe UPS devices work in harmony viathe parallel connection and that thereis an optimum load distribution.Overloads can occur if there is nocontrol, which can result in the failureof the device with the lowest impe-dance. Fig. 5.2/8 shows an (n+1)redundancy for n = 2. In this context,it is irrelevant which of the threedevices is replaced by the other two,when a fault occurs, as long as the

power for each device does notexceed the rated power. This meansthat the output power of each UPSmay not exceed 66% of the ratedpower, as long as all three devicessupply the load.

The synchronization of externalbypass switches with the integratedbypass switches during parallel opera-tion provides a simple improvementof the short-circuit properties via theelectronic bypass paths. As the cur-rent carrying capacity increases as asquare of the rated current, a doub-ling of the bypass current pathsresults in a quadrupling of the short-circuit working capacity.

System redundancy

In the IT sector and especially withoperators of data centers, the mirro-ring of as many components as possi-ble is offered as a high-availabilitysolution. Networks and networkcomponents are set up and operatedin parallel. Computers, servers anddisc systems are installed twice andoperated in a defined RAID* mode. Allcomponents also have two powersupply units, so that the power supply

Fig. 5.2/8: Parallel connection for (2+1) redundancy and common, external electronic bypass switchwith manual bypass* RAID: Redundant Array of Independent Discs


supply is also redundant. The powersupply can be backed up via twoindependent sources by means of an(n+n) UPS parallel system. Fig. 5.2/9shows the so-called “Tier IV” structureaccording to Ref. [5]; STS is a statictransfer switch which enables aswitchover to be made to a secondsupply source when a fault occurs fordevices with only one system input.However, it must be noted that eachadditional component in theavailability calculation also brings inits own probability of a fault.

An important tool for theimplementation of a functioningsystem redundancy with regard to thepowersupply is a suitable high availabilitycontrol software solution. If, forexample, one of the two parallel UPSsystems fails, it is not necessary thatan automatic shutdown be performedin another IT area. On the other hand,the boundary conditions that resultfrom linked systems must also betaken into consideration, even whenno problem occurs in your own area.

5.2.6 Construction,Installation andEnvironmental Conditions

An alternative that is becomingincreasingly important especially for areplacement, is the use of UPSsystems in separate, air-conditionedcontainers. If, for example, the initialUPS system was installed during thebuilding phase, before the stairs orthe ceilings were built, then asubsequent replacement with a largersystem can cause problems. Thereforeinformation about the shipmentdimensions and the use of hand-pallettrucks and fork-lift trucks should beprovided.

The specifications for ventilation, safefloor loads, accessibility for serviceand maintenance purposes and therequirements of the variousconnections, such as supply inputs,battery connection, load connectionand communication connections,must be taken into account for theUPS installation. The necessaryclearances between UPS and ceilingmust be taken into account and, ifrequired, the specifications withregard to the degree of protection;this also applies to for the inflow ofthe cooling air. Dust filters andmechanical protection equipmentsuch as screens and covers or specialenclosures can help achieve thedesired IP protection class accordingto IEC 60529. An example of such anapplication is the so-called “Ice Box”(Fig. 5.2/10), in which a UPS of theMASTERGUARD C series is installed in

��

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

��

�!� �!�

"��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��#��

��

��

��

�!� �!�

"��

"��$ %� �� &��'��% � ��%� "�� "#&��'��%� �� '��'��%� �� %� �� (��#��

��#��

��

Fig. 5.2/9: Block diagram for the infrastructure configuration according to “Tier IV”

55/15

Power Generation

A water-cooled outer casing can beused as a special option for the largeUPS devices of the MASTERGUARD S IIIseries so that the room air conditio-ning and ventilation can be dispensedwith. However, the appropriate waterpipes will then have to be installed.

The installation altitude is also ofinterest for ventilation and cooling, sothat a power derating in accordancewith the manufacturer specificationsmay have to be taken into account foraltitudes greater than 1,000 m abovesea level.

��

Fig. 5.2/10: MASTERGUARD C series with integrated battery in an air-conditioned cabinet for use incritical environments


5.2.7 Planning of Serviceand Operation

When planning a UPS system, thefollowing operating factors must beconsidered in detail:

� Energy costs

� Supply quality

� Operational safety

The required reliability and efficiencyof the power supply must be ensuredduring operation over a long term. If adata center operator is only concer-ned with the operation and mainte-nance of the UPS system after thelegal warranty period has expired, thisattitude is subject to the followingrisks:

� No or inadequate support whenproblems occur

� Delivery times for spare parts (e.g.wear due to incorrect operation,pollution due to environmentalconditions or external causes)

� Extended response times andincorrect responses when a faultoccurs

� Reduction of the service life of theequipment

An operator can avoid these dangersif expert support is already agreedupon during commissioning. Thelong-term guarantee of UPS operationcan roughly be divided into threeareas:

� Regular inspections and service

� Maintenance contracts of variouskinds concerning the scope ofperformance and response times

� Round-the-clock solutions withtelemonitoring service

Inspections and service

Environmental influences such asdust, moisture, temperature or possi-ble air flow can cause problems notonly for the UPS, but also for theassociated battery system duringoperation. Dust can reduce the insula-tion distances for electronic compo-nents and impede the air supply orheat dissipation. Moisture can causecorrosion or short circuits. Tempera-ture influences the service life of thebattery blocks and components (seeRef. [6]), whereby the temperatureitself is influenced by the air flow, theactual operating state and otherfactors.

With closed storage battery systems,the battery level must be checkedregularly as the battery loses electro-lyte through gassing during opera-tion. The battery manufacturersgenerally recommend that this also bechecked for valve-regulated, sealedlead-acid batteries. Individual blockmonitoring can be very useful hereand help reduce the inspection costs.It is recommended that half-yearlyinspections be performed after thestart of operation.

During inspections, the battery andthe environmental conditions arechecked and any pollution removed. Ifnecessary, advice on the use of airfilters or air conditioning can be givenduring the service call. It may beuseful for the data center operator tohave a stock of spare parts whenthere is no maintenance contract.

Maintenance contracts

As the availability of the power supplyin the data center is affected by theavailability of the UPS system, unfore-seen problems should have as littleeffect as possible on the operation.For this reason, maintenance con-tracts are usually made with a defini-

tion of the response time and withfixed agreements for the serviceassignments of the maintenancepersonnel when faults occur and forinspections. In that case, the mainte-nance service can be entrusted withstock keeping of spare parts. Theservice personnel must be on sitequickly and also be well trained.They should already be acquaintedwith the UPS system and its systemenvironment at the customer’s so thatany repairs can be carried out quicklyon-site.

Round-the-clock solutions

Optimum support is provided by aseparate signaling option directlyfrom the UPS to the service center.The UPS then signals every problemand fault to a monitoring center andto the service technician who has theresponsibility for the specific system(see Ref. [7]). The technician can thenread out the data stored by the UPSusing remote diagnostics, comparethis with a UPS type-specific databaseand initiate appropriate action. Messa-ges can, of course, be forwarded toauthorized personnel at the datacenter operator’s. The accumulatedoperating data is also sent from theUPS memory to the monitoring centerat regular intervals and collectedthere. Any problems that are develo-ping can be detected in good timethrough permanent checking andanalysis of the data. Indications of aproblem can be:

� UPS utilization that is becomingincreasingly imbalanced

� Gradual temperature rise in theroom

� Extraordinary load peaks that maybe an indication of unplannedevents

55/17

Power Generation

� Continual deterioration of the inputvoltage conditions that may laterresult in a switchover to batteryoperation

� Increased temperatures duringbattery tests

5.2.8 ProfitabilityConsiderations

It can be assumed that the UPS solutionis primarily to satisfy the project-specificsafety requirements, because failure ofthe backed-up load would generallyresult in higher costs. The costs for theUPS system are made up of:

� Procurement costs plus extra costs,such as planning, delivery, installa-tion and commissioning

� Electricity costs through internallosses and for the air conditioningand room lighting

� Depreciation or rent for the roomsin which the UPS and battery sys-tem are operated and their insu-rance costs

� Service and commissioning costs

A rough estimate of the relationshipbetween investment costs and poweroutput can be displayed graphicallyfor the UPS. Fig. 5.2/11 shows that aredundant solution with severalsmaller UPS systems, e.g. block sizesless than 100 kVA, should be carefullycalculated and compared to a (1+1)solution with larger UPS systems.Service and monitoring costs for thevarious concepts must also be takeninto consideration.

When considering the costs caused byinternal power losses, do not forgetthat protective measures such asfilters and transformers make a majorcontribution to the safety of thesystem (Ref. [8]); this also applies tothe costs for maintenance and moni-

toring systems, such as telemonito-ring and battery monitoring.

Fig 5.2/11: Investment costs in relation to the UPS power

References:

[1] Siemens AG (Hrsg.): Totally Integrated PowerApplication Manual – Establishment of BasicData and Preliminary Planning, 2006

[2] Uninterruptible Power System EuropeanGuide / CEMEP, 2nd extended edition; ZVEIe.V. – 2003

[3] Battery Management: Increasing theReliability of UPS – etz; D. Fischer, A. Lohner, P. Mauracher – 4/96

[4] Quality and Reliability of System-independentPower Supplies – Conference: UPS andStandby Power Supply; Dipl.-Ing. R. Hümpfner(MASTERGUARD GmbH) – 2000

[5] White paper: The Classifications Define SiteInfrastructure Performance; The UptimeInstitute, Inc. – 1996, 2001–2006

[6] Service Life Considerations for Stationary Batteries; ZVEI Leaflet No. 19 – 2003

[7] LIFE Data Sheet / Product BrochureMASTERGUARD GmbH – 2003

[8] How environmentally friendly is a UPSelectronic ecodesign; Dr. Siegbert Hopf(MASTERGUARD GmbH) – 2006



Technical details and order informationabout UPS products of the MASTER-GUARD C, D and S III series are availa-ble electronically via the Siemens A&DMall:

� https://mall.automation.siemens.com/de

Tender specification documents for theUPS devices can be downloaded as textor GAEB file from the specificationspages of Siemens Totally IntegratedPower:

� http://www.automation.siemens.com/tip/html_00/support/ausschreibung_stromversorgungen.htm

Hard copies of the product catalogs canbe ordered via the MASTERGUARDInternet pages:

� http://www.masterguard.de/page/ger/contact4.php

Personal support is provided by thelocal sales representative:

� http://www.masterguard.de/page/partner_d_ger_karte.html

The latest information on the subjectof UPS can be found in the MASTER-GUARD newsletter “NewsBoard” whichcan be ordered free of charge from thewebsite:

� http://www.masterguard.de/newsboard/ger/anmeldung/nboard3.php

For direct requests, specific questionsor suggestions, please mail

� [email protected]

or use the Internet form at

� http://www.masterguard.de/qm/Webservice.htm

chapter 6

Low Voltage

6.1 Low-Voltage Switchgear

6.2 Protective and Switching Devicesin the Low-Voltage PowerDistribution

6.3 Requirements of the Switchgear in the Three Circuit Types

6.4 Container Solutions

Photo 6.1/1: SIVACON S8 switchgear

6 Low Voltage


6.1 Low-VoltageSwitchgearWhen a power distribution concept isto be developed with dimensioning ofthe systems and devices, its require-ments and feasibility have to bematched by the end user and themanufacturer.

When selecting a low-voltage maindistribution board, the prerequisite forits efficient sizing is knowledge of itsuse, availability and future options forextension. The demands on powerdistribution are extremely diverse.They start with buildings that do notplace such high demands on thepower supply, such as office build-ings, and continue through to thehigh demands, for example, made bydata centers, in which smooth opera-tion is of prime importance.

As no major switching functions in theLVMD have to be considered in theplanning of power distributionsystems in commercial buildings and

no further extensions are to beexpected, a performance-optimizedtechnology with high componentdensity can be used. In these cases,mainly fuse-protected equipment infixed-mounted design is used. Whenplanning a power distribution systemfor a production plant however,system availability, extendibility,control and the visualization areimportant functions to keep plantdowntimes as short as possible. Theuse of circuit-breaker-protected andfuse-protected withdrawable-unitdesign is an important basis. Selectiv-ity is also of great importance forreliable power supply. Between thesetwo extremes there is a great designvariety which is to be optimallymatched to customer requirements.The prevention of personal injury anddamage to equipment must, however,be the first priority in all cases. Whenselecting appropriate switchgear,it must be ensured that it is a type-tested switchgear assembly (TTA,in compliance with IEC 60439-1 and

DIN VDE 0660-500) with extendedtesting of behavior in the eventof an accidental arc (IEC 61641,VDE 0660-500, Addendum 2), andthat the selection is always madeunder consideration of the regulationsthat have to be observed with regardto the requirements for the entiresupply system (full selectivity, partialselectivity).


� Dimensioning of the low-voltage maindistribution system:

Siemens AG (ed.): Totally Integrated Power,Application Manual, Establishment of Basic Dataand Preliminary Planning, 2006, Chapter 5,page 5/17 ff.

� For the detailed planning:

Siemens AG:SIVACON planning manuals.The planning manuals are also available fordownload at www.siemens.com/sivacon–> Support –> Infomaterial

66/3

Low Voltage

6.1.1 Overview

The SIVACON S8 low-voltageswitchgear is a variable, multi-purposeand type-tested low-voltageswitchgear assembly (TTA) that can beused for the infrastructure supply notonly in administrative and institu-tional buildings, but also in industryand commerce. SIVACON S8 consistsof standardized, modular componentsthat can be flexibly combined to forman economical, overall solutiondepending on the requirements.SIVACON S8 has a high level of func-tionality, flexibility and quality withcompact dimensions and a highdegree of safety for persons andequipment. We or our authorizedcontracting party will perform thefollowing:

� The customer-specific configuration� The mechanical and electrical

installation� The testing, for which we use

type-tested function modules

The documentation specified by usforms the basis for our authorizedcontracting party. SIVACON S8 can beused as a type-tested power distribu-tion board up to 4,000 A. Furtherinformation is available on the Inter-net at www.siemens.com/sivacon

Standards and regulations

SIVACON S8 is a type-tested low-voltage switchgear assembly (TTA)in compliance with IEC 60439-1/DIN EN 60439-1 / VDE 0660-500.SIVACON S8 is resistant to accidentalarcs in compliance with IEC 61641,DIN EN 60439 / VDE 0660-500,Addendum 2

Circuit-breaker designThe panels for the installation of the3WL and 3VL circuit-breakers are used

for the supply of the switchgear andfor the outgoing feeders and bus ties(sectionalizer and bus coupler).The rule that only one circuit-breakeris used for each panel applies tothe entire circuit-breaker design(Photo 6.1/4).

The device mounting space isintended for the following functions:

� Incoming/outgoing feeders with3WL circuit-breakers in fixed-mounted and withdrawable-unitdesign up to 4000 A

� Sectionalizer and bus coupler with3WL circuit-breakers in fixed-mounted and withdrawable-unitdesign up to 4,000 A

� Incoming/outgoing feeders with3VL circuit-breakers in fixed-mounted design up to 1,600 A

Universal mounting designThe panels for cable feeders in fixed-mounted and plug-in designup to630 A are intended for the installationof the following switchgear(Photo 6.1/5):

1 2 3 4 5 6

Photo 6.1/2: The following mounting designs are available (description from left to right):(1) Circuit-breaker panel with Sentron 3WL up to 4000 A or 3VL up to 1600 A(2) Universal mounting design for cable feeders up to 630 A in fixed-mounted and plug-in

design (3NJ6)(3) 3NJ6 in-line switch disconnector design (plugged in) for cable feeders up to 630 A

in plug-in design(4) Fixed-mounted panel (front cover) for cable feeders up to 630 A and modular devices(5) 3NJ4 in-line switch disconnector design (fixed-mounted) for cable feeders up to 630 A(6) Reactive power compensation up to 600 kvar


Photo 6.1/3: Circuit-breaker design

Photo 6.1/7: Fixed-mounted 3NJ4 in-line switchdisconnector design

Photo 6.1/4: Universal mounting design Photo 6.1/5: Plug-in 3NJ6 in-line switchdisconnector design

Photo 6.1/6: Fixed-mounted design with frontcovers

� SIRIUS 3RV/3VL circuit-breaker� SENTRON 3K switch disconnector� SENTRON 3NP switch disconnector� SENTRON 3NJ6 switch disconnector

in plug-in design

The switching devices are mounted onmounting plates and connected to thevertical current distribution bars withthe supply side. Plug-in 3NJ6 in-lineswitch disconnectors can be installedusing an adapter. The front is coveredby panel doors or compartment doors.

Plug-in 3NJ6 in-line switchdisconnector designThe panels for cable feeders in plug-indesign up to 630 A are intended forthe installation of in-line switchdisconnectors. The plug-in contact onthe supply side is a cost-effectivealternative to the withdrawable-unitdesign. Their modular design enablesan easy and quick retrofit or replace-ment under operating conditions. Thedevice mounting space is intended forplug-in, in-line switch disconnectorswith a distance between pole centersof 185 mm. The vertical plug-on bussystem is arranged at the back of thepanel and covered by an optionaltouch protection with pick-off open-ings in the IP20 degree of protection.This enables the in-line switchdisconnectors to be replaced withoutshutting down the switchgear(Photo 6.1/6).

Fixed-mounted design with frontcoversThe panels for cable feeders in fixed-mounted design up to 630 A areintended for the installation of thefollowing switchgear (Photo 6.1/7):

� SIRIUS 3RV/3VL circuit-breaker� SENTRON 3K switch disconnector� SENTRON 3NP switch disconnector� Modular devices

The switching devices are mounted oninfinitely adjustable device holdersand connected to the vertical currentdistribution bars with the supply side.The front of the panel has eithercovers with or without hinges oradditional doors with or without awindow.

Fixed-mounted 3NJ4 in-line switchdisconnector designThe panels for cable feeders in fixed-mounted design up to 630 A areintended for the installation of 3NJ4in-line fuse switch disconnectors. Withtheir compact design and modularstructure, in-line fuse switch discon-nectors offer optimal installationconditions with regard to the achiev-able packing density. The busbarsystem is arranged horizontally at theback of the panel. This busbar systemis connected to the main busbarsystem via cross-members. The in-linefuse switch disconnectors are screweddirectly onto the busbar system(Photo 6.1/8).

66/5

Low Voltage

The LVMD checklist with the most important properties of a power distribution board and the associated explanation isused to match the requirements of the end user and manufacturer.

Safety against accidental arcs

The testing of low-voltage switchgear under accidental arc conditions is a special test according to IEC 61641 orVDE 0660-500, Addendum 2. This test helps to estimate the danger to which a person is subject when an accidentalarc occurs. With the test under accidental arc conditions, SIVACON already provides the proof of safety for personnel asstandard, with the following assessment criteria.

Assessment criteria

� Correctly secured doors, covers, etc. may not open.� Parts that are potentially hazardous may not jump apart.� No holes may form in the freely accessible external parts of the housing (enclosure).� No vertically mounted indicators may ignite.� The protective conductor circuit for parts of the housing that can be touched must still be functional.

Standards and regulations

� IEC 60439-1, VDE 0660-500� IEC 61641 / VDE 0660-500 Addendum 2, safety against accidental arcs� Arc barriers to restrict the accidental arc to one panel� Insulated busbars

Safety standard for low-voltage switchgear assemblies(see Chapter 11, Appendix A3)

� Type-tested assemblies (TTA)� Partially type-tested assemblies (PTTA)

Ambient conditions (in the switchgear room)

Environment category(see Totally Integrated Power, Application Manual, Establishment of Basic Data and Preliminary Planning, Chapter 5, page 5/21)

c IR 1 c IR 2 c IR 3

Ambient temperature

(24 hour average, see Totally Integrated Power, Application Manual, Establishment of Basic Data and Preliminary Planning, Chapter 5, page 5/24

c ........... °CDepending on the ambient temperature and the power losses of the switchgear, there may be thermal effects (derating)that can make cabinet air-conditioning necessary.

Installation altitude above sea level c < 2,000 m c other ........... m

IP degree of protection according to IEC 60529 (see Appendix A4)

For indoors c IP30 c IP31 c IP40 c IP41

For cable basement c IP00 c IP40 c IP54

Severe operating conditions c None

Checklist

Low-voltage main distribution board (LVMD)


Chemical emissions

(see Totally Integrated Power, Application Manual, Establishment of Basic Data and Preliminary Planning, Chapter 5, page 5/22)

System configuration

(see Totally Integrated Power, Application Manual, Establishment of Basic Data and Preliminary Planning, Chapter 4, page 4/8)

c TN-C

c TN-S

c IT

c TT

Supply connection: c L1, L2, L3, PE

c L1, L2, L3, PEN

c L1, L2, L3, PE + N

c L1, L2, L3, PEN (isolated) + PE

Central grounding point (CGP) location: c Outside c Inside in panel ........................

Line data

Number of feeding systems (transformer, generator, UPS) ..................................................................................

Parallel line operation c Yes

Power per feeding system ........................ kVA

Number of main busbar sections ........................ units

Rated current In ........................ A

Rated operational voltage Ue ........................ V

Rated short-time withstand current Icw ........................ kA

Rated short-circuit impulse current withstand strength Ipk ........................ kA

Cable/busbar connection

For supply panels c From the bottom c Cable c Busbar

c From the top c Cable c Busbar

c From the rear c Cable c Busbar

For outgoing feeder panels c From the bottom c Cable c Busbar

c From the top c Cable c Busbar

c From the rear c Cable c Busbar

Horizontal busbar system

Location c Top

c Rear (top)

c Rear (bottom)

Checklist

66/7

Low Voltage

Checklist

Legend:

Functional unit(s) includingterminals for the connectionof external conductors

Enclosure

Busbars includingdistribution bars

Internal compartmentalization

Form 2a

No compartmentalizationbetween connections andbusbars

Form 2b

Compartmentalizationbetween connectionsand busbars

Form 3a

No compartmentaliza-tion between connec-tions and busbars

Form 4a

Connections in the samecompartmentalization as theconnected functional unit

Form 3b

Compartmentalizationbetween connectionsand busbars

Form 4b

Connections not in the samecompartmentalization as theconnected functional unit

Form 1

No internal compartmentalization

Form 3

Compartmentalization between busbars and functionalunits + compartmentalization between functional unitsthemselves + compartmentalization betweenconnections and functional units

Form 4

Compartmentalization between busbars and functionalunits + compartmentalization between functional unitsthemselves + compartmentalization between connec-tions of functional units

Form 2

Compartmentalization between busbarsand functional units

Internal compartmentalization of the panels in accordance with IEC 60439-1, VDE 0660-500 Item 7.7

Panels

Circuit-breaker design c Form 1 c Form 2b c Form 3a c Form 4b

Fixed-mounted design c Form 1 c Form 2b c Form 4a c Form 4b

Fixed-mounted 3NJ4 in-lineswitch disconnector design c Form 1 c Form 2b

Plug-in 3NJ6 in-line switch disconnector design c Form 1 c Form 3b c Form 4b

Reactive power compensation c Form 1 c Form 2b

* Form 4b according to IEC 60439-1 is comparable to Form 4 Type 4 or Form 4 Type 5 according to BS 60439, when the cable feed is via heavy-gauge

conduit screwed joints in the base plate.


Checklist

Versions (L1, L2, L3 + …)

c PE

c PEN

c PE + N

c PEN (insulated) + PE

c PEN, N = 50 %

c PEN, N = 100 %

Design and installation

Fixed-mounted design c

Plug-in/non-withdrawable design c

Withdrawable design c

Type of installation c Single front

c Back to back

c Double front

66/9

Low Voltage

6.2 Low-VoltageProtective andSwitching DevicesThe TIP Application Manual,Establishment of Basic Data andPreliminary Planning, Section 5.3describes the basics for thedimensioning of the low-voltage maindistribution board and its maincomponents. The following focuseson the relevant characteristics andselection criteria of the respectivedevices that are used in the mainpower distribution circuits incommercial buildings and in industry.

Note: All figures apply for low-voltagepower systems or distribution boardsin IEC applications. Different regula-tions and criteria apply for systemsaccording to UL standards.

If you have questions on UL applica-tions, please contact your localSiemens representative. We providesolutions for these applications, butthey must be treated completelydifferently.

Depending on the country, standardspecifications, local practices, plan-ning engineer, technical thresholdvalues, etc., low voltage power distri-bution systems are made up of vari-ous protective devices.

Circuit-breaker-protected switchgear (circuit-breaker)

ACB Air Circuit-Breaker

– Air circuit-breaker

– Non-current-limiting circuit-breaker

– Current-zero cut-off circuit breaker

MCCB Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker

– Molded-case circuit-breaker

– Current-limiting circuit-breaker

MCB Miniature Circuit Breaker

– Miniature circuit-breaker

MSP Motor Starter Protector

MPCB Motor Protector Circuit-Breaker

– Circuit-breaker for motor protection

Fuse-protected switchgear (fuse switch disconnector / switch disconnector

LTS Switch disconnectorDepending on the type of operation, thesedevices are divided into two main groups:

Operator-dependent

– Without breaker latching mechanism, with protection (fuse);with these devices, the fuse isalso moved when making and breaking(= fuse switch disconnector)

– With breaker latching mechanism,with protection (fuse); with these devices,the fuse is not moved when making andbreaking (= switch disconnector with fuse

Operator-independent

– With breaker latching mechanism,without protection (without fuse);these devices are only used to interruptthe circuit, similar to a main switch(= switch disconnector without fuse)

Table 6.2/1: Overview of circuit-breaker-protected switchgear

Table 6.2/2: Overview of fuse-protected switchgear

MSP

ACB

MCCB ACB LTS

LTS MCCB

M M M

Fig. 6.2/1: Core functions of the protective devices in the individual circuit types

Fuse-protected Circuit-breaker-protected

M

M

M M M

M

M M

6300 A1600 A

630 A

Applicationplants motor isolators

3-pole/4-pole

Fixed mounting / plug-in / withdrawable-unit design

Rated current ACB:MCCB:Fuse:

Short-circuitbreaking capacity

ReleaseInfluences selectivityand protection setting

Communicationand data transfer

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Fig. 6.2/2: Main selection criteria


6.2.1 Circuits and DeviceAssignment

(see also Section 2.2 “Dimensioning ofPower Distribution Systems”)

Basic configuration of a low-voltage power distribution systemand assignment of the protectivedevices including core functions

Core functions in the respectivecircuits

Supply circuitTask: System protectionProtective device– ACB (air circuit-breaker)

Distribution circuitTask: System protectionProtective devices:– ACB (air circuit-breaker)– MCCB (molded-case circuit-breaker)– SD (switch disconnector)

Final circuitTask: Motor protectionProtective devices:– MCCB (circuit-breaker

for motor protection)– SD (switch disconnector)– MSP (3RT contactor, 3RU overload

relay, 3UF motor protection andcontrol devices

6.2.2 Criteria for DeviceSelection

A protective device is always part of acircuit and must satisfy the correspon-ding requirements (see also Section2.2 “Dimensioning of Power Distribu-tion Systems”). The most importantselection criteria are shown in thefollowing.

Main selection criteria

Fig. 6.2/2 shows the seven mostimportant selection criteria that mustbe at least taken into account for thedevice selection.

66/11

Low Voltage

6.3 Requirementson the Switchgearin the Three CircuitTypes

6.3.1 Device Applicationin the Supply Circuit

The system infeed is the most “sensi-tive” circuit in the entire power distri-bution. A failure here would result inthe entire network and therefore thebuilding or production being withoutpower. This worst-case scenario mustbe considered during the planning.Redundant system supplies and selec-tive protection setting are importantpreconditions for a safe networkconfiguration. The selection of thecorrect protective devices is thereforeof elementary importance in order tocreate these preconditions. Some ofthe key dimensioning data isaddressed in the following.

Rated currentThe feeder circuit-breaker in the LVMDmust be dimensioned for the maxi-mum load of the transformer/genera-tor. When using ventilated transform-ers, the higher operating current of upto 1.5 x IN of the transformer must betaken into account.

Short-circuit strength

The short-circuit strength of thefeeder circuit-breaker is determinedby (n–1) x Ik max of the transformer ortransformers (n = number of trans-formers). This means that the maxi-mum short-circuit current that occursat the installation position must beknown in order to specify the appro-priate short-circuit strength of theprotective device (Icu). Initial orienta-tion is provided in the table of short-

circuit currents (see Totally IntegratedPower, Application Manual, Establish-ment of Basic Data and PreliminaryPlanning, Chapter 10, page 10/20).Exact short-circuit current calculationsincluding attenuations of themedium-voltage levels or the laidcables can be made, for example, withthe aid of the SIMARIS design dimen-sioning software. SIMARIS designdetermines the maximum and mini-mum short-circuit currents and auto-matically dimensions the correctprotective devices

Utilization categoryWhen dimensioning a selective net-work, time grading of the protectivedevices is essential. When using timegrading up to 500 ms, the selectedcircuit-breaker must be able to carrythe short-circuit current that occursfor the set time. Close to the trans-former, the currents are very high.This current carrying capacity is speci-fied by the Icw value (rated short-timewithstand current) of the circuit-breaker; this means the contactsystem must be able to carry themaximum short-circuit current, i.e.the energy contained therein, untilthe circuit-breaker is tripped. Thisrequirement is satisfied by circuit-breakers of utilization category B(e.g. air circuit-breakers, ACB).Current-limiting circuit breakers(molded-case circuit breakers, MCCB)trip during the current rise. They cantherefore be constructed more com-pactly.

ReleaseFor a selective network design, therelease (trip unit) of the feeder circuit-breaker must have an LSI characteris-tic. It must be possible to deactivatethe instantaneous release (I). Depend-ing on the curve characteristic of theupstream and downstream protectivedevices, the characteristics of the

feeder circuit-breaker in the overloadrange (L) and also in the time-lagshort-circuit range (S) should beoptionally switchable(I4t or I2t characteristic curve). Thisfacilitates the adaptation of upstreamand downstream devices.

Internal accessoriesDepending on the respective control,not only shunt releases (previously:f releases), but also undervoltagereleases are required.

CommunicationInformation about the currentoperating states, maintenance, errormessages and analyses, etc. is beingincreasingly required, especially fromthe very sensitive supply circuits.Flexibility may be required withregard to a later upgrade or retrofit tothe desired type of data transmission.

6.3.2 Device Applicationin Supply Circuits(Coupling)

If the coupling (connection of Net-work 1 to Network 2) is operatedopen, the circuit-breaker (tie breaker)only has the function of an isolator ormain switch. A protective function(release) is not absolutely necessary.

The following considerations apply toclosed operation

Rated currentMust be dimensioned for the maxi-mum possible operating current(load compensation). The simultane-ity factor can be assumed to be 0.9.

Short-circuit strengthThe short-circuit strength of the feedercircuit-breaker is determined by thesum of the short-circuit componentsthat flow through the coupling. Thisdepends on the configuration of thecomponent busbars and their supply.


Utilization categoryAs for the system supply, utilizationcategory B is also required for thecurrent carrying capacity (Icw value).

ReleasePartial shutdown with the couplingsmust be taken into consideration forthe supply reliability. As the couplingand the feeder circuit-breakers havethe same current components when afault occurs, similar to the paralleloperation of two transformers, the LSIcharacteristic is required. The special“Zone Selective Interlocking (ZSI)”function should be used for largernetworks and/or protection settingsthat are difficult to determine.

6.3.3 Device Applicationin the Distribution Circuit

The distribution circuit receives powerfrom the higher level (supply circuit)and feeds it to the next distributionlevel (final circuit).

Depending on the country, localpractices, etc., circuit-breakers andfuses can be used for system protec-tion; in principle, all protectivedevices described in this chapter.The specifications for the circuitdimensioning must be fulfilled. TheACB has advantages if full selectivityis required. However for cost reasons,the ACB is only frequently used in thedistribution circuit as of a rated cur-rent of 630 A or 800 A. As the ACB isnot a current-limiting device, it differsgreatly from other protective devicessuch as MCCB, MCB and fuses.

As no clear recommendations canotherwise be given, Table 6.3/1 showsthe major differences and limits of therespective protective devices.

6.3.4 Device Applicationin the Final Circuit

The final circuit receives power fromthe distribution circuit and supplies itto the consumer (e.g. motor, lamp,non-stationary load (power outlet),etc.). The protective device mustsatisfy the requirements of the con-sumer to be protected by it(see Fig. 5.2.2).

Note:All protection settings, comparison ofcharacteristic curves, etc. always startwith the load. This means that noprotective devices are required withadjustable time grading in the finalcircuitMeter cabinet, floor distributionboard:See Chapter 8, Subdistribution Boards

Motors:See Chapter 8, Subdistribution Boards

66/13

Low Voltage

Table 6.3/1: Overview of the protective devices

ACB air

circuit-breaker

MCCB

molded-case

circuit-breaker

Fuse switch

disconnector

Switch

disconnector

with fuses

MCB

miniature

circuit-breaker

Reference

values,

specifications

Standards IEC Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Region

Application System protection Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Power supply system

Installation

Fixed mounting Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

AvailabilityPlug-in – Up to 800 A – Partly –

Withdrawable unit Yes Yes – – –

Rated current In 6300 A 1600 A 630 A 630 A 125 A Operating current IB

Short-circuit breaking

capacityIcu Up to 150 kA Up to 100 kA Up to 120 kA Up to 120 kA Up to 25 kA

Maximum short-circuit

current Ik max

Current carrying capacity Icw Up to 80 kA Up to 5 kA – – – Circuit

Number of poles3-pole Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Power supply system4-pole Yes Yes – Partly –

Tripping characteristicETU Yes Yes – – –

Power supply systemTM – Up to 630 A Yes Yes Yes

Tripping function

LI Yes Yes Yes* Yes* Yes

Power supply system

LSI Yes Yes – – –

N Yes Yes – – –

G Yes Yes – – –

Characteristics

Fixed – Yes Yes Yes Yes

Power supply systemAdjustable Yes Yes – – –

Optional Yes Yes – – –

Protection against

electric shock,

tripping condition

Detection

of Ik minNo limitation

Depends on

cable length

Depends on

cable length

Depends on

cable length

Depends on

cable length

Minimum short-circuit

current Ik min

Communication

(data transmission)

High Yes – – – –

Customer specificationMedium Yes Yes – – –

Low Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

ActivationLocal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Customer

specificationsRemote (motor Yes Yes – Partly –

DeratingFull rated

current up to60 ºC 50 ºC 30 ºC 30 ºC 30 ºC Switchgear

System synchronization Yes Up to 800 A – – – Power supply system

* According to the fuse characteristic


Container erection independent ofproject scheduleThe construction and equipping of thecontainers mainly depends on thepower demand and the number ofpanels. In this way, the power distribu-tion can be planned and constructedseparately from the building require-ments. This provides the planningengineer with more time and thearchitect with more freedom whendesigning the building.

Factory-assembled installationConstruction and equipping of thecontainers is performed at the manu-facturer’s premises under optimumworking conditions. Thus, higherproductivity owing to the increasedmaterial availability, the more eco-nomical use of tools, as well as themore efficient cost structures(severance) result in a significant costadvantage.

QualityThe equipped containers can becompletely tested (safety, wiring,high voltage, function). This reducesthe testing and commissioning workat the building site, which results infurther cost and time savings.

Project milestonesIf desired, the customer acceptance ofthe container can be performed at thefactory. In this way, a project mile-stone can be achieved independentlyof the remaining progress of theproject.

Variable useContainer solutions can be reused ortransported to new locations and areespecially suitable for temporary ormobile applications. Examples of thisare: building site power supplies,power supply for a mobile, open-castmining excavator.

Containers can be customized for thecomplex systems in standard and

special sizes, e.g. for power distribu-tion, automation and drive systems.They are completely configured,assembled and tested at the factory.

Container construction types

The three most common types ofconstruction are described in thefollowing. The appropriate containerconstruction type depends on thelocation of use and the environmentalconditions there.

Simple constructionContainers for normal requirementsconsist of a steel frame covered withsandwich panels.

Fully welded constructionFully welded steel containers fulfill highrequirements with regard to stabilityand tightness. The walls are constructedof corrugated steel plates. The walls cancarry loads and are suitable for open-type equipping of the interior. Theconstruction is EMC-tested in accor-dance with international standards.Stackable versions can also be con-structed when space is limited.

Steel skeleton constructionThe steel skeleton construction istechnologically the most sophisticatedversion. With the torsionally rigid,rugged steel skeleton, the containersare exceptionally stable during trans-port and installation.

The open-type construction (patentedmodular enclosure system) savesweight and space and is especiallysuitable for containers that can betransported by air (ICCC). The con-struction is EMC-tested in accordancewith international standards. Stack-able versions can also be constructedwhen space is limited.

Electronics cabinet that can betransported by airThe ICCC (Instrumentation anControl Cargo Cabinet) is the com-

6.4 ContainerSolutionsThe costs for infrastructure rooms areincreasing. Space is a rare commodity!Container solutions as turnkey alter-natives to conventional infrastructurerooms create additional space andalso offer further decisive advantagessuch as flexibility in installation,utilization and reuse. In addition,there is also less pressure imposed bythe planning schedule, as the installa-tion is independent of the buildingconstruction progress and not least, acost advantage through better utiliza-tion of the space in the building. Theoptimized installation of the compo-nents in the container and the testedsolutions also help to reduce costs.

Containers create spaceThe containers can be installed on theroof of the building or next to thebuilding and thus provide additionalspace for infrastructure equipmentsuch as power distribution systems,fire alarm equipment, service rooms,etc.

Increased reliability of supplyInstallation on the roof increases thereliability of supply. Whereas cellarscan be flooded and the power distri-bution interrupted, power supply ismaintained with a container solutionon the roof of the building

Note:The weight of a container varies,depending on the type of containerconstruction and amount of equip-ment, between 20 and 30 t.

Customized solutionsThe container dimensions are variableand therefore enable the installationof standard switchgear. No specialsolutions have to be constructed onaccount of technical conditions asso-ciated with the building.

66/15

Low Voltage

pact and flexible solution for theinstallation of electronic componentsin an accessible electronics cabinetthat can be transported by air.

Several functional units can be com-bined into an overall function in anICCC (e.g. entire automation of aplant). This complete solution enablesthe entire function to be delivered tothe building site already tested, whichreduces the commissioning times.

Technical features� Variable dimensions or ISO standard

dimensions up to 20 m long and4 m wide

� Outdoor installation – from arctic totropical environments

� Thermal insulation and airconditioning – as required

� High level of soundproofing –expandable according to externalnoise level

� Installation of electrical systems upto the control room level

� Cabling of the electrical and controlsystems – simply in the false floor

� Guaranteed high quality and longservice live (approx. 20 to 30 years)

� Option: resistant to earthquakes(strengthening for seismic areas).

Advantages at a glance

� No building costs thanks topreassembled containers

� Reduced installation and quickcommissioning on site

� Simplified logistics and shorterthroughput times

� Shorter capital tie-up through latercontainer planning

� No unnecessary provision ofreserve space during buildingworks

� Integration test of related systemcontrol systems in the factory

� Faster availability at theinstallation site and preparedexternal connections

� Optimization of the availablespace in the building

� Less space required at theinstallation site through stacking

ContactSiemens AGAutomation and Drives SystemsEngineering (A&D SE S5)Würzburger Str. 12190766 FürthGermany

Claus-Thomas Michalak+49 911 7 50-23 [email protected] Schrems+49 911 7 50-29 [email protected]

Simple construction

Fully welded construction

Steel skeleton construction

Fig. 6.4/1: Container construction types


Busbar Trunking Systems, Cables and Wires

chapter 77.1 Busbar Trunking Systems

7.2 Cables and Wires

7 Busbar Trunking Systems, Cables and Wires


7.1 BusbarTrunking SystemsWhen a planning concept for powersupply is developed, it is not onlyimperative to observe standards andregulations, it is also important todiscuss and clarify economic andtechnical interrelations. The ratingand selection of electric equipment,such as distribution boards and trans-formers, must be performed in such away that an optimum result for thepower system as whole is kept inmind rather than focusing on individ-ual components.

All components must be sufficientlyrated to withstand normal operatingconditions as well as fault conditions.Further important aspects to beconsidered for the preparation of anenergy concept are:

� Type, use and shape of the building(e.g. high-rise building, low-risebuilding, number of story levels),

� Load centers and possible powertransmission routes and locationsfor transformers and main distribu-tion boards,

� Building-related connection detailsaccording to specific area loads thatcorrespond to the type of use of thebuilding,

� Statutory provisions and conditionsimposed by building authorities,

� Requirements by the power supplynetwork operator.

The result will never be a single solu-tion. Several options have to beassessed in terms of their technicaland economic impacts. The followingrequirements are of central impor-tance:

� Easy and transparent planning

� High service life� High availability� Low fire load� Flexible adaptation to changes in

the building

Most applications suggest the use ofsuitable busbar trunking systems tomeet these requirements. For thisreason, engineering companiesincreasingly prefer busbar trunking tocable installation for power transmis-sion and distribution.

Siemens offers busbar trunking sys-tems ranging from 25 A to 6,300 A:

� the CD-K busbar system from 25 to40 A for the supply of light fixturesand micro-consumers,

� the BD01 busbar system from 40 to160 A for supplying workshops withtap-offs up to 63 A,

� the BD2 busbar system from 160 to1,250 A for supplying medium-sizeconsumers in buildings and indus-try,

� the ventilated LD system from1,100 to 5,000 A for power trans-mission and power distribution anproduction sites with a high energydemand,

� the LX sandwich system from 800to 5,000 A, mainly for power trans-mission insensitive to position inbuildings with the requirements ofdegree of protection IP54 andspecial conductor configurationssuch as double N or insulated PE,

� the encapsulated LR system from630 to 6,300 A for power transmis-sion for extreme environmentalconditions (IP68).

For the configuration of a busbarsystem the following points are to benoted:

Calculation/dimensioning� Electrical parameters, such as rated

current, voltage, given voltage dropand short-circuit strength at place ofinstallation

Technical parameters of the busbarsystems� The conductor configuration

depends on the mains systemaccording to type of earth connec-tion

� Reduction factors e.g. for ambienttemperature, type of installation,(vertical) busbar position (horizon-tal on edge) and degree of protec-tion

� Copper is required as conductormaterial; otherwise aluminum hasadvantages such as weight, price,etc.

� How is the system supply to becarried out: as a TTA solutiondirectly from the distribution boardor by means of cables at the end orcenter of the busbar

� Max. cable connection options toinfeed and tap-off units

� Power and size of the tap-off unitsincluding installation conditions

� Number of tapping points� Use of bus systems possible� Influence of a magnetic field (hospi-

tals, broadcasting studios)� Environmental conditions, espe-

cially ambient temperature (e. g.where there are fire compartmentsin each floor of a vertical shaft

Structural parameters andboundary conditions� Phase response (changes of direc-

tion in the busbar routing possible,differences in height, etc.)

� Functional sections (e.g. variousenvironmental conditions or varioususes)

77/3


� Check use in sprinkler-protectedbuilding sections

� Fire areas (provision of fire barriers–> what structural (e.g. type ofwalls) and fire fighting (local provi-sions) boundary conditions arethere?

� Fire protection classes of the firebarriers (S90 and S120)

� Functional endurance classes (E60,E90, E120) and certifications of thebusbar systems (observe relevantderatings)

� Fire loads/halogens (prescribed fireloads in certain functional sections,e.g. fire escape routes, must not beexceeded).

Fixing of the busbar systems to thestructure� Maximum clearance from fixings

taking into consideration location,weight of system and additional loadssuch as tap-off units, lighting, etc.

� Agreement on possible means offixing with structural analyst

� Use of tested fixing accessories withbusbar systems with functionalendurance

� Observe derating for type of instal-lation

� Dimensions of the distributionboard, system supplies and tap-offunits:

– installation clearance from ceiling,wall and parallel systems for thepurpose of heat dissipation andinstallation options

– crossing with other installations(water, gas pipes etc.)

– swing angle for installing andoperating the tap-off units

– minimum dimensions for changesof direction in the busbar routing,fire protection compartmentaliza-tion, wall cutouts

– space requirement for distributionconnection

– cutout planning (sizes and loca-tions of the cutouts)

� Linear expansion (expansion units,if applicable).

Further information:� Siemens AG

Totally Integrated Power Application Manual –Basics and Preliminary PlanningNuremberg, 2006, Chapter 5

� Technical data, dimension drawings, compo-nents, etc. are included in the technical catalogsLV70, LV71 T, LV 72 T of Siemens AG.


CD-K system 25 A – 40 A

The system is designed for applica-tions of 25 to 40 A and serves toprovide an economical and flexiblepower supply for lighting systems andlow-consumption equipment. Typicalareas of application are departmentstores, supermarkets, storerooms orclean room technology.

1.Trunking unit� 3-, 4-, 5-conductor� Degree of protection: IP54, IP55� Standard lengths:

2 m and 3 m� Rated current:

30 A, 40 A, 2 x 25 A, 2 x 40 A� Spacing of the tapping points:

0.5 m and 1 m� Rated operating voltage:

400 V AC

2. Feeding unit� Cable entry:

from three sides

3. Tap-off component� Pluggable while energized� 3-pole for 10 A and 16 A� Equipped as

L1, L2 or L3 with N and PE� 5-pole for 10 A and 16 A� Codable

4. End flange

5. Possible supplementaryequipment� Fixing clamp� Suspension hook � Hanger� Cable fixing� Coding set

NSV

0_0

00

35

1

2

3

4

5

Busbar case

Tap-off componentFeeding unit

End flange

Supplementary equipment

Fig. 7.1/1: System components for CD-K system

77/5


System BD0140 A – 160 A

The BD01 busbar trunking system isdesigned for applications from 40 to160 A. Five rated amperages areavailable for only one size, i.e. allother components can be used for allfive rated currents irrespective of thepower supply. The system is usedprimarily to supply smaller consumers,e.g. in workshops.

1. Trunking unit� 4-conductor (L1, L2, L3, N, PE =

casing)� Degree of protection: IP54, IP55

� Standard lengths: 2 m and 3 m.� Rated current:

40 A, 63 A, 100 A, 125 A, 160 A� Spacing of the tapping points:

0.5 m und 1 m� Rated operating voltage:

400 V AC

2. Directional change components� Changes of direction in the busbar

routing possible:flexible, length 0.5 m, 1 m

3. Feeding unit� Universal system supply

4. Tap-off unit� Up to 63 A, with fuses or miniature

1

2

4 5

3

4

4

6

1

2

3

Busbar case

Feeding unitDirectional change component

4

5

Tap-off unitDevice case

6 Supplementary equipment

NSV0_00041

Fig. 7.1/2: System components for BD01 system

circuit-breaker (MCB) and withfused outlets

� With fittings or for customizedassembly

� For 3, 4 or 8 modules (MW)� With or without assembly unit

5. Device case� For 4 or 8 modules (MW)� With or without assembly unit� With or without outlet installed

6. Possible supplementaryequipment� Installation sets for degree of pro-

tection IP55� Fixing and suspension� Coding set

1

2

3

Busbar case

Feeding unitDirectional change component

4

5

Tap-off unitDevice case

6 Supplementary equipment


BD2 system 160 A –1,250 A

The BD2A/BD2C busbar trunkingsystem (aluminum/copper) is suitablefor universal use. It has not only beendesigned to provide flexible powersupply and distribution for consumersin trade and industry, it can also beused for power transmission from onesupply point to another. In addition,the BD2 busbar trunking system isused as rising mains in multi-storybuildings, and since a large number ofchanges of direction in the busbarrouting are possible, it can be adaptedto the building geometries perfectly.

1. Trunking unit� 5-conductor (L1, L2, L3, N, PE,

optional with half N and/or with half PE)

� Degree of protection: IP52, IP54,IP55

� Busbar material: copper or aluminum

� Rated current:160 A, 250 A, 315 A, 400 A (68 mm x 167 mm)500 A, 630 A, 800 A, 1,000 A,1,250 A (126 mm x 167 mm)

� Standard lengths:3.25 m, 2.25 m and 1.25 m

� Lengths available: from 0.5 m to3.24 m

� Tapping points:– without– on both sides 0.5 m apart

� Fire protection: fire safety class S90and S120 in accordance with DIN4102, pages 2 to 4

2. Directional change components� On edge or flat position� With or without fire protection� Horizontal angle unit with or with-

out user-configurable bracket� Z-unit� T-unit

3

4

1

3

5

4

5

2

5

2

5

4

3

1

2

3

Busbar caseDirectional change componentFeeding unit

NSV

0_0

00

81

4

5

Tap-off unitSupplementary equipment

Fig. 7.1/3: System components for BD2 system

� cross unit� Flexible changes of direction in the

busbar routing possible up to 800 A

3. Feeding unit� Feeding from one end� Center feeding� Stud terminal� Cable entry

from 1, 2 or 3 sides� Distribution board feeding

4. Tap-off unit� 25 A to 630 A� With fuse, miniature circuit-breaker

(MCB) or fused outlet installed

5. Device case� For 8 modules (MW)� With or without assembly unit

6. Possible supplementaryequipment� End flange� For fixing:

– universal fixing clamp for on edgeor flat position

– fixing elements for verticalphases, for fixing to walls orceilings

� Terminal block

1

2

3

Busbar caseDirectional change componentFeeding unit

4

5

Tap-off unitSupplementary equipment

77/7


LDA/LDC system 1,100 A – 5,000 A

The LD busbar trunking system is usedboth for power transmission andpower distribution. A special featureof the system is a high short-circuitstrength and it is particularly suitablefor connecting the transformer to thelow-voltage main distribution andthen to the subdistribution system.When there is a high power demand,conventional current conduction bycable means that parallel cables arefrequently necessary. Here the LDsystem allows optimal power distribu-tion with horizontal and vertical phaseresponses. The system can be used inindustry as well as for relevant infra-structure projects, such as hospitals,railroad stations, airports, trade fairs,office blocks, etc.

1. Trunking unit� 4- and 5-conductor system� Busbar material:

copper or aluminum� Rated current:

1,100 to 5,000 A– LDA1 to LDC3 (180 mm x 180 mm)– LDA4 to LDC8 (240 mm x 180 mm)

� Degree of protection:IP34 and IP54(IP36 and IP56 upon request)

� Standard lengths:1.6 m, 2.4 m and 3.2 m

� Lengths available: from 0.5 m to 3.19 m

� Tapping points:– without– with user-configurable tapping

points� Fire protection partitions: fire resist-

ance class S120 in accordance withDIN 4102-9

2. Directional change components� With or without fire protection� Horizontal angle unit with or with-

out user-configurable bracket� Z-unit

� U-unit� T-unit

3. Tap-off unit� Degree of protection IP30 and IP54

(IP55 upon request)� With fuse switch disconnector from

125 A to 630 A� With circuit-breaker from 80 A to

1,250 A� Leading PEN or PE connector� Switching to load-free state follow-

ing defined, forced-operationsequences

� Coding bracket

4. Feeding unit� Cable feeding unit� Universal terminal for transformers

5. Terminal boxes for connection todistribution board� TTA distribution connection to the

SIVACON system from the top/bot-tom

� Terminals for external distributionboards

6. Possible supplementaryequipment� End flange� Terminal block

NSV

0_0

06

85

1

44

5

4

6

6

6

2

3 Busbar caseDirectional change componentFeeding unitTap-off unitDistribution board connectionSupplementary equipment

1

2

3

4

5

6

Fig. 7.1/4: System components for LDA/LDC system

Busbar caseDirectional change componentFeeding unitTap-off unitDistribution board connectionSupplementary equipment

1

2

3

4

5

6


LXA/LXC system from 800 A – 5,000 AThe LX busbar trunking system is usedboth for power transmission andpower distribution. Special features ofthe system include high flexibility andposition insensitivity, and it is particu-larly suitable for power distribution inmulti-story buildings. The high degreeof protection IP54, which is standardfor this system, and tap-off units up to1,250 A also guarantee a safe supplyif there is a high energy demand. Itcan be used in industry as well as forrelevant infrastructure projects suchas hospitals, railroad stations, air-ports, data centers, office blocks, etc.

1. Trunking unit4- and 5-conductor system in variousconductor configurations, includingseparate PE or double N� Busbar material:

copper or aluminum� Rated current: 800 up to 5,000 ASize (mm) Aluminum Copper137 x 145 up to 1,000 A up to 1,250 A162 x 145 up to 1,250 A up to 1,600 A207 x 145 up to 1,600 A up to 2,000 A287 x 145 up to 2,500 A up to 3,200 A439 x 145 up to 3,200 A up to 4,000 A599 x 145 up to 4,500 A up to 5,000 A� Degree of protection: IP54 (IP55

optional)� Standard lengths: 1 m, 2 m and 3 m� Lengths available: from 0.35 m to

2.99 m� Layout: horizontal and vertical

without derating� Tapping points:

– on one side– on both sides

� Fire protection partitions:fire resistance class S120 in accordance with DIN 4102 Part 9


out user-configurable bracket� Z-unit� U-unit� T-unit

NSV

0_0

12

46

4

6

4

5

6

2

1

3


1

2

3

4

5

6

Fig. 7.1/5: System components for LXA/LXC system

4. Feeding unit� Cable feeding unit� Universal terminal for transformers

5. Terminal boxes for connection todistribution board� TTA distribution connection to the

SIVACON system from the top/bottom� Terminals for external distribution

boards

6. Possible supplementaryequipment� End flange� Flange for degree of protection

increased from IP54 to IP55� Terminal block

3. Tap-off unit� Degree of protection IP54� With fuse switch disconnector from

125 A to 630 A� With circuit-breaker from 80 A to

1,250 A� Pluggable while energized up to 630 A� Fixed installation up to 1,250 A

(on terminal block)� Leading PEN or PE connector� Switching to load-free state following

defined, forced-operation sequences� Coding bracket


1

2

3

4

5

6

77/9


LRC system from 630 A – 6,300 A

The LRC busbar trunking system isused for power transmission. A specialfeature of the system is high resist-ance to external influences of chemi-cal and corrosive substances, and it isparticularly suitable for use in theopen air and in environments withhigh air humidity. The high degree ofprotection IP68 is guaranteed with theencapsulated epoxy cast-resin casingand serves to provide reliable powertransmission when there is a highenergy demand. The system can beused in industry as well as for relevantinfrastructure projects such as railroadstations, airports, office blocks, etc.

1. Trunking unit4- and 5-conductor system � Busbar material: copper� Degree of protection: IP68� User-configurable lengths:

from 0.30 m to 3.00 m� Layout: horizontal and vertical

without derating� Fire barriers:

fire resistance class S120 inaccordance with DIN 4102 Part 9


out offset� Z-unit� T-unit

3. Feeding unit and distributorunits� Universal terminals for

transformers, external distributorsand cable connection

4. Possible supplementaryequipment� End flange� terminal block

LR – LX adapter Encapsulated link componentStraight busbar componentDirectional change componentExpansion unitConnector Fire barrierConnector for distribution board connectionFixing componentTap-off point with tap boxCable feeding unit

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

6

7

8

9

10

5

3

2

4

1

11

Fig. 7.1/6: System components for LRC system

LR – LX adapter Encapsulated link componentStraight busbar componentDirectional change componentExpansion unitConnector Fire barrierConnector for distribution board connectionFixing componentTap-off point with tap boxCable feeding unit

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11


7.2 Cables andWiresWe read more and more reports in thedaily press about major fires in hotels,high-rise buildings, large industrialplants and office buildings, which veryoften entail dramatic rescue opera-tions to save people’s lives. Spectacu-lar fires like in the London Under-ground, in Dusseldorf airport, in theChannel Tunnel or in Mont-Blanctunnel resulted in numerous casual-ties and economic losses of billions.According to current estimates, therehave been approximately 5 millionfires in the industrial sector world-wide. These have resulted in esti-mated losses amounting to well over100 billion US dollars (= ca. 75 billioneuros).

The main hazard with such fire catas-trophes is the thick smoke emissionand the release of poisonous combus-tion gases such as carbon dioxide(CO2), carbon monoxide (CO) and –especially in closed rooms – the fall inthe level of atmospheric oxygen (O2)which is vital for human beings andanimals. The extremely opaque fumesstop people from being able to seeand find their way in rooms full ofsmoke and thus prevent them fromescaping and surviving. The conse-quences are dramatic: death throughsuffocation or poisoning – as hap-pened with the airport fire in Dussel-dorf. In addition to this, fire-fightingwater contaminated with toxins(including dioxin) and corrosive andpoisonous flue gas cleaning residuespollute the environment. This damagecan only be rectified in an environ-mentally compatible way at greatexpenditure, and even then only tosome extent. Through the diffusion ofcorrosive fire gases, particularly fromindustrial fires, serious secondarydamage is also incurred.

However, cables and wires are onlyseldom the cause of fires, as thereport on the fire catastrophe inDusseldorf airport also established.But fire can quickly spread to thecable routes installed in buildings. Iffire protection (fire barriers) is notcarried out by an expert, the fire canspread to other rooms and otherstories. This behavior is described asfire propagation. Consequently, cablesare classified according to their firepropagation characteristics.

Fire risk of PVC cables

Planned and installed by experts,installations with conventional cablesmade of PVC present no increased firerisk. With PVC-insulated cables, how-ever, very corrosive and toxic gases(with a poisonous effect) can bereleased in the event of a fire. Thesegases – not combustible themselves –displace the atmospheric oxygen atthe seat of the fire and thus affect theslow-burning property or the flameretardance of the halogen-containingmaterial.

The escaping hydrohalogen gasesreact with water, e.g. air humidity, toform electroconductive substances.This leads to an accelerated break-down of the insulating property. Forthis reason, halogen-containingmaterials are not suitable or to berecommended as insulating materialfor cables if the cables are still to beoperational after a longer exposure toflames. In order to pass the functionaltest during or after exposure toflames, the combustion residues ofwire insulation must not be conduc-tive. Halogen-free materials do nothave the above-mentioned disadvan-tages. Even when halogen-free mate-rials are combined, it has to be takeninto consideration that conductivesubstances such as acetic acid can beformed.

Halogen-free cables with improvedfire behavior and functionalendurance

In order to reduce risks and damage,the cable industry has developed fire-resistant, halogen-free cables andwires that meet more stringent safetyrequirements and thus fulfill theprerequisites for a forward-lookingelectrical installation. These safetycables and wires have a number ofsignificant advantages:

� No fire propagation in the event oflocal flame exposure

� Optional: functional endurance inthe event of flame exposure of 800 °C, at least 20 minutes up to amaximum of 180 minutes in accor-dance with IEC 60331 and VDE 0472-814 (previously “insulation integrity”)

� Optional: functional endurance E30or E90 of the entire cable system inaccordance with DIN 4102-12

� Proven low flue gas and smokedevelopment

� Low emission of corrosive sub-stances and gases

� Low poisonousness (toxicity) of theflue gases

The areas of application of thesecables and wires can be divided intotwo categories:

� Premises where the protection ofpersons is the main concern, suchas hospitals, hotels, departmentstores, subways, office blocks,public buildings, etc.

� Premises where the protection ofassets is the main concern, such asindustrial plants, premises with dataprocessing equipment, powerplants, nuclear power plants, mili-tary facilities, etc.

77/11


7.2.1 Requirements forthe Fire Behavior ofCables and WiresApart from the properties described,the safety cables and wires must havea few other dominant characteristics,which will be described in detailbelow.

Since the terms used with reference tocables and wires with special burningbehavior are not standardized, theirmeanings are defined below withrespect to the relevant test procedure.Here a distinction must be madebetween material-related and product-related definitions:

Material-related definitions

Halogen-free properties (corrosivity of the combustiongases)In the event of burn-off of halogen-containing cables and wires, depend-ing on the halogen content, verycorrosive (acid) gases are producedthat destroy easily corrodible parts inthe vicinity of the seat of the firewithout these being caught by thefire.

Standards concerning the halogen-free properties of cables and wires areto be found in

� IEC 60754-1 / DIN VDE 0482-267-2-1regarding the quantitative determi-nation of the halogen level and

� IEC 60754-2 / DIN VDE 0482- 267-2-2regarding the corrosivity and elec-troconductivity of the combustiongases.

Toxicity of the combustion gases(poisonous combustion gases)All combustion gases resulting frominsulating materials are toxic. This iscaused by the level of carbon monox-ide alone. The relevant standard is theFrench NES 713 / NF C20-454. (IECstandard is being drafted.)

Here the level of a number of differ-ent toxicologically relevant substancesis ascertained and compared withcorresponding limit values.

Critical oxygen content, LOI (Limited Oxygen Index)So as to make it possible to assess thefire behavior of cable and line materi-als, the test procedure standardizedunder ASTM D2863-70 was selected,which indicates the lowest oxygencontent in terms of percentage of anoxygen/nitrogen mixture whereby amaterial set alight still burns. Air isknown to have an oxygen content of21%, from which it may be concludedthat materials with an LOI < 21 burn.

Flue gas density

Flue gases arising from a fire canmake it difficult to recognize escaperoutes, so the materials for cables andwires must be designed to be lowfuming.

For measuring the flue gas density,the procedure normally used is theAmerican one for measuring the lightabsorption in the waste gas duct ofthe furnace when a defined test pieceis exposed to flames.

Inspection standards:

IEC 61043-1 and -2/VDE 0482-268-1and VDE 0482-268-2

Product-related definitions

Flame retardance The test for flame retardance is a“normal” fire test to determine theself-extinguishing capability of a cableor wire after exposure to flames inaccordance with IEC 60332-1 / DIN EN50265-2-1 / VDE 0482-265-2-1.

Examples: ÖLFLEX CLASSIC 100;NSSHÖU, NSLFFÖU, HO7RN-F,HO5VV-F, etc.

If requirements are not as high, a testin accordance with IEC 60332-2 / DINEN 50265-2 / VDE 0482-265-2-2 isalso possible. These test methods arenot used for fire-resistant cables andwires.

Low flammabilityThe test for low flammability is amulti-cable fire test in accordancewith VDE 0482-266-2-4 / DIN EN50266-2-4 / HD 405.3 / IEC 60332-3-24. The procedure is that in a furnacea vertically mounted bunched cabletied to a ladder is fired with a flame of800 °C for 20 minutes. After the flamehas been turned off, the cable bundlemust extinguish itself before the firehas reached the top end of the cable.These tests are also known as “cablebundle tests.” Cables which pass thistest are then classified as having theproperty ”no fire propagation inaccordance with IEC 60332-3“.

Examples: ÖLFLEX 100 H; ÖLFLEX110H and -110CH and ÖLFLEX 130 H,LAPPTHERM 145, H05Z-K/H07Z-K.

Fig. 7.2/1: Examples of the LOI value ofinsulating materials

Material LOI

PE 18

PTFE > 90

PC (compound fire-resistant) > 30


Functional endurance of cables andwires in the event of exposure toflamesThe functional endurance (previouslyknown as insulation integrity) ofcables and wires indicates how long acable exposed to fire remains electri-cally reliable.

The test method used here is thestandard VDE 0472 / DIN 57472-804derived from IEC 60331. A 1.2 m-longcable test specimen is fired with aflame of 800 °C (± 50 °C) for theduration of 20 minutes, while powercables are supplied with 400 V andcommunication cables with 110 Valternating voltage during exposure toflames. In this test, up until January1991 the test specimen was onlytested for insulation integrity, and thiswas done by monitoring for shortcircuit between the wires.

Note: The modified standard DIN VDE0472-814: 1991-01 stipulates testingthe copper conductor for interruptionsince the function of the line is onlyensured if there is no interruption orshort circuit during the required timeof exposure to flames. The functionalendurance in accordance with DIN VDE0472-814 is indicated on the line bymeans of an additional label FE forfunctional endurance of at least 20minutes or with additional information(time class), e.g. FE 90 for functionalendurance of at least 90 minutes. Theusual time classes are FE (2); FE 30; FE60; FE 90; FE 120; FE 180.

However, in practice, electric linestested as above have often failed inthe event of real fires much earlierthan as defined by the functional test,so that, for example, emergencylighting, signs for fire exits and smokeextraction systems, etc. have prema-turely failed to function. This hasoften had serious consequences forpeople and assets.

Functional endurance of the cablesystemFor a long time, therefore, the author-izing agencies had called for a realistictest for these types of line to bedevised that corresponds much moreclosely to the actual conditions in theevent of fire. It was very soon realizedthat, for example, the cable fixingplays a decisive role in maintainingthe electrical function, and the firetest conditions must be made morestringent. These requirements havebeen fulfilled with the standard DIN 4102-12: 1991-01. It applies toassessing the fire behavior of con-struction materials and structuralelements of electric cable systems. Inorder to distinguish the functionalendurance in accordance with DINVDE 0472-814, the functionalendurance classes E30, E60 and E90for the functional endurance of acable system have been created.Cables and wires that are in accor-dance with the test specification DIN4102-12 receive the much sought-after type-examination certificate(IBMB) only in conjunction withapproved, tested cable fixing systems(e.g. by OBO). Since the buildingauthorities in Germany act in accor-dance with DIN 4102 regardingrequirements for cable systems, theprevious VDE test in accordance with0472-814 has become much lessimportant.

There are also other functionalendurance tests in other countries.Here it is worth mentioning the testmethods used in Belgium in accor-dance with NBN-C 30-004F3, wherethe test specimen is exposed to anadditional firing mechanism, and theFrench test method in accordancewith NF C32-070 CR1, where theflame temperature is 900 °C and thetime exposure to flames is 15 min-utes.

Fire loadThe fire load of cables and wires isdetermined by measuring the energyreleased per meter of line for totalcombustion of all organic substances.This is a theoretical value which iscalculated from the sum of the individ-ual components used in the cable. Thefigures are in kWh/m or MJ/m.

What should also be mentioned regard-ing measurement of the fire load is thecomparison between PVC cables andwires and fire-resistant cables and wires.This is used to ascertain that the fireload with PVC cables is lower than fire-resistant cables; but this comparison isinappropriate since the flashing time isnot defined here. If the flashing time ofPVC cables was taken as a basis, itwould be established that the fire-resistant cables are not yet burnt andthus had released less energy than PVCcables. There is no valid measuringmethod for this.

Note:

The fire safety classes standardized inDIN 4102 indicate fire resistanceclasses according to a fire resistancerating in minutes. F90 means fireresistance rating = 90 minutes. Thisstandard also indicates classificationsfor non-combustible constructionmaterials (A1, A2) and combustibleconstruction materials with theclasses B3 – highly inflammable, B2 –normal flammability and B1 – lowflammability (flame-retardant). Thisinformation cannot be applied to theprovisions for cables and wires, sincein DIN 4102, fire propagation is themain concern, i.e. the fire shieldingtime in the event of a fire potentiallyspreading.There is only a link between firesafety classes and the provisions forcables and wires with special firebehavior concerning the buildingregulations on fire barriers for cable

77/13


penetration, which is to be found withdetails of the fire resistance classes,e.g. F90 and with relevant detailsabout size of the wall openings,minimum wall thicknesses and otherestablished points.

Construction of cables and wireswith functional enduranceBare copper conductors, whichaccording to requirements (up tothree hours’ functional endurance)can be covered with a layer of insulat-ing mica, and then insulation made offlame-retardant, halogen-free, cross-linked polyolefin. A layer of fiber glassis normally used over the coating ofthe stranded wires as a flame protec-tion layer. A material made of flame-retardant, halogen-free, cross-linkedpolyolefin is also used as an outersheath.

These construction characteristicsmean that all the requirements forproperties described in the introduc-tion can be fulfilled.

Construction of cables and wireswith particular burning behaviorFor cables and wires with particularburning behavior in halogen-free orlow-halogen versions, the sameconstruction principles apply as to the standard cable types.

Effects of flame-retardant additivesin halogen-free materialsThe fundamental effect is demonstratedbelow through the example of an EPRcompound and the additive aluminumhydroxide:

� At fire temperatures, considerablequantities of heat are consumedthrough the decomposition ofaluminum hydroxide and thusextracted from the combustionprocess of the rubber. This slowsdown the speed of the burn-off of

the rubber compound and theformation of combustible decompo-sition products.

� The steam vapor produced from thedecomposition of the aluminumhydroxide forms an oxygen-dis-pelling protective gas.

� A crust is formed on the surface ofthe rubber from the carbonizingproducts and aluminum hydroxidewhich limits further progress of thecombustion.

Multi-cable fire test with respect tocompound developmentExperience during development ofthese cables has shown that a furnaceand test equipment for testing the firepropagation to cable groupings inaccordance with IEC 60332-3 areessential for the development of fire-resistant cables and wires. For it hasemerged that with compound devel-opment it is only possible to assessthe burning behavior of cables onlyfor the respective test methods andwhen even apparently inconsequen-tial boundary conditions are observed.A change in the air exchange rateduring the multi-cable fire test canturn the test result completely upsidedown.

Experience to date has shown that onthe basis of the combustibility of amaterial established under laboratoryconditions, for example, measured asLOI value, is in no way an indicationof the course of the multi-cable firetest.

This can be clearly illustrated takingthe example of an ethylene vinylacetate (EVA) based rubber com-pound with an LOI value > 40, since itfails as a sheathing compound in themulti-cable fire test; a flame-retardantinfluence is not observed.

Consequence: There is virtually nopoint in attempting to relate the

results from different burning tests inorder to draw conclusions from theresult of one test procedure on theprobable result of another fire test.

Assessments within a material orcompound group are only to be madefor burning tests actually conductedwith the same boundary conditions.

7.2.2 Types of SafetyCables and Wires andtheir Areas of Application

Fixed installation

� 0.6/1 kV NHXH power cable

� 0.6/1 kV N2XH; N2XCH power cable

� 0.6/1 kV (N)HXH power cable E30, -E90 for safety circuits

� 0.6/1 kV (N)HXCH E30, -E90 powercable for safety circuits

� H(St)H light-current cable

� JH(St)H light-current cable E30,-E90 for safety circuits.

These cables are suitable for fixedindoor installation, in cable ducts andsometimes also outdoors. Areas ofapplication are facilities with highrequirements for safety and protectionof persons and concentration of assets.

Examples: industrial plants, premiseswith data processing equipment,nuclear power plants, military facili-ties, multi-story buildings, ware-houses, building services, mobiledrilling platforms, ships, mines,underground installations, tunneling,hospitals, etc.

� NHXMH installation lines

These lines are to be used preferablyfor fixed installation, for the indoorwiring of buildings with increasedsafety requirements, where protectionof persons is the main concern andthere are limited escape routes in theevent of a fire.

Table 7.2/2: Connecting and control cables for machines and industrial plants (Source: LAPPKABEL)


Halogen-free cables with burning behavior in accordance with IEC 60332-1 (flame-retardant) or IEC 60332-3 (highly flame-retardant)

Examples: hospitals and departmentstores, hotels, high-rise apartmentblocks, theaters, administrative build-ings, terminal buildings at airports,emergency power systems for lightingescape routes, ventilation systems,etc.

Flexible round cables

These cables are suitable for laying indry, damp and wet rooms, and somealso outdoors. Areas of application aremachines and industrial plants withincreased safety requirements whereprotection of assets is the main con-cern. For cables used in this type ofcapacity, there are frequently further

requirements regarding flexibility, oilresistance, no substances harmful tolacquers,* etc.

Examples: connection and control lineof and in machine tools, conveyors,large machinery, if the cables aresubject to bending. Depending onrequirements regarding flexibility,these are ÖLFLEX 110H, ÖLFLEX130H, ÖLFLEX 440P, ÖLFLEX-FD 855P.

Example of application of ÖLFLEX 130H:baggage handling systems in airports.

Note:VDE 0298-4 applies to the correctdimensioning of the current carryingcapacity of cables and wires in build-

* Materials used should be free of substancesharmful to the application of lacquers

Product name Burning behavior Characteristics Type of installation

ÖLFLEX CLASSIC 100 H highly flame-retardant connecting cable, oil-resistant, free of substances harmful to lacquers, hydrolysis-resistant fixed/flexible

ÖLFLEX CLASSIC 110 H highly flame-retardant control cable, oil-resistant, free of substances harmful to lacquers, hydrolysis-resistant fixed/flexible

ÖLFLEX CLASSIC 110 CH highly flame-retardant as ÖLFLEX CLASSIC 110 H plus Cu braided screen fixed/flexible

ÖLFLEX CLASSIC 120 H flame-retardant control cable, oil-resistant, free of substances harmful to lacquers, hydrolysis-resistant, increased flexibility fixed/flexible

ÖLFLEX CLASSIC 120 CH flame-retardant as ÖLFLEX CLASSIC 120 H plus Cu braided screen fixed/flexible

ÖLFLEX CLASSIC 130 H highly flame-retardant inexpensive control cable, free of substances harmful to lacquers, hydrolysis-resistant fixed/flexible

ÖLFLEX CLASSIC 135 CH highly flame-retardant as ÖLFLEX CLASSIC 130 H plus Cu braided screen (without inner sheath) fixed/flexible

ÖLFLEX 440 P flame-retardant PUR control cable, resistant to cold, oil-resistant, VDE registered flexible

ÖLFLEX 440 CP flame-retardant as ÖLFLEX 440 P plus Cu braided screen flexible

ÖLFLEX 540 P flame-retardant power cable, resistant to cold, oil-resistant, VDE registered flexible

ÖLFLEX 540 CP flame-retardant as ÖLFLEX 540 P plus Cu braided screen flexible

SPIREX coiled cable flame-retardant coiled cable made of ÖLFLEX 540 P with high recoiling forces flexible

ÖLFLEX SERVO FD 755 P flame-retardant PUR servomotor cable, resistant to cold, oil-resistant highly flexible

ÖLFLEX SERVO FD 755 CP flame-retardant as ÖLFLEX SERVO FD 755 P plus Cu braided screen highly flexible

ÖLFLEX SERVO FD 760 CP flame-retardant feedback cable (speedometer cable) highly flexible

ÖLFLEX SERVO FD 770 CP flame-retardant resolver, encoder, sensor cable highly flexible

ÖLFLEX SERVO FD 781 P flame-retardant PUR servomotor cable, resistant to cold, oil-resistant, low-capacity highly flexible


ÖLFLEX SERVO FD 785 P flame-retardant PUR servomotor cable, resistant to cold, oil-resistant, low-capacity, 0.6/1 kV highly flexible


ÖLFLEX FD 820 H flame-retardant power chain cable, resistant to cold, optimal very small diameters highly flexible

ÖLFLEX FD 820 CH flame-retardant as ÖLFLEX FD 820 H plus Cu braided screen highly flexible

ÖLFLEX FD 855 P flame-retardant power chain cable for long distances to be traversed, resistant to cold, UV-resistant highly flexible

ÖLFLEX FD 855 CP flame-retardant as ÖLFLEX FD 855 P plus Cu braided screen highly flexible

ings. Outside of buildings (in air or inground) VDE 0276-603 also applies.

An overview is to be found in theproduct information on halogen-freecables in the latest LAPPKABEL cata-log.

www.lappkabel.de


LAPPTHERM 145 lines highly flame-retardant electron beam cross-linked line, thermally particularly resistant, unsusceptible to welding beads fixed/flexible

LAPPTHERM 145 C lines highly flame-retardant as LAPPTHERM 145 line plus Cu braided screen fixed/flexible

H05Z-K, H07Z-K 90° flame-retardant halogen-free single-core, max. temperature range on the conductor +90 °C fixed

H05Z-K, H07Z-K 110° highly flame-retardant halogen-free single-core, max. temperature range on the conductor +110 °C fixed

SILFLEX SiF, SiF/GL, SiD, SiZ, FZLSi flame-retardant silicone single-core for operating temperature range from –50 °C to +180 °C fixed

SILFLEX SiHF flame-retardant silicone control and connecting cable, temperature range from –50 °C to +180 °C fixed/flexible

SILFLEX SiHF/GLS flame-retardant as SILFLEX SiHF but with steel wire armoring fixed/flexible

SILFLEX H05SS-F EWKF flame-retardant silicone control and connecting line with HAR approval, notch-resistant fixed/flexible

SILFLEX UL/CSA flame-retardant silicone control and connecting line with UL/CSA approval fixed/flexible

SILFLEX EWKF flame-retardant silicone control and connecting line, notch-resistant fixed/flexible

SILFLEX EWKF C flame-retardant as SILFLEX EWKF plus Cu braided screen fixed/flexible

ZERO-FLAME SC 350 flame-retardant single-core made of glass filament for high temperatures: –50 °C to +350 °C fixed/flexible

ZERO-FLAME MC 350 flame-retardant cable made of glass filament for high temperatures: –50 °C to +350 °C fixed/flexible

ZERO-FLAME SC 1565 flame-retardant single-core for extreme temperatures from –195°C to +400 °C, for a short time up to +1565 °C fixed/flexible

ZERO-FLAME MC 1565 flame-retardant cable for extreme temperatures from –195 °C to +400 °C, for a short time up to +1565 °C fixed/flexible

77/15



(N)HXMH highly flame-retardant high-current installation cable fixed

J-H(ST)H …BD highly flame-retardant installation cable for telephone, measurement and signal transmission fixed

J-H(ST)H …BD fire alarm cable highly flame-retardant fire alarm cable for telephone, measurement and signal transmission in accordance with VDE 0815 fixed

UNITRONIC LAN UTP/S-H 200 MHz-CAT.5e flame-retardant Class D LAN cable for structured cabling fixed/flexible

UNITRONIC LAN UTP/S-H 250 MHz-CAT.6 flame-retardant Class E LAN cable for structured cabling fixed

UNITRONIC LAN STP/S-H PiMF 250 MHz-CAT.6 flame-retardant Class E LAN cable for structured cabling, pairs in metal foil fixed/flexible

UNITRONIC LAN STP/S-H PiMF 600 MHz-CAT.7 flame-retardant Class F LAN cable for structured cabling, pairs in metal foil fixed

UNITRONIC LAN 1.2 GHz flame-retardant LAN cable meeting the requirements of draft standard prEN 50288-4-1 fixed

HITRONIC POF SIMPLEX PE-PUR flame-retardant OWG for transmissions up to ca. 60 m for 660 nm wavelength, adhesive-free fixed

HITRONIC POF SIMPLEX S PE-PUR/S PA-PUR flame-retardant as HITRONIC POF SIMPLEX PE-PUR, also SERCOS compatible fixed

HITRONIC POF SIMPLEX FD PE-PUR flame-retardant OWG for transmissions up to ca. 60 m for 660 nm wavelength, adhesive-free highly flexible

HITRONIC POF DUPLEX FD PE-PUR flame-retardant OWG for transmissions up to ca. 60 m for 660 nm wavelength, adhesive-free highly flexible

HITRONIC HUN LWL flame-retardant fiber glass cable for use indoors and outdoors for high mechanical loads fixed

HITRONIC HDH I-V(ZN) H flame-retardant mini-breakout fiber glass cable for short to medium distances indoors fixed

ETHERLINE H CAT.5 and CAT.5e flame-retardant fast Ethernet lines with transmission rate 100 Mbit/s fixed

ETHERLINE H Flex CAT.5 flame-retardant fast Ethernet line with transmission rate 100 Mbit/s flexible

Table 7.2/4: Cables and lines, data lines, optical fiber for building installation (Source: LAPP CABLE)


UNITRONIC LiHH flame-retardant data line with DIN 47100 color code fixed/flexible

UNITRONIC LiHCH flame-retardant as UNITRONIC LiHH plus Cu braided screen fixed/flexible

UNITRONIC LiHCH (TP) flame-retardant as UNITRONIC LiHCH, paired fixed/flexible

UNITRONIC FD P plus UL/CSA flame-retardant data line for power chain use, UL listed, low-capacity, resistant to cold highly flexible

UNITRONIC FD CP plus UL/CSA flame-retardant as UNITRONIC FD P plus UL/CSA but with Cu braided screen highly flexible

UNITRONIC FD CP (TP) plus UL/CSA flame-retardant as UNITRONIC FD CP plus UL/CSA, paired highly flexible

UNITRONIC BUS P COMBI IBS flame-retardant installation remote bus cable INTERBUS 100 ø, color-coded in accordance with DIN 47100 fixed

UNITRONIC BUS FD P IBS flame-retardant remote bus cable INTERBUS 100 ø for power chain use highly flexible

UNITRONIC BUS FD P COMBI IBS flame-retardant installation remote bus cable INTERBUS 100 ø for power chain use highly flexible

UNITRONIC BUS L2/FIP 7-wire flame-retardant PROFIBUS line for higher requirements, oil-resistant fixed

UNITRONIC BUS HFFR L2/FIP FC highly flame-retardant PROFIBUS line for higher requirements, oil-resistant fixed

Table 7.2/5: Data and bus lines for machines and industrial plants (Source: LAPP CABLE)

Table 7.2/3: Connecting and control cables for machines and industrial plants (Source: LAPP CABLE)


Subdistribution Systems

chapter 88.1 General

8.2 Configuration

8.3 Selectivity and Back-up Protection

8.4 Small Distribution Boards and Wall- or Floor-Mounted Distribution Boards

8.5 Circuit Protection Devices

8 Subdistribution Systems


8.1 GeneralSubdistribution systems, as an essen-tial component for the reliable powersupply to all consumers of a building,are used for the distributed supply ofcircuits. From the subdistributionboards, cables either lead directly orvia ground contact outlets to theconsumer. Protective devices arelocated within the subdistributionsystems.

These are:

� Fuses

� Miniature circuit-breakers

� RCD (residual current devices)


� Overvoltage protection

They provide protection againstpersonal injury and protect:

� Against excessive heating caused bynon-permissible currents

� Against the effects of short-circuitcurrents and the resulting mechani-cal damage.

In addition to the protective devices, asubdistribution system also containsdevices for switching, measuring andmonitoring. These are:

� Isolators

� KNX/EIB components

� Outlets

� Measuring instruments

� Switching devices

� Transformers for extra-low voltages

� Components of the building controlsystems

8.2 Configuration The local environmental conditionsand all operating data have utmostimportance for the configuration ofthe subdistribution systems. Thedimensioning is made using thefollowing criteria:

Ambient conditions

� Dimensions

� Mechanical stress

� Exposure to corrosion

� Notes concerning constructionmeasures

� Wiring spaces

� Environmental conditions

Electrical data

� Rated currents of the busbars

� Rated currents of the supply circuits

� Rated currents of the branches

� Short-circuit strength of the busbars

� Rating factor for switchgear assem-blies

� Heat loss

Protection and installation type

� Degree of protection

� Observance of the upper tempera-ture limit

� Installation type (free-standing,floor-mounted distribution board,wall-mounted distribution board)

� Protective measures

� Accessibility, e.g. for installation,maintenance and operating

Type of construction

� Number of operating faces

� Space requirements for modularinstallation devices, busbars andterminals

� Supply conditions

The number of subdistribution boardsin a building is determined using thefollowing criteria:

Floors

A high-rise building normally has atleast one floor distribution board foreach floor. A residential buildingnormally has one distribution systemfor each apartment.

Building sections

If a building consists of several sec-tions, at least one subdistributionsystem is normally provided for eachbuilding section.

Departments

In a hospital, separate subdistributionsystems are provided for the variousdepartments, such as surgery, OPtheater, etc.

Safety power supplies

Separate distribution boards for thesafety power supply are required forsupplying the required safety equip-ment. Depending on the type and useof the building or rooms, the relevantregulations and guidelines must beobserved, such as VDE 0100-710 and-718 and the MLAR (Sample Directiveon Fireproofing Requirements for LineSystems).

8.2.1 Standards to beObserved forDimensioning

� IEC 60364-2-20, DIN VDE 0100-200Low voltage installations; Part 200Definitions

� IEC 60364-3-30, DIN VDE 0100-300;Assessment of general characteris-tics of installations

88/3


� IEC 60364-4-41, DIN VDE 0100-410Protection against electric shock

� IEC 60364-4-30 / DIN VDE 0100-430Protection against overcurrent

� IEC 60364-5-51 / DIN VDE 0100-510Selection and erection of electricalequipment; common rules

� IEC 60364-5-20 / DIN VDE 0100-520Wiring systems

� DIN VDE 0298-4 Recommendedvalues for the current carryingcapacity of sheathed and non-sheathed cables

� DIN VDE 0606-1 Connecting materi-als up to 690 V; Part 1 – Installationboxes for accomodation of equip-ment and/or connecting terminals

� DIN 18015-1 Electrical systems inresidential buildings, planningprinciples

8.2.2 Selection of theProtective Devices andConnecting Lines

The selection and setting of theprotective devices to be used mustsatisfy the following three conditions:

� Protection against non-permissiblecontact voltage for indirect contact(electric shock)

� Overload protection

� Short-circuit protection

Detailed information for the threeconditions, see Section 2.2 “Dimen-sioning of Power Distribution Sys-tems”.

An exact protective device selectionand thus the dimensioning of subdis-tribution systems requires extensiveshort-circuit current calculations andvoltage drop calculations. Catalogdata for the short-circuit energies, theselectivity and the back-up protection

of the individual devices and assem-blies must also be consulted. In addi-tion, the appropriate regulations andstandards must be observed. At thispoint, a reference should be made tothe SIMARIS design dimensioning toolthat automatically takes account ofthe above mentioned conditions,catalog data, standards and regula-tions, and consequently automaticallymakes the device selection.

8.3 Selectivity andBack-up Protection Rooms used for medical purposes(VDE 0100-710) and meeting rooms(DIN VDE 0100-718) require theselection of protective devices insubareas. For other building types,such as computer centers, there is anincreasing demand for a selectivegrading of the protective devices,because only the circuit affected by afault would be disabled with the othercircuits continuing to be supplied withpower without interruption (see alsoSection 2.3 “Power System Protectionand Protection Coordination”).

Because the attainment of selectivityresults in increased costs, it should bedecided for which circuits selectivity isuseful. Back-up protection is thelower-cost option. In this case, anupstream protective device, e.g. an LVHRC fuse as group back-up fuse,supports a downstream protectivedevice in mastering the short-circuitcurrent, i.e. both an upstream and adownstream protective device trip.The short-circuit current, however,has already been sufficiently reducedby the upstream protective device sothat the downstream protectivedevice can have a smaller short-circuitbreaking capacity. Back-up protectionshould be used when the expectedsolid short-circuit current exceeds the

breaking capacity of the switchingdevice or the consumers. If this is notthe case, an additional limiting protec-tive device unnecessarily reduces theselectivity or, indeed, removes it.

The following scheme should befollowed for the selectivity or back-upprotection decision:

� determine the maximum short-circuit current at the installationpoint,

� check whether the selected protec-tive devices can master this short-circuit current alone or with back-up protection using upstreamprotective devices,

� check at which current the down-stream protective devices and theupstream protective devices areselective to each other.

Selectivity and back-up protectionexemplified for a data center

Computer centers place very highdemands on the safety of supply. Thisis particularly true for the consumersattached to the uninterruptible powersupply and ensure a reliable databack-up in case of a fault and serviceinterruption. Those solutions provid-ing selectivity and back-up protectionrelying on the previously mentionedSIMARIS design configuration toolshould be presented at this point.Photo 8.3/1 shows a subdistributionsystem in SIMARIS design. A SENTRON3WL circuit-breaker as outgoingfeeder switch of the main distributionis upstream to the subdistributionsystem shown here. The followingfigures show the selectivity diagramsfor the considered subdistributionsystem automatically generated bySIMARIS design (Photo 8.3/2). SIMARISdesign specifies the characteristiccurve band of the considered circuit(yellow lines), the envelope curves of


all upstream devices (blue line) and alldownstream devices (red line). Inaddition to the specification of theminimum and maximum short-circuitcurrents, any selectivity limits for theindividual circuits are also specified.

Photo 8.3/3 shows the selective grad-ing of the 3WL circuit-breaker from themain distribution system and the groupback-up fuse (125 A LV HRC fuse) ofthe subdistribution system. The con-sumers critical for functionalendurance which are installed in aredundant manner in the subdistribu-tion system should not be protectedwith the same back-up fuse but ratherbe assigned to different groups.

The selectivity diagram shows thecircuit diagram of a single-phaseconsumer in the subdistributionsystem. This circuit diagram is pro-tected with a 10 A miniature circuit-breaker with characteristic C and for a

maximum short-circuit current of9,719 kA selective for the 125 Agroup back-up fuse.

The same subdistribution system alsocontains an example for back-upprotection. Photo 8.3/4 shows theselectivity diagram for the combina-tion of the group back-up fuse with a10 A miniature circuit-breaker of thecharacteristic B. Up to the breakingcapacity of the 15 kA miniature cir-cuit-breaker, the two protectivedevices are selective to each other.Above this value, the current is limitedby the fuse and the miniature circuit-breaker protected by a fuse; bothdevices trip.

SIMARIS design automatically gener-ates these characteristic curves toprovide exact information about themaximum and minimum short-circuitcurrents of the associated circuit.Photo 8.3/4 also shows up to which

current (Isel kurz) the protective devicesare selective to each other.

Photo 8.3/1: Subdistribution in a data center, display in SIMARIS design

88/5


Photo 8.3/2: Selectivity of the group back-up fuse to the upstreamprotective devices

Photo 8.3/3: Selectivity of the group back-up fuse / miniature circuit-diagramcombination

Photo 8.3/4: Back-up protection of the group back-up fuse / miniaturecircuit-breaker


8.4 Small Distri-bution Boards andWall- or Floor-Mounted Distri-bution BoardsAll power consumers of a residentialbuilding, an administrative building ora factory should be supplied reliablywith electricity. In accordance withthe operational requirements for allnetwork nodes, low-voltageswitchgear, low-voltage distributionboards or controlgear should beconfigured so that they satisfy theassociated conditions of their site ofinstallation, and from which both theconnected consumers and also thecable and wires are switched, pro-tected and monitored.

The following items are particularlyimportant for the configuration:

Ambient and installationconditions

Mechanical stress

� Degree of protection in accordancewith DIN EN 60529 Direct contactprotection, dust and water protec-tion

� Ambient temperature and climaticconditions

� Corrosion exposure

� Type of installation and fastening(e.g. free-standing, wall attach-ment)

� Cover or doors, possibly transparentor non-transparent

� Dimensions, maximum permittedexterior dimensions of theswitchgear

� Maximum permitted dimensions ofthe switchgear for transport andinstallation on site

� Cable ducts, possibly base cover

� Cable entry

� Type of cable installation (cableduct, racks and similar)

� Device installation (fixed or insertsor withdrawable units for fastreplacement)

� Accessibility of the devices: parts tobe accessed during operation, suchas fuses, miniature circuit-breakers,etc., should be grouped andarranged within the switchgearassemblies so they are accessible(e.g. using a quick-acting cover).Contactors and fuses should beplaced in separate enclosures.

Type of installation, accessibility

So that the most economical construc-tion can always be selected, beforespecifying construction measures, thecharacteristics of the switchgear anddistribution boards should be com-pared with each other and then adecision made. Such characteristicsinclude:

� Open or closed construction (typeof operating area)

� Self-supporting installation: free-standing in the room, on a wall, orin a niche

� Non-self-supporting installation: forfastening on the wall, on a mount-ing structure or in a wall niche

� Type of access, e.g. for installation,maintenance and operating

� Dimensions (height, depth, width)

� Notes concerning constructionmeasures

Protective measures

� Protection against direct contact foran open door in the installationdistribution board using contactprotection covers, IP30 degree ofprotection

� Protection against indirect contacton all frame and covering parts withsafety class 1 (protective conductorconnection)

– Safety class 1(protective conductor connection)Encapsulations and parts of theweight-bearing metal structureare protected against corrosionusing a high-quality surface-protecting coating. Metal parts forswitchgear and distributionboards must be included in theprotective measures using aprotective conductor.

– Safety class 2(protective insulation)If switchgear or distributionboards of safety class 2 are used,ensure that the protective insula-tion applied in the factory is notpenetrated by conducting metalparts such as switch shafts, metal-lic conductor glands, etc. Theinactive metal parts within theprotective insulation, such asmounting plates and housing ofdevices may never be connectedwith the PE conductor or PENconductor, even when they have aPE connection terminal. If coversor doors can be opened without atool or key, all touchable conduc-tive parts inside must be placedbehind an insulated cover in theIP2X degree of protection. Thesecovers may only be removedusing a tool. The looping-throughof PE conductors is permitted.

88/7


Space requirements for modularinstallation devices , busbars andterminals

For the configuration of rack-mountedmodular installation devices in encap-sulated switchgear and distributionboards, in particular for box-typedistribution boards, in addition to thespace required for the devices them-selves, sufficient space must be pro-vided for:

� The voltage distance (clearance inair) to the encapsulation

� The heat dissipation of the individ-ual devices

� Any required blow out space forswitchgear

� The wiring

� The connection of the outer ingoingand outgoing cables (connectionspace)

� The device identification

A clear designation of the associateddevices should be used both in theproject documentation and in thecompleted switchgear assemblies.This is true, for example, also for theassociation of the fuses to the circuits.

Meters/counters and measuringinstruments should be placed at eyelevel. All devices requiring manualintervention should be placed at arm'sreach (roughly at a height between0.6 and 1.8 m).

Under some circumstances restric-tions that result from the use of adevice in an encapsulation must beobserved, e.g. for the rated currentand the switching capacity.*

Wiring space

After installing the switchgear anddistribution boards, the availablewiring space for outgoing cables andwires both inside and outside is deci-sive for the efficient execution of thewiring work. A particularly smallencapsulation would initially appearto be very economical to purchase,however, the restrictive wiring spacecan require such a high installationcost for the initial and later connec-tion of cables that the low priceadvantage becomes lost.

For cables with a large cross sectionensure that sufficient space forspreading out the cores and routing isavailable.

Special requirements

Special requirements, such as explo-sion protection, protection againstaggressive atmospheres and shocksmust be taken into consideration inaccordance with the appropriatespecifications or as additional agree-ments.

Selection of the electrical equip-ment

For the equipment installed in theswitchgear assemblies, the followingmust be considered:

� Its associated device specifications

� The suitability with regard to therated data, in particular short-circuitstrength and capacities

� Current-limiting protective devicesmay need to be installed.

Rated load factor

To prevent an uneconomical over-dimensioning of the housing andresources, we recommend the use ofthe rated load factors (Table 8.4/1)(unless other data has been agreed).

The rated load factor must be consid-ered for the determination of the testcurrents for the temperature-rise testand for the dimensioning of thecurrent paths and devices of theinfeed and busbars.

Electrical equipment in switchgearand distribution board systems dissi-pate their heat losses to the surround-ing air. To ensure the correct functionof this equipment, the prescribed limittemperatures in switchgear must beobserved.

DIN VDE 0660-507 contains calcula-tion methods, applications, formulasand characteristic data for maintain-ing the upper limit temperature.

Table 8.4/1: Rated load factors (DIN VDE 0660-500 Section 4.8, Table I)

Number of main circuits Rated load factor

2 and 3 0.9

4 and 5 0.8

6 to (including) 9 0.7

10 and more 0.6

* Also see Low-Voltage Controls and DistributionSIRIUS – SENTRON – SIVACON; Catalog LV 1Order no. E86060-K1002-A101-A6

Figure 8.4/1: Steps for determining and maintaining the limit temperature


The observance of the upper limittemperature within switchgear cabi-net systems is proved using

� EN 60439-3 / DIN VDE 0660-504

� IEC 60890 / DIN VDE 0660-507

These standards contain calculationmethods, applications, formulas andcharacteristic data for maintaining theupper limit temperature. Figure 8.4/1shows the general procedure. Thecorrect selection of the variousdevices to be installed plays a signifi-cant role for the dimensioning ofsubdistribution boards. The followingchecklists provide help for this impor-tant decision. The required parame-ters from the checklist allow thecorrect device selection for eachcircuit.

Selection of an appropriate switchgearcabinet system with adequate space forthe resources to be installed (e.g. using

the catalog)

Determine the effective heat loss Pv eff inin the switchgear cabinet system

Specify the permitted upper airtemperature ∆t in the switchgear cabinet

system (e.g. ∆t = 20 K)

Caution: observe the max. operatingtemperature of the installed equipment!

Proof of observance of the uppertemperature limit

End

Start

Yes

No

Ps Max. heat radiation loss of the switchgear cabinet∑Pv Total of the heat loss of the installed switchgear and lines

* Increase the Cu cross-section forbusbar systems and wiring of theswitchgear

Select a larger switchgear cabinetor divide into two or morepanels.

Other changes to influence theradiating heat loss Ps(switchgear cabinet) by

– air conditioning of theswitchgear cabinet system

– low-loss construction*

Selection/specification,whether the selected switchgear

cabinet system is suitable forPs ≥ ∑Pv

88/9


8.4.1 ALPHA SELECT

Planning and configurationsupport from the TIP tool platform

ALPHA SELECT is the tool for theelectrician and switchgear panelbuilder for building installations.Support is provided for planning,configuring, cost estimating, tender-ing, order processing and the con-struction of the various distributionboards.

ALPHA SELECT allows the fast andsimple selection of SIMBOX smalldistribution boards, ALPHA metercabinets, ALPHA distribution boardsand ALPHA 8HP insulated distributionsystems, including quick-assemblykits, assembly kits, the associatedaccessories and BETA modular instal-lation devices. Products can also bechosen from the A&D EGH catalog andthe CA01 electronic catalog. ALPHAmeter cabinets can be chosen inaccordance with the regulations ofthe local power supply network opera-tors or also based on technical criteria.

The possibility to hide and displaylevels (layer display) gives the user anoverview of the equipment assign-ment of the distribution board. In theresulting bill of materials, discountsfor individual items or products can beassigned and markups for the installa-tion effort calculated. The output to aproject can be customized as required.Electronic export formats (bill ofmaterials as CSV file, graphics asWMF, complete output as PDF), theprinting of a tender (optionally withor without integrated drawings) and

8.5 CircuitProtection DevicesThe correct selection of the variousdevices to be installed plays a signifi-cant role for the dimensioning ofsubdistribution boards. The followingchecklists provide help for this impor-tant decision. The required parame-ters from the checklist allow thecorrect device selection for eachcircuit.

Photo 8.4/1: Selection of the distribution boardsystem

Photo 8.4/2: ALPHA distribution board assembly

Photo 8.4/3: ALPHA 8HP insulated distributionboard assembly

Photo 8.4/4: ALPHA 400-ZS meter cabinet

the printing of drawings with frame inthe formats DIN A3 or DIN A4 areavailable as output.

It is also possible to include the con-struction structure in the data output.This can be used, in principle, as aconstruction plan for building up thedistribution board.

You can obtain further informationfrom your Siemens contact.

ALPHA SELECT can be downloadedfrom

www.siemens.de/alpha-select –> Support


Checklist

Residual-current-operated circuit-breaker (RCCB)

Project name

.........................................................................................

Owner/developer

.........................................................................................

Planning engineer

.........................................................................................

Power supply system (RCCB cannot be used in the TN-C system) ........................

Rated voltage

Un of RCCB c 230 Vc 400 Vc 500 V

Rated current

In of RCCB c 16 Ac 25 Ac 63 Ac 80 Ac 125 A

Rated residual current

I∆n of the RCCB

Protection against direct contact (additional protection) c ≤ 30 mA

Protection against indirect contact (fault protection) c ≥ 30 mA

Fire protection (for ground fault current) c ≤ 300 mA

Disconnect condition

in the TT system satisfies the grounding resistance ........................

Number of poles c 2

c 4

Selectivity requirements c Yes c No

Tripping behavior of the RCCB

Instantaneous – standard c

Short-time-delay – super resistant c

Selective – staggered arrangement of RCCBs c

Back-up fuse checked / back-up protection ensured ........................ / ........................

88/11


Checklist

Residual current form

Tripping range / sensitivity of the residual current device

Type A – pulse-current sensitive c

Type B – universal current sensitive, SIQUENCE c

Special installation requirements

Harsh environmental conditions, SIGRES c

Frequency range 50 to 400 Hz c

Possibly miniature circuit-breakers selection – see CB checklist ..............................................................................

Result of residual-current-operated circuit-breaker selection ..............................................................................

noitcennoc-NCAV521…42SERGISnip-2

10 30 100 300 500 1000 1P+N 3P+N 16 25 40 63 80 100 125 Type A* Type A* S 100/125 A tfelK

6-111

6-7642113

6-7642164

8-614

8-76416

6-64213 KK01

6-616 KK01

KK6-581643

6-113 KK13

6-764213 KK12

6-57642463

6-56444

6-564247

8-6444

8-576446

8-547

8-648

4-7642463

5-4-76476

6-642563

6-7642463 KL

6-4243 KK03

6-764243 KK12

6-64243 KK01

6-76446 KK01

6-6446 KK12

8-646 LK21KK

KK01

Type A K

]A[tnerrucdetaRsniPseireS Rated residual current [mA]

500 V3P+N

Frequency 50-400 Hz

Characteristic

4 -6

Special versions

SIQUENCEType B K

SIQUENCEType B S

5SM3

5SM3 3

63 A

4

FI 30 mA 4-pin

*KS

Version for selective tripping Super-resistant versionType A: AC and pulse-current-sensitive fault

current acquisition


Checklist

RCCB module

Project name

.........................................................................................

Owner/developer

.........................................................................................

Planning engineer

.........................................................................................

Power supply system

(RC cannot be used in the TN-C system) ........................

Rated voltage

Un of the residual current device c 230 V

c 400 V

Rated current

In of the residual current device c 0.3 to 16 A

c 0.3 to 40 A

c 0.3 to 63 A

c 80 to 100 A


I∆n of the residual current device


Protection against indirect contact (fault protection) c > 30 mA



in the TT system satisfies the grounding resistance ........................

Number of poles c 2

c 3

c 4


Tripping behavior of the RCCB



Selective – staggered arrangement of RCCB modules c

88/13


Checklist



Type A – Pulse-current sensitive c

Miniature circuit-breaker selection – see MCB checklist .........................................................................................

Result of RCCB module selection .........................................................................................

10 30 100 300 500 1000 2 3 4 6...16 1) 6...401) 6...631) 80...1002) Type A 3) Type A 3)

6-1216-2432636-54327643

10KK6-5243238-52268-543876

6-742638-74268-748

4 2 -6 KK01

4-pin 6..40 A

1) 2 pins = 2 MW (36 mm); 3 and 4 pins = 3 MW (54 mm); plus the pole number per CB each 1MW2) 2 pins = 3.5 MW (63 mm); 4 pins = 5 MW (90 mm); plus the pole count per CB each 1.5MW3) Type A: AC and pulse-current-sensitive fault current acquisition

Version for selective tripping

Short-time delayed, super-resistant

30 mA

5SM2

Specialconstruction

Pins

RCCB module

Rated residual current [mA] Rated current [A] Characteristic

Order no. (MLFB) e.g.

5SM2

3

Series

S

S

K

K

K

RCCB module: selection table for order no. details


Checklist

RCBO – residual-current-operated circuit-breaker with integralovercurrent protection

Project name

.........................................................................................

Owner/developer

.........................................................................................

Planning engineer

.........................................................................................

Power supply system (RCBO cannot be used in the TN-C system) ........................

Rated voltage

Un of the RCBO c 230 Vc 400 V

Rated current

In of the RCBO c 6 Ac 8 Ac 10 Ac 13 Ac 16 Ac 20 Ac 25 Ac 32 Ac 40 Ac 100 Ac 125 A


I∆n of the residual current device


Protection against indirect contact (fault protection) c > 30 mA



in the TT network satisfies the grounding resistance ........................

Conditions/consumers in the circuit

Outlets, non-stationary consumers c B

Motors, lamps c C

Transformers, inductances, capacitors c D

Number of poles c 2

c 4

88/15


Checklist


Tripping behavior of the residual current device



Selective – staggered arrangement of RCBOs c

Back-up fuse checked / back-up protection ensured ........................ / ........................



Type A – Pulse-current sensitive c

Type B – Universal current sensitive, SIQUENCE c

Result of RCBO selection .........................................................................................

10 30 300 1000 1+N 2 4 6 10 B/ Type A1) C/ Type A1) C/ Type A1) B/ Type A1) C/ Type A1) C/ Type B2) D/ Type B2) C/ Type B2) D/ Type B2)Standard

(230 V or 400 V) 480 V 6 8 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 100 125

7-6-451 61310160KK7-46563 042352026131018060KK

3 6 5 6 4 -6 0423520261310160KK7-453 52026101KV

7-6-4263 KK 827-6-423 0423520261310160AF

7-6-4426 WK 827-6-44863 KK 82

4763 -7 AK 81 824763 KA8- 81476 -7 2818KC476 KB7- 82476 -8 BK 81

Order no. (MLFB) e.g.5 6 KK 10

1+N 6 kA A-Char. 10 A

5SU1

Rated current[A]

SeriesRated residual current [mA] Switching

capacity [kA]CB characteristic / RC typePin

30mARCBO

Version

5SU1 3 -6

SK S S K K S

1) Type A: AC and pulse-current-sensitive fault current acquisition

2) SIQUENCE Type B: residual current acquisition for: AC, pulse currents und smooth DC fault currents

Selective

Short-time delayed, super-resistant

S

K

RCBO: selection table for order no. details


Checklist

Miniature circuit-breaker (MCB)

Project name

.........................................................................................

Owner/developer

.........................................................................................

Planning engineer

.........................................................................................

Rated cross section of the circuit ........................ mm2

Iz in accordance with DIN VDE 0298 T4

(Observe reduction factors with regard to the installation type, bundling and ambient temperature)

Rated current of the MCB ........................ A

Short-circuit current at the mounting location of the MCB

Site of installation accessible for ordinary people (EN 60898)

Icn of the MCB c 6 kAc 10 kAc 15 kA

Site of installation not accessible for ordinary people – Industry (EN 60947-2)

Icn of the CB switch c 25 kA

Conditions/consumers in the circuit

Recommendation for the tripping characteristic

Semiconductor, long cable lengths c A

Outlets, non-stationary consumers c B

Motors, lamps c C

Transformers, inductances, capacitors c D

Number of conductors(Number of poles, 1, 1+N, 2, 3, 3+N, 4) ........................


Back-up protection ensured ........................

Protection measure / disconnect condition ........................ / ........................

If required,selection of the RCCB – See RCCB checklist .........................................................................................

Result of the miniature circuit-breaker selection .........................................................................................

88/17


Checklist

Icn Icu *_ 1+N in55 70 6 10 15 25 1 2 3 4 1+N 1MW 3+N 0.3 0.5 1 01. Jun 2 3 4 6 8 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 A B C D

5S J*_ 53216 SK7-6-02613101

6-36050423520261310160402016Y

6-36050423520261310160654326Y

8-7-3605042352026131018060403020511050416543216Y

6-042352026131016006Y

7-042352026131018060402006Y

Y 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 01 15 02 03 04 06 08 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 -5

6-08360504235202613101606543214Y

7-083605042352026131018060403020511050416543214Y

8-3605042352026131018060403020511050416543214Y

6-360504235202613101606543217Y

8-7-3605042352026131018060403020511050416543217Y

5S 8-7-360504235202613101806040302051105041521_*8Y

6-3605042352026131016040201_*5Y

2_*5Y 6-36050423520261310160

7-36050423520261310180604030205110504121_*5Y

P 4 1 2 3 4 80 91 92 -6 -7

P 4 1 2 3 4 8-1908

P 5*_ 1 2 3 4 80 91 92 -7

SuffixSeries 70 mm 10 kA 1-pin 16 A

5S

5S

5 S

C-Char

1 16 -7

Suffix

5S

5S

5S

.rahC]A[tnerrucdetaRsniP]mm[htpeDseireS Switching capacity [kA]

Y 4

*_ Types with special construction for residential buildings

*_ Series with high switching capacity up to 70 kA in accordance with EN 60947-2

*_ Universal current version

Rated Rated current In of the Iz (line)cross-section qn MCB for protection of Permitted continuous load current for

2 conductors under load 3 conductors under load 2 conductors under load 3 conductors under loadmm2 A A A A

1.5 16 16 19.5 17.52.5 25 20 27 244 32 32 36 326 40 40 46 41

10 63 50 63 5716 80 63 85 7625 100 80 112 9635 125 100 138 119

Table 8.5/1: Assignment of miniature circuit-breakers to conductor cross-sectionsExample: Ribbon cable, multi-core line on or in the wall, installation type C*) at + 30 ºC ambient temperature

* Installation type C in accordance with IEC 60364-5-52 / DIN VDE 0298-4. The lines are attached so that the separation between them and the wall surface is less than 0.3-times the external diameter of the lines.


Checklist

Fuses

Project name

.........................................................................................

Owner/developer

.........................................................................................

Planning engineer

.........................................................................................

(observe standards, certifications, approvals)

System voltage

AC DC

up to 400 V c c

up to 500 V c c

up to 690 V c c

> 690 V c c


gG – line protection, general protection .........................................................................................

aM – motor circuits, switchgear protection .........................................................................................

quick – line protection, general protection .........................................................................................

slow – line protection, general protection .........................................................................................

aR/gR/gS semiconductor protection super quick, see SITOR checklist

Rated voltage of the fuse AC ........................ V DC1 ........................ V

Short-circuit current at the mounting location ............................. kA

Rated short-circuit breaking capacity of the fuse AC ........................ kA DC1 ........................ kA

System Size Rated current strength

NH 000, 00, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 4a 2–1,250 A

D (DIAZED) DII, DIII, DIV, NDz 2–100 A

D0 (NEOZED) D01, D02, D03 2–100 A

Cylinder fuses 10 x 38, 14 x 51, 22 x 58 2–100 A

Selectivity requirements tested ........................

Protection measure / shutdown condition tested ........................ / ........................

88/19


Checklist

Installation of the fuse

Devices without switching function .........................................................................................

Fuse holder, fuse socket, fuse bases .........................................................................................

Devices with switching function 2 .........................................................................................

Fuse-disconnectors, fuse switch disconnector, switch disconnector with fuse .........................................................................................

Have the operating conditions of the selected protection components been observed? ........................

Is derating required? ........................

Result of the fuse selection .........................................................................................

1 The DC values normally lie below the AC values2 Observe the rated making and breaking capacity of the switchgear


Checklist

SITOR semiconductor safety fuses

Project name

.........................................................................................

Owner/developer

.........................................................................................

Planning engineer

.........................................................................................

(observe standards, certifications, approvals)

Operating voltage

AC DC

up to 690 V c c

up to 1,000 V c c

> 1,000 V c c

Limit load integral of the object to be protected (i2t) .........................................................................................

Switch-off integral of the SITOR – fuse (i2tA) .........................................................................................


C aR – partial-range semiconductor protection .........................................................................................

C gR – full-range semiconductor protection .........................................................................................

C gS – full-range semiconductor protection and cable and line protection .........................................................................................

Rated voltage of the fuse AC ........................ V DC1 ........................ V

Short-circuit current at the mounting location ............................. kA

Rated short-circuit breaking capacity of the fuse AC ........................ kA DC1 ........................ kA

System Size Rated amperage

NH 000, 00, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 4a 16–1,250 A

D (DIAZED) DII, DIII, DIV 16–100 A

D0 (NEOZED) D01, D02 10–63 A

Cylinder fuses 10 x 38, 14 x 51, 22 x 58 1–100 A

Selectivity requirements tested ........................

88/21


Checklist

Installation of the fuse

Devices without switching function .........................................................................................

Fuse holder, fuse socket, fuse bases .........................................................................................

Devices with switching function 2 .........................................................................................

Fuse-disconnectors, fuse switch disconnector, switch disconnector with fuse .........................................................................................

Direct installation on busbars ........................

Has the derating of the fuse link – device combination been observed? ........................

Operating conditions

Varying load of the consumerVarying load factor / derating of the SITOR fuse .........................................................................................

Temperature rangeHeat dissipation and cooling adequate .........................................................................................

Result of the fuse selection .........................................................................................

1 The DC values normally lie below the AC values2 Observe the rated making and breaking capacity of the switchgear


Checklist

Lightning current and overvoltage protection (LCO)

Project name

.........................................................................................

Owner/developer

.........................................................................................

Planning engineer

.........................................................................................

Risk analysis in accordance with DIN EN 62305-2 performed ........................

3-level protection concept with LCO Type 1 / 2 / 3 c

or 2-level protection concept with LCO Type 2 / 3 c

Number of feeding systems / main distribution boards (MD) ....................... items

Mind connection to ground at the infeed / MD!

Total number of subdistribution boards (SD) ....................... items

Mind connection to ground in SD!

Number of the consumers / final circuits that require special protection ....................... items

Lightning current and overvoltage protection Type 1

Number of poles for TN-C systems c 3

for TN-S and TT systems c 4

Each MD must be tested whether in addition to the main fuse, an additional back-up fuse is required for the overvoltage protection device. Where:

Main fuse available?

c Yes > 315 A gG; additional back-up fuse ≤ 315A gG required –

spur line wiring, recommended 125 gG

c Yes ≤ 315 A gG; no additional back-up fuse required –

V wiring

The devices are normally installed in the MD upstream or downstream of the meter.Installation upstream of the meter requires the agreement of the supply system operator.


Number of poles for TN-C supply systems c 3

for TN-S and TT supply systems c 4

88/23


Checklist

Each SD must be tested whether in addition to the main fuse, an additional back-up fuse is required for the overvoltage protection device. Where:

Fuse available?

c Yes > 125 A gG; additional back-up fuse ≤ 125A gG required

c Yes ≤ 125 A gG; no additional back-up fuse required


A Type 3 surge arrester must be used for each end consumer/circuit that requires special protection. The overvoltage protection devices should be installed as near as possible to the device to be protected.

Number of poles for 1 phase c 2

for all 3 phases c 4

For each Type 3

The surge arrestor must be tested whether in addition to the plant fuse an additional back-up fuse is required for theovervoltage protection device. Where:

Fuse / CB 25A B/C present?

c Yes > 25 A gG; additional back-up fuse ≤ 25A gG required

c Yes ≤ 25 A gG; no additional back-up fuse required

Result of the device selection for lightning current and overvoltage protection .........................................................................................

Fig. 8.5/1: Installation of the overvoltage protection equipment in the TT system (VDE 0100 T534)

Fig. 8.5/2: Installation of the overvoltage protection equipment in the TN-C-Ssystem (VDE 0100 T534)


Power Consumers

chapter 99.1 Starting, Switching and

Protecting Motors 9.2 Lighting

9.3 Elevator Systems

Table 9.1/1: Switching and protective devices for motors

9 Power Consumers


9.1 Starting,Switching andProtecting MotorsFor the planning and selection of thecontrol system and the protection ofmotors, the relevant standards andregulations have to be observed.These are primarily IEC 60947 (Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear),VDE 0100, EN 60204-1 and the stan-dards for EMC, EN 61000-3-2 and EN 50082.

If switching devices for motors areused in an area in which personsmight be endangered, the relevantregulations (safety regulations forworkplaces) are to be observed.

For further information on the“Requirements for safety at the work-place”, please refer to the FederalInstitute for Occupational Safety andHealth atwww.baua.de/baua/index.htm

An overview of the harmonized EUstandards is to be found atwww.newapproach.org

Selection of protective andmonitoring devices

In a motor feeder, the protectivedevices have to ensure the protectionof the line and the motor. This can beaccomplished with separate devices orwith a combined device fulfilling bothfunctions.

Motor protection can be accomplishedwith

� an overcurrent release (motorprotection in acc. with IEC 60947),or

� a temperature sensor (always in themotor winding), or

� electronic motor protection devices(SIMOCODE).

Device Advantages Disadvantages Bus-capable

Direct starter, reversingstarter (load feeder,motor starter)

High starting torque

Fast start-up

AC motors can be operated

High starting current Yes

Soft starter Starting current is limited Low starting torqueOnly three-phase motors

Yes

Frequency converter Starting current is limitedSpeed variable at constanttorque

System perturbationsOnly three-phase motors Yes

Table 9.1/2: Protective and switching devices according to utilization categories

Alternating voltage

Category

AC-3 Squirrel-cage motors: switching on / off during operation

AC-4 Squirrel-cage motors: switching on, plugging, reversing, jogging

AC-53a Controlling a squirrel-cage motor with semiconductor contactors

Direct voltage

Category

DC-3 Shunt motors: switching on, plugging, reversing, jogging, dynamic braking

DC-4 Series motors: switching on, plugging, reversing, jogging, dynamic braking

Configuration

A combination of centralized and distrib-uted components is absolutely reasonable.In the case of a compact arrangement ofmotors to be switched, the centralizedconfiguration is advantageous.

For the wiring of switching devices andmotors, devices with a standardizedconnection method such as, for example,in ISO 23570, Part 2 and 3, are a mainte-nance-friendly solution. The individualcomponents can be rapidly installed andreplaced. Standardized interfaces remark-ably reduce the error rate during installa-tion; moreover, the downtimes duringoperation are reduced.

Selection of the switchingdevices

There are the following types ofswitching devices:

� Load feeder (protective andswitching device, mostly circuit-breaker and contactor)

� Motor starter (protective andswitching device in a casing)

� Soft starter� Frequency converter

Except for the load feeder, theswitching devices are available for acentralized configuration (mostlyIP20) as well as for a distributed one(IP54 to IP65).

99/3

Power Consumers

Selection according to utilizationcategories

The utilization categories are definedin IEC 60947-4-1, VDE 0660-102.

These categories are primarily suitablefor the switching of motors.

In the case of requirements not cov-ered by a category, one speaks abouta mixed operation. For that, anapproximative calculation of theservice life of the switching devicescan be carried out.*

Table 9.1/3: Start-up modes and start-up parameters for soft starters in selected applications

* Also see:Siemens AG (Ed.): Switching, Protection andDistribution in Low-Voltage Networks, 4th

Edition, Publicis, Erlangen, 1997

Normal starting CLASS 10 (up to 20 s with 350% In Motor)The soft starter's output can be the same as that of the implemented motor

Application Conveyor beltsPoweredrollerconveyors

Compressors Small ventilators Pumps Hydraulic pumps

Starting parameters

• Voltage ramp and current limiting– Start voltage (%) 70 60 50 30 30 30– Starting time (s) 10 10 10 10 10 10

– Current limit value Deactivated Deactivated 4 x IM 4 x IM Deactivated Deactivated

• Torque ramp– Start torque 60 50 40 20 10 10– End torque 150 150 150 150 150 150– Starting time 10 10 10 10 10 10

• Breakaway pulse Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms)Stopping mode Soft stopping Soft stopping Coasting down Coasting down Pump stop Coasting down

Very heavy starting CLASS 30 (up to 60 s with 350% In Motor)The selected soft starter must have a power class that is 2 classes higher than that of the implemented motor

Application Large fans Mills Crushers Disk saws/ribbon saws

Anlaufparameter

• Voltage ramp and current limiting– Start voltage (%) 30 50 50 30– Starting time (s) 60 60 60 60

– Current limit value 4 x IM 4 x IM 4 x IM 4 x IM

• Torque ramp– Start torque 20 50 50 20– End torque 150 150 150 150– Starting time 60 60 60 60

• Breakaway pulse Deactivated (0 ms) 80%; 300 ms 80%; 300 ms Deactivated (0 ms)Stopping mode Coasting down Coasting down Coasting down Coasting down

Heavy starting CLASS 20 (up to 40 s with 350% In Motor)The selected soft starter must have a power class that is 1 class higher than that of the implemented motor

Application Stirrers Centrifugal machines Milling machines

Starting parameters

• Voltage ramp and current limiting– Start voltage (%) 30 30 30– Starting time (s) 30 30 30

– Current limit value 4 x IM 4 x IM 4 x IM

• Torque ramp– Start torque 30 30 30– End torque 150 150 150– Starting time 30 30 30

• Breakaway pulse Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms)Stopping mode Coasting down Coasting down Coasting down or DC braking


A decisive criterion in the selection of theswitches is the communication capabilityof the devices (instabus KNX/EIB,PROFIBUS, PROFINET, AS-Interface etc.)and thus the possible integration intoa process control system.

Further points to be considered in theselection of switching devices are theswitching frequency (operatingcycles/hour) as well as the intermit-tent service and the start-up mode(direct on-line starting, soft starting).

The standard decisive to that is DIN EN 60034-1 Rotating electricalmachines – Part 1: Rating and per-formance.

This standard applies all rotatingelectrical machines except for thosebeing subject to other standards. Inthe rating and selection of rotatingelectrical machines, the specificationof the load including start-up, electri-cal braking, no-load operation andbreaks as well as their duration andchronological order are especiallyimportant.

Load feeder and motor starter(direct on-line and reversingstarter)These devices are a cost-effectivesolution for the switching of motors.They ensure a short acceleration timeand a high starting torque.

There are two variants� Electromechanical switching

devices� Electronic (semiconductor) switch-

ing devices

With electromechanical switches, theoperating mode in acc. with DIN EN60034-1 (continuous, short-time,intermittent operation, etc.) also hasto be observed. If the on-time of themotor is short compared with thestart-up time, the load is higher andthe switching device therefore has to

be dimensioned larger.

Since the service life of electro-mechanical switching devices islimited by the number of operatingcycles, it is recommended to useelectronic switching devices in thecase of a high number of operatingcycles (continuous switching fre-quency > 200 operating cycles/hour).

Since the inrush currents during thestart-up of larger motors are very highwith these devices, there are also star-delta startings used for three-phasemotors. For that, the motor is oper-

ated in star-connection during ramp-up and then switched over to delta-connection. Compared to the directswitch-on, the starting current islimited to 2/3.

It has to be ensured that the motorhas the required voltage endurancefor the delta-connection.

Soft startersAnother option for limiting the start-ing current is the use of soft starters.Soft starting has the following advan-tages compared with a loadfeeder/motor starter:

Start-up mode Meaning

Direct on-line With the direct start-up mode set, the voltage at the motor is

immediately increased almost to line voltage upon the start

command. This corresponds approximately to the start

behavior with a contactor.

Voltage ramp The terminal voltage of the motor is increased from a

paremeterizable starting voltage to line voltage within an

adjustable start-up time.

Torque control With torque control, the torque generated in the motor is

linearly increased from a parameterizable starting torque to

a parameterizable end torque within an adjustable torque

starting time.

Voltage ramp + current

limitation

In combination with the voltage ramp start-up mode, the

starter continuously measures the phase current via an

integrated current transformer. A current-limiting value (IB)

can be set on the soft starter during the motor ramp-up.

When this value is reached, the motor voltage is regulated by

the soft starter in such a way that the current does not

exceed the set value. Current limitation superimposes the

voltage ramp start-up mode.

Torque ramp + current

limitation

In combination with the torque control start-up mode, the

starter continuously measures the phase current via an

integrated current transformer. A current-limiting value can

be set on the soft starter during the motor ramp-up. When

this value is reached, the motor voltage is regulated by the

soft starter in such a way that the current does not exceed

the set value. The current limitation superimposes the

torque control start-up mode.

Motor heating

(supporting function)

If IP54 motors are used outdoors, their cooling down leads to

a condensation of water in the motor (e.g. over night or in

winter). This might lead to leakage currents or short circuits,

when they are switched on. In order to heat the motor

winding, a “pulsating” direct current is supplied without the

motor rotating.

Table 9.1/4: Start-up modes for soft starters and their meaning

99/5

Power Consumers

� Current peaks during the start-upare relieved

� Bumpless start-up� Mechanical stress for the load is

reduced

There must not be any capacitiveelements in the motor feederbetween the soft starter and motor(e.g. no reactive power compensationsystem). In order to prevent anyfailures in the compensation systemand/or the soft starter, neither staticsystems for reactive power compensa-tion nor dynamic PFC (Power FactorCorrection) must be used during thestart-up and coasting of the softstarter.

For the selection of the soft starter itis important to look into the applica-tion in depth and take into accountthe start-up time of the motor. Longstart-up times mean a thermal loadfor the soft starter. With the selectionand simulation software “Win-SoftStarter”, all Siemens soft starters canbe simulated and selected, taking intoaccount different parameters, such assystem conditions, motor data, loaddata, special application require-ments, etc. This software is a valuabletool, its application makes tedious andextensive calculations for determiningthe suitable soft starters obsolete.

Table 9.1/3 suggests sample settingvalues and device dimensions; theseare for information purposes only andnot binding. The setting valuesdepend on the application and haveto be optimized during the commis-sioning.

Since the soft starter has a reducedstarting torque during ramp-up, it isnot suitable for all applications. Thestarting torque of the load has to besmaller or at the most equal thestarting torque of the motor.

Typical applications are, for example:� Conveyor belts, transport systems:

– jerk-free starting– jerk-free braking

� Rotary pumps, piston pumps:– prevention of pressure surges– extension of the service life of the

pipe system� Agitators, mixers:

– reduction of the starting current� Large fans:

– protection of the gears and v-belts

When using fuses as upstream protec-tive devices semiconductor safetyfuses are to be used. In the case of anincreased switching frequency, thetechnical data of the manufacturer areto be observed at any rate. The aver-

age switching frequency is approx. 20 operating cycles/hour.

For soft starters, different start-up andcoasting modes may be parameter-ized.

The specific regulations of the devicemanufacturer have to be observed forthe planning. These refer to installa-tion notes, selection of the higher-level switching and protective devices.

Coasting mode Meaning

Free coasting With free coasting, the energy supply to the motor is

interrupted via the soft starter upon the cancellation of the

on-command. The motor coasts freely, only driven by the

mass inertia (centrifugal mass) of the rotor and the load.

Torque ramp With torque ramp, the free coasting is extended. This

function is set if an abrupt shut-down of the load is to be

prevented. This is typical for applications with a small mass

inertia or a high load torque (e.g. conveyor belts).

Pump coasting Pump coasting is set if the surge pressure upon the switch-

off of the pump is to be prevented. Any noise nuisance and

mechanical stress to the pipe system and e.g. throttles

located in it is reduced.

Direct current (DC)

braking

With DC braking, the free coasting is shortened. For

applications with larger mass inertias, use the following

formula: Jlast ≤ 5 x JMotor

Dynamic direct current

(DC) braking

Combined braking

With dynamic DC braking, free coasting is shortened. For

applications with smaller mass inertias, use the following

formula: Jlast ≤ JMotor

Table 9.1/5: Coaching modes for soft starters and their meaning


A further advantage of frequencyconverters is the option of regenera-tive feedback into the system.

Note:Frequency converters are also avail-able for single- and two-phase AC motors.

Peculiarities of frequencyconverters

System perturbationsThe harmonic currents and voltagesgenerated in the converter distort thesine curve of the voltage. Since theloads are designed for sinusoidalvoltages, a distortion of the voltagemight lead to interferences and eventhe destruction of loads and electricalequipment. Therefore, the respectivestandards specify limit values for theindividual harmonics as well as for thetotal distortion factor THD. Somestandards only state limit values forthe voltage (e.g. EN 61000-2-2 andEN 61000-2-4), others for voltage andcurrent (e.g. IEEE 519).

Due to the continuously increasinguse of variable-speed drives, theevaluation of system perturbationsbecomes more and more important.The operators of supply networks aswell as those of variable-speed drivesincreasingly demand statements onthe harmonic behavior of the drivesso they can check already at theplanning and configuring stage if thelimit values required by the standardsare kept to.

For a limitation of the system pertur-bations, line reactors or active filtersare to be used. Line reactors areusually required for

� systems with a high short-circuitload (no impedance),

� several converters at one commonsystem connection point,

Parameterizabletorque starting time

M Direct on-line starting(maximum torquethat can be generated)

Motor has run up and isin nominal operation ( ).The runup is detected and the bypass contacts close.

Nomn

Parameterizablestart voltage

Soft startLonger ramp time

Load (e. g. Fan)

Acceleration torque

Soft startShort ramp time

Motor torque (M)

Speed (n)min -1

MNom

1

2

3

Nm

M

M

M

3

2

1

Fig. 9.1/1: Function principle of voltage ramp / torque curve

Parameterizableramp time

M Direct on-line starting(maximum torquethat can be generated)

Motor has run up and isin nominal operation ( ).The runup is detected and the bypass contacts close.

Nomn

Parameterizablestart voltage

Parameterizablelimiting torque

Soft startTorque-controlled

Load (e.g. Fan)

Acceleration torque

Soft startTorque-controlled and limited

Motor torque (M)

Time (t)s

MNom

2

1

2

3

Nm

M

M

M

1

3

Fig. 9.1/2: Function principle of torque control

Frequency convertersFrequency converters are used foradapting the speed in order to protectthe mechanics or to reduce the cur-rent peaks, as with the soft starter.Frequency converters are also moresuitable for dynamic processes than

soft starters. The speed of the con-nected motor can be changed contin-uously and almost loss-free by varyingthe voltage and frequency. Moreover,with a frequency converter, a motorcan be operated beyond the ratedspeed without the torque sinking.

99/7

Power Consumers

� converters in parallel operation,� converters equipped with line filters

for radio interference suppression.

Active Front End (AFE) convertersgenerate hardly any system perturba-tions. They are the ideal solution forutility companies and operators withhigh system requirements. The per-formance range is 37 to 6,000 kW.

High-frequency radiation and EMCIn accordance with the definition ofthe EMC Directive, the electromag-netic compatibility describes “adevice's capability of working satisfac-torily in an electromagnetic environ-ment without causing any electro-magnetic interferences itself whichwould be unacceptable for otherdevices existing in this environment”.As to ensure that the relevant EMCregulations are complied with, thedevices need to have a sufficientlyhigh interference immunity on theone hand and on the other hand theinterference emission has to be lim-ited to agreeable values.*

The EMC requirements for variable-speed electrical drives are defined inEN 61800-3 Adjustable speed electri-cal power drive systems – Part 3: EMCrequirements and specific test meth-

ods. A variable-speed drive system(Power Drive System, PDS) in thesense of this standard consists of thepropulsion converter and the electricmotor including the connectingcables. The driven machine is not partof the drive system. The EMC productstandard EN 61800-3 defines differentlimit values depending on the installa-tion site of the drive system. For areduction of the radiations, line filtersare used. The line filters also limit thesystem perturbations. As to ensurethat the line filters achieve the high-est impact, the installation has to bemade in accordance with the EMCrequirements. So that the interferencecurrents can flow back to the con-verter again on a low-inductive path,a shielded cable between the con-verter and motor is required. Themotor cable should have a symmetri-cal conductor design for that.

The magnitude of the high-frequencyleakage currents depends on numer-ous drive parameters. The mostimportant influencing factors are thefollowing:

� Magnitude of the intermediatecircuit voltage UZK of the converter

� Rate of voltage rise du/dt whenswitching

� Pulse frequency fP of the inverter� Converter output with or without

motor choke or motor filter� Characteristic impedance ZW or

capacity C of the motor cable� Inductivity of the grounding system

and all grounding and shieldingconnections

The length of the motor cable shouldalso be paid attention to. The cablecapacitites which are increasing withthe length, especially with shieldedcables, cause additional currentpeaks. This current then has to besupplied additionally by the frequencyconverter, which might lead to a shut-down of the converter.

Fig. 9.1/3: High-frequency leakage or interference currents on the line-side PE connection subject to the line filters

* For further information on the EMC:Siemens AG (Ed.): Totally Integrated PowerApplication Manual –Basic Data and Preliminary Planning, 2006

IPE without line filter (Category C4) IPE with line filter (Category C3) IPE with line filters (Category C2)

IPE

IPE

IPEØØØ


9.2 Lighting

9.2.1 People in the Office – Development ofNew Office Forms

In a fast moving world of labor andbusiness, the spatial situation as wellas the requirements of the personsusing the rooms are changing asrapidly. At many workplaces,work-stations are configured and changedsubject to the composition of theteam. Flexible working hours andflexible job locations, non-territorialoffices and mobile workstations makenew demands on the architecture ofour workplaces. The company build-ing becomes more and more a com-munication site, a place whereemployees can meet and exchangeinformation. Coming to the fore aremeeting zones, conference rooms andcatering areas, in which teams can gettogether for formal or informal meet-ings.

Administrative buildings have thusbecome more complex. Furthermore,building owners always demand thehomogeneous overall appearance oftheir building architecture matchingthe corporate design. From the build-ing face to the reception area, fromcellular to open-plan offices, from theareas with public traffic to the repre-sentative manager's office, all zoneshave to match the company.

Architects become all-rounders whohave to plan the colors, furniture,light and climatic conditions of thewhole system. In this system, thefocus is on an efficient work situation.The employees are to find a motivat-ing and performance-enhancingatmosphere. Part of that is of coursealso a functional as well as attractivework and experience environment.

Therefore, flexibility is also requiredfor the development of lighting con-cepts. Lighting, after all, is an impor-tant part of the overall system of“office building”. It allows for a good

vision and well-being at work andinfluences the sensual experiencecharacter of the architecture and theindividual rooms.

9.2.2 Light Quality for aFlexible World of Labor –Lighting of Workplaces inInterior Rooms

In recent years, the recommendedstandard values for the illuminance ofindoor workplaces have been in-creased considerably, also because itis easier today to implement bettervision conditions at work cost-effec-tively, with improved lamps and theiroperating devices, luminaires andsystem engineering. This was com-bined in several DIN 5035 standards“Artificial Lighting” as well as since2003 in the European standard DINEN 12646 “Lighting of Workplaces”.

In order to ensure the quality oflighting, the visual function, the visualcomfort and the visual ambiance haveto be harmonized with each other andwith the room use. The visual functionis influenced by the illuminance leveland the glare limitation. For the visualcomfort, especially color renderingand harmonious brightness controlplay a role. The visual ambiance isdetermined by the light color, thelight direction and the shadiness.

In order to be and remain flexible, it isalso important today to take measuresensuring the employees' safety andhealth at work, no matter where andhow they work.

Photo 9.2/1: Telenor – non-glaring ELDACONmicroprism technology

Photo 9.2/2: Infineon Campeon – lightingsolution for flexible room use

99/9

Power Consumers

9.2.3 Light Between thePriorities of EnergyEfficiency and LightQuality

The combination of flexibility, healthand well-being is connected with aholistic concept of light quality – aconcept which takes into account notonly the compliance with the require-ments of lighting technology but alsoesthetic, ergonomic and architecturalcriteria as well as the individual emo-tional expectations of the people.

The separate switchability and dimmabil-ity of individual components, for exam-ple, provides for modifiable lightambiances in interior rooms. Here, thefirst lighting component is the roomlight which is defined as light reflectedby ceiling and wall areas. The secondcomponent is the directly radiating lightfor functional and work surfaces. Switch-ability and dimmability mean that amodification of the illuminance and lightcolors is achieved. These basic compo-nents take into account the interactionof light, room and people.

The following requirements for thelighting system have to be taken intoaccount:

� Adequate illuminance� Sufficient uniformity of brightness� Favorable shadow effect� Prevention of glare� Matching light color and color

rendering

Adequate illuminance

The illuminance depends on the typeof visual task. Precision work requireshigher illuminances than rough work,dark objects a higher one than brightobjects. In general, performance andwork pleasure increase with theilluminance increasing, while acci-

dents, faults and scrap decrease andthe fatigue diminishes.

The Workplace Regulation “ArtificialLighting” (ASR 7/3) specifies theminimum values for the nominalilluminance depending on the type ofroom or work (see Appendix A6). A rough estimate of the illuminance ispossible with the installed power ofthe lighting fittings or lamps. Table9.2/1a shows how much Watts persquare meter of the base area of aroom have to be installed approxi-mately when using fluorescent lamps

Photo 9.2/3: High illuminances with a lighteffect similar to daylight

Photo 9.2/4: Light bands running in parallel aremounted above assembly lines. Theyensure a uniformly high illuminancelevel in the assembly area and providean incidence of light which preventsirritating reflected glare on the metalsurfaces.

Nominalilluminance

(lx)

Installed power/base area of the room (W/m2)

Lights approx. 2 m abovethe area to be illuminated



1,000 50 60 64

750 38 45 48

500 25 30 32

300 15 17 19

200 10 11 13

100 5 6 6

50 3 3 4

Table 9.2/1b: Factor subject to the lamp type

Lamp type Factor

Incandescent lamp 4

Halide lamp 1.6

Fluorescent lamp 1

High-pressuremercury-arc lamp

0.8

Indium-amalgamfluorescent lamp (3-band lamp)

0.6

High-pressuresodium-vapor lamp

0.5

Halide metal-vaporlamp

0.5

Table 9.2/1a: Nominal illuminance subject to the installed power/m2 when using fluorescent lamps


Shadow effect

The shadow effect supports the recog-nition of an object and its surfacestructure. Therefore, the illuminationshould not be too poor in shadows,the shadow depth (shadiness) shouldnevertheless be low. The shadowedges are to taper off softly. Dropshadows – these are points at theworkplace which do not get any directlight at all – are to be strictly avoided.The use of lamps with a large lumi-nous surface, supported by the reflec-tion of the light at bright ceilings andwalls, complies with this requirement.

The differences of the brightnesses inthe shadow area and in the adjacentsurface directly irradiated by the lightare usually so big that the visualfunction is clearly reduced in theshadow area.

A completely diffuse illumination asworkplace lighting is to be objected tosince it does not provide any shadi-ness and therefore impedes therecognizability of surface structures.The main part of the light at theworkplace is to incident sidewise fromthe top in order to prevent annoyingshadows of the body. With workplacespredominantly oriented to daylight,the direction of the incidence of lightand the light distribution of the artifi-cial lighting are to be designed inaccordance with the day lighting, e.g.same direction of the incidence ofdaylight and artificial light.

In only a few areas of application, the disadvantages of a shadelesslighting have to be accepted in ordernot to put at risk successful work, e.g.when checking the color differencesin the graphic arts industry. Here,directed lighting might lead to theformation of gloss and thus impedethe checking.

Photo 9.2/5 The combination of directly andindirectly radiating illuminationcreates a comfortable lightatmosphere of room and workinglight

(not 3-band lamps) in order to obtainthe required illuminance. In the caseof an illumination with other lamptypes, the value calculated with thistable has to be multiplied with acorresponding factor (Table 9.2/1b).

The general illumination is deter-mined as the average value of evenlydistributed reading points at a meas-uring height of 0.85 m. In walkways,the measurement is carried out on thefloor or up to a maximum of 0.2 mabove that at several points along theway – namely along the center line.

Uniformity of brightness

Favorable viewing conditions existwhen the environment of the work-station is slightly less bright than theworkstation itself. In accordance withDIN 5035, the brightness differencesin the closer area of the visual objectare not to be bigger than 1:3. A localuniformity is achieved with a suffi-cient number of lamps at not toogreat distances to each other and at aheight as large as possible. A brightwall and ceiling paint adds to that.Very suitable for that are fluorescentlamps arranged as light bands. Theseshould be installed in viewing direc-tion. With a sufficient, uniform gen-eral illumination, additional workplaceillumination is often unnecessary. Ifeach point of the room is to be avail-able as workplace, a high degree ofuniformity across the entire room is tobe striven for. The illuminance is notto be less than 60% of the nominalvalue at any of the workplaces. Bright-ness differences due to differentreflectance coefficients in the work-space are absolutely desired with auniform illuminance, they are impor-tant for information purposes.

Glare

Too high differences in luminance inthe visual field create a glare. A dis-tinction is made between direct andreflected glare. The reflected glareshould be prevented especially atcomputer-screen workstations. Suit-able for that are particularly lampswhose luminous flux is emitted by alarger surface, e.g. fluorescent lampsin connection with covers based onthe ELDACON technology.

Glare can be prevented or reduced bythe following:

� Arrangement of the light source asfar outside the viewing direction aspossible

� Lamps with a scattering casing, e.g.grid surfaces, frosted glass, soft-boxes

� Arrangement of the fluorescentlamps light bands in parallel to theviewing direction

� Selection of lamps with a low lumi-nance, e.g. fluorescent lampsinstead of incandescent lamps

� Use of matt surfaces (prevention ofreflected glare)

99/11

Power Consumers

Light color – color rendering

The human eye is adapted to thenatural sunlight with respect to thecolor assessment. For this reason, theobjective of the lighting technologyhas to be the imitation of the spectralcomposition of daylight by artificial

Table 9.2/2: Light colors for fluorescent lamps in acc. with DIN

Light color Area of application

Warm white High red proportion, similar to incandescent lamp

Neutral white Suitable for workrooms, offices and sales rooms

Daylight white To be used with high illuminances

is the reason why incandescent lampsseem more yellow up to red comparedto daylight. With fluorescent lamps, thelight color depends on the type ofluminescent material. For workrooms, aneutral white light color is preferred.Bright, warmly toned walls support thegood color impression of a room. With avery low illuminance, a warm light coloris more suitable than a cold one. In orderto receive a rendering similar to daylight,the color daylight white in connection

with illuminances of more than1,000 Lux are required. Different lightcolors in the same or in adjacent roomsare to be avoided.

Energy efficiency

Intelligent lighting starts in the head:energy-conscious building and reno-vating – in view of the necessity ofeconomically and ecologically sensibleaction, this task concerns all of us.

Lamp Positive Negative

Lamp technology Efficient lamps, e.g. T16 fluorescent lamps, halide metal-vapor lamps

Incandescent lamps

Operating devices Electronic ballast (EB) Magnetic ballast (MB)

Service & maintenance Lamps easy to clean, low soiling tendency

Lamp with high soiling tendency

Operating efficiency Efficient optics, e.g. ELDACON Inefficient optics

Light management Positive Negative

Switchability of the system Switchable in groups Only switchable as a whole

Dimmability of the system Daylight-dependent constant light regulation Fixed artificial light setting

Presence of persons Presence/motion detector switching Static switching

Variable light packages Multipower operation Fixed light packages

Building management technology Integration into facility management system Isolated maintenance group

Daylight Positive Negative

Room surfaces White/bright surfaces, clean rooms Dark surfaces, dirty rooms

Incidence of daylight Daylight can be dosed and directed (e.g. sunblinds) Simple, static darkening (e.g. sunscreen, simpleblinds)

Daylight systems (full-time non-glaring exploitation of thedaylight): prismatic and reflective systems

Closed architecture

lighting. An illuminated object canonly appear in its natural color if thecorresponding color components arecontained in the inceding light. Thecomfortableness is subject to the lightcolor. White light creates a moreactive day feeling. Decisive for thelight color is the color temperature,measured in Kelvin (K).

The higher the color temperature, thelarger the blue portion of the light. This

Table 9.2/3: Quick check for energy efficiency


There is a need for action in mostcases: the lighting systems eitherwaste energy or run counter to basicergonomic and thus qualitative rules.

The European Directive2002/91/EC

An important basis for energy savingis the evaluation of the total energyperformance of buildings, requestedin the European Directive 2002/91/ECand to be put into national legislation.In Germany, the prestandard DIN V18599 on the “Energetic evaluation ofbuildings” was developed in prepara-tion for the energy conservationordinance EnEV 2006.

For the opening up of the energeticsavings potential, Siteco has devel-oped concepts and solutions matchedspecially to the implementation of the EU Directive 2002/91/EC. Lightsolutions going hand in hand with the legislation and at the same timetaking to heart further quality criteriasuch as ergonomics, glare effect, color rendering and illuminance. TheSiteco Energy Quick Check gives firstrecommendations in this respect.

The quality of the luminous flux is ofprime importance for new buildingsand the redevelopment of older

buildings. It is especially important to

make sure that the daylight and

artificial light form a sensible unit,

increasing the energy efficiency.

When selecting the illuminants, it is

important that their light efficiency

per unit is as high as possible (Lm/W)

and they therefore achieve a good

luminosity at a low energy consumption.

9.2.4 Innovative LightTechnology

Light conduction

The ELDACON light conduction tech-

nology ensures a high degree of

illuminance at the workplace without

the source of light appearing dazzling.

The light of two T16 fluorescent

lamps (T5) is conducted from the

optical system directly to the work

surface via a precise microprism

structure. Reflected glare and direct

glare are reduced to a minimum. The

luminous surfaces appear homoge-

nous and convey a crystal-clear, bright

and brilliant esthetic impression.

TechnologyA high illuminance level and at thesame time nonglaring light are desir-able but seem to be opposed require-ments. The ELDACON technologycombines both by a patented lightconduction method via high-precisionmicroprism structures.

The light of high-efficient 16 mmfluorescent lamps is distributed non-glaringly in the room. At the sametime, ELDACON allows for a geometric

Table 9.2/4: Quick quality check

Light management Positive Negative

EM (illuminance) Adequate illuminance Illuminance too low

Glare No glare Direct and reflected glare

Shadiness Balanced shadiness conditions Drop shadows, purely diffuse light

Luminance conditions Balanced Strong bright-dark transitions

Color rendering Natural colors (as in daylight) Falsified colors

Light atmosphere, light colorComfortable light atmosphere, e.g. due to a balanced ratio ofdirect and indirect light

Unpleasant “cave effect”, unexpected light color(evening blue)

Individuality User setting options (privacy) Preset, no individual setting

Photo 9.2/6: The ELDACON light conductiontechnology ensures a high degree ofilluminance at the workplacewithout the source of light appearingdazzling

99/13

Power Consumers

format which sets new standards in sofar as the height is concerned. ELDA-CON was developed specially fortrendsetting office lighting solutions.

ApplicationHappy light for life and work: opti-mum lighting conditions obey certainprinciples subject to the work situa-tion and room characteristics. Thequality of the artificial light is espe-cially important at places where thereis hardly any daylight or where peoplealso work at night. Light solutionsbased on the ELDACON technologycreate lighting conditions whichincrease the job performance and liftthe spirits. And since nowadays flexi-bility and variation at the workplaceare in demand, lamps with ELDACONand the furniture can be arranged inthe room absolutely freely – and thatwith a light quality at a constantlyhigh level. For rooms with highrequirements for the direct glarelimitation, Siteco developed the HighDefinition Prismatics (HDP). Apartfrom the use in offices, HDP lamps aremost of all suitable for the lighting ofcommunication areas, workshops,charge offices, libraries, cateringareas, or waiting zones as well asclassrooms and auditoriums. The HDPtechnology is therefore designed fornormative UGR (Unified Glare Rating)values of 19 or less.

Mirrortec mirror-projectortechnologyThe principle is simple: the light of aprojector is focused to a facet mirror.The curved mirror surfaces reflect thelight non-glaringly to the surface tobe illuminated. Siteco first imple-mented this technology under thename “Mirrortec” and has developed itfurther for a number of applications inthe meantime.

Mirror-projector systems consist ofthe following:

� A mirror as (facet) secondary reflector

� At least one high-power spotlight� A pole or system beam

ProjectorIn order that the light exactly hits themirror or reflection surface and doesnot radiate beyond that, the projec-tors need to have both a bundlingcharacteristic and a high degree ofefficiency.

Mirror reflectorWith the reflection via convex orconcave reflector facets, the light canbe distributed very exactly.Aluminum-coated calottes are used asreflector material.

Fresnel technologyFor an exact light distribution as wellas maintenance and installation,Siteco developed new reflectionsurfaces based on vaporizedmicrostructures. This Fresnel technol-ogy allows for reducing three-dimen-sional mirror facets to almost two-dimensional structures. Reflectorswith 30 to 40 mm high facets canthus be replaced by a 2 mm thinplastic plate made of polymethyl

methacrylate (PMMA) – the reflectoris thus almost plane.

An anti-scratch coating ensures long-term protection; moreover, thesmooth surface of the reflectionsurface can be easily cleaned. At thesame time, reflectors in Fresnel tech-nology are a compact, easy-to-installsolution with an exact and uniformlight distribution. The mirror with theplane PMMA microstructure is precon-figured for the most different lightingsituations. The material is very thinand light. The reflection surface isbrilliant and conveys a high value.

The microstructure allows for new,fascinating design options for thelight fitting, for light and shadow aswell as for the light distribution. Withthe Fresnel technology, the distribu-tion around the pole known from thelighting planning is an ideal quadrati-cally illuminated surface. High-preci-sion illumination is no problem withthis technology.

ApplicationSince the light source and reflectorare separated, the mirror-projectorsystems offer a variety of options inlarge rooms and also outdoors –

Photo 9.2/7: Light conduction via Mirrortectechnology

Photo 9.2/8: Conventional reflector technology(left) – microstructure of theFresnel mirror (right.)


functional as well as esthetical. There-fore, the mirror-projector technologyis more and more often used wheresophisticated and architecturally inte-grated light solutions are demanded.

Daylight systems

In architecture, the natural daylight israted high. In architectural concepts,this appears with an increased use ofthe daylight via fully glazed fronts,glass-roofed inner courtyards andskylights. This development is carriedby realizations on the human well-being in the daylight and its healtheffect as the pulse generator for thebiological rhythm. Various aspects ofenergy saving also play a role here.

At the same time, the increased use ofthe daylight results in increasedrequirements for the sun protection ofa building and the glare protection forworkplaces. Daylight systems directdiffuse light into the depth of thebuildings and create a uniform illumi-nance in the room. They protect

against direct solar radiation and thusagainst a high entry of heat energy,especially in the summer months.After all, they prevent glare at theworkplace via luminance reductionand allow for a high-quality illumina-tion of computer-screen workstations.

Fundamental ideaThe light of the sun is a basic require-ment for any life. It determines ourrhythm of life and supports the well-being. Daylight imparts importantknowledge on climate, space and time.Only in the daylight can we see objectsin their natural color. Light and shadowcreate space but also point up the timeover the day and year. Nevertheless,daylight also means heat which leadsto unpleasant room temperaturesespecially in the summer. It hasextreme variations in brightness whichare hard to compensate for. The highdaylight densities create glare whichespecially impairs work at computerscreens. Daylight systems exploit theadvantages of the daylight and com-pensate for its disadvantages. They

make daylight calculable withoutdestroying its information content.

System advantages� Daylight systems create a comfort-

able room climate via– limitation of the room heating in

the summer,– limitation of the glare without

darkening the room,– improvement of the light distribu-

tion.� Daylight systems help to save

energy via– reduction of the on-times of

lamps,– low expenditure for ventilation

and air-conditioning.� Daylight systems offer new creative

options.

The reasonable integration of thedaylight not only reduces the energyconsumption but also increases ourwell-being at the workplace. Naturaland artificial light complement oneanother in terms of a comfortable,harmonic atmosphere.

Photo 9.2/9: Barajas airport, Madrid: here, theFresnel technology was usedsuccessfully for the first time.Richard Rogers' design was about aceiling doing without any revisionareas. A flat and light secondarymirror in the skylights performs theillumination of the terminal areas.

Photo 9.2/11: The plenar hall in theMaximilianeum, Munich: a highlyeffective, prismatic daylightsystem was installed in the470 m2 glass roof. It reflects the“hot” direct sunlight and thusprevents any glare effects and animpairment of the room climate.

Photo 9.2/10: New country house in Tyrolia,Innsbruck: the daylight reacheseven the most bottom floors byusing a mobile prism system andmicro sunscreen rouvers.

99/15

Power Consumers

LED – the new light source

A new light source establishes itselfstep by step in more and more lightapplications: the light-emitting diode(LED). The luminous semiconductorchip has already established itself forexample in the dashboard lighting ofcars, illuminated billboards, or asstatus and signal displays in electricand electronic devices. Nevertheless,the lighting of traffic facilities, repre-sentative buildings, in departmentstores or hotels also gains in impor-tance steadily. LEDs are increasinglyused for the illumination of officesand in the private living area. Specialoffice lamps with an integrated LEDtechnology can light with a uniformlyilluminated light surface in any num-ber of dynamically changing colors.The color change mode can be setindividually. Flexible tube LEDs set apurposeful accent by creating curvedlines of colored light and can beintegrated in architectural elements inthis form.

Extraordinary featuresThe small size of the LEDs results in ahigh degree of design freedom in thedevelopment of lamps. The control ofthe radiation angle can be imple-mented very efficiently with smalloptics. LEDs are today manufacturedwith a light efficiency of up to 75lumens per Watt (lm/W) in the color

white. With that, LEDs today providelight efficiencies higher than those ofhalide lamps. In the near future, LEDswill be available with ratings in therange of 100 lm/W and will thusalmost reach the power of fluorescentlamps.

Since LEDs radiate their light only in ahalf space and conventional lightsources in most cases require anadditional reflector which clearlylimits the degree of efficiency of thesesystems, the actual light efficiency ofthe LEDs is far higher than that ofconventional light sources.

Table 9.2/5: Modern energy efficiency with respect to light quality

Photo 9.2/12: LEDs in the office area for moreenergy efficiency and moreatmosphere: warm-white lightreaches work and action areaswhile daylight-white, cooler lightradiates indirectly to the top. Theexternal effect of buildings atnight can be designed withadditional low-power LEDs.

Before After

Retrofitting 4 x 18 W T26, KVGTD 3 x 14 W T16, ECG

Illuminance 490 lx 515 lx

Lamp service life 7,500 h 16,000 h

Operating time p.a. 1,800 h 1,800 h

Connection value 3.31 kW 1.67 kW

Number of lights 36 36

Relative current costs 100% 51%

Energy-saving with better lighting conditions: 49%


9.2.5 Room and Light

Types of lighting for offices andadministrative buildings

Light illuminates and stages rooms;lighting types are tools for that. Apartfrom the compliance with technicaland functional rules, standards andguidelines, lighting is also aboutcreating an esthetic environment,generating good moods, and increas-ing the well-being of the people. Themodern working environment with itsmobile team work, recreation areasand flat screens requires new lightsolutions.

Today, there are numerous lightsystems with various light effectsavailable for good illumination inoffice and administrative buildings:from the classical, directly radiatingrecessed luminaire via directly/indi-rectly radiating surface-mountedluminaires, pendent luminaires or footlamps with a variable light distributionup to computer-controlled light sys-tems. When selecting the appropriatetype of lighting, the connection ofvisual function, visual comfort andvisual ambiance have to be taken intoaccount. There are three lightingconcepts used for the illumination ofoffices. These concepts can be imple-mented via different types of lighting.

Lighting concepts

Room-related lightingUniform lighting of the entire room: thisis to be preferred if the arrangement ofthe workspaces is not known in theplanning phase or if the arrangement ofthe workspaces is to be flexible.

Light variants: directly radiating ceilinglight, directly/indirectly radiating pen-dent light.

Workspace-related lightingA different illumination of workspaces

and the immediate surroundings is tobe preferred if several workspaces of aroom have different viewing tasks andtherefore require a different illumi-nance level. Also suitable if “workislands” are to be separated from eachother optically.

Light variants: directly radiatingceiling lights, directly/indirectly radiat-ing pendent lights, workspace-ori-ented lights with a special ELDACONlight technology, indirectly radiatingillumination with directly radiatingsingle-user lamps / foot lamps andtable lamps.

Subarea-related lightingIn addition to a workspace-related orroom-related “basic lighting”, work-space lights can be used to implementan illuminance level in a subareaadapted to the viewing task or individ-ual wishes. DIN 5035-8 containsrequirements/recommendations forworkspace lights. Based on thesespecifications, workspace-orientedlights with a special ELDACON lighttechnology, indirectly radiating illumi-nation with directly radiating single-user lamps / foot lamps and tablelamps are especially suitable here.

Application examples

Office workplacesFlexible lighting with a non-glaringSiteco ELDACON technology for theInfineon headquarters Campeon, acenter of the information and sciencesociety.

The design and arrangement of theCampeon buildings reflect Infineon'sambition as an IT company with apartly virtual character. A flexibleroom design and communicationwere the core demands on the interiordesign. And also on the lighting:Siteco's complete solution is based onthe principle of freedom and high-

value light quality. The nameCampeon stands for a concept of workin the future – an open, functionalenvironment with a campus characterallowing for the fast exchange ofknowledge. Many of the employeeswork in teams whose members aredistributed all over the world, workingtogether via electronic data connec-tions and staying in the Campeonoften only for a limited time. Due tochanging team compositions and aflexible arrangement of the furniture,the decision was made in favor oflights with ELDACON technology forthe offices.

The light of approx. 6,700 foot lampsand approx. 1,800 pendent luminaireswith ELDACON technology is con-ducted from the optical systemdirectly to the work surfaces viaprecise microprism structures – andthat non-glaringly. Each workplacehas a foot lamp standing next to itwhich can be freely arranged in theroom – and with a light qualitity at aconstantly high level (Photo 9.2/15).Together with the foot lamp, the lightmodules with an angular aluminumprofile form a creative unit and anefficient illumination supportinginnovation, i.e. responding to thelight requirements of the individualpersons. All meeting zones in the core

Photo 9.2/13: Infineon headquarters Campeon

99/17

Power Consumers

Photo 9.2/14: The planning of a lighting system requires detailed technical knowledge and a structuring of the building in various areas, utilizations and requirements.

areas of the modules come up withthe ultra-flat light modules in presti-gious design, also relying on thesuspended mounting variant. Thissolution also allows for a completelyfree arrangement of the lights in the

room, irrespective of the arrangementof the furniture (Photo 9.2/16).

In the computer centers, louveredlamps with a BAP65 mirror louverprovide for a comfortable room

atmosphere and at the same time forhigh luminances. Translucent, illumi-nated end caps create an interestinglight effect. The BAP65 mirror louverwith a direct/indirect light distribution(30% indirect proportion) enriches the

Room-related lighting

Workspace-related lighting

Subarea-related lighting


Photo 9.2/18: Mirrortec technology for auniform illumination

Photo 9.2/15: ELDACON technology … Photo 9.2/16: … for non-glaring light Photo 9.2/17: Modular light band systems

illumination of the areas surroundingthe workplace. Recessed luminaireswith diffuser optics provide light forthe sanitary facilities.

Industrial workplacesIn the Audi plant in Ingolstadt, modu-lar light band systems, hall area lights(4 x 80 W) and modern mirror-projec-tor technology create very good,balanced lighting conditions. Refer-ring to a hall in the car body construc-tion, 15,900 m2 of logistics andproduction area each plus offices,social rooms and staircases are illumi-nated energy-efficiently and at thesame time with a high-quality lightingtechnology. The assembly areas weresupposed to be illuminated from thedriveways as far as possible in order toensure continuous assembly work.Therefore, the decision was made infavor of the use of 4-lamp hall arealights (4 x 80 W) mounted at a heightof eight meters. Thus, assembly areaswith a width of up to eight meters canbe illuminated with 300 lx from bothsides of the driveways. Therefore,only the storage places and the widerhall areas or areas with platformshave to be equipped with additionalassembly line lights (Photo 9.2/17).

The combined use of DUS assemblylights and hall area lights in the pro-duction area as well as the use of lightbands also create balanced lightingconditions via a high vertical portionof the light in the logistics area (DUSIP20) and in the offices (DUS Plus).

In the open, lobby-like architecture ofthe offices with the connected stair-case, the Mirrortec technologyensures highest degrees of efficiencyand a uniform illumination in theradiation area. With their high-quality,reduced design, the projector 400 andthe mirror 5NW139 with Fresneltechnology constitute a formal unitand allow for an exact definition ofthe radiation area. Downlights withVirtualSource reflector technologyprovide an additional visual comfort inthis building area at a high degree ofefficiency (Photo 9.2/18).

Apart from the compliance with thenormative requirements, the lightingsolution with relatively high, uniformilluminance levels and high verticalsurfaces adds to increasing the well-being of the employees and to posi-tively influence the productivity oftheir work.

99/19

Power Consumers

9.3 ElevatorSystems

9.3.1 Overview of thePlanning

The timely planning of the conveyingsystems for large and complex build-ings has a great importance for thetotal planning. It is often the case thatalthough elevators complying withthe building regulations and stan-dards are planned, in many cases alater traffic analysis states that theplanned elevator capacity is notsufficient for a satisfactoryconveyance of persons and freight.Nevertheless, in most cases the plan-ning has already advanced so far thatthe required changes are no longerpossible and no more than compro-mise solutions can be found. How-

ever, this should not be the sense ofplanning.

9.3.2 Configuration ofElevator Systems

The functionality of a building isdetermined most of all by the con-veyor systems. The correct dimension-ing and arrangement of passenger orfreight elevators contributes consider-ably to the attractiveness and rentabil-ity of the building. OTIS providescompetent and comprehensive con-sultancy for the selection of theconveyor system.

Elevators or escalators?

For the conveyance of persons, thequestion is when to use elevators,escalators, or moving walkwayscomplementing one another.

For overcoming large conveyorheights, e.g. in office and administra-tive buildings or hotels, elevators areused. With high volumes of traffic andsmall conveyor heights (departmentstores, railroad stations, exhibitiongrounds, or airports), escalators andmoving walkways provide a continu-ous operational readiness and a highconveyor capability. A practical combi-nation with elevators for the con-veyance of older or handicappedpeople and baby carriages ensures asmooth traffic flow.

Determination of the requiredconveyor capacity

Especially for complex buildings, therequired conveyor capacity (numberof persons to be transported within afive-minute interval based on the totaloccupancy of the building) should bedetermined at an early planning stagewith a traffic analysis. This ensures

Type of building

Productrecommendation

Passenger elevators without machine room

Passenger elevators with machine room Escalators Moving walkways

Gen2Comfort

Gen2Flex

Gen2Premier

Gen2PremierED

Gen2Lux

OTIS2000 H

Individualeleva-tors

Bedeleva-tors

Freighteleva-tors

Goods ele-vators andundergroundelevators

Smallgoodselevators

OTIS506 NCE

OTIS513 NPE

OTIS606 NCT

OTIS610 NPT

Residential buildings ••• •• • � �

Premium residentialbuildings • ••• � �

Existing buildings •• ••• • • � �

Office and adminis-trative buildings •• • ••• ••• ••• •• •• � � •••

Hotels •• • ••• ••• ••• •• •• � � •••

Hospitals, seniorcitizens’ homes • ••• ••• ••• •• � � •••

Department stores,shopping centers • ••• ••• • •• ••• � � ••• •••

Industrial buildingsand warehouses • • •• •• ••• � �

Community facilities,parking garages ••• •• � �

Public traffic areas ••• ••• •• � � ••• •••

••• Optimal solution •• Just recommendable � Universally applicable systems

Table 9.3/1: Selection criteria for OTIS passenger elevators, escalators and moving walkways

that the planned number and per-formance (load-carrying capacity,rated speed and group arrangement)of the elevator systems assures anoptimum conveyance of persons andfreights in the building.

In Austria, for example, a conveyorcapacity calculation is mandatory.Basic data for a traffic analysis are thebuilding type and height, number offloors and their use as well as themaximum number of persons in thebuilding. A simplified traffic analysisfor a project can be carried out withe*direct = “Online planning” atwww.otis.com. You will receive a firstrecommendation for the number andtype of elevators of the OTIS productrange. Furthermore, OTIS providespersonal, individual and competentsupport.

Further planning steps

Not only the number and capacity ofthe elevators play a role in the eleva-tor planning. Also the shaft situation,drive type, door design and controlare to be determined individually.Moreover, the relevant regulationsand guidelines have to be observed.

9.3.3 Regulations andGuidelines – Overview

Safety always comes first with eleva-tors. This applies to the elevator usersas well as to the elevator as a work-place. In Germany, there are bindingregulations on the erection and opera-tion of elevator systems. The mostimportant regulations are described inthe following.

Ordinance on Industrial Safety andHealth (BetrSichV)The BetrSichV regulates requirementsfor the erection and operation ofelevator systems and substantiatesespecially the following operatorobligations:

� Registration of elevator systems atthe respective authority via a cen-tral regulatory agency

� Implementation of a safety-relatedevaluation (e.g. acceptance of anew system or inspection of exist-ing systems)

� Determination of the maintenanceintervals / inspection periods

� Determination of the intended useof elevator systems

� Notification of the respectiveauthority in the case of accidents

Elevator Directive (95/16/EC)European directive (law) regulatingthe minimum requirements for eleva-tors newly put in circulation. Thisdirective has been implemented inGermany as the Twelfth OrdinanceRegulating the Equipment Safety Act(12. GSGV) and in Austria as Ordi-nance Regulating the Safety of Elevators (ASV 96).

Machinery Directive (98/37/EG)European directive (law) for theerection of, for example, hoistingplatforms and elevators in accordancewith the guidelines for handicappedpersons. In Germany, it has beenimplemented as the Ninth OrdinanceRegulating the Equipment Safety Act(9. GSGV) and in Austria by the Ordi-nance Regulating the Safety ofMachinery.

EN 81Safety-related rules for the construc-tion, erection and operation of eleva-tor systems.

Building regulations of the federalstatesIn Germany and Austria, each federalstate regulates the constructionalimplementation such as, for example,the smoke exhaust openings of eleva-tor shafts , the engine room design,

when to install an elevator and whichsize it has to have. These specifica-tions differ from state to state.

Federal Water Act (WHG)This German act states rules, require-ments and tests which have to becomplied with when handling water-endangering substances.

Energy Conservation Ordinance(EnEV)This ordinance demands a closure ofthe building envelope. This meansthat, for example, smoke exhaustopenings of elevator shafts must beclosed until the time when an open-ing is mandatory in the case of a fire.

Sample Directive on FireproofingRequirements for Line Systems(MLAR)The Directive on Fireproofing Require-ments for Line Systems (MLAR) is tobe observed when installing theelevator control in escape and rescueroutes (corridors or staircases). Itdemands a separation of the controlvia components made of non-com-bustible material with a (proven) fireresistance rating of 30 minutes. This isachieved, for example, with

� a fire-resisting housing of the eleva-tor control, or

� the installation of the elevatorcontrol in a niche of the buildingclosed with a fire-resisting door.

Fire protectionEuropean guidelines and the variousbuilding regulations of the federalstates regulate the fire protection inelevator construction. Measures forfire protection in elevator systems arealways required when the shaft sepa-rates fire areas.

Elevator shaftIn accordance with DIN 4102, theshaft has to be surrounded by walls


99/21

Power Consumers

corresponding to the fire resistancerating F90 (and therefore withstand afire for 90 minutes). At the same timethis means that glazed elevators donot comply with the requirements offire protection.

It is additionally demanded that thetransmission of smoke to other floorsvia the shaft is prevented. This isachieved via a shaft ventilation; theEnEV is to be observed for that. In mostcases, a shaft head opening of at least2.5% of the shaft base or at least0.1 m2 is considered to be sufficient.

Fire resistance of shaft doorsEN 81-58 constitutes test methods forthe determination of the fire resist-ance of shaft doors. The objective is toprevent the propagation of fire via theelevator shaft.

Shaft doors made of glass are unsuit-able as fire protection doors.

Elevator carIn order to prevent the propagation offire via the elevator car, the materialselection for the lining of the elevatorcar is stipulated in an amendment toDIN 18091:

� The highest permissible amount ofcombustible material is 2.5 kg/m2 ofthe interior surface of the elevatorcar.

� The materials used have to complywith at least fire protection class Bin accordance with DIN 4102-1.

Firemen's elevatorsApart from the regulations of theregional fire departments, EN 81-72states safety rules for the constructionof firemen's elevators. The require-ments given here substitute the detailsof the TRA 200 marked with (F).

Note: In the case of a fire, the fire-men's elevators are no rescue eleva-tors for persons within the building,

but are only used by the firemen forfirefighting especially in high-risebuildings. It is recommended tocontact the responsible fire depart-ment before installing any firemen'selevators to be able to observe local,extended fire regulations.

Behavior of elevators in the case offire EN 81-73 regulates the behavior ofelevators in the case of a fire. Theobjective of this standard is to informthe firemen that no persons aretrapped in the elevators and exposedto smoke and fire. The general rule isthat elevators must not be used incase of a fire.

Noise protection

Elevator systems make operatingnoise that generates airborne andstructure-borne sound in the building.In order to achieve a sufficient noiseprotection, special demands are madeon the building construction and theelevator system. In order to imple-ment a sufficient and at the sametime economically acceptable noiseprotection, a close cooperationbetween the contractors responsiblefor the planning and execution ofconstruction work and the elevatormanufacturer is required already inthe planning phase.

Note: The OTIS elevator systemscomply with DIN 4109 for housingtechnology systems if the shaft wallshave been designed in accordancewith this standard by the customerand if VDI guideline 2566 has beenobserved.

DIN 4109 – noise protection inbuilding construction DIN 4109 regulates the permissiblemaximum values for noise pressurelevels in buildings and contains speci-fications for the building construction.

VDI 2566 – noise reduction inelevator systemsThis guideline consists of two partsapplying to elevators with (Part 1) orwithout a machine room (Part 2). Inaccordance with that, the elevatormanufacturer is obliged to observethe specified values for the airborneand structure-borne sound for thesound emissions caused by the eleva-tor system. The objective of thisguideline is also to specify measuresfor reducing the propagation ofairborne and structure-borne sound.

VDI 4100 – noise protection inapartments This guideline defines higher require-ments on rooms in need of protec-tion. In accordance with that, livingrooms or bedrooms should not adjoindirectly to elevator shafts or machinerooms.

Further regulations and guidelinesThe construction and installation ofnew elevator systems are regulated byfurther laws apart from the onesstated so far. These are, among others:

DIN EN 81-28

This standard which is valid all overEurope stipulates features for emer-gency call systems. It has to beensured that an emergency call isforwarded to a permanently mannedplace via a 2-way communicationsystem and that the trapped persondoes not have to take any furtheraction.

Note: The OTIS REM emergency callsystem complies with all require-ments stated here and at the sametime improves the safety and reliabil-ity of the elevator system, as it is aremote monitoring system.

EN 18030 (Draft)This regulation draft is to substitutethe old DIN 18024/25 as regardselevators. It partly stipulates specifica-tions deviating from DIN EN 81-70. Indetail, it has to be checked exactlywhich specifications have to beobserved for the implementation ofthe elevator system.

DIN EN 81-70This standard deals with the require-ments for the handicapped-accessible

equipment of elevator systems. Itapplies to new as well as to existingsystems and is to provide more mobil-ity for handicapped people.

Ordinance on Industrial Safety andHealthThe Ordinance on Industrial Safetyand Health not only applies to newsystems but especially to operators ofelevator systems. The operator obliga-tions have been tightened seriously,since the operators are responsible for

the safe operation of their elevatorsystems.

DIN EN 13015This standard stipulates the require-ments a maintenance companyshould fulfill. Only companies certi-fied in accordance with this standardcan ensure a qualified maintenance ofelevator systems. OTIS is certified byRWTÜV.

9.3.4 Configuration ofEscalators and MovingWalkways

The functionality of a building isdetermined most of all by the con-veyor systems. The correct dimension-ing and arrangement of escalatorsand moving walkways contributes tothe attractiveness and thus therentability of a building.

Areas of applicationDue to the different requirements,escalators and moving walkways aredesigned for two areas of application:industrial buildings (departmentstores or the like) and public trafficareas (e.g. railroad stations). Thelatter makes clearly higher demandsdue to longer periods of operationand more severe operationaldemands.

Determination of the requiredconveyor capabilityThe required conveyor capability ofescalators and moving walkwaysshould be determined at an earlyplanning stage with the help of atraffic analysis. In that, first of all thetheoretical conveyor capability istaken. This results from the ratedspeed of the system and the stepor pallet width. With a width of1,000 mm and a speed of 0.5 m/s, thetheoretical conveyor capability is9,000 persons per hour. Nevertheless,


Gen2 ComfortDuty

kg m/sDrive (without control)

input power in kW

4 320 1 3.0

6 500 1 4.4

8 630 1 5.1

12 920 1 7.8

13 1,020 1 8.6

Gen2 PremierDuty


input power in kW

8 630 1 5.8

8 630 1.6 8.6

10 800 1 7.2

10 800 1.6 10.5

13 1,000 1 8.7

13 1,000 1.6 12.8

Gen2 Premier EDDuty


input power in kW

17 1,275 1 11.3

17 1,275 1.6 – 1.75 19.1

21 1,600 1 12.4

21 1,,600 1.6 – 1.75 20.9

24 1,800 1 13.2

24 1,800 1.6 – 1.75 21.9

26 2,000 1 16.3

26 2,000 1.6 24.9

26 2,000 1.75 26.8

Table 9.3/2: Electrical parameters

99/23

Power Consumers

the actual conveyor capabilitydepends on the user behavior whenentering the escalators or movingwalkways. At a speed of 0.5 m/s, it isapprox. 70% of the theoretical value.

Note:For industrial buildings, a simplifiedtraffic analysis can be carried out withe*direct “Online planning” atwww.otis.com, with a first recom-mendation for the number andarrangement of the escalators of theOTIS product range. OTIS also pro-vides personal help for detailedtechnical planning.

Further planning stepsNot only the area of application andthe conveyor capability of the escala-tors and moving walkways play a rolein the planning but also the arrange-ment or the operating mode. More-over, also regulations and guidelineshave to be observed.

Regulations and guidelines

Regulations and guidelines not onlyaffect the actual products but also thelocal environment in order to ensurethe highest possible degree of safetyof the users. OTIS escalators andmoving walkways comply with allnational and international safetyrequirements (EN 115 / ANSI / CSA) aswell as the national standards inGermany.

Machinery DirectiveEscalators and moving walkways aremachines in the sense of the EuropeanMachinery Directive 98/37/EC and haveto meet the safety requirements speci-fied in it. In Germany, this directivewas put into national legislation in theNinth Ordinance Regulating the Equip-ment Safety Act (9. GSGV).

European standard DIN EN 115 –Safety rules for the constructionand installation of escalators andmoving walkways

The objective of this standard is tostipulate safety rules in order toprotect persons from accident risksduring operation and during mainte-nance and monitoring works. Thisstandard applies to all escalators andmoving walkways to be newlyinstalled.

ZH1/4845 – Guidelines forescalators and moving walkways ofthe Association of commercial andindustrial workers' compensationinsurance carriersThese guidelines address the opera-tors of escalators and moving walk-ways. They contain protection goalsand safety measures.

Workplace OrdinanceBuilding regulations of the federalstatesThe building regulations of the indi-vidual federal states stipulate addi-tional requirements for the environ-ment of the system, e.g. the installa-tion of handrails by the customer.

BGVR: Regulations and rules forsafety and health at work by theworkers' compensation insurancecarriers

Extensive information on and tools for theconfiguration and planning of elevators andescalators www.otis.com


The machine-room-less GeN2 Comfort is based on theinnovative concept of steel-core-sheathed polyurethane(PU) belts.This high-quality elevator system is veryeconomic, comfortable and extremely reliable. Due to thevery good cost/performance ratio, it is perfectly suitable forfunctional residential and commercial buildings. The GeN2Comfort provides ride comfort at a low energy demand.It is environmentally friendly, reliable and safe andoptionally also provides a reduced shaft head of 2,500 mmor 2,600 mm.

Your advantages:

� Smooth, comfortable elevator rides� Reduced shaft head of 2,500 mm or 2,600 mm possible

at low construction costs and without any opticallydistracting building superstructures

� High, load-independent stopping accuracy (± 3 mm), notrip hazards for passengers

� Gearless drive� More economic than elevators with gear drive machines� Very good cost/performance ratio� Very environmentally friendly� Reduced wear at a considerably longer service life of the

belts compared to conventional steel ropes� Saving of the machine room� Highest possible safety via an electronic belt monitoring

(PULSE™ system) around the clock� Optimized integration in the building� Minimized structure-borne noise transmissions� Reduction of the static load of the shaft walls� Fast installation process� Automatic rescuing of persons in the case of a power

failure (optional)

Load capacity:320 – 1,020 kg (4 – 13 persons)

Speed:1.0 m/s

Max. travel height:45 m with up to 16 stops

OTIS GeN2™ ComfortThe elevator for residential buildings and functional office buildings

99/25

Power Consumers

*

*

* Flexible arrangement possible after consulting OTIS.

Telescopic sliding door, opening to the right (mirror-inverted door design possible)

Access from one sideOther floors

TF / TRF – door portals

Floor with control unit


MRF – door frame

SF wall connection frame

Accesses on both sidesOther floors


SF wall connection frame SF wall connection frame

MRF – door frame MRF – door frame

Centrally opening sliding door





Floor with control unit


MRF – door frame

SF wall connection frame SF wall connection frame SF wall connection frame


Control unit

Control unit

Table 9.3/2: Layout diagrams for GeN2 Comfort


1) Clear shaft depths apply to doors on the floor; ifdoors in the shaft:

+ 100/150 mm with access from one side+ 200/300 mm with accesses on both sides

after selection of the door model and consulting OTIS

Elevator in accordance with Lifts Directive 95/16/EC

Elevator size Car dimensions Door Shaft dimensions

Load capacity and number of persons

Clear carwidth LKB

(mm)

Clear cardepth

LKT(mm)

Type

Clear passage

LD(mm)

Clearshaftwidth

LSB(mm)

Clearshaftdepth

LST1) (mm)1 access

Clearshaftdepth

LST1) (mm)2 accesses

4 pers., deep car320 kg,

1 and 2 accesses800 1,100 TLD 700

6 pers., standard car450 kg, 1 access

480 kg, 2 accesses1,000 1,250

TLD

CLD

800

800

6 pers., deep car480 kg, 1 access

500 kg, 2 accesses1,000 1,300 TLD

800

850

900

8 pers., deep car630 kg,

1 and 2 accesses1,100 1,400

TLD

CLD

800

900

800

900

12 pers., wide car900 kg, 1 access

920 kg, 2 accesses1,400 1,500

TLD

CLD900

13 pers., deep car1,000 kg, 1 access

1,020 kg, 2 accesses1,100 2,100

TLD

CLD

800

900

800

900

1,340

1,530

1,800

1,530

1,580

1,670

1,600

1,670

1,800

1,990

1,900

2,000

1,600

1,670

1,800

1,990

1,340

1,490

1,540

1,640

1,740

2,340

1,440

1,590

1,640

1,740

1,840

2,440

Car dimensions handicapped-accessible

In acc. with (DIN 18024/25)

or DIN 18030

LBO

In acc. with EN 81-70Type 1:

1,000 mm x 1,250 mm

Type 2:

1,100 mm x 1,400 mm

Type 1

Type 1

Type 2

Type 2

Type 2

Table 9.3/3: Shaft dimensions GeN2 Comfort Counterweight with and without gripping device

LKB Clear car widthLKH Clear car heightLKT Clear car depthLSB Clear shaft widthLST Clear shaft depthLD Clear passageLTH Clear door heightDR Outside callTLD Telescopic doorCLD Centrally opening doorK Shaft headS Pit

Abbreviation Designation

Speed (m/s)Max. travel height

(m)

1.0 45

Elevator groupsElevator groups with up to three individualelevators possible: for further details, pleasecontact your OTIS contact person.

Numberof persons

S min.(mm)

S max.(mm)

F(kN)

4 pers. 1,150

1,400

30.0

6 pers.

1,050

36.5

8 pers. 45.5

12 pers. 57.0

13 pers.

F = largest concentrated load

63.0

Clear doorheight

LTH (mm)

2,000 2,100 2,200

2,100 2,200 2,300

Clear car height LKH (mm)

*) Reduced shaft head (2500 mm or 2600 mm)possible on request

Speed (m/s) K (mm)

1.0 LKH + 1,200

Sha

ft he

ad K

*T

rave

l hei

ght

Pit

S

Door on the floor

Door at the pit

99/27

Power Consumers

Table 9.3/4: Dimensions GeN2 ComfortCounterweight with grippingdevice for accessible spaces belowthe shaft

Fig. 9.3/3: Vertical section GeN2 Comfort


GeN2 Premier, the machine-room-less elevator of the

second generation: steel-core-sheathed polyurethane (PU)

belts have superseded conventional steel ropes. The result is

an elevator with extremely smooth, comfortable and quiet

rides providing a unique ride comfort at a low energy

demand. The GeN2 Premier meets the highest demands and

sets new standards with respect to comfort, economic

efficiency, reliability and safety.

Your advantages:

� Silent and smooth elevator rides

� Optimum ride comfort

� High, load-independent stopping accuracy (± 2 mm),

no trip hazards for the passengers

� Reduced shaft pit possible

� Gearless drive

� Up to 50% more economical than elevators with gear

drive machines

� Very environmentally friendly

� Reduced wear at a considerably longer service life of the

belts compared to conventional steel ropes

� Saving of the machine room

� Highest possible safety via an electronic belt monitoring

(PULSE™ system) around the clock

� Minimized structure-borne noise transmissions

� Large performance range

� Three-dimensional door zone monitoring possible

� Automatic rescuing of persons in case of a power failure

(optional)

Load capacity:

630 – 1,025 kg (8–13 persons)

Speed:

1.0 m/s and 1.6 m/s

Max. travel height:

75 m with up to 24 stops

OTIS GeN2™ PremierThe elevator for the highest demands in exclusive hotels and exalted residential and office buildings

*

*





Floor with inspection panel


MRF – door frame

SF wall connection frame



SF wall connection frame SF wall connection frame









MRF – door frame

SF wall connection frame SF wall connection frame SF wall connection frame

MRF – door frame MRF – door frameInspection panel

Inspection panel

99/29

Power Consumers

Fig. 9.3/5: Layout diagrams for GeN2 Premier




Clear carwidth LKB

(mm)

Clear cardepth

LKT(mm)

TypeClear

passageLD (mm)

Clearshaftwidth

LSB (mm)

Clearshaftdepth

LST1) (mm)1 access

Clearshaftdepth



In acc. with (DIN18024/25)

or DIN 18030

LBO


1,100 mm x 1,400 mm

Type 2

Type 2

Type 2

Type 2

8 Pers., deep car630 kg, 1 access

650 kg, 2 accesses1,100 1,400

TLD800900

CLD800900

1,600

1,660 1,7801,6701,8002,0001,900

1,700 1,7801,9002,0001,600

2,380 2,4801,6701,8002,000

2,1501,700 1,780

2,400

10 Pers., wide car800 kg, 1 access

820 kg, 2 accesses1,350 1,400

TLD 900

CLD800900

13 Pers., deep car1,000 kg, 1 access

1,025 kg, 2 accesses1,100 2,100

TLD800900

CLD800900

13 Pers., wide car1,000 kg, 1 access

1,025 kg, 2 accesses1,600 1,400 CLD

900

1,100

1) Clear shaft depths apply to doors on the floor; if doors inthe shaft:


after selection of the door model and consulting OTIS.

Table 9.3/5: Shaft dimensions GeN2 Premier Counterweight without gripping device

Elevator in accordance with Lifts Directive 95/16/EG.



99/31

Power Consumers

Speed(m/s)

Max. travel height(m)

1.0

1.6

402)

75

Elevator groupsElevator groups with up to three individualelevators possible: for further details, pleasecontact your OTIS contact person.

Numberof persons

S min.3)

(mm)1,0 m/s

S max.3)

(mm)1,6 m/s

F(kN)

8

1,120 2) 1,400

67.1

10 86.8

13 100.0

Clear door height LTH (mm)

2,000 2,200

2,100 2,300

Clear car height LKH (mm)

Speed(m/s)

K (mm)

1.0

1.6

LKH + 1,180

LKH + 1,400

3)S

haft

head

K*

Tra

vel h

eigh

tP

it S

Door on the floor

Door at the pit

F = largest concentrated load

2) If travel height > 40 m at 1 m/s, please contactOTIS.

3) Reduction of the pit possible on request.

Table 9.3/6: Dimensions GeN2 PremierCounterweight without grippingdevice

Fig. 9.3/6: Vertical section GeN2 Premier


GeN2 Premier ED is the large elevator of the second gener-ation that doesn’t require a machine room: steel-core-sheathed polyurethane (PU) belts have superseded con-ventional steel ropes.

The GeN2 Premier ED without machine room providessuperior technology at a load capacity of 1,275 kg andmore. Apart from extremely smooth and quiet rides as wellas the unique ride comfort, it provides flexible door andcar heights and variable car dimensions. The GeN2 PremierED meets the highest demands and sets new standardswith respect to comfort, economic efficiency, reliabilityand safety.

Your advantages:

� Silent and smooth elevator rides� Optimum ride comfort� High, load-independent stopping accuracy (± 2 mm),

o trip hazards for the passengers� Gearless, regenerative drive� Up to 50% more economic than elevators with gear drive

machines� Flexible door and car heights� Variable car dimensions� Very environmentally friendly� Reduced wear at a considerably longer service life of the

belts compared to conventional steel ropes� No machine room required� Highest possible safety via an electronic belt monitoring

(PULSE™ system) around the clock� Minimized structure-borne noise transmissions� Reduction of the static load of the shaft walls� Large performance range� Three-dimensional door zone monitoring possible� Three speeds selectable

Load capacity:1,275 – 2,000 kg (17–26 persons)

Speed:1.0 m/s; 1.6 m/s and 1.75 m/s

Max. travel height:75 m with up to 24 stops

OTIS GeN2 Premier EDThe elevator for the highest demands with high load capacities as of 1,275 kg

*

*




SF – door portals


SF – door portals


Inspection panel

Inspection panel



SF – door portals


SF– door portals


99/33

Power Consumers

Fig. 9.3/8: Layout diagrams for GeN2 Premier ED




Clear carwidth LKB

(mm)

Clear cardepth

LKT(mm)

Type

Clear passage

LD(mm)

Clearshaftwidth

LSB(mm)

1) Clear shaft depths apply to doors on the floor; ifdoors in the shaft:


after selection of the door model and consulting OTIS.

17 Pers., deep car1,275 kg,

1 und 2 accesses1,200 2,300 TLD 1,100 2,020 2,550

1,1002,700

1,650

2,800

17 Pers., wide car1,275 kg, 1 access

1,275 kg, 2 accesses

2,000 1,400 CLD

1,1002,700 1,950

1,850

21 Pers., wide car1,600 kg,

1 und 2 accesses

2,000 1,700

2,8002,100 1,600CLD

1,200 3,050 1,95026 Pers., wide car

2,000 kg, 1 und 2 accesses

2,350 1,700 CLD

1,200 3,050 1,85024 Pers., wide car

1,800 kg, 1 und 2 accesses

2,350 1,600 CLD

1,300 2,370 2,95026 Pers., deep car

2,000 kg,1 und 2 accesses

1,500 2,700 TLD

21 Pers., deep car1,600 kg,

1 und 2 accesses1,400 2,400 TLD 1,300 2,320 2,650

2,640

1,740

2,040

1,940

2,040

1,940

3,040

2,740

Type 2

Type 3

Type 3

Type 3

Type 3

Type 3

Type 2

Type 2

Clearshaftdepth

LST1) (mm)1 access

Clearshaftdepth



In acc. with(DIN 18024/25)

orDIN 18030

LBO


1100 mm x 1400 mm

Type 3:

2000 mm x 1400 mm

Tabelle 9.3/7: Shaft dimensions GeN2 Premier ED Counterweight with and without gripping device

Elevator in accordance with Lifts Directive 95/16/EG.



99/35

Power Consumers

Sh

aft

he

ad

KT

rave

l he

igh

tP

it S

Door on the floor

Door at the piton angle bracket

Elevator groupsElevator groups with up to four individual eleva-tors possible: for further details, please contactyour OTIS contact person.

Speed (m/s) K (mm)

1.0

1.6

LKH + 1,350

LKH + 1,650

1.75 LKH + 1,750

Speed (m/s)Max. travel height

(m)

1.0

1.6

452)

75

1.75 75

Clear doorheightLTH

(mm)

2,000 2,200 3) 2,300 2,400 -

2,100 – 2,300 2,400 2,500

2,200 - - 2,400 2,500

2,300

2) If travel height > 45 m at 1 m/s, please contact OTIS.

3) If LKH 2200 mm, then S + 100 mm

– - 2,400 2,500

Clear car heightLKH (mm)

Speed (m/s)

Door

S min. (mm)

Counterweight withoutgripping device

1,275 kg1,600 kg

1,800 kg2,000 kg

1,275 kg1,600 kg

1,800 kg

Counterweight with gripping device

1.0 2)

1.6

1.75

CLD

TLD

CLD

TLD

CLD

TLD

1,420

1,150

1,710

1,310

1,810

1,360

1,420

-

1,710

-

1,810

1,150

1,310

1,360

1,240

1,400

1,450

Number of persons F (kN)

17

21

24

125.0

147.0

155.0

26 161.0

-

2,000 kg

1,420

1,240

1,710

1,400

1,810

1,450

Fig. 9.3/9: Vertical section GeN2 Premier ED

Table 9.3/8: Dimensions GeN2 Premier EDCounterweight without gripping deviceCounterweight with gripping device for accessible spaces below the shaft


Ease of Operation, Safety and Control Engineering

chapter 1010.1 Power Management with

SIMATIC powercontrol

10.2 Building Management System

10.3 Energy Automation for theIndustry

10.4 Safety Lighting Systems

10.5 Robust Remote Terminal Unit for ExtremeEnvironmental Conditions (SIPLUS RIC)

10 Ease of Operation, Safety and Control Engineering


10.1 PowerManagement withSIMATICpowercontrolPower management is an integrativesolution concept, that also makesprovisions for system expansion usingcomponents that can be flexiblycombined. It permits operating costoptimization by increasing the energyefficiency. Taking account of chang-ing internal and external operatingconditions, energy flows and energycosts are analyzed with regard to theirecological and economic aspects, andsavings potential is indicated.

Power management measures andarchives the consumption of various

energy types, such as electricity, gas,water, heat, refrigeration, etc., pro-duces status and fault reports, anddisplays them in an operator controland monitoring system.

10.1.1 Functions andAdvantages of PowerManagement

Transparency of the completepower distribution system

� Graphical display of the operatingstates (switches, valves, …)

� Currently measured values onlineComprehensive overview of thestate of the power supply and itsswitching states. Fast responses aremade to operational changes;prompt response to changes of the

operating state. The follow-up costsfor abnormal operating states arekept as low as possible. Detailedinformation on incidents and mal-functions of the power distributionwithin the plant/building permit fastand targeted fault rectification.

� Documentation and archiving ofswitching actions and energy flows.Error and incident messages (e.g.operating sequences) with theprecise date and time; loggingpermits the subsequent analysis ofdowntimes and fault patterns anddevelopments.

� Analysis possibilities for the opti-mization of energy consumptionand cost

� Comparison possibilities of allcharacteristic quantities using loadcurves and reports

Ethernet

PROFIBUS

Automation

Power distribution Routing distribution board Bus-capable interface

Fig. 10.1/1: Power management with SIMATIC powercontrol; consistent data from the acquisition through to the analysis

1010/3


Table 10.1/1: Circuit-breaker-protected technology

� Directly acquired values: current,voltage, frequency

� Calculated values: power, cos ϕ, THD, etc.– Pulse and analog inputs

� Current and voltage� Power consumption

Processing level

� SIMATIC powercontrol with automa-tion system SIMATIC S7-300,SIMATIC S7-400 or SIMATIC WinAC

� Contiguous data acquisition� Data conditioning and short-term

archiving

Visualization level

� SIMATIC powercontrol, SIMATICpowercost based on SIMATIC WinCC

� Transparent display of energy flowsand costs

� Currently measured values andswitching states

� Analysis windows with load curvedisplays (e.g. year, month, freelyconfigurable)

� Configuration dialog for parameteri-zation rather than programmingincluded

� Supported first configuration� Very simple adaptation to changing

plant conditions

Switchgear

Siemens offers a comprehensivedevice range within the fuse-pro-tected and circuit-breaker-protectedtechnology at the low-voltage level.Options available include switchingdevices with (auxiliary/alarm)switches for the status acquisition andrelease or motor drives for the switch-ing of the switching devices (seeTable 10.1/1 and 10.1/2).

Status Switch

ON

/OFF

A

uxi

liary

sw

itch

Rel

ease

dA

larm

sw

itch

Wit

hd

raw

able

un

itA

uxi

liary

sw

itch

OFF

Vol

tage

rel

ease

OFF

Und

ervo

ltage

rel

ease

,vo

ltage

rele

ase

ON

/OFF

/RES

ETM

otor

dri

ve

ACB 3WL… 630 – 6,300 A X X X X X X

MCCB3VL…3VF…

16 – 1,600 A16 – 100 A

XX

XX

X XX

X X

MPCB 3RV… 0.16– 100 A X X X X X X

MCB5SY…5SP4…

0.3– 80 A80 – 125 A

XX

X X X X

RCCB 5SM3… 16 – 125 A X

SD3KA…3KE…

63 – 630 A250 – 1,000 A

XX

XX

��

� On requestAbbreviations:ACB Air Circuit-BreakerMCCB Molded Case Circuit-BreakerMPCB Motor Protection Circuit-BreakerMCB Miniature Circuit-BreakerRCCB Residual Current-Operated Circuit-BreakerSD Switch-Disconnector

The display of the mutual dependen-cies creates transparency. Savingspotential can be determined by inter-preting the minimum and maximumvalues.

� Status-controlled maintenanceusing limit value messages andalarms

Signaling of maintenance intervalsusing limit value messages and alarmsfor maintenance-relevant measuredquantities and operating states.

� Energy cost allocation to organiza-tional units or cost centers whichactually caused consumption, basedon the energy measurements, e.g.for the further processing in analy-sis programs

� Supported analyses with cyclical orevent-controlled reports

Monitoring and comparison, e.g. ofconsumption values by means ofpredefined standard analyses. Leak-

age losses, shrinkage, etc., with highfollow-up costs consequently can bedetected fast targeted, and at low in afast and targeted way cost.

� Data export or linking for furtherprocessing (analysis tools, MES, …)

10.1.2 Components of thePower ManagementSystem in Low-VoltageApplications

Power management in the electricalpower distribution can be structuredinto three levels:

Acquisition level

� Protective and switching devicesprovide status information

� Switching and control devices aretriggered

� Multifunction measuring equipmentprovides comprehensive data

OFF

ON

Status Switch


Table 10.1/3: Fuse-protected technology

Table 10.1/2: Communication-capable devices

Status Switch

ON

/OFF

A

uxili

ary

curr

ents

witc

h

Fuse

tri

pp

edA

larm

sw

itch

Wit

hd

raw

able

un

itA

uxili

ary

curr

ents

witc

h

ON

/OFF

Mot

or d

rive

FSD

3NP…3NJ4…3NJ5…3NJ6…

2 – 630 A2 – 1,000 A2 – 1,250 A2 – 630 A

XXXX

X

SDF3KL…3KM…5SG7…

2 – 630 A2 – 400 A16 – 100 A

XXX

XX �

FB5SG5…5SF…

16– 63 A2 – 100 A

� On requestAbbreviations:FSD Fuse Switch-DisconnectorSDF Switch-Disconnector-FuseFB Fuse Block

Digitalsignals

Measurements

Stat

us

Swit

chin

g

Vo

ltag

e

Cu

rren

t

Phas

ed

isp

lace

men

t

Pow

er

Wo

rk

Communication-capablecircuit breakers

SENTRON 3WL… mit COM15

SENTRON 3VL… mit COM10

XX

XX

X XX

X X X

Motor protection andcontrol devices

SIMOCODE DPSIMOCODE pro

XX

XX X

XX X X X

Multifunctionmeasuring instruments

SENTRON XX

XX

XX

XX

XX

XX

Multifunction pro-tection with controller

SIPROTEC X X X X X X X

MeterPulse output

Bus interface X X X XXX

Measurements

UL1-N

UL3-N UL2-NUL2-3

UL3-1 UL1-2

L1

L3 L2

PS

QS

SS

W S Bezug

W S Lieferung

cos L1

cos L3 cos L2

cos SN*

Spannung Strom Phasenverschiebung Leistung / Arbeit

Metrology

Siemens offers a comprehensivedevice range within the metrology forthe medium- and low-voltage level.

10.1.3 TypicalImplementation ofPlanning Tasks within thePower Distribution

Planning documents describe not onlythe devices to be used, but also thequantities to be measured within anelectrical power distribution. Thereare various solution concepts for theimplementation of these tasks inswitchgear cabinet design. Thesesolution concepts reflect, for example,company guidelines, customerrequirements, service aspects, costspecifications.

The following sections discuss out-going circuits/supply circuits consist-ing of a protective device and ameasurement system. Protectivedevices include all devices of thefuse-protected and circuit-breaker-protected technology. Measurementsystems are all devices with communi-cations capability plus current con-verters. If a bus system is used, itsspecific requirements must be obser-ved.

Communication-capable circuitbreakers

Circuit-breakers with integratedcommunication are the best solutionfor new systems. The acquisition ofthe measured values is an integratedpart of the circuit breaker. The meas-ured values are displayed on therelease and made available using thecommunication function. The remotecontrol is also performed using thiscommunication function.

Other characteristics:

� No additional wiring expense forstatus monitoring and control

� High data efficiency coupled withgood accuracy

The appropriate options can be usedto equip the devices with digitalinputs and outputs for statusacquisition and for actuating theswitching devices.

OFF

ON

Status Switch

OFF

ON

Status Switch

1010/5


Protective devices andmultifunction measuringinstrument

System protection using the protec-tive device and the measurementprocess using a multifunction measur-ing instrument are independent fromthe device viewpoint. Multifunctionmeasuring instruments may or maynot be equipped with a display.Devices with a display are normallyinstalled in a 96 mm x 96 mm sizedcut-out in the switchgear cabinetdoor; multifunction measuring instru-ments without display are installed onthe mounting rail. The phase currentsare measured using current trans-

formers connected next to the fusedsupply voltage on the measuringinstrument. The data is made avail-able using a plug-in communicationconnection.


� Can also be installed with smallwiring expense in existing systems

� Highest data efficiency and highestaccuracy for multifunction measur-ing instruments

Circuit-breaker with motorprotection and control unit(SIMOCODE)

The system motor protection usingthe protective device and the meas-

urement by a motor protection andcontrol unit (SIMOCODE) are inde-pendent from a device viewpoint, andare usually installed in the switchgearcabinet. To measure the phase cur-rents and voltages, the current/volt-age acquisition modules that belongto the SIMOCODE system must beinstalled and wired.


� No additional wiring expense forstatus monitoring and control

� High data efficiency and accuracy

Meter for billing

Besides switching and protectivedevices without communications

Fig. 10.1/2: Various possible solutions of the planning tasks

Requirement

1,2,3I W

Currentmeasurement(converter)

SIMOCODEPRO

SENTRON 3 VLmit COM 10

U1,2,3

1,2,3I

Pcos

U1,2,3

1,2,3I

Pcos

U1,2,3

1,2,3I

Pcos

U1,2,3

1,2,3I

Pcos

U1,2,3

1,2,3I

Pcos

U1,2,3

1,2,3I

Pcos

U1,2,3

1,2,3I

Pcos

Single-pole

diagram

Requirement

U1,2,3

1,2,3I

Pcos

SIMOCODEPRO

SENTRON 3 WLmit COM 15

Requirement

Counter(converter)

Multifunctionmeasuringinstrument


capability, an electricity meter can beequipped with a drum-type register ora display for the acquisition of thepower consumption.

In many cases, meters approved bythe Physikalisch Technische Bunde-sanstalt (PTB) are required for theinvoice preparation. This approval isgranted only for a limited time. Afterthis time has expired, the meter mustbe approved again; this requires theremoval of the meter. Other than thepower value, most electricity metersdo not provide any additional data.Power consumption can be read onthe display / drum-type register (man-ually). To minimize reading errors, anautomatic consumption quantitytransfer can be made using a pulseinterface and a distributed peripheraldevice, or transfer data can be read atan input of a multifunction measuringinstrument or using bus systems.

� Other characteristics– data acquisition with calibrated

measuring instruments to supplybilling information (approvalstatus monitoring!)

– high accuracy of the power con-sumption metering

SIMATIC powercontrol is characterized by

� Planning assurance– modular expandable system,

innovative, always state-of-the-artin accordance with current stan-dards and legal regulations

– minimized interface risk with acoordinated portfolio of A&Dhardware and software productsas part of TIA and TIP

– high solution quality thanks to thestandardization and use of stan-dards (e.g. standard hardware,such as SIMATIC S7 and IndustrialEthernet)

� Optimum implementation– energy management software for

the simple integration of a com-plete system consisting of typicalhardware components of the low-voltage power distribution range

– complete program of energymanagement functions in the full,expanded version

– simple parameterization (noprogramming) and commissioning

� Cost reduction during operation– optimization of the operating

costs by the transparency of theenergy flows from the supply tothe consumption

– evaluation using energy-relatedparameters based on the con-sumption and costs

– increased efficiency (saving effect5–20% depending on the currentsituation) of the energy supplythanks to exact knowledge of thedemand profile

Further information:� SIMATIC powercontrol at

www.siemens.de/simatic-powercontrol

� For products of the SIMATIC family atwww.siemens.de/simatic

� For the power management with SIMATICpowercontrol see “Totally Integrated PowerApplication Manual – Establishment of BasicData and Preliminary Planning”, 2006, Chapter 6,page 6/4 ff.

� For the order numbers of the components andsoftware packages described here, consult thecurrent catalogs or contact your branch officerepresentative.

1010/7


10.2 BuildingManagementSystemThe instabus KNX/EIB building man-agement system favorably combinessimple installation, clear systemstructure, modularity and flexibility. Acontinually increasing product rangefor lighting, sun protection, heating,ventilation, refrigeration, safety andenergy management from all well-known electrical installation suppliershas contributed to the success ofbuilding management systems since

their market introduction in 1991.Critical for the success was the manu-facturer-independent, standardizedopen system engineering with thestandards EN 50090 (in Europe), ANSIEIA 776-5 (in USA) and ISO / IEC14543-3 (international).

Cost reduction through the use ofstructured room automation

The standardized building managementsystem forms the basis for the cost-optimized operation of energy efficientbuildings as demanded by far-sightedinvestors to ensure a value increase oftheir property. Compared with conven-

The complete operation is more than ten times more expensive than the manufacturing costs

Operating/reconstruction costsErection costs

0%

100%0 10

2

4

6

8

10

20

Factor

30 40 Years50

Fig. 10.2/1: Comparison of the erection costs to the operating costs

tional electrical installation engineering,the instabus KNX/EIB building manage-ment system is characterized by costreductions in both the investment phaseand in the operating phase of a build-ing. In the investment phase, the dis-tributed system configuration of thebuilding management system allowsthe reduction of power cabling com-pared with solutions using conventionalelectrical installation engineering. In theoperating phase, the simple reconfigur-ing options simplify the adaptation tochanged space utilization. When theoverall costs are considered, the operat-ing costs are ten times the investmentcosts over the lifetime of a building.


10.2.1 Cost Reduction inthe Investment Phase

The instabus KNX/EIB building manage-ment system is a fully distributed bussystem. Each individual bus device hasa microprocessor that controls the

communication with other bus devicesand the function of the bus device.This modularity of the building man-agement system forms the basis forproviding a system availability compa-rable with that of a conventionalelectrical installation.

Compared with solutions using con-ventional electrical installation engi-neering, the distributed system config-uration provides the building manage-ment system with the possibility toreduce the power cabling. This reducesboth the installation costs and also thefire load. Because the fire load affectsnot only the required fire protectionmeasures but also the ceiling thick-nesses (concrete masses) of a building,the reduction of the fire load is inter-esting when the overall constructioncosts are considered by the architectsand the planners. When integratedbuilding planning is made, a significantpart of the investment costs in thebuilding management system can be

compensated here by saving in thebuilding structure.

Note concerning the fire load:The amount of saving results from thecomparison between the installationwith conventional technology andusing a building management system.This depends on the specific projectand the associated extent of automa-tion. In Fig. 10.2/2, the use of abuilding management systemreduced the conventional wiringshare from 60% (PVC) to 30% (PVC).

The reduction of wiring also means lessspace is required for cable ducts andvaults. This helps to attain the goal ofoptimizing the usable space with regardto the complete volume of a building.To permit the consistent distribution ofthe building management system,control units are available for installa-tion in flush-mounted boxes.

If a conventional solution is used, moreautomation functions mean morewiring. This is particularly true whentwo or more installation systems arecombined to produce an integratedroom automation. The placement ofactuators in floor-level distributionboards results in long cable lengths. Aconstruction with a distribution cablethat supplies the electrical energy fromthe floor-level distribution boards toroom distribution boards (in officebuildings: installation in the corridorabove the suspended ceiling) alreadybrings significant savings for the cablelengths. The exact saving potentialdepends on the building geometry andthe specific project. A busbar trunkingsystem, from which flexible branchescan be made to room distributionboards, can be used instead of one ormore distribution cables.

CostsBuilding substation control systems / conventional

Only local switching

Central switching

+

Shutter control

Scene control

+

+ Single room controlRoom divider control

+

+

Time controlDimmingConstant-light control

+++

1.3

0.950.90

0.85

0.75

1

Functionality

Fig. 10.2/2: Investment cost savings

PVC PVC

instabus EIB

120%

100

80

60

40

20

0

100

115

9097,5

60

40 40

30

60

37,5

60

75

halogen-free

halogen-free

Conventional

Cabling Equipment

Fig. 10.2/3: Proportion of cost incurred bycabling and equipment

1010/9


10.2.2 Cost ReductionDuring the OperatingPhase

The modular system structure of theinstabus KNX/EIB building manage-ment system permits the implemen-tation of a modular electrical installa-tion that can be easily adapted to thechanged room utilization by reconfig-uring. This means time and costsavings already in the constructionphase. Once the building is in opera-tion, room utilization can be changedquickly and at low cost.

The instabus KNX/EIB building man-agement system avoids the need forlarge-scale changes of the electricalinstallation in the case of new ten-ants or organizational changes,adaptation of room sizes or roomequipment. Costly periods of non-occupation because of extensivereconstruction measures are reducedsignificantly. On average, depart-ments in office buildings move toother rooms every three years. Com-pared with conventional electricalinstallations, the additional costs forthe building system engineering payfor themselves in just three yearsmerely by the faster adaptation tothe changed room utilization.

Note concerning the reduced costsfor changes in the room utilization:Let us assume that in an office build-ing the ceiling lighting is switchedtogether along axes. If walls aremoved, for conventional engineer-ing, the cable from the switch(assuming just one!) to the addedlights must be relaid and the cable tothe removed lights cut. In the mostfavorable case, this can be doneusing wiring blocks. With a buildingmanagement system, wiring blocksare not needed and the new assign-ment to the rooms is made by recon-

figuring the actuators and the associ-ated pushbuttons. The time for thischange is just a few minutes ratherthan one or more hours. This, how-ever, assumes an appropriate plan-ning of the electrical installationdesigned for flexibility and modularity.

Constant light control example

A constant light control can keep theillumination intensity at a predefinedlevel or at a level set by the user. Thisutilizes the daylight while reducingthe energy costs. To combine theutilization of daylight with sun pro-tection, the louvers of the shuttersare regulated so that they allowdaylight into the room and block thedirect daylight depending on the sunradiation angle. Shielding from directsunlight reduces the heating of theroom and thus the costs for theclimatic control of the room.

Presence detector example

In combination with presence detec-tors, the room functions can easily bechanged automatically from comfortoperation to standby or energy-saving operation. This can also beprovided in combination with anaccess control or with time control orbe controlled manually. Outside themain utilization times, the illumina-tion in corridors can be switched offwhen nobody is present. Within themain utilization times, the lightinglevel is reduced to a set minimumlevel when persons are present. Thisachieves an optimum energy savingcoupled with a longer lifetime of thelights.

Window contact example

While a window is open, the roomtemperature control can automaticallyenter protective operation mode sothat the control system becomes

Costsinstabus KNX/EIB / conventional

Only local switching

Time controlDimmingConstant-light control

Central switching

+

Shutter control

Scene

control

Minimization of the energy cost

Cost saving by reparameterization rather than reinstalling for change of use

+

+ Single room control

Room divider

control

+

+

+++

0.9

0.75

0.85

0.70

0.60

Functionality

1

Fig. 10.2/4: Operating cost reduction through the use of instabus KNX/EIB

active again only for undershooting afrost-protection temperature or over-shooting a heat-protection tempera-ture. At night, a central command canbe used to switch the temperaturecontrol automatically to energy-savingoperation. These measures allow theenergy amount used for illuminationand for room temperature control tobe reduced over the complete opera-tional time to half that for conven-tional systems!

10.2.3 Energy Costs andOptimization of theMaintenance

In addition to satisfying the comfortneeds of the room occupants, i.e. theoccupants' satisfaction, the correctassignment of operating costs and theoptimization of maintenance costs aredecisive for a building operator for theprofitable operation of a property. Theelectricity meters or operating hourscounters provided for acquiring theoperating costs related to the associ-ated department or tenant can beread regularly over the bus. Thisallows the operating costs to betransferred monthly, daily or in anyother time intervals to a billingdepartment where they can beprocessed for billing. To optimizemaintenance, the operating hours oroperating cycles of an item of equip-ment (e.g. motor, pump, lamp) can berecorded, and when a predefinedthreshold is exceeded (e.g. 10,000hours light duration), automaticallyconverted into a maintenance request(requirement-controlled mainte-nance).

Note:The N343 operating hours and oper-ating cycles counter is used to acquirethe operating hours. The N162counter (direct connection up to 63 A)

and the N165 converter counter aretwo alternatives for the acquisition ofthe active energy consumption.

Power supply contracts can requirethat a maximum amount of power isnot exceeded within a certain timeinterval (typically: 15 minutes). Theobservance of the power consumptionlimits is ensured using the maximum-demand monitor that uses predefinedrules to automatically remove or addloads. This can significantly lower theenergy costs, even for smaller build-ings.

NoteThe N360 maximum-demand monitorcan be used to monitor maximumpower loads up to 1 MW.

10.2.4 Safety

The protection of persons and assetsplays an important role in the buildinginstallation. The building manage-ment system can effectively help toprevent, or at least limit, damage.

Before a storm can damage shuttersand cause parts to fly through the airas dangerous projectiles, the shutterswill be automatically placed in a safeposition.

If the corridor lighting operates pres-ence-dependent, it always providesthe correct amount of light whenrequired. On the other hand, no moreenergy than required is consumed.The same is true for exterior and pathlighting activated depending on thedarkness, movement and time, andalways switched on when required.

Damage caused by unsupervisedelectrical devices (copiers, printers)can be prevented by switching themoff centrally at night.

The same window contact used toswitch the room temperature operat-


Photo 10.2/1: Operating cycles counter N 343

Photo 10.2/2: Counter N 162

ing mode to energy-saving operationcan also be used to report “windowopen” or “door open”. This can beused to prevent the possibly majordamage caused by frost, storm orrain.

An interface of the fire detectionsystem for the building managementsystem can be used to switch offspecific electrical consumers beforethey become an additional danger. At

1010/11


the same time, the complete lightingcan be switched on to reduce thedanger of panic.

In case of danger, persons in thebuilding can be safely led outsideusing an emergency and escape pathlighting in accordance with EN 1838.

Note:The regulations for safety lightingmust be observed.

10.2.5 Other Applications

Conference and meeting roomsrequire many functions:

� Switching and dimming lights� Raising and lowering shutters� Raising and lowering the projection

screen� Switching the projector/beamer on

and off� Switching loudspeakers on and off

For different situations (e.g. lecture,discussion, presentation), thesevarious functions must be broughtinto a certain state. For example, for alecture, the main lighting should beswitched off or dimmed, the projectorshould be switched on, the projectionscreen lowered and the shuttersclosed. This scenario can be initiatedby pressing a single button. A push-button, a touch panel or a PC can beused as input device. Just as easily,when the room is left, pressing abutton initiates an "everything off"scenario so that no devices remainswitched on unnecessarily. In thesame manner as scenarios can beinitiated by pressing a button, anevent such as the overshooting of atemperature threshold or a brightnessvalue can initiate a single scene or acomplete execution sequence.

10.2.6 Interfaces

instabus KNX/EIB provides a wideselection of interfaces to other sys-tems. These include interfaces to ananalog telephone, GSM, ISDN, DALI,PROFIBUS DP, PROFINET, BACnet, OPCand Internet Protocol (IP).

DALI (Digital Addressable Lighting Interface)

DALI is an interface definition forelectronic control gear (ECG) forillumination control. DALI permits thecontrol of up to 64 devices using acontrol unit. Only control units suchas the GE141 EIB/DALI interface or theN141 KNX/DALI interface make fulluse of the possibilities that DALIoffers. The combination of DALI andbuilding management system permitsthe implementation of solutions thatpreviously were not possible, or onlyat considerable cost.

For example, the communicationpossibilities provided by DALI allowthe failure of a single lamp or a singleECG, the switching status and a cur-rent dimming value to be reported.This makes the operational state ofeach lamp group and, indeed, eachlamp to always be available to thebuilding management system. Thisdata can be shown on a display orwith little effort forwarded to ahigher-level building managementsystem.

The DALI standard allows the assign-ment of DALI devices to as many as 16scenarios. The specific settings foreach scenario are stored in the indi-vidual DALI devices and can be initi-ated with a single command. Thisallows even complex scenarios or veryfast command sequences to be initi-ated by the building managementsystem.

Photo 10.2/3: Maximum-demand monitor N 360

Photo 10.2/4: EIB/DALI interface GE 141

Photo 10.2/5: KNX/DALI interface N 141

The N141 KNX/DALI interface alsoprovides the possibility of effectcontrol, for example, for a runninglight or color changes. This allows thecombination of KNX/EIB and buildingmanagement system with DALI toachieve system capabilities compara-ble with those for DMX.

EIBnet/IP

The complete linking of local andworldwide networks has also openednew possibilities for building manage-ment systems. Even properties spreadthroughout the world can be moni-tored and controlled centrally at lowcost 24-hours a day from any location.In particular, this is also true in con-junction with the EIBnet/IP defined asstandard in EN 13321-2. EIBnet/IPextends the building managementsystem in a system-conformingmanner and easily through the use ofexisting local and worldwide datanetworks. Using existing networks forcommunication reduces the costs forthe creation, operation and mainte-nance of the building managementsystem for commercial buildings andreal estates at differerent locations.Control commands and data can beexchanged with building manage-ment systems much faster and inlarger volume. This large volume notonly permits a central monitoring andgreatly extends the operational possi-bilities, but also significantly reducesoperating costs.

EIBnet/IP is an open standard for theremote configuration, the remoteoperation and the fast communicationbetween KNX/EIB lines and installa-tions. The standard describes mainlytwo different communication possibil-ities: tunneling and routing.

Routing allows a KNX/EIB protocolfrom an EIBnet/IP router to be for-warded to several different routers.This is the basis for the fast communi-cation between lines, backbones orcomplete installations. A device suchas the IP router N146, which imple-ments EIBnet/IP routing, so corre-sponds functionally to a line or back-bone coupler.

In contrast, tunneling permits thepoint-to-point communication withEIBnet/IP devices. This replaces not

only the communication using a serialinterface, but, in addition to thehigher speed, allows location inde-pendency. Any point in the IP networkcan access the KNX/EIB installation.With little effort, any status from thebuilding management system can betransferred directly to a higher-levelbuilding management system.

In buildings or split estates with veryhigh standardization of the buildingmanagement system, the same solu-tion is often used at all building levelsor properties. This unavoidably leadsto an identical configuration in theindividual units. However, theseinstallations should still be managedcentrally and operated remotely. TheEIBnet/IP standard provides a user-friendly name that can be individuallyassigned to EIBnet/IP devices, such asthe IP interface N148/21, the IP routerN146 or the IP controller N350E. Thisdevice name is then used to identifyand distinguish the building levels orproperties. In conjunction with theComBridge Studio visualization soft-ware written by IPAS GmbH based onthe new EIBnet/IP standard, theseproperties and subsystems are oper-ated centrally with a single applica-tion. The manufacturer-independentETS3 configuration software can beused to configure these systems usinga network connection.

10.2.7 Cost Reductionusing Structured RoomAutomation

Increased demands placed on theenergy efficiency of buildings requirean optimization of the energy provi-sion, distribution and use. This goalcan only be achieved with automa-tion. The instabus KNX/EIB buildingmanagement system can be used tosensibly automate both the powerdistribution and the power consump-tion at an acceptable cost. Sensibleautomation considers the comfort

requirements of the room occupants:room temperature and lighting bright-ness are set optimally for the associ-ated use situation. However, the roomoccupants must always have thepossibility to individually change theirwork environment.

Generally, the lighting brightness andthe room temperature are not directlycoupled with each other. Artificial ornatural lighting, however, also causesa rise in the temperature of therooms, which, depending on the timeof the year, is either desirable orundesirable. Sun protection systemsaffect the room temperature andbrightness. Since conventional solu-tions for the control of the lighting,sun protection and heating-ventila-tion-refrigeration are each limited to asingle type of installation, mutualdependencies between the differentinstallations cannot be taken intoaccount. Only the use of a buildingmanagement system permits anintegration of the control of different


Photo 10.2/6: IP router N 146

1010/13


installations in the room at acceptablecost.

The goal is the reduction of not onlythe planning time and cost, but alsothe construction and operating costs.Planning with room modules is themethod of choice. Here, a roommodule is considered to be the small-est room unit (e.g. axis) and thus thesmallest planning unit. Each roommodule has room functions (Fig.10.2/1). Only a matched automationof these room functions can optimizethe power consumption, whereas themodularization minimizes the con-struction costs and keeps the mainte-nance costs low.

The room module is planned so that itcontains all required functions. Thefollowing points must be considered:

� Use of daylight with anti-glare / sunprotection control

� Constant light regulation in con-junction with the use of daylight

� Lighting control (dimming) usingthe DALI interface

� Temperature regulation in conjunc-tion with sun protection control

� Occupancy-dependent control ofthe room operating mode (comfort,standby, night, protective opera-tion)

� Operating elements for the user– Wall-mounted pushbuttons– Telephone interface– Browser interface (PC as operating

station)– Interface to the building manage-

ment system

Such a planned room module is thenduplicated in accordance with thebuilding geometry. The EIBnet/IPtechnology permits an unrestrictedduplication of the room modules orthe several combination of roommodules. EIBnet/IP also permits a veryefficient interface to building manage-ment systems.

Fig. 10.2/5: Room functions in the commercial buildings

Light� Lighting control� Anti-glare control� Daylight control � Sun protection control

� Occupancy control and controlof the room operating mode

� Room access control� Operation and display� Minimization of the energy

cost

Temperature� Sun protection control� Heating� Cooling� Ventilation� Temperature and climatic control

Planning documents

Planning and tender documents areavailable atwww.din-bauportal.de/siemens

Training

A comprehensive training program forKNX/EIB is available atwww.siemens.de/sitrain-et

Literature

The principles and the systemproperties of the KNX/EIB buildingmanagement system are discussed indetail in the “Handbuch EIB Haus- undGebäudesystemtechnik, KNX/EIB-Grundlagen” published by ZVEI andZVEH in German.

The “Handbuch EIB Gebäudesystem-technik, Anwendungen” published byZVEI and ZVEH contains examples forthe control of lighting, sun protectionand heating-ventilation-refrigeration,for load management and for the

monitoring, display, reporting andoperating of facilities. Siemens offersmodular training courses for buildingmanagement systems as training forthe use of Siemens devices in theseapplication areas.


10.3 EnergyAutomation for theIndustryThe task of energy automation is toprovide electricity reliably in a formappropriate for the requirement.Energy automation covers

� Network management for theoverall control of the energydemand

� Substation automation for a cost-effective control of operations

� Remote control for a secure anduser-friendly remote access to theprocess

This task is not limited to pure powerutilities. After all, every industry isdependent on the guaranteed avail-ability of electricity at the lowestpossible cost, irrespective whether in

the mining industry, the processingindustry, transport companies, health-care, etc. Although the generaldemand for solutions may be univer-sal, the individual solution must beindustry- and company-specific.

Competition leads to an increasedcost pressure that requires rationaliza-tion measures, also for the electricitysupply. This can be, for example,result in restrictions imposed on shiftwork for network monitoring at nightor at the weekend.

The energy market, which is nowsubject to increased dynamics andcomplexity because of the marketliberalization, also affects powersupply in the industrial sector. Acqui-sition, monitoring and control of theenergy purchases and the peak loadcan reduce costs and optimize in-plantpower generation.

Energy automation means

� High quality and availability of thepower supply

� Optimum use of all resources withminimized network losses

� Increased safety from blackouts anddamage by system protection

� Increased efficiency through theminimization of downtimes as theresult of fast fault detection andclarification

� Improved profitability because ofreduced operating and maintenancecosts

� Reduction of energy costs as theresult of consumption optimization

� High security of investment as aresult of detailed knowledge of theassociated state and behavior of thepower supply

� Expandable solutions thanks toincreased flexibility, scalability andthe use of standardized components

Fig. 10.3/1: Energy automation at a glance

Total solutions

Control center

Spectrum PowerCC

So that you…

… keep an eye on everything

… protect plant operation

… secure yourinvestment

… maintain the connection

Field level

SIPROTEC

SIMEAS

Communication level

IEC 61850, PROFIBUS, Modbus, OPC, DNP

IEC 60870-5-101, -103, -104

Station automation and remote control technology

SICAM PAS

ACP 1703

1010/15


10.3.1 Spectrum PowerCCNetwork Control System

Spectrum PowerCC is the comprehen-sive and expandable system solutionfor the economical and reliable oper-ating control of power supply sys-tems. The Windows-based controlsystem was developed using interna-tional standards and de-facto stan-dards.

With a comprehensive range of differ-ent application possibilities, thecontrol system increases the effi-ciency of power system operation andadapts itself to these specific require-ments.

The control system can be integratedin existing IT environments and alsoprovides significant savings not onlyfor system administration and dataupdating costs, but also for engineer-ing. Spectrum PowerCC is Web-basedand can easily be connected to theInternet.

Advantages of Spectrum PowerCCat a glance

� Targeted and step by step invest-ment

� Open and standardized interfaceswith modular architecture ensuresan optimum integration capabilityand the expandability of the systemsolutions

� Use of the latest standards (CIMdata model; IEC 61970) and indus-trial de-facto standards (OPC -Object Linking and Embedding forProcess Control) for connection tothe automation world, MicrosoftOffice or SIMATIC WinCC for opera-tor control and monitoring; thisprovides access to office communi-cation systems and the world ofindustrial automation

� Mobile access to all data with Webaccess and Internet connection: Thisallows, for example, remote systemadministration, faster resupply andan active participation on energytrading

� The innovation of the individualsolution components increases thelifetime of plants and the return oninvestment

Application and functional scope

The Spectrum PowerCC functions aretailored to the requirements of indus-trial power supply both as a simple

computer system (all-in-one solution)and a redundant multi-server version.

Basic functions

The basic SCADA functions contain,among other things, operator controland monitoring, logging, control,adjustment, flagging and issuing ofalarms. This scope of performance iscomplemented by alarm forwarding,e.g. via “Cityruf” (city call), the operat-ing and display possibility usingintranet/Internet, messages and valuescreated using linking rules, and auto-matic command outputs.

Fig. 10.3/2: Spectrum PowerCC user interface


User interface

The uniformity of the appearance andthe operating philosophy of SpectrumPowerCC are supported by a Web-capable user interface whose layout,use of colors, operator prompting,acoustic signals, etc., are identical forall applications. Users familiar withMicrosoft Windows will find many ofthe standardized Windows elementsin the user interface.

Spectrum PowerCC provides clear andunderstandable displays, the visualiza-tion of values – also graphically as barcharts, curves, filling levels, etc. – thelogging of messages, powerful filterfunctions for signaling lists and the

display of information outside the powersupply, e.g. from the production plant.The operator receives alarms as opticaland/or acoustic indicators. Graphicalrepresentation of the fault cause can beselected directly from the message list;messages can be classified according totheir importance.

Operating support

The operating support is used todetermine the fault location, topologi-cal coloring, locking conditions,determination of the fault location inthe supply network, display of net-work sections with ground fault as theresult of messages of suitable protec-tion equipment, localization of faulty

resources and the highlighting ofnetwork sections without power.

Archive

With their data, archives are a pool ofexperience gained from networkoperation. They are the backbone ofonline operations control, in particu-lar, concerning higher-level optimiza-tion and decision functions, thewording of contracts for energypurchase, as well as further opera-tional requirements placed on archivedata (data mining).

Load management

Load management of power systemsby Spectrum PowerCC permits the

Fig. 10.3/3: Example of an energy automation concept with communication connections to the field level and the control center

…

Spectrum Power PC

RemoteSICAM PAS CCoperation

SICAM PAS

IEC 60870-5-101/104

or DNP V3.00

IEC 60870-5-104

Ethernet

Modbus/PROFIBUS DPIEC 60870-5-101PROFIBUS FMS

IEC 60870-5-103

Distributed remoteoperation

BC 1703 ACP

SIPROTECprotection /

combi-protection

SIPROTECprotection / combi-

protection

Measurement,SIMEAS power

quality

Small remoteoperating unitTM 1703 mic

IEC 61850

…

1010/17


optimum use of power purchasingcontracts taking account of the loadsor in-plant generating possibilitiesthat can be connected or discon-nected from supply on the basis ofkWh rate periods. The load manage-ment prevents the exceeding ofcontractually agreed purchase limitvalues taking account of the opera-tional load and power generatinglimitations, such as the minimum/maximum operating time, availability,downtime, etc. The load managementsystem can be expanded with dedi-cated load forecasts (hours or days)and resource planning (matching ofthe demand and the generatingcapability). The load managementsystem also provides an interface toripple control systems.

Process data acquisition andinterfaces

The PROFIBUS, IEC 60 870 5-101, -102,-104 and SINAUT 8-FW standard proto-cols simplify the process connection.The OPC interface permits the simpleand efficient connection of industrialcommunications standards such asIndustrial Ethernet.

Interfaces based on ODBC/OLE simplifythe integration of tools such asMicrosoft Excel. An SQL interface isprovided for archive information. Asimplified SQL interface permits dataaccess directly from the domain model(e.g. plant data, process data or datacalculated in applications).

Communication via Internet andintranet

The control system is often part of aninternal and external computer net-work. Spectrum PowerCC permitsaccess to the system using the Inter-net, for example, to give on-call ormobile personnel operating capabilityat night. Wide-band intranet accessfrom office workplaces or using an

extranet, also from remote work-places, is also possible. The Internetcommunication is protected againstunauthorized access using the appro-priate security concepts.

10.3.2 Energy Automationwith SICAM PAS

SICAM PAS (Power Automation Sys-tem) is the comprehensive solutionfor distributed automation in switch-gear, independent of whether powerdistribution is for a large industrialplant, a large consumer, or a facility,such as an airport.

Energy automation – consistentand open

Through the use of the IEC 61850, theSICAM PAS substation control deviceprovides for expandable interoperableplant construction. For example,SICAM PAS is suitable for the inclusionof field devices of all manufacturersapplying IEC 61850. The concept andparameterization of SICAM PAS sup-ports the direct data exchange at thefield level. This means no bottlenecksin communication, for example. Thefastest Ethernet connections and a“Station Unit” optimized for datatransmission and processing makeSICAM PAS a pioneering energyautomation system. Network capabil-ity and open data interfaces such asOPC permit a simple transfer of infor-mation to the office and industrialworld. This facitilitates analyses, orjust the display of energy data, asoften needed for the manager respon-sible for production.

Simple integration

PROFIBUS FMS, PROFIBUS DP or IEC60870-5-103 allow existing plants atthe low-voltage level or in the indus-trial process automation to be inte-

grated in a concept with IEC 61850.IEC 60870-5-101 and 104 are pro-vided for the remote communication.The cooperation on the STA (SeamlessTelecommunication Architecture)standardization project with the goalof providing a consistent use of IEC61850 down to the control centerlevel ensures the integration capa-bility of SICAM PAS.

Central control and monitoring

All plant sections, starting with thesystem supply and ending with thelow-voltage distribution, can becentrally monitored and controlledfrom SICAM PAS CC (Control Center).This and a fast response provided bythe clear representation of the operat-ing situation permit a cost-optimizedoperation and a fast supply resump-tion, should malfunctions occur in thepower system. SIMATIC WinCC asbasis of the operation ensures thecompatibility with the automation ofother industrial processes and reducestraining times to a minimum.

Fast standard configurations

The SICAM PAS UI intelligent parame-terization system is designed so thatits operation conforms to DIGSI andtakes configuration data directly fromthe field level. An XML data transferis provided for IEC 61850 and theSIPROTEC 4 field devices. The stan-dard configurations provided in alibrary for other field devices can beeasily integrated as types. This pre-vents duplicate inputs or input errors.


10.3.3 Remote Control,Communicating andAutomating with ACP 1703

There is the increasing demand tolocally acquire physically separatedinformation and to reliably transferthis information to where the data isneeded for monitoring and analysis.Just a few optical fiber cables ratherthan many parallel signal cablesreduce the cost for installation andmaintenance, and also ensure highreliability and interference immunity.The ACP 1703 system family can beused here.

High functionality and flexibility arethe basis for a modern remote controlsystem. This also includes comprehen-sive possibilities for communication,automation and the integration ofprocess signals. The various ACP 1703components offer optimum scalabilitydepending on the number of inter-faces and process variables. All arebased on the same system architec-ture, use the same technology andcan be edited with the same tool,Toolbox II.

In industrial processes in particular,the boundary between remote controland distributed control engineeringoften cannot be defined unambigu-

ously. The secondary technology mustalso flexibly solve the required taskswhere they are needed. ACP 1703 andSICAM PAS together cover the fullscope of possible tasks, and providesolutions for every requirement,featuring high performance as well asprofitability.

ACP 1703 consists of the followingcomponentsAK 1703 ACP is the large automationcomponent for a flexible mix ofcommunications, automation andperipherals. A scalable number ofserial and Ethernet interfaces,redundancy concepts and high signaldensity for local inputs/outputscharacterize these componentsAK 1703 ACP can be used as a centralunit or as a remote control substation,data node or front-end, automationunit with stand-alone function groups,and with local or remote peripherals.

TM 1703 ACP is the solution for com-pact applications. This componentprovides up to five communicationinterfaces, an automation functionand peripheral connection using thedistributed TM terminal modules. Themechanical construction is based onintelligent terminal modules forsimple installation on 35-mm mount-ing rails. TM 1703 ACP permits thedirect interface connection of actua-

tors and sensors with wire crosssections up to 2.5 mm2. Modules forbinary input/output up to 220 V DCalso open up savings potential at thecoupling level. For the distributedinput/output, individual modules canbe installed at distances up to 200 mfrom the control panel.

BC 1703 ACP is the robust componentfor highest EMC compatibility and directperipheral interface connection up to220 V DC. High switching capacity anddirect measuring transducer inputspermit operation under harsh condi-tions. Up to three communicationsinterfaces and integrated automationfunction ensure the flexible use incentral and distributed configurations.The BC 1703 ACP can also be expandedwith TM terminal modules.

TM 1703 mic, as small remote controlunit, assumes a special place. Option-ally equipped with a serial or Ethernetinterface, it can use up to eight TMterminal modules. IEC 60870-5-101(serial) or IEC 60870-5-104 (usingTCP/IP) is available as protocol. Theincluded automation function can beused for simple tasks. The integratedWeb server supports the simple con-figuring using a standard Webbrowser. The unit is installed easily onmounting rails.

Photo 10.3/1: ACP 1703 Photo 10.3/2: TM 1703 ACP Photo 10.3/3: BC 1703 ACP

1010/19


Common properties

All components of the ACP family arebased on the same system architec-ture and, despite their different con-structions, use the same technology.As they also feature the same func-tions, they can be combined witheach other as required and can beused and both from a technical andeconomic viewpoint, they can be usedoptimally according to requirements.For example, since all componentsrely on the same communicationmodules (other than TM 1703 mic),they can use the available protocols.Not only the standard protocols, suchas IEC 60870-5-101/103/104 and IEC61850 are available, but also commonstandards such as DNP 3.0 or Modbus,together with many proprietary proto-cols provided for interfacing existingthird-party equipment.

What is also common to all compo-nents is the integrated flash memorycard for the reliable storage of allparameters and the specific firmware.This supports a problem-free replace-ment of a component, simply byexchanging the memory card. Thememory card can also be writtenoffline with the Toolbox II and thenadded to the system.

An integrated tool

Toolbox II provides all functionsrequired for integrated and consistentengineering of the complete plant,such as data collection, data model-ing, configuring and parameteriza-tion. Furthermore, it supports theengineering of the process informa-tion for the automation and mainte-nance control systems, including thecreation of automation tasks using agraphical function chart in accordancewith IEC 61131-3. Even the manage-ment of the systems from third-partymanufacturers using their specificparameters is possible with Toolbox II.The data modeling is constructedobject-oriented and thus simplifiesdata clarity and consistency, evenafter several changes/extensions havebeen made.

Toolbox II runs with all ACP 1703subsystems and supports all sub-processes of a remote control andautomation project. Data exchangewith DIGSI and SICAM PAS UI ensuresthat even mixed configurations do notrequire the same data to be enteredmore than once.

Remote control is more

ACP 1703 always provides adequateperformance. The modular multi-processor concept allows the proces-sor power to grow with each systemexpansion. The distributed architec-ture and the principle of evolutionarydevelopment ensure a durable systemwith a long service life. This securesinvestment in the long run. Highfunctional reliability is a matter ofcourse for the ACP 1703; its inte-grated comprehensive self-monitoringfunction detects any problem immedi-ately, and informs the operationalmanagement and service withoutdelay.

Photo 10.3/4: TM 1703 mic


� Spectrum PowerCC: www.siemens.com/powerCC

� SICAM PAS:www.siemens.com/sicam

� ACP 1703:www.siemens.com/sicam


10.4 SafetyLighting SystemsThe globalization and harmonizationprocess makes the international stan-dards and regulations landscape notonly ever more complicated, but alsosubjects it to continuous change.Solutions considered to be fully legiti-mate yesterday have been completelyrejected today and can no longer beapplied. New requirements are addedand, not infrequently, complicate theplanning and project implementativ.To address this situation and to avoidthe need to continually catch up withthe latest development, the interestedobserver has just one possibility. Theobserver must become familiar withthe original concepts of safety lighting.In other words, determine the protec-tion goal and prepare its implementa-tion for each specific applicationsituation. We must finally waive good-bye to an ever-recurring myth: there isno one piece of paper on which every-thing is written describing how toproceed. The aim of safety engineeringis to ensure that nothing happenswhen something happens. This is theonly measure for the work of the safetyspecialists.

Introduction

Safety lighting began its tender startin the early days of industrializationwhen the founding fathers of today'scorporate groups began to fetch manylabourers into their factories andemploy them in large production hallswithout adequate daylight. Whenpower failures occurred, the employ-ees were sometimes still standingnext to running machines and sud-denly left without any lighting. Thisresulted in many severe accidentswhich gave rise to the call for safetylighting. Every employer was required

to make provisions for his employeesto be led safely to the factory doors incase of malfunctions. The safetylighting successively entered otherareas where persons gathered andnowadays it is inconceivable that it isnot needed in many application areas.

Wherever people come together, apower failure brings major dangers.

A safety lighting system built in accor-dance with statutory regulations,properly maintained and functioning,permits at least a safe exit from thebuilding.

A safety lighting system consists ofthe safety power source, distribution,monitoring units, cable systems, lightsand rescue signs. To implement such

Table 10.4/1: Requirements placed on the electrical system for safety lighting systems (source: E DIN VDE 0108-100: 2005-1 0)

Examples for buildingregulations in force for

buildings in whichpeople gather

Illu

min

ance

([

lx)

Max

. sw

itch

over

tim

e (s

)

Rate

d op

erat

iona

l dur

atio

n (i

n ho

urs)

of

the

pow

er s

ourc

e fo

r sa

fety

pu

rpos

es

Illu

min

ated

or

back

-lit

safe

ty s

ign

s in

con

tin

uou

s op

erat

ion

Cen

tral

pow

er s

upp

ly s

yste

m –

CPS

Pow

er s

upp

ly s

yste

m w

ith

po

wer

lim

it –

LPS

Sin

gle-

batt

ery

syst

em

Pow

er g

ener

atin

g se

t w

ith

out

inte

rru

ptio

n (

0 s

econ

ds)

Pow

er g

ener

atin

g se

t w

ith

sh

ort

inte

rru

ptio

n (

≤ 0

.5 s

econ

ds)

Pow

er g

ener

atin

g se

t w

ith

med

ium

inte

rru

ptio

n (

≤ 1

5 s

econ

ds)

Spec

ially

-pro

tect

ed p

ower

su

pply

syst

em

Gathering places,theaters, cinemas

2) 1 3 • • • – • • – –

Exhibition buildings 2) 1 3 • • • – • • – –

Shops 2) 1 3 • • • – • • – –

Restaurants 2) 1 3 • • • • • • – –

Hotels, guesthouses,senior citizen's homes

2) 1 1) 8 5) • • • • • • • –

Schools 2) 1 1) 3 • • • • • • • –

Parking buildings,underground garages

2) 15 1 • • • • • • • –

Airports, railroadstations

2) 1 3 6) • • • • • • – –

High-rise buildings 2) 1 1) 3 4) • • • • • • • –

Rescue routes in placesof work

2) 15 1 • • • • • • • •

Workplaces subject toparticular danger

2) 0.5 3) • • • • • • – •

Stages 3 1 3 • • • • • • – –1) Depending on the panic risk, from 1 second to 15 seconds 2) Illuminance intensity of the safety lighting in accordance with DIN EN 1838 3) The time for which persons are subject to danger4) For high-rise residential buildings, 8 hours, unless the switching operation satisfies the requirements of Section 4.7.65) Three hours are sufficient when the switching operation satisfies the requirements of Section 4.7.66) For above-ground areas of railroad stations, one hour is also permitted provided an appropriate evacuation concept exists

• permitted – not relevant

1010/21


a system, a number of building-specific aspects must be consideredduring the planning and implementa-tion. The continually increasing shareof electronic components in ourbuildings means the fault scenarios tobe considered become ever morecomprehensive. The basic task of asafety lighting in any fault situation isto ensure adequate lighting beingswitched on in good time.

This requires that in case of failure,the route of the power supply, fromthe feeding point to the actuallyinstalled general lighting, must besubstituted with safety lighting. Thenearer the emergency power source isto the site of application, the lessexpense is required for the cabling. Ifbus systems are used to operate thegeneral lighting, they must also bemonitored. The possibility that somecircumstance causes both systems tofail at the same time must also beexcluded. This could, for example, becaused by a fire or excavation work atcable channels.

10.4.1 Planning

For a detailed planning, we requirethe following documents:

� Valid building permit� Fire protection expertise with the

building’s fire areas� Escape and rescue paths diagram� Floor plans and sections� Planning documents for the general

lighting

The fire protection concept specifiesthe general outline for the scope ofthe required safety lighting. Howeverthe general standards and regulationsare often merely amended by specialadditions. To determine the overallscope of amendments, see Table10.4/1.

After reading the documents, enterthe individual fire areas in the floorplans and draw the escape and rescuepaths. Some state building regulationsrequire that fire areas larger than1,600 m2 be subdivided into so-calledelectrical fire areas.

The fundamental decision shouldnow be made whether the archi-tect's general lighting is to be usedfor the safety lighting, or whetherseparate safety lighting suppliedby a system manufacturer is to beused. This question is decisive for

Characteristics CEAG data Explanation Satisfied

Operating voltagerange DC: 186 V - 275 V at -10 °C Possible battery voltage range in

backup operation

Switching time: from AC to DCfrom DC to AC

System switching time:180 ms – 450 ms180 ms – 450 ms

Typical CEAG system switchingtime

Satisfies the standard*: DIN EN 60929 Electronic ballast for tubularfluorescent lamps supplied withalternating-current

Satisfies the standard*: DIN EN 61347-2-3(incl. Appendix J)

Special requirements placed onelectronic ballast for fluorescentlamps supplied with alternating-current

Satisfies the standard*: DIN EN 61000-3-2 EMC (electromagneticconformance) standard

Satisfies the standard*: DIN EN 61547 EMC standard – electricalinterference, in particular foremergency lighting lamps

Satisfies the standard*: DIN EN 55015(measurement for AC and DC)

EMC standard – limit values andmeasuring procedures for radiointerference to electrical lightingequipment

* The certification in accordance with VDE 0108 does not suffice because this is not any electronic ballast standard

Characteristics CEAG data ExplanationManufacturerdetails:

No-load current of theelectronic ballast(without or withdefective illuminant) inDC operation

Setpoint for use of: 2L-CG-S: <10 mA / <28 mA2L-CG (4–120 W): <10 mA2L-CG (7–120 W): <25 mA2L-CG (11–120 W): <41 mA

Selection aid for lamps / ballastmonitoring modules, CEAG type:2L-CG, as specified in the catalog

Max. switch-on currentper ECG in ACoperation:

Permitted total switch-on current for:SKU 4 x 1 A (CG) => 60 A/ms per circuitSKU 2 x 3 A (CG) => 120 A/ms per circuitSKU 1 x 6 A (CG) => 180 A/msSKU 2 x 3 A CG-S => 250 A/ms per circuitSKU 1 x 6 A CG-S => 250 A/ms

Applies to a maximum permittedswitch-on current of the ballastsin circuit in order to handle themaximum contact load of thecircuit switching operations.

Rated current in ACoperation:

Manufacturer-specific To determine the maximumnumber of ballasts per circuit

Rated current in DCoperation:

Manufacturer-specific dito

Light flux ratio in DC operation 186 V com- ipared with 230 V

Manufacturer-specific In battery operation foremergency light ballasts for thelight planning

Lights planned for use as safety lights must conform to the DIN EN 60598-2-22 standards.

Table 10.4/2: Requirements placed on third-party ECGs (request table with an e-mail to: [email protected])


the further planning for threereasons:

� Lamps for general lighting requireshigher wattages with the conse-quence that fewer lights per circuitcan be connected. More circuits(cabling and circuit modules) arerequired.

� The lights and their fittings mustsatisfy a number of standards. Table10.4/2 summarizes the standards tobe satisfied and the required param-eters for ECGs in safety lighting .

� The required battery capacity will bemuch greater.

Converted architect lights often have a“wild” interior. Important is that a lightthat serves as a safety light must nowsatisfy much stricter criteria. And themore additional engineering (monitor-ing module, separate ECGs for multi-lamp lights, DALI modules) installedon-site, the more difficult it is to satisfythese standards. In the worst case, thegeneral lighting that was merely

converted to safety lighting does notfunction in an emergency. All personsinvolved will have to carry the respon-sibility. A better solution is to have themanufacturer directly equip thedesired lights with the required emer-gency light components. This retainsthe warranty and the CE marking isnormally maintained.

The number of lights is now deter-mined individually for each fire area.To do this, enter the safety and rescuepath lights required in accordance withEN 1838 in the floor plans and transferthem to the project chart (Photo 10.4/1).The circuits result from the fire areasand the associated lights.

The correct system must now be cho-sen. If permitted by the building condi-tions, the equipping of fire area withlow-power systems (LP system, previ-ously called group battery systems) is agood choice. If this is not possible, theuse of a central power system (CPsystem, previously called central bat-

tery system) is recommended. The finalcircuit wiring from the LP and CP sys-tems to the lights is made in accor-dance with the Sample Directive onFireproofing Requirements for LineSystems (MLAR). The advantage ofthese systems lies in the relatively shortcable lengths, and the energy requiredin an emergency is available frombatteries very near the place of use. Nocomplicated switchgear and cablenetworks for distributing the emer-gency power must be built and main-tained (E30, E90).

When the safety lighting needs to beactivated, the safety light unit mustreceive a switch-on signal. The extentof the possible interference sourcesthat need to be detected and avoidedin an emergency must be considered.The procedure here is simple. Thegeneral distribution board is moni-tored with voltage sensors so that onoccurrence of an incident, the com-plete general lighting of a complete

Photo 10.4/1: Example of a project schedule (request project schedule as an Excel file with an e-mail to: [email protected])

1010/23


area cannot fail undetected. Thisobviously also includes lighting con-trol and any bus systems. Irrespectiveof whether the bus fails and thegeneral power supply is still opera-tional or, the other way round, thesafety lighting must operate withoutdelay in any fault situation. Thisobviously also applies to dimmedsafety lights.

Safety lighting with alternativepower sources

The installation of alternative powersources for the safety lighting issomewhat more difficult than for theLP and CP systems. The effort for theacquisition of a failure of the generallighting remains the same as for theLP and CP systems. The difficulty herelies in the often long, including linesbetween buildings transmission linesof the emergency power supply in thefact that power must be 100% pro-vided in an emergency (take accountof the protection requirements). Theplanner is responsible and must provethat safety lighting is available with-out delay when required, and notinterrupted for the prescribed nominaloperational duration. However,because every electrical system is builtdifferently, this can develop into ademanding task. A possible approachcould be mind-mapping: follow thepath of the emergency supply fromthe point where the emergency powersource feeds in to the final circuits ofthe safety lighting. Every place whereemergency power supply could behindered must be considered inadvance and precautions must betaken to prevent such adverse effects.Such areas also include possibleexcavation work in the property, firein distribution boards or on cablingsections, normal wear, usual powerfailures in the public grid etc. Theinrush currents must not be underesti-mated, which, in an emergency,

would load such alternative powersources, in particular, when all con-sumers are switched on at once. Thesmallest and the largest possibleshort-circuit current must be includedin all calculations. Selectivity andabsence of system perturbations mustbe proved with calculations anddocumented. In case of fire, possibleheating of the E30/E90 power cablesmust be considered for calculatingappropriate cable cross sections.Considerations are required whenexactly the emergency power sourceshould be connected into supply in anemergency and how the systemrecovery test could proceed. Whetherthis effort is worthwhile comparedwith LP systems and CP systems maybe different from case to case. Thestep, however, must be consideredcarefully from the beginning, becausea change from one system to anothersystem is not always possible.

Single battery lights

Although single battery lights areeasier to use, they are not economicalwhen more than approximately 15units are involved. The purchase priceand the frequently-required batteryreplacement mean they do not reallyrepresent an alternative. The systemsshould have at least an automatic testlog and a blocking function. There aremany reasons for and against the useof single battery lights. Anyone whohas already used this technologyknows what problems are involved.Such a solution can be recommendedonly under very unusualcircumstances.

10.4.2 Where Is a SafetyLighting SystemRequired?

E DIN VDE 0108-100: 2005-10; Section 4.1

“The safety lighting ensures thatshould the general power supply fail,the lighting is made available withoutdelay, automatically and for a prede-fined time in a specified area”. Thesystem must ensure that the safetylighting satisfies the following func-tions:

a) Illumination of the rescue pathsigns

b) Illumination of the exit ways sothat the safe areas can be safelyreached

c) Adequate illumination of the firefighting equipment or alarm equip-ment along the rescue paths

d) It should permit work associatedwith safety measures.

To ensure that the safety lightingsystem is configured to meet theapplicable standards, prior to config-uring the system, drawings must beprovided that show the layout of thebuildings and all existing or suggestedrescue paths, fire-alarm call pointsand fire protection equipment, andindicate the position of all obstaclesthat could impair escape.

The safety lighting must be active ifonly parts of the general lighting fail.Provisions must always be made toensure that, should the general powersupply fail, the safety lighting in theaffected faulted area is activated. Thiscan also mean that individual circuit-breakers, ground leakage circuit-breakers and control-circuit fuses forbus systems or light control systemsare monitored.

At least two circuits and two safetylights must be planned for every areaequipped with safety lighting.


Controllers and bus systems of theelectrical system for safety purposesmust be independent of the con-trollers and bus systems of the build-ing control systems. A coupling ofboth systems is permitted only withan interface that ensures a reliable,electrical isolation of both systemsfrom each other.

The extent of a safety lightingdepends on the type and use of thebuilding. Further notes are containedin Table 10.4/1.

10.4.3 MLAR – SampleDirective on FireproofingRequirements for LineSystems

Several high damage incidents inrecent years made it clear that apower failure, etc., can also be theresult of a fire. Consequently, MLARguidelines must be considered duringthe setup of safety lighting systems.The functional safety of the wholesystem must always be consideredwhen determining the system scope.

MLAR: 2005-11, Excerpt:

5 Functional Endurance of ElectricalCable Systems in Case of Fire

5.1 Basic Requirements

5.1.1 The electrical cable systems forsafety technology systems and equip-ment prescribed by the building regula-tions must be constructed or separatedby components in such a way that thesafety systems and equipment remainfunctional (functional endurance) incase of fire for an adequate period oftime. This functional endurance mustbe ensured for possible interactionswith other systems, equipment or theirparts.

5.1.2 Other safety systems and equip-ment required for operation may alsobe connected to the distribution boardsfor the electrical cable systems whichwere installed for safety systems andequipment prescribed by buildingregulations. In this case, it must beensured that safety systems and equip-ment prescribed by the building author-ities are not impaired in any way.

5.2 Functional Endurance

5.2.1 Functional endurance of thecables is ensured if the cables

a) satisfy the test requirements speci-fied in DIN 4102-12:1998-11 (func-tional endurance class E 30 to E90) orare laid

b) on unfinished ceilings below thefloor screed with a thickness of at least30 mm or if

c) they are buried in the ground.

5.2.2 Distribution boards for electricalcable systems with functionalendurance in accordance with Section5.3 must be

a) located in dedicated rooms not usedfor other purposes that are separatedfrom other rooms by walls, ceilings anddoors with a fire resistance appropriatefor the required duration of the func-

tional endurance and, with the excep-

tion of the doors, with non-inflamma-

ble building materials,

b) separated with a housing for which

the operability of the electrical fittings

in the distribution board is proved in

case of fire for the required duration of

functional endurance by a usability

certification issued by the building

authorities (note: the party performing

the installation has the proof responsi-

bility) or

c) surrounded by components (includ-

ing their terminations) that have a fire

resistance appropriate for the required

duration of the functional endurance

and, with exception of the termina-

tions, are made of non-inflammable

building materials, whereby it must be

ensured that the operability of the

electrical fittings in the distribution

board is proved in case of fire for the

required duration of functional

endurance. (This requires a certified

system with building authorities

approval number of at least Z 86.2)

5.3 Duration of the Functional

Endurance

5.3.2 The duration of the functional

endurance of the wiring systems must

be at least 30 minutes for

a) safety lighting systems; excluded are

wiring systems used to supply power to

the safety lighting only within a fire

area at a floor level or only within a

staircase; the floor area of each fire

area must not exceed 1,600 m2,

b) passenger elevators with control

that allows use in case of fire; excluded

are wiring systems located within the

elevator shafts or the motor rooms laid

with functional endurance E30.

1010/25


10.4.4 Installation of a CPSystem Battery System

For the installation of CP Systembattery systems a number of regula-tions and specifications apply, inparticular MLAR: 2005-11, DIN EN50272-2 and LBO. Depending on thebuilding conditions, the previouslymentioned regulations and specifica-tions provide the following possibili-ties for placement:

� Main distribution board of thegeneral power supply (MD-GPS) andmain distribution board of thesafety power supply (MD-SPS) in anelectrical operating area. Ensurehere that MD-GPS and MD-SPS areseparated from each other with30 minutes functional endurance(Fig. 10.4/1a).

� MD-SPS including battery in aseparate electrical operating area.Ensure here that MD-GPS andMD-SPS are separated from eachother with 90 minutes functionalendurance (Fig. 10.4/1b).

10.4.5 Final Circuits in theFire Area

The requirements placed on fireprotection have resulted in a greatlyincreased installation effort. Toaddress this development in the finalcircuits, in addition to the previouslymentioned three circuit types, afourth circuit type has been developed– allowing free programming in thecircuit. In this case, only two finalcircuits are required for each fire area.Permanent, standby or switched lightscan be attached at any point of such acircuit. Power is always present at alllights and the system module in thelights blocks or releases the power tothe ECG. The installation is made inthe conventionally installed safetylighting circuits without additional

Switched permanent light (DLS)Safety lights switched in “switchedpermanent light” illuminate when thegeneral lighting is switched on, thegeneral lighting fails or for a manuallyor automatically activated continuousoperation test. This circuit type allowsthe safety lighting to be integratedseamlessly in the general lighting.

User-configurable circuit (STAR)Safety and rescue sign lights in theDS, BS, DLS circuit types are operatedusing a patented technology on theusual 3-pole power cable. Softwarethat runs on the Windows user inter-face is used to program the CEAGproducts.

Fig. 10.4/1b: Placement of CP System batterysystems, battery systems in the HV-SV

Fig. 10.4/1a: Placement of CP System batterysystems with substation

expense. The requirements placed onfire protection in accordance withMLAR: 2005-11 remain effective.

Circuitry types of the safetylighting

Permanent light (DS)Safety lights in “permanent light”illuminate in every operating state. Inpower system operation, the lightsare supplied with 230/240 V, 50/60Hz. In battery operation, the switchingunit installed in the safety lightingsystem supplies power to the safetylights.

Standby light (BS)Safety lights switched in “standby”illuminate when the normal lightingfails (power failure) and for a manu-ally or automatically activated contin-uous operation test. Should the powersystem fail, the control unit switchesto battery operation. The direct cur-rent fed over the switching unitsupplies the lights, until the powersystem is restored or the exhaustivedischarge protection is activated.


10.4.6 Test of a NewSystem

To ensure that the safety lighting hasbeen installed correctly, a test by anauthorized expert must be made priorto the initial commissioning. Theexpert must certify the effectivenessand operational reliability of thesystem. The test inspector must test atleast the following parameters:

For all systems

� Nominal illuminance including an ageing allowance(E DIN VDE 0108-100; 2005-10)

� Measurement of the lighting systemvalues in accordance with DIN 5035-6

� Power system recovery and reactiva-

tion (transient system fault) at theend of 2/3 of the nominal operatingtime.

In addition, for group and centralbattery systems:

� Behavior of the general lighting incase of the power system recovery

� Execution of the network moni-toring

� Documentation (DIN EN 50172)� SCSG fire protection � Absence of system perturbations

(DIN EN 50172)� Ageing reserve for the battery

(DIN EN 50171)

10.4.7 Standards

As of March 2007, VDE 0108-1 to VDE0108-8 should no longer be used.

DEN 50172 (VDE 0108-100: 2005-01)has already been supplemented in2005 (E DIN VDE 0108-100: 2005-10).The immediate use of this draft isrecommended by the responsible UK221.3 of the DEK (Deutsche Kommis-sion für Elektrotechnik Elektronik

Informationstechnik, German Com-mission for Electrical Engineering,Electronics, Information Technology)in the DIN and VDE. This means thefollowing standards should be usedfor newly planned safety lightingsystems:

� DIN VDE 0100-718 provides basicstatements about the installation ofa safety lighting system,

� E DIN VDE 0108-100; 2005-10provides additional information forbattery-backed systems.

Fig. 10.4/4: Safety lighting system with the appropriate E30 wiring using three fire areas in a building.The hybrid circuits (STAR) reduces the wiring effort by 50% for each of the two supply leads.

Fig. 10.4/2: Traditional installation with the DS,BS, DLS circuits; two circuits areprescribed for each type (a total ofsix circuits)

Fig. 10.4/3: Installation with user-configurablecircuits (STAR hybrid circuit) requiresonly two final circuits for all circuits.Subsequent change to the circuit typeis possible without any problems.

Contact:

CEAG Notlichtsysteme GmbHSenator-Schwartz-Ring 2659494 Soest, GermanyTelephone: +49 (0) 29 21 / 6 9-8 70, Fax: +49 (0) 29 21 / 69-6 17Internet: www.ceag.de E-mail: [email protected]

DS

BS

BSBS DLS

DLS

DS

BS

BSBS DLS

DLS

6 circuits

2 circuits

1010/27


10.5 RobustRemote TerminalUnit for ExtremeEnvironmentalConditions (SIPLUS RIC)The requirements for the simpleinclusion of data from peripheralsources in the existing control sys-tems increase. Ease of operation,optimization and monitoring tasksmust be satisfied. The communicationpaths are very comprehensive andoften also long; the data sources arevery diverse and often must bechanged in remote, inhospitableregions. This means the remoteterminal unit must be correspondinglyflexible.

General requirements placed on aremote control system for extremeenvironmental conditions

� Extended temperature rangefrom -40 to +70 °C

� Standard transmission protocols,observance of communicationsstandards such as IEC 60870

� Low energy consumption� Robust construction suitable for

outdoor use, stainless steel housing� Simple installation and commission-

ing� Over-voltage protection� Faster availability at the site of

installation and prepared externalconnections

� Expandible hardware and software� Versatile communication connec-

tions and protocols to the controlcenter

� High data security� Compatibility to existing control

systems

Environmental conditions /outdoor operation

The housing constructed as a robuststainless steel unit and the electronicsdesigned for operation in a widetemperature range from -40 to +70 °Cmakes the remote terminal unitsuitable for use as outdoor device. Forprotection from aggressive gases,humidity and condensation, theelectronic circuit boards can be coatedwith a protective varnish.

Dialectric strength of the inputsand outputs

Depending on the application and thesite of installation, high requirementsare placed on the electrical loadingcapability of the inputs. For operationin electrical power distribution sys-tems, the inputs and outputs must bedesigned for maximum surge voltagesof 3.5 kV.

Wide-range power supplies

The integrated wide-range powersupplies that can be operated with both110/230 V AC and 24/110 V DC allowthe devices to be connected directly tothe available power supply withoutrequiring any additional power con-verter. This saves not only engineeringexpense, but also hardware and installa-tion.

Communication

The international standard protocolsdeveloped for applications in thepower transmission and distributionsectors permit a reliable data trans-mission also over large distances. Theactual communication medium canbe:

� Modem with wire connection� Ethernet� Optical fiber conductor� Wireless/GPRS

Use of communications standards

The communications types for remotecontrol systems agreed in internationalcommittees are specified in the IEC60870-5-101 and -104 standards andprove a high and reliable standard. Theobservance of these standards ensuresthe simple and reliable data exchange.Comprehensive know-how is availableworldwide.

Examples of the functions defined bythe IEC required uniformly for WAN:

� Data types with attributes� Communication or operating modes� Clock handling� Operational and alarm signalling� Preprocessing of measured values

and counter values� Command processing � Diagnostic functions

Control center link

Depending on the application, thedata must be interfaced to controlcenters. For a SIMATIC solution, theremote terminal unit is accessed froma CPU of the S7-300 or S7-400 series.The connection between the CPU andthe remote terminal unit is based onthe standard protocol IEC 60870-5-101 or 60870-5-104 using an appro-priate communications medium(cable, optical fiber conductor, wire-less, mobile radiocommunications, …).

If information needs to be exchangedwith power supply system operators,utility companies, etc., the remoteterminal unit can perform this taskdirectly. The building services controlsystem or automation system isdecoupled. The interface between theoperators is a clearly defined hard-ware interface. No intervention ismade in the building services controlsystem.


Cost-optimized design

For the selection of the devices, toavoid the need for expensive engi-neering, ensure that the basic versionalready includes all componentsrequired for operation, such as powersupply, inputs, outputs and communi-cations interfaces. To extend the datavolume, expansion modules suppliedwith power from the base unit can beplugged in.

Simple installation

For installation, the device is simplysnapped on a mounting rail. All con-nections are made using plug connec-tors. This allows connection to beprepared in advance so that thecommissioning cables only need to beplugged in.

Compatibility

Easy compatibility between theSIMATIC CPU and the remote controlsystem makes the application veryflexible. This allows the benefits ofboth systems (automation and remotecontrol system) to be used.

The main module is fully equipped with

� Power supply (AC or DC)� Communications interfaces (LAN,

electrical or optical fiber conductor)

� 16 digital inputs� 4 analog outputs� 16 digital outputsExpansion modules can be extendedwith one or more of the followingunits

� DI 16, digital inputs� AI 8, analog inputs� CO 16, digital outputs� MCU, Motor Control Unit

Available protocols

� IEC 870-5-101� IEC 870-5-104� In preparation: ModBus RTU

Connection of the remote terminalunit to an existing control center

The use of standardized remotecontrol protocols makes the inclusionof SIPLUS RIC in SCADA (SupervisoryControl and Data Acquisition) systemseasy to implement.

The SIPLUS RIC product family sets thestandard in the industry with regardto flexibility, robustness and ease ofuse. The connection to SIMATIC, inparticular, allows the use of the bestfeatures of both systems.

The platform basis is SIMATIC S7

� Long-term availability� Standard portfolio, stocks of spare

parts� Familiar look-and-feel� Same tool, no new on-the-job

learning, no new training

Platform expansion with SIPLUSextreme

� Hardened against temperatureeffects

� Hardened against environmentaleffects with a contour-adaptedcoating (conformally coated)

Platform expansion with SIPLUSRIC

� IEC protocols implemented asapplication, no version dependency

� Expanded with outdoor devices

Photo 10.5/1: Modular, hardened remote control system (from the left: main module, motor controlmodule, analog inputs/outputs, digital inputs/outputs)

Photo 10.5/2: Possible connection of the remoteterminal units to a SIMATIC system

Further information:Siemens AGA&D SE S5Würzburger Str. 12190766 Fürth

Claus-Thomas MichalakKlaus CzwalinnaTel.: +49 (0) 9 11 / 7 50-23 04Tel.: +49 (0) 9 11 / 7 50-49 78E-mail: [email protected]: [email protected]

chapter 11

Appendix

11 Appendix


A1 Standards,Regulations andGuidelines

DIN 57100 VDE 0100 Erection of low-voltage installations with rated voltages up to 1,000 V

DIN VDE 0100-710 Erection of low-voltage installations – Requirements for special installations or locations –

Part 710: Medical locations

DIN VDE 0100-718 Erection of low-voltage installations – Requirements for special installations or locations –

Part 718: Installations for gathering of people

DIN VDE 0101 Power installations exceeding 1 kV

DIN EN 60909-0 VDE 0102 Short-circuit currents in three-phase a.c. systems - Part 0: Calculation of currents

DIN VDE 0105-100 Operation of electrical installations – Part 100: General requirements

(VDE 0107) Withdrawn, currently DIN VDE 0100-710

(VDE 0108) Withdrawn, currently DIN VDE 0100-718 (transition period until 03/2007)

DIN VDE 0141 Earthing system for special power installations with nominal voltages above 1 kV

DIN VDE 0185-1 Protection against lightning – General principles

DIN EN 50272-2 VDE 0510-2 Safety requirements for secondary batteries and battery installations – Part 2: Stationary batteries

DIN VDE 0800-1 Telecommunications; general concepts; requirements and tests for the safety of

facilities and apparatus

Arb.Stätt. VO Workplace Ordinance

Elt Bau VO Regulations (of the German Länder) on the construction of utilities rooms for electrical installations

TA-Lärm Instruction for the protection from acoustic exposure

TAB “Technical supply conditions set by the local power distribution network operator”

The stipulations made by TÜV, TÜH, and Dekra

Rules for the prevention of accidents

Official regulations (e. g. state building regulations) and other conditions for building imposed by authorities

Expertise on fire safety and expert concepts

Further notes on planning, configurations and layout:VDI 2078 To calculate the cooling load in air-conditioned rooms

AGI J 12 Construction of rooms for indoor switchgear, Worksheet published by

Arbeitsgemeinschaft Industriebau e. V. (AGI) (Working Group on Industrial Building)

Applicable VDE standards can be found in the standards database provided by VDE Publishing House (www.vde-verlag.de).

When planning and erecting build-ings, many standards, regulations andguidelines must be observed and complied with in addition to the explicit specifications made by the building and plant operator

(e.g. factory regulations) and theresponsible power distribution net-work operator. The following list shallgive you an overview of the mostimportant documents in this context.

Table A1/1: Standards, regulations and guidelines

Requirements on low-voltageswitchgear regarding their heat dissi-pation, packing density, managementof high short-circuit currents andinsulation strength have risen tremen-dously in recent years.

Safe operation of low-voltageswitchgear is only ensured if themanufacturer observes all standardsapplicable to the switchgear assemblyand is able to present proof thereof.Only switchgear in compliance withcurrently valid standards satisfy pres-ent-day safety regulations.

The following standards apply:

IEC 60439-1, VDE 0660 Part 500

Low-voltage switchgear andcontrolgear assembly

Type-tested and partially type-testedassemblies

The content of these two standardsis identical. They show twopossibilities to manufacturelow-voltage switchgear:

• Type-tested assemblies (TTA)

• Partially type-tested assemblies(PTTA)

A2 Safety Standard for Low-Voltage SwitchgearAssemblies

Required proof for compliance with standards

Requirement TTA PTTA

1. Temperature-rise limit Test Test or extrapolation

2. Dielectric strength Test Test

3. Short-circuit strength Test Test or extrapolation

4. Effectiveness of the protective conductor Test Test

5. Creepage distances and clearances in air Test Test

6. Mechanical function Test Test

7. IP degree of protection Test Test

Type-tested assemblies (TTA)

In such an assembly, all componentsalone as well as their functionableassembly, including all electrical anmechanical connections have beentype-tested. The prerequisite for theuse of other switching/protectivedevices is that their technical data areat least identical or better (conclusionby analogy).

Partially type-tested assemblies(PTTA)

Such assemblies contain type-testedand not type-tested components. Nottype-tested components must bederived from type-tested ones.

For type-tested assemblies all proofmust be produced by means oftesting.

There are two exceptions for partiallytype-tested assemblies:

1. Proof that temperature-rise limitsare kept. In circuits of max. 3,150 Afeeding current this proof may also beproduced by means of extrapolation.

2. Proof of the short-circuit strength isommitted for switchgear which isprotected by a current-limiting devicewith a let-through current ≤ 15 kA.

If extrapolation or calculation accord-ing to DIN VDE 0660 Part 500 isrequired, it shall always be basedupon a deduction of type-testedsystems.

Only if all proof has been producedunambiguously, the system inquestion is a type-tested switchgearassembly or a partially type-testedassembly. Hence, these assembliesmeet the relevant safetyregulations.

1111/3

Appendix


A3 IP Degree of Protection according to IEC 60529

Meaning for the protection ofequipment:

Meaning for the protection ofpersons

IP.XProtected against ingress offoreign matter

Protected against access todangerous parts with a

Firs

t co

de fi

gure

0 (not protected) (not protected)

1 ≥ 50 mm in diameter back of the hand

2 ≥ 12.5 mm in diameter finger

3 ≥ 2.5 mm in diameter tool

4 ≥ 0.04 in in diameter wire

5 dust-protected wire

6 dustproof wire

Meaning for the protection ofequipment:

IP.XProtected against ingress ofwater with harmful effects

Seco

nd

code

figu

re

0 (not protected)

1 vertical drops

2 drops (15 ° inclination)

3 sprayproof

4 splashproof

5 hoseproof

6 jetproof (strong jets)

8 temporary immersion in water

9 permanent immersion in water

Meaning for the protection ofpersons:

IP.XProtected against accessto dangerous parts with a

Add

itio

nal

lett

er(o

ptio

nal

)

A back of the hand

B finger

C tool

D wire

4 Designation

Protection by an enclosure is indicated in the IP code as follows

4.1 IP code layout IP 2 3 C

Code letters

(International Protection)

First code figure

(figures 0 to 8 or letter X)

Second code figure

(figures 0 to 8 or letter X)

Additional letter (optional)

(letters A, B, C, D)

1111/5

Appendix

A4 InstallationGuidelines forCables and Wires

Again and again, cables and wires arelaid wrongly. When recoiling orunwinding, damage may already beinflicted (Fig. A4/1). Their tensile andthermal loads are often not lookedinto. The following installation guide-lines shall help to minimize trouble.

Cabling must be selected appropriateto the installation and operatingconditions. It must be protectedagainst mechanical, thermal or chemi-cal impact, as well as against theingress of moisture from the cableends.

Insulated high-current power cablesmust not be buried in the ground.Temporary covering of rubbersheathed cables, type NSSHÖU, orcable tracks with soil, sand or similar,e.g. on construction sites is not con-sidered as burying.

Fixtures of stationary cables and wiresmust not damage them. If cables andwires are laid horizontally on walls orceilings and fastened with clips, forcables and wires which are not rein-forced, the 20-fold outer diameter isan approximate value for clip spacing.This spacing also applies to bracketsfor laying on cable ladders and racks.When laid vertically, clip spacing may

be increased as appropriate for thecable or clip type.

For connection to non-stationaryequipment, flexible cables must berelieved from tensile load and shear-ing at the entry points into the casingand secured against twisting andkinking.

The outer cable sheath must not bedamaged by the tension relief devices.Standard models of flexible PVCcables are not suitable for outdoorinstallation.

Flexible rubber sheathed cables(e.g. NEOFLEX cables) are only suit-able for permanent use outdoors iftheir outer sheath consists of plasticmaterial, normally based on poly-chloroprene (e.g. Neoprene). Specialcables must be used for permanentapplication in water.

Cable systems with functionalendurance

These cable systems must be designedin compliance with the type tests(DIN 4102-12).

Thermal load

Temperature-rise limits for the respec-tive cable design are included in thetechnical data. The upper limits mustnot be exceeded because of cableheating on account of current heatdissipation and ambient thermalimpact. The lower limits specify the

AA

B BB

A A

B

lowest permissible ambient tempera-ture.

Tensile load

Tensile load of conductors should beas low as possible. The followingtensile load on cable conductors mustnot be exceeded:

� Cables for non-stationaryequipmentFor cable installation and operationintended for non-stationary equip-ment, a maximum of 15 N per mm2

conductor cross section is permitted,whereby cable screens, concentricconductors and split protective con-ductors are not counted. Cablingwhich is subject to dynamic stress inoperation, e.g. in cranes with a highaccelaration force, in power chainswith a great movement frequency,appropriate measures must be taken,e.g. increasing the bending radius inthe individual case. Otherwise thecable service life may be impaired.

� Cables for fixed installationgThe maximum tensile load for fixedcable installation is 50 N per mm2

conductor cross section.

Fig. A2/1: Recoiling and unwinding of cables

For further information on these installationguidlines please refer to

� DIN VDE 0298-1� DIN VDE 0891


A5 Fire Load Valuesof Cables and Wires

Fire load calculations are gainingmore and more importance for publicbuildings. Depending on the materialtype, cables and wires have different

mean fire load values. The fire loadsgiven in the table below are non-binding guide values only.

MaterialType

Fire load in kWh/kgAverage

Fire load value in MJ/kgAverage

PVC 5.8 21

PE 12.2 44

PS 11.5 42

PA 8.1 26

PP 12.8 46

PUR 6.4 23

TPE-E 6.3 23

TPE-O 7.1 26

NR 6.4 23

SIR 5.0 18

EPR 6.4 23

EVA 5.9 21

CR 4.6 17

CSM 5.9 21

PVDF 4.2 15

ETFE 3,.9 14

FEP 1.4 5

PFA 1.4 5

PTFE 1.4 5

HFFR 4.8 17

HFFR cross-linked 4.2 15

Note:The above mentioned calculation is only applicable to cables and wires whose combustible materialsare fully made of the same material type and do not contain any other metal parts besides the coppercontent. Product-specific fire load values in form of a table can beobtained on request for: ÖLFLEXCLASSIC 100H, ÖLFLEX CLASSIC 110H, ÖLFLEX® CLASSIC 110 CH, ÖLFLEX 120H, ÖLFLEX 130H, ÖLFLEX120 CH, ÖLFLEX FD 820 H und ÖLFLEX FD 820 CH. Conversion of quantities: 1 kWh/m = approx. 3.6 MJ/m; 1 MJ/m = approx. 0.227 kWh/m.

Integration of fire loads at and in

buildings into the calculation. As far as

the assessment and limitation of

consequential fire risks are concerned,

there are different national laws and

standards to date. In Germany, the

applicable state building regulations for

buildings stipulate that certain limits

regarding the accumulation of

combustible parts directly connected to

the building, such as cables and wiring

of building installations, be also taken

into account (see Supplement 1 of VDE

0108 Part 1).

1111/7

Appendix

Type of indoor area or activity Nominal illuminance En [lx] Comment

1. General areas1.1 Traffic zones in storerooms 50

1.2 Storage areas

1.2.1 Storage areas for similar or large-unit goods 50

1.2.2 Storage areas with search requirements for non-similar storage goods 100

1.2.3 Storage areas with reading requirements 200

1.3 Automatic high-rack warehouse

1.3.1 Corridors 2

1.3.2 Operator station 200

1.4 Dispatch center 200

1.5 Recreational, sanitary and medical care facilities

1.5.1 Canteens 200 Atmospheric lighting,possibly incandescent lamps

1.5.2 Other recreational rooms and resting areas 100

1.5.3 Rooms for physical exercise 300

1.5.4 Changing rooms 100

1.5.5 Washing rooms 100 Possibly additional illumination of mirrors

1.5.6 Lavatories 100

1.5.7 Medical rooms, rooms for first aid and medical care 500

1.6 Building services, utilities

1.6.1 Machine rooms 100

1.6.2 Power supply and distribution 100

1.6.3 Telex, post room 500

1.6.4 Telephone operator 30

2. Traffic routes inside buildings2.1 For people 50

2.2 For people and vehicles 100 Adjustment of nominal illuminance to adjacent areas: En1 ≥ 0.1 En2 where:En1 = En of the traffic routesEn2 = En of adjacent areas

2.3 Stairs, moving escalators and inclined traffic routes 100

2.4 Loading platforms 100

2.5 Automatic conveyor systems or belts in the vicinity of traffic routes 100

2.6 Gateway areas

2.6.1 For day shift 2 x Enmin. 400 lx

2.6.2 For night shift 0.5 Ento 0.2 En

A6 Table of Nominal Illuminance



3. Offices and similar rooms3.1 Office rooms with daylight-oriented workplaces only in the

immediate vicinity of windows 300 Workplace-oriented general lighting, at the workplace at least 0.8 En

3.2 Office rooms 500

3.3 Open-plan offices – high level of reflection 750 High levels of reflexion:– medium reflection 1,000 ceilings with min. 0.7,

walls/partitions min. 0.5.Single-user lamps useful

3.4 Technical drawing 750 En referred to a typical position of the drawing board of 70 ° towards the horizontal plane; in the center 1.2 m high

3.5 Conference and meeting rooms 300

3.6 Reception rooms 10

3.7 Areas with access to the public 200

3.8 Areas for data processing 500

4. Chemical industry4.1 Process plants, remote- controlled 50

4.2 Process plants with occasional manual intervention 100

4.3 Permanently occupied workplaces in process plants 200

4.4 Measuring desks and stations, control platforms and desks 300 If required for operative reasons: En < 300 lx

4.5 Laboratories, fabrication 300

4.6 Works requiring advanced viewing tasks 500

4.7 Color checks 1,000 Single-user lamps useful. Pay attention to color rendering.

5. Cement industry, ceramics and glass making5.1 Workplaces and areas near kilns, at mixers for raw material;

crushers in brickyards 200

5.2 Enameling, rolling, pressing, forming of simple parts,glazing, glass blowing 300

5.3 Grinding, etching, polishing of glass, forming of fine parts,manufacture of glass instruments 500

5.4 Decoration work 500 Single-user lamps useful

5.5 Grinding of optical lenses, crystal glass, off-hand grinding and engraving, medium-quality work 750

5.6 Fine work 1,000


1111/9

Appendix


6. Iron and steel works, rolling mills, large foundries6.1 Production plants without manual intervention 50

6.2 Production plants with occasional manual intervention 100

6.3 Permanently occupied workplaces in production plants 200

6.4 Measuring desks and stations, control platforms and desks 300 If required for operative reasons: En < 300 lx

6.5 Test and quality check stations 500 If required for operative reasons: En < 500 lx

7. Metal processing7.1 Handforging of small parts 200

7.2 Welding 300

7.3 Workstations, automated or semi-automated machinetools 300

7.4 Coarse and medium machine work; permissible tolerance > 0.1 mm 300 For permissible tolerances see DIN 7168 Part 1

7.5 Fine machine work; permissible deviation < 0.1 mm 500

7.6 Workplaces with robots 300

7.7 Marking, measuring and inspection workplaces 750

7.8 Cold rolling mills 200

7.9 Wire and tube drawing, production of cold strip sections 300

7.10 Metal sheet processing 300

7.11 Manufacture of tools and cutlery 500

7.12 Assembly

7.12.1 coarse 200

7.12.2 medium-fine 300

7.12.3 fine 500

7.13 Drop-forging 200

7.14 Foundries

7.14.1 Accessible subterranean tunnels, conveyor belts, cellars etc. 50

7.14.2 Platforms 100

7.14.3 Sand conditioning 200

7.14.4 Dressing station 300

7.14.5 Workplaces at the cupola and mixer 200

7.14.6 Casting houses 30

7.14.7 Shake out places 200

7.14.8 Machine molding 200

7.14.9 Manual molding 300

7.14.10 Core making 300

7.14.11 Pattern making 500

7.15 Diecasting shops 300

7.16 Surface treatment




7.16.1 Electroplating 300

7.16.2 Smoothing, painting, varnishing 500

7.16.3 Check stations 750

7.17 Tool, gage, model and jig construction, precision tool makinghigh-precision assembly 1,000 Single-user lamps useful

7.18 Automotive production plants At assembly lines with workplace-related fluorescent lighting, glare reduction can be ommitted if plant conditions require this

7.18.1 Body shop 500

7.18.2 Body, surface treatment 500

7.18.3 Paintshop – spray booth 1,000

7.18.4 Paintshop – polishing stations 750

7.18.5 Paintshop – finishing 1,000

7.18.6 Upholstery 500

7.18.7 Final assembly of car body and chassis 500

7.18.8 Inspection 750

8. Power plants8.1 Feeder systems 50

8.2 Boiler house 100

8.3 Pressure compensation rooms in nuclear power plants 200

8.4 Machine rooms 100

8.5 Adjoining rooms, e.g. pump stations, condenser rooms 50

8.6 Switchgear stations in buildings 100

8.7 Control rooms 300 If required for operative reasons: En < 300 lx

8.8 Maintenance work at the turbine and generator 500 Additional lighting for the duration of the work

9. Electrical/electronic industry 9.1 Cable and wire production, varnishing and impregnation of coils,

assembly of large machinery, simple mounting work, winding of coils and armatures with coarse wire 300

9.2 Assembly of telephones, small motors, winding of coils and armatures with medium-size wire 500

9.3 Assembly of small equipment, radios and TV sets,winding of fine wire coils, fuse production,adjusting, testing, calibrating 1,000 Single-user lamps useful

9.4 Assembly of smallest parts, electronic components 1,500


1111/11

Appendix


10 Jewelry, watch and clock making industry10.1 Jewelry making 1000

10.2 Gem cutting 1500 Single-user lamps useful

10.3 Optician’s and watchmaker’s workshops 1500

11 Wood working11.1 Steaming pits

11.2 Frame saws 200

11.3 Work at the planing bench, glueing, assembly 300

11.4 Selection and check of veneer wood, inlays 500

11.6 Working at woodworking tools, turning, chamfering, dressing, rabbeting, slitting, cutting, sawing, milling 500

11.7 Wood finishing 500

11.8 Quality checks 750

12 Paper making, graphic and printing industry12.1 Work at hollander engines, edge runners and pulp mills 200

12.2 Paperboard, corrugating and cardboard machines, cardboard production 300

12.3 Ordinary bookbinder’s work, wallpaper printing 300

12.4 Gilding, blocking or blind-tooling, work at printing presses 500

12.5 Retouching, manual and machine typesetting 1000 Avoid glare by reflection by means of suitable angles of incidence;diagonally from side for manual typesetting

12.6 Color checking for multi-colored prints 1500 Single-user lamps useful

12.7 Steel and copper engraving 2000

12.8 Photo typesetting, reproduction 500

12.9 Page layout finishing, copying 800

13 Leather industry13.1 Work at tubs, vats and pits 200 Ensure vertical lighting of vats

Prevent reflections by choosing suitable angles of incidence

13.2 Scraping, slicing, rubbing, tumbling of skins 300

13.3 Saddler’s work, stitching, sewing, polishing, sorting, pressing, cutting to size, punching, shoe making 500 For darker materials increase to

1,000 lx, possibly by single-user lights

13.4 Leather dyeing (machine-dyeing) 750

13.5 Quality checks

A6 Table of Nominal Illuminancee



13.5.1 for medium demands 750

13.5.2 for superior demands 1,000

13.5.3 for premium demands 1,500 For surface checks: additional lighting with diagonal incidence; single-user lamps useful

13.6 Color checks 1,000 Single-user lamps useful; pay attention to color rendering

14 Textile manufacture and processing14.1 Workplaces and areas at baths and breaking of bales 200

14.2 Carding, washing, ironing, work at opening and carding machines, stretching, combing, slashing, card cutting, roving, jute and hemp roving 300

14.3 Dyeing 300

14.4 Preparing the yarn or warp beam, warping, spinning, spooling,reeling, twining, twisting, knitting, emboidering, weaving 500

14.5 Pricking, perching, sewing, cloth printing 750

14.6 Millinery 750

14.7 Burling, napping 1,500

14.8 Invisible mending 1,500

14.9 Quality and color checks 1,000 Single-user lamps useful, pay attention to color rendering

15 Food, beverage and tobacco industry15.1 Workplaces and work areas in the brewery, at the malt-floor,

for washing down, filling in barrels/kegs, cleaning, sieving, peeling, food processing in the cannery, and work in chocolate factories,workplaces and work areas in sugar refineries, for the drying and fermenting of crude tobacco, fermenting cellar 200

15.2 Picking and washing of produce; grinding, mixing, packing 300

15.3 Workplaces and work areas at slaughterhouses, butchers’ shops,dairies, grinding mills and filtering floors 300 Depending of the workplace layout,

ensure sufficient vertical illuminance

15.4 Cutting and sorting of fruit and vegetables 300

15.5 Preparation of delicatessen, kitchens; manufacture of cigars and cigarettes 500

15.6 Quality checks of glass jars and product checks;garnishing, decorating, sorting 500

15.7 Color checks, laboratories 1,000 Single-user lamps useful,pay attention to color rendering


1111/13

Appendix


16 Wholesale and retail trades16.1 Shops 300

16.2 Cashier’s desks 500

17 Crafts and trades (examples from various industries)17.1 Flame conditioning and painting of steel parts 200

17.2 Preassembly of heating and ventilation systems 200

17.3 Locksmith’s and plumber’s shops 300

17.4 Garages 300

17.5 Joiner’s workshops on construction sites see no. 11 Select nominal illuminance according to no. 11

17.6 Repair shops for machinery and apparatus 500

17.7 Radio and TV repair shops 500

18 Service sector18.1 Hotels and restaurants

18.1.1 Reception 200

18.1.2 Kitchen 500

18.1.3 Dining room 200

18.1.4 Conference rooms 300

18.1.5 Self-service restaurants 300

18.2 Launderettes and dry cleaners

18.2.1 Washing 300

18.2.2 Machine ironing 300

18.2.3 Manual ironing 300

18.2.4 Sorting 300

18.2.5 Stains removal quality check 1000 Single-user lamps useful

18.3 Hair styling 500

18.4 Cosmetics 750

19 Plastic processing19.1 Injection molding 500

19.2 Blow molding 300

19.3 Pressing 300



A

AA (or ST) Shunt release

AC Alternating current

ACB Air Circuit-breaker

AGI Arbeitsgemeinschaft Industriebau,German working group on industrial building

ANSI American National Standards Institute

AR Automatic reclosing

AS Auxiliary switch

ASR “Arbeitsstätten-Richtlinie”, Workplace Regulation

ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials

B

BetrSichV “Betriebssicherheitsverordnung”,Ordinance on Industrial Safety and Health

BGVR “Berufsgenossenschaftliche Vorschriften und Regelnfür Sicherheit und Gesundheit bei der Arbeit”Regulations and rules for safety and health at workby the workers' compensation insurance carriers

C

CAN Controller Area Network; field bus system developed byBosch for networking controllers in automobiles

CB Circuit-breaker

CCA CENELEC Certification Agreement; an agreement whichentitles European manufacturers to obtain a nationalcertification mark for their electrical engineering products,based upon test results from an approved institute of oneof the particpating countries.(source: http://www.ul-europe.com/de/solutions/marks/cca.php)

CE (marking) Communauté Européenne; EuropeanCommunity; using the CE mark, manufacturers confirmthe conformity of their products to the relevant ECDirectives and compliance with “essential requirements”stipulated therein

CENELEC Comité Européen de Normalisation Electrotechnique;European Committee for Standardization in ElectricalEngineering

CFC Continuous Function Chart; Siemens engineering tool forgraphic editing of automation functions based onprepared function blocks under the Microsoft Windowsoperating systems

CGP Central grounding point

CHP Combined heat and power plant

CIM Common Information Model, IEC standard (cf. IEC 61970)for the integration von IT systems in the power generationand distribution industry

CSA Canadian Standards Association

CSV (file) Character Separated Values, Comma SeparatedValues or Semi-Colon Separated Values; text file for savingand exchanging simple-structured data in which theindividual data items are separated by commas, semi-colons or other symbols

Cu Copper

D

DALI Digital Adressable Lighting Interface; protocol forcontrolling digital lighting equipment in buildings

DC Direct current

DF Dimensioning factor; ratio of the rated apparent powerSgen to the apparent power SUPS of the uninterruptiblepower supply

DIN Deutsches Institut für Normung e. V.; German industrialstandard

DMT Definite-time overcurrent-time protection

E

EC European Community

ECG Electronic control gear

EIB European Installation Bus

EMC Electromagnetic compatibility

EN European standard

EnEV Energieeinsparverordnung

EPR Ethylene propylene rubber

ETS EIB Tool Software

ETU Electronic trip unit

EVA Ethylene vinyl acetate

F

FB Fuse-block; fuse socket with fuse-link

FELV Functional extra-low voltage

FI- Fault current

FS Fault signal switch

FTP File Transfer Protocol; specific network protocol for datatransmission via TCP/IP networks

Abbreviations

1111/15

Appendix

G

GPS General power supply

H

HDP High Definition Prismatics; lighting technology deveolopedby Siteco

HV HRC High-voltage high rupturing capacity fuse

HVAC Heating, ventilation, air conditioning

HOAI Honorarordnung für Architekten und Ingenieure,Regulation of Architects’ and Engineers’ Fees in Germany

I

IAC Internal Arc Classification

I-release Instantaneous electromagnetic release

ICCC Instrumentation and Control Cargo Cabinet; container forelectrical/electronic and control systems, suitable fortransportation by air

IEC International Electrotechnical Commission

IGBT Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor; used in motor drives,traction power controls, UPS systems and power supplyunits, for example

IP (code) International Protection (acc. to DIN); Protection againstingress (of)

IP Internet Protocol

ISO International Organization for Standardization

K

KUPS UPS factor

KNX Konnex; building systems technology in compliance withEN 50090

L

LAN Local Area Network

L-release Inverse-time (long-time) delayed release

LC (~ resonant circuit), inductive-capactive resonant circuit

LCD Liquid crystal display

LED Light Emitting Diode

LEMP Lightning electromagnetic pulse

LOI Limited Oxygen Index

LPZ Lightning protection zone

LSC Category of operational availability of (medium-voltage)switchgear

LV Low-voltage

LV HRC Low-voltage high rupturing capacity fuse

LVMD Low-voltage main distribution

M

MCB Miniature Circuit-breaker

MCCB Molded-case circuit-breaker

MES Manufacturing Execution System

MKT Capacitor type

MLAR Sample Directive on Fireproofing Requirements for LineSystems

MSP Motor Starter Protector

MPCB Motor Protector Circuit-Breaker

MV Medium-voltage (supply)

MVMD Medium-voltage main distribution

N

NES 713 Standard on the toxicity of flames

NF Norme Française

NiCd Nickel cadmium

O

ODBC Open DataBase Connectivity; standardized databaseinterface, used as database query language in –> SQL

OLE (–> OPC) Object linking and embedding; a Microsoftproprietary object system and protocol which enablesinteraction of different (OLE-capable) applications andthus the creation of heterogenous composite documents

OPC OLE for Process Control; standardized software interface

OWG Optical waveguide

P

PDF Portable Document File; cross-platform file formatdeveloped by Adobe Systems

PMMA Polymethylmethacrylate

PTB Physikalisch-Technische Bundesanstalt, highest Germanfederal agency for testing, calibrating and approvals

PROFIBUS Process Fieldbus

PROFIBUS DP PROFIBUS distributed periphery

PTTA Partially type-tested (switchgear) assembly

PV Photovoltaics

PVC Polyvinyl chloride


R

RAID Redundant Array of Independant Discs

RCBO Residual-current-operated circuit-breaker with integralovercurrent protection

RCD Residual current protective device

RCCB Residual-current-operated circuit-breaker

S

S-release Short-time-delayed overcurrent release

SCADA Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition

SBS Static bypass switch

SD Switch-disconnector

SDF Switch-disconnector-fuse; switch disconnector with fuse

SF Simultaneity factor

SF6 Sulphur hexafluoride

SEMP Switching electromagnetic pulse

SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol, for easy controland monitoring data network components such as routers,servers, switches, printers, computers etc. from a centralserver

SQL Structured Query Language; programming language forthe definition, query and manipulation of data forrelational databases

STA Seamless Telecommunication Architecture

STS Static transfer switch

SPS Safety power supply

T

TA Technical instruction, in Germany, on various(environmental) issues, such as air pollution, noise etc.

TAB Technical supply conditions(of the power supply network operator)

TCP Transmission Control Protocol

THD Total Harmonic Distortion

TIP Totally Integrated Power

TM Thermal-magnetic tripping

TTA Type-tested assembly; type-tested switchgear assembly

TÜH Staatliche Technische Überwachung Hessen, TechnicalControl Association in the State of Hesse, as a jointventure by the TÜV Süd and the State of Hesse

TÜV Technischer Überwachungsverein, German serviceorganization for technical inspection and safety tests, nowthe brand name for technical and life safety approvalsconcerning industrial applications as well as the privateconsumer

U

UGR Unified glare rating

UPS Uninterruptible power supply

V

VDE Association for Electrical,Electronic & Information Technologies

VDI Verein Deutscher Ingenieure e.V., Association of GermanEngineers

VRLA Valve Regulated Lead Acid

W

WHG Wasserhaushaltsschutzgesetz, German Federal Water Act

WMF Windows Metafile; vector-based graphics formatdeveloped by Microsoft

Z

ZVEH Central Association of Electrical and IT Trades in Germany

ZVEI Zentralverband Elektrotechnik- und Elektronikindustriee.V., German Electrical and Electronic Manufacturers’Association

ZSI Zone-selective interlocking (also called short-time gradingcontrol)

1111/17

Appendix

Contacts for Special Interests

HamburgDieter DrescherTel.: +49 40 2889-2084E-mail: [email protected]

ErfurtRalf HeinemannTel.: +49 361 753-3355E-mail: [email protected]

DüsseldorfBernd WagnerTel.: +49 211 399-2769E-mail: [email protected]

FrankfurtNikolaos Kartalas/Ralph SamulowitzTel.: +49 69 797-5016Tel.: +49 69 797-3370E-mail: [email protected]: [email protected]

MunichWolfgang Bährle/Bernhard HartelTel.: +49 89 9221-3453Tel.: +49 89 9221-6978E-mail: [email protected]: [email protected]

HannoverGerd SchwarzbachTel.: +49 511 877-1539E-mail: [email protected]

DresdenJürgen BorsdorfTel.: +49 351 844-4414E-mail: [email protected]

CologneJürgen HupperichTel.: +49 221 576-3137E-mail: [email protected]

NurembergWilhelm EbentheuerTel.: +49 911 654-3969E-mail: [email protected]

BerlinDr. Erich MautTel.: +49 30 386-33021E-mail: [email protected]

LeipzigHeiko TritschlerTel.: +49 341 210-221E-mail: [email protected]

EssenFrank RöhlingTel.: +49 2739 89285-1E-mail: [email protected]

StuttgartKlaus Häberlen/Karl-Heinz MarkertTel.: +49 711 137-2221Tel.: +49 711 137-2634E-mail: [email protected]: [email protected]

Elevators, escalators, moving walkways

OTIS GmbH & Co. OHGOtisstraße 33D-13507 BerlinTel.: +49 30 4304-1600 Fax: +49 30 4304-2585

Lighting systems

Siteco Beleuchtungstechnik GmbHTechnical SupportGeorg-Simon-Ohm-Straße 50 D-83301 Traunreut/Obb.Tel.: +49 8669 33844Fax: +49 8669 33540E-mail: [email protected] www.siteco.de oder www.siteco.com

Safety lightingng

CEAG Notlichtsysteme GmbHSenator-Schwartz-Ring 26 D-59494 SoestTel.: +49 2921 69-0www.ceag.de

Cables

U.I. Lapp GmbHSchulze-Delitzsch-Straße 25D-70565 StuttgartTel.:+49 711 7838-01www.lapplabel.de

Uninterruptible power supply

MASTERGUARD GmbHPostfach 2620D-91014 ErlangenFax: +49 9131 6300300www.masterguard.de

Infoline (workdays 9 a.m. to 5 p.m.)Tel.: 0180 5323751E-mail: [email protected]

Your Siemens Contact Partners

Consultant Support


Trademarks

ALPHA SELECT®, DIAZED®, DIGSI®, GEAFOL®, instabus® EIB,

NEOZED®, NXAIR®, NXPLUS®, S7-300®, S7-400®, SENTRON®,

SICAM®, SIGRA®, SIGRES®, SIMATIC®, SIMARIS design®, SIMBOX®,

SIMEAS®, SIMOCODE®, SIPLUS®, SIPROTEC®, SIQUENCE®, SIRIUS®,

SIVACON®, SolarPark™, PowerCC®, SUNIT™, Totally Integrated

Power™, WinAC®, WinCC®

are registered trademarks of Siemens AG.

ELDACON®, Mirrortec®

are registered trademarks of SITECO Beleuchtungstechnik GmbH

GeN2™, PULSE™

are registered trademarks of OTIS GmbH.

LAPPTHERM®, NEOFLEX®, ÖLFLEX®, SILFLEX®, SPIREX®, UNITRONIC®

HITRONIC®, ETHERLINE®

are registered trademarks of LAPP Group.

Microsoft® und Windows®

are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corp., Redmond, Wash., US.

NEOPREN®

The omission of any specific reference with regard to trademarks,brand names, technical solutions, etc., does not imply that they arenot protected by patent.

Imprint

Totally Integrated PowerApplication Manual –Part 2: Draft Planning

Published by

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft



Siemens Building Technologies

Editor

Ralf Willeke, Siemens AG, A&D CD TIP

Publishing House

Publicis KommunikationsAgentur GmbH, GWANägelsbachstr. 3391052 Erlangen, Germany

Print

Hofmann Infocom AGEmmericher Straße 1090411 Nuremberg, Germany

Binding

THALHOFER, D-71101 Schönaich, Germanyethabind jacketProtected by patent

© 2007 Siemens AktiengesellschaftBerlin and Munich

Alle rights reserved. Nominal charge 36 EUR.

All data and circuit examples without engagement.

Subject to change without prior notice.

Application Manual – Part 2: Draft Planning

Integrated solutions for power distributionin commercial and industrial buildings

Tota

lly In

tegr

ated

Pow

erTM

Ap

pli

cati

on

Ma

nu

al

– P

art

2:

Dra

ft P

lan

nin

g

The information provided in this manual contains merely general descriptions orcharacteristics of performance which in case of actual use do not always apply asdescribed or which may change as a result of further development of the products.An obligation to provide the respective characteristics shall only exist if expresslyagreed in the terms of contract.

All product designations may be trademarks or product names of Siemens AG orsupplier companies whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violatethe rights of the owners.

w w w . s i e m e n s . c o m / t i p

totally integrated

powerSiemens Aktiengesellschaft


Gleiwitzer Straße 555

90475 NUREMBERG

GERMANY


Freyeslebenstraße 1

91058 ERLANGEN

GERMANY

Siemens SWITZERLAND AG

Building Technologies Group

International Headquarters

Gubelstrasse 22

6301 ZUG

SWITZERLAND

Nominal charge: 36 EUR

Order No. E20001-A70-M104-V1-7600

Dispo 27612

H04120_2007_Umschlag_Englisch.qxd 16.08.2007 6:07 Uhr Seite 1

Application Manual - Part 2 - DraftPlanning - Siemens

Documents

lowvoltage power systems

lowvoltage power distribution

lowvoltage systems

system protection

lowvoltage switchgear

power management

overvoltage protection

protection equipment